A Grammar of The English Tongue (5th Ed.), 1728 PDF

This is a reproduction of a library book that was digitized
by Google as part of an ongoing effort to preserve the

information in books and make it universally accessible.
https://books.google.com
O.
0
-
'
-
_ . .. . .
,\ . a \
\
1
- A
, .
let. ſ
.
a'-
a .. . , .
Iſ ,
4 \
a \ x
r s \
II.
p
_
' -
_
'A
4
'
at A
I
_ . \ , L. A_
_ .
, 1 1',
xv ,
./
I
r
...)4
l'
'
a'
4'
'\
*l
xl. __
!..l
\'
'I
'
'
'4
'fl
[I
[i
A'
.\
p
I
.
\
\
- ,
P
F
E 4
- 4
_.
U
.
. A.
r -
.
' .
.
Q
'w
\
"
'
THE
APPROBATION
O F
Iſaac Bickerflqflſi, Eſq;
HE following TREATlSE being ſubmitted to my
Cenſure; that I may paſs it with Integrity, l.muﬅ
declare, That as GRAMMAR in general is on all
Hands allow'd
appears to me, the
thatFoundation of All Art:ofſſand
THlS GRLAMMAR theScience-s,
ENGLISH ſo it
T on G 01: has done that Juﬅice to our Language, which, till

now, it nex'rer obtain'd. The TEXT will improve the moﬅ
Ignorant, and the Noras will imploy the moﬅ Learned.
I therefore enjoin all my Female Correſpondents to Buy, Read,
and Study this G R A MM A R, that their Letters may be ſome
thing leſs AZnigmatie: And on all m Male Correſpondents
likewiſe, who make no Conſcience o Falſe spelling and Falſe
Engliſh, I lay the ſame Injunction, on Pain of having their
7 Epi/lle: expos'd in their own proper Dreſs, in my Lucubm
' tions.
Iflmc Bic/eezﬅafl; cenſer.

GRAMMAR
OF THE
Engliſh Tongue,
wITH THE \ '
Arts of Logick, Rhetorick, Toetry, &c.
ILLusH-RATED with USEFUL
N 0 T E s; Giving the
GROUNDS and REASONS

OF
Grammar in General.
The Whole making Ea Compleat SYSTEM
of a'n ENGLISH EDUCATION.
For the U s E of the

S C HſſO O L S of Great Britain and Irelamz'.
The' FIFTH EDI T 10N,'Corrected.
LONDON:'
Pxinted for F. CL A Y, at the Bible, and D. B R 0 WNE, at the
Black-swan, both without Temple-Ear. M.DCC.XXVIII
[5768/26 43.
zs Mb'
. HWFTT oſſ ,ct .r. . -
1 'T r
'.' LZL x WHAITPÞ T'HB;:.,,:.U'J ,r a
(i . a LT
'r --. -- < T 'T -r '7 r. 7' r ſ
*_. I
;nU;._HL 'in . C A.
. .!\i--
_4-.
'T"-)
i: \) Lbu
al:
a
. 1.',1.
wis-t. (4 .. . Land
'zS
- I'W E WMVLWWW'P '._ wzou ..\ . '."='.'- (444.
" 'Fy ' "U
- 'ral l- tiſ- wiſ: L'j N 1.'3 w'
. *- i.
*MAT5A , 'V
as; Ww.
'_ MA as , \{'*-"'xe>s*.z
'vfflm 'bcſſ__
a &SIR. AN, In, ffx
-_ . XCWQ jafl
. z .%<.>Pls at five-alsothe
LangUage for Wthh the fgl- '
IOWing Grammar is made, Mix
Pe'ſormance ddth'-- A Naturally
claim Yovn MAJEsTY's
Protefliidni'; - - 'Oz- 'NT
A,.*\Grflmmr_\\g£ , the French
Lafiiſage wastheFikﬅ Labour
of that Learned Body the
French Academy, That being
"sm'I'mfiz azf'iA. the
37'2-7ſſ-ſſ AD-E' D I C A "ctr icto ſſN. '
the Foundaltiion of'a'll Writing:
And-'als Yj) U RLM Aj g s His
(Arrfif have been Suþetiorf-to
thfiwflffixwwf sleepe
that, "by Tour Royal? Hfluence,
You will give the ſame Supe
riority to Our Afſiti ancſfiscz
'li'f'c'H hie Xllfflfiiltz,
ffifit 'a Z'to
To BYMK J m if,
w on? riuſ-'r 'IOZ D((Z;{.>J:£jjſf£;t-'
'LZJY (Shem ai 'tzzvzaaqn'XIÞ grziwol
Y'LZLIULMMZÞMZ) sz'xnsscuilzjadl
BZ'ZTBFH LM 51qu mid:
Thu? MONK'S WEMWGMZ
&NNW. Otlj 'esv=2*w_'<.{27 A
ZLJO'JRJ zflqii CLZQYMLX
Oſi vhofl fanned zed) '30
$ rq>
ſi 'h 'X \ ,
rugd 3*='I
ed,
1 gſxzwlsuzlſi &NNW
I a
:;-::l.1 [The Authors.

'Þ- ".iii:):' 11. '1
" HE vPteblibatlon and Succefi of the Firﬅ Edition o thi:

ſi- Grammar, be' find, ﬅirr'd up the Emulation oſſ'ſwo
Gmtlemen to g'i-ue the Town their Performance: in this
' ſi j ' hind:
EngliſhThefirﬅ i: tallthe
Grammarz 11, An
loﬅ Eſſay towards
had the a Practical
emphatic Titleof
THE Engliſh Gmmmar; or, An Eſſay on the Art of Grammar
apple to, and exemplify'd in, the Engliſh Tongue. Were't- in e
hope: that Two ſuch Gentlemen of Lettert, whoſe Time had been
devoted to the 'Inflruffion ofother: in the Latin and Greek Gram nmr,
wouldmþlee ſinne' urther Progre s in, 'andſurniſh better Helpe, and
more onſ) Metho t to, ſithe En iſh Student: in hit Mother-Tongue,
than wewiho never-had e'nplq'd our Time in that Way. Had we
found whdt 'we expected'in them, weſhou'd not have given ourſelves
any farther Trouble of Re-uz'ſing our own for a Sccond'Imprcffion;
ſhtixfj'd with the Honour of"op.*nt'ng a Way forInch glorious Impro-ve
ments. But we are apt to believe, that t e 'very ual'gfcation,
from which we' expected a more excellent Production, was' the Cauſe
if the little Prog'e : they'made in A Diſcovery that hadſb airl] been
aid before them Dr. Wallis and Ogrfflvcs: 'For Cu m hat/b
ﬅrong a Force on the Mind, that it Taſe: 'with- the Bulk of Mankind
flat Reaﬅm nndSacred Truth. The lriſh thoughtthemfllweoppreſs'd
by the Law that forbid them to draw with their Horſet Tails-Land
that becauſe their Anccſiart had known no'better V'a of doing it:
And Per-ſon: who have not-onlj been Edtcoated themſe vex, but have.
bred u other: in a particular Method! 'me/'t'have open-Bright
neſt " soul to-drl/Loſiver iſ: Error:,\"and fln/hh-vhw. >- Lad.
The'not
conc'cl firﬅ Eſſayiﬅ
prevail diſhhaMnde'ed, xportlyquittod'rhedd
hine/elf torqm't Trock, i:but
i' intirelj. ſſ'Ihe ſecond ſb
fiirfrom parting jnith- a' Tlrt e of the old Greek and Latin Term',
that he pour: in a- new Poffi: upon w. The firﬅ it ſo full of Ob
flurit] and Covffuſion, for want of Method, that his Book can Ze of
= A 2. 'tt '
vi P R E F A- C E.
littleUſh to the Inﬅrut'lioo of the Ignorant 3 and the latter has ſo
little Regard to the Engliſh Tongue, that in the Title of his Book
he i: guilty of on evident Miſnomer, it being no more on Eng
liſh Gramxmr,v-thon 4 Chincſc. ' > '
That, the firﬅ Effiyifi logs no Method," is plain from his very Di
wzſzbn-gſ GrMM'zÞ MZY divided Gumm-te into fit" 1'1'9'1,
yet the Parts of Speeeh (whie he unncaff'ril] makes eight, eiffer
the oldV/oy) are plac'd under-'so me Hem! of thatDi'uiſion; which
is Orthography, Proſody, Etymology, Syntnx. 'Tis cotzflgfls'd,
the: the Author might hg-ue ſhelter'd the Part; of Speeth unde;
Etymology,
o'nt in ASenſe,
he hes out himſelf; which
offfiom man]
thatGrnmmnrians
Refugeſſ ;;for hewe
givinggiven
the it,
Chapter of his ſecond Part (when heſſ tlffitmteh'd an his Doctrine 'of
lfbnls), the Title of Etymelogy,,6y no) of Dﬅinction, his plain,
hemnlerſtood it in the Senſe of Deri-uation in the ' r' , or he
had forgotproduce
Xc/'cffity the Members of and
Ohſmrit] his Dimfion:
Confnſ/on.Both jmhich
_ Why: ſi
In the next Plate, this Eſihyiﬅ has thrown that Part of his Di
wiyian loſt in his Book, whichin Uſe, in Nature, no), andinhis own
Puſ/tion, ought to he firſt.- For the Doctrine of Lette's is throughg
to he known before 'me proceed to Itſ/owls; But the Copduct aft/21.'
Author in this particular, being contrary 'a the Order and ,
ofNoture, nay,- contraty to his me Diffig/ition-qf the Parts in xh'z
Divi/ion it filf, muſt neoeffilrily produce Configſton and Ohſrurity,
- Thirdly, He intirely reject: Proſody, the' 'ydmarily good' the
ſecond Member of his 'am Diviſior'z Near; this Di-uiſzon Ws neceſl
ſhrjflri: 'me no' it me; neufflry, a" ought all-along to hewe
been ohſerviol; not, itvaught never-to haveþeenmade.
Fourthly, For want of Method, ſe-ueml Parts of Speech orejum
bled promiſhwig/þi'togctloer, the Doctrine Zf which ought to have er:-can
_-_ -
been. mere diﬅinct, for Diſli'zctim is a great. elp to Perſpimity; with
out mhizh, the Knowledge which 'nen-on'd come), he 'very de
fective 'nd/ohſmrefl But this Author he; me been fittisfi'tl tojoin
the conſideration of theſe Parts of speech, which in regard of this
Nemrefand Order ought to ſhewe hew ſeparate, but former: the
Sy'ntax, or Co'z/Zruction of our Langxmge, through his Diſcourſa of
V/onis; tho' the Doctrine of Whrds, ſeparate-I] conſider'd, and in a' 1l5Ei5.:p-5.
Sentenee, are Things diﬅinct enough.
WE muﬅ indeed co'ffeﬅ, that me believe, that Dr.Wallis 'piſſed
him in this particular, as he did-us in our Firﬅ Editiqn, neither
of m confining the' the learnedDoctor 'rote to Men already skill'd
in the Latin Grammar, and therefore had no need of treating them
's ſue/o es' 'ere entirely ignorant of GrammaL - > -4._
3. _ .
X 't
PsnzgnAc E. ,
of. Fiſthly,
the a actin I?
zt eþtp
eldC'n/zlti'ſiþ'd
Terms, aadjheold aul . Di-vifloa
Mind: mmgti'ges in long,
and qflner
ing entire)inunknoſiwn
dark Expzdnzzziauf 'oft enihj
to the L'ear'ner, can' on!Latin mak,
puzzle which be-.
potinfli-act)
him. This Multzþlici'gþnctzszm-dc i: again mere-'fly j rifþflzting,
at the End
Anſwer,- of
hlth'at pha taſ, inContent: athe>
eapingſia'da'dle, ſ muſeleſſ'
' 'cffflceﬅian me '
Lead dn'fhe"
'mea/r Aleinpty thedom Learne'z. ' ' p. - >
Sixthly, 'Ihe Rule: aſ? nbtflcffleimtl] dzflinguiſh'd, which give: the'
Learnerj a Dffqtd in thyfing 'Shat to Fommit to; hie Memo'y, and
what not._ For t eſe an) maw/lother R?ajbns,"wz could not think
this Effizy towards a, A Piact'icalEnZlſſh ſufficient' 'a date'
u: fi-am
and flomendeavouring 'to gar-'eft t e 'Errors
giving the V/prldanEditikbn of our Fi'rflf
marenſbfid, lm rcffion,''
Mffmprepſſerfict.
But the firﬅ Ectffiyiﬅ len-va usſb much Raanſizfor Hope: ofmak
ing athe
flen, much farther
Eſi'ay Progreſi der]
on Gramma: jn thi: Mr/eenlarje:
'nine/7 than the
theVflrld haf-yet
e 'HapeLſifzncr
in thi; we find'notfi: much a: anſAira at aGrgmman' eguliar Lee
our own Langmge, the, Author being = Went. eq [eyeaLtZeſeifi-ſhme
Thing: theſelf-ſame I/Vay, a: all thtſſ have done, whoxha-ue, endea
vour'd to fane. an' szngue in every Thing to the Method d Form
of the Latin and' Grcdc: For hieſi Execution isſh contrary to- he De
ſzgn he ſeemsin one Part a hi: Prefacc to propoſe; that Wh'iting in'
Engliſh, he only make: t e Taxk the more dzffimſlr; fine: tct uctnder-L
ﬅand his Ter'mythe Reader muſt underﬅandGreek;- whc'eis' in the
ordinary Itſ/ay of learning that Language, the_Stu_dent is ,-ſu poz'd to
have a competent Knowledge qfl the La__tin_, before he approacþeþthe.
Greek _Grammar3-5T0Mmzt iþþi tell£r_it:'ih the,P_r_gFacd, that?
'very Man, M'qman, _andChiid,- night to the. learned Ihm iuagmk
a: incapable, without them, to underſtand 'the Terſhk'made ne þf in ſ
ſeveral Prtffeffiom : Not tonſiderin that che he tieqctiu'reg ifn'lm-r
pqſſhility, ſince much the great Part qfſſlktdankinhlþanhj nimmw
ſhare lO or x_1 _Tun_of their Live: in learning chaſe dead LG.
guagn, to arrive atv a'pn'fefl Knowledge eftheir own." l >- .' v He
But by thi: Gentleman? 'may of Agying, me ought. 't my to:
he Maﬅer: qffiL'Atdinzaþd Greek, but of Syphiſh 'Irgſ' High.
Dutch, Law-Dutch, 'Frenchzjhe Old-SIZIXOA;: Welflr; Rnnicz
Gothic, and-mandic; fineſt 'mjcch pha-grain manie;
common and general Ue' m 'Miivezffiom'rhqfl-Jſe-beriſ Tonguea
Nay, by theﬅanza waj'o Reaſhning 'me-may 'piav'eyth'bt- the Romans
and Greeks did not. nderſtand their awanoſiriigueJ;Y*6e'dzc_/'e*tljqu=
were not acquainted with jhezzWelſh, or ancient CLIt-ibykheraþgipg
ahwe 62,o
Latina radical
much Greek
greater Mrdx deriv'dfrom
Nnmhmi _*"-'*"' the
- &yields-'anſ
* '" \ ſi
. " '= ' -* - A: 3. ->1=::"'*- J-i-k I Witha
'- 1
fi 'PRQFACE
'54.-i.
With much 'better Red an the arme'- Eſhyiﬅ; ' ogni-to re uire
fime Skill in the Old-Sanuſſfli, whe'ſceffik fillmv'ſſ' chi/all Hanch? the"
Bad] of our Tongue is nally deri-U'J. But we 'cannotagne with that"
Autho'r, wwſhfqr' a: dun, becauſe 'the fuer] Nature and "jGenixu '*
of on' Language' i; almrfi entire? alter'dfinu that &Wah-m diſ: '
us'd,- a'nd me the M'eanizzgo Word: i: (map- iuſbme' 'veryfe'w
Caſksl to ſie fimghtfrom- the Uſagq (ſ our qwn, 'mid not that offor
ma' Tin-'3. - he Saxons, for ExampÞFW we may credit Dr.
Hickes) haddmriom'Tn-mimtiom to'rheir Mrds, at' leaſt Two in
ever)tSuhflamive
exce the. PerſidnalSir-gular;
Names, adhered: we haveIhu':
that harſh, m' Word non' in at?
Drſſ. 'Hickes e,"
are"
my Six ſeveral Declenfions vhe Saxon Namex, but him have \
not ſo and
Dual, much a: one.
Plural; He give:
W': have themNtmzhcr,*e9cce£rv
no Dilal three Number-s,- aperhaps
Singnlar,
in \
Both. To make thi: plainer, me ſhall tranſcrihe t e six Declen f-N'g*J-Lm
iions from the Antiqumy': Grammar. _ i .
'The fifll Declenſion, which 'nd/m- thſſe Genitive Caſe in es, and
v the Dative in e, the-Nominativc in as, 'he Genitive Plural.
in a, and The Dative in um; m, þ
' Now. Smith ' * Nom. Smithas -\_J>-g-*
' Gen. Smithes - "5 - Gen. Smitha
. Smithe ' Dat. Smithum
NNW' Accuſ. Smith Hard' . Accuſ. Smithas
_' "'* Voc. Eala thuSmith " - Voc. Eala ge Smithas
Abl. Smith. ' Abl. Smithum.
; flandDeclenfiofll i; of Names, Phtffc Singular Number i;
' ſaiaz he-lflczgriinativeL their Genttive, Dutive, Accuſative,
so
I'andctAbhtiv'e 'in an, th' Nommattve Plural in an, Geni
'*I;_gzve in a, Dativejn um; m; Witega; a Prophet. *
_' "1 Norn, Witega ' *' Witegm _- .a
'T ſi ſi " ' Gen. Wite
Dan Witegan" T _ _ v ct Witegena
Wite um
ACCÞWiteZ'ZZ ® murd'- Witcgan
' 7 _ ' Yon; EalatlmWitega .Eala ge Witcggn
* . Lbl,.,Witegan,. ' ſ , Witegum. -1 '
' Mirſictl armſiwcth' the any 'the Nomina; air.
In Latin Pluczl MQB inns Mr'AndSlt- the 38317-2'- _ - ſ

ct , qu- _, Andgitu- _ .
Gan. Andgices A Anggzm
ſi' ' i Dat'aA ite Anl immfl
was' ACÞ- l i l l Audgitu * '* '
. a Voc.Ea.lathu . i - l A 7
' .*'. Abl. Angitc, 1; A AngumkYf - ,
ſ
P- R--E-F A C E-L Vii
Thefim'th Declenfion he: the ſame "victim-5 In 'he figfl, ex
nyt that the Nominative Plural is theſam as the Nomir
natwe singular; at, Word.
Nom. Word Word'
Gen. Wordes Worda
smguL
. AZZ.. WWfrſſriie
D Pluffl- gggum
Voc. Eala thu Word - - Ealn ge Word
Abl. Worde Wordum.
He fifth Declenſion agree: with. the firﬅ, extegt that the Gc
nitive singular
at in Wiln, ends in e,' and
A' Maid. * ' the
' ſ ' Nominmvc ' Plural
' in a',
. Nom. Wiln "X Wilnav
Gen. WiIne ' *Wilna
. Dat. Wilhe Wilnum
Smgul- Acc. Wiln Pluml- Wilna
Voc. Eala thu Wilu 'Eala ge Wilna
Abl. Wilne. _ Wilnum. ' '
The ſixth Declenſinn it: Nominaſſtirre Singular in u, it: Ge
mtivc in a, Dative, Aecufitive, Voeative in u; and the
Pluml Caſes all form'd like thoſe of the fifth; a: Sunu, a Son.
Nom. Sun r - Suna_
Gan. Snna Suna
. th.Sunu . Sgnum
Smgul. ACQ Sunu Plural. sum
Voc. Raia thu Su-au Eala ge sung.
Arbl. Sunu. A " Sunqm. *
The "caitives, or ualitiendi War-'With rom thoſe in out he.
ſenfimguago; FZtL-eir Tewtglnaflm dijflngmſh the Genfler;
that is, theſme Termination iefor the Maſtuline and Neuler,
but a different for Feminine 5 4.', God, gqu.
Maſculine Neuter. The Femine.
Nom. God bonus, bonum.
Gan. Godes
. - Dat. Gndum
singul- - Acc. God
Voc. Goda
Abl.-Godum . . .
Now. Gode ' . Buni, home, bone. - v'x
Gcn. Godra ffl _
Dat. Godum
final' Acc. Gode
Voc. Gods " - _
Abl. Godum; m
viii X P- R_ --E.'F At .C , Eli.
"W'e might giveyou various Iryianſices more of the eſſential Di e
rence between the old Saxon and modern Engliſh To'n egxhutz eſe
mu atisfl any.reaſimahle Man, that it. is. ſo great, t atthe Saxon
can e no Rule tb us ſand that to underﬅand ours, there, is'no need
o knowing the Saxon. eAnd tho' Dr. Hickes mufl 5.? allow'd to have
een a very curious Enquirer into thoſe Ohſblete Tongues, out of
Dſ/Z, and containing nothing valuahle, et it does by no meansfollow
(as is plain from what has been ſaid that we are not o'hlig'd to
derive the Senfi', Conflrntt'ion, or Nature of ourpreſint Language
from his DZ/Zoveriese But it-is the preſent Tongueſ/tak is the, onl
Ohjeii'qf out; Conſideration, as. it matters not to'the underﬅanding
of that,from
Swine whether we know
Soyvin. Timethat Kiile
indeed hasiſderiv'ed
an 'entirefrom Cowin, or
'Dominion'ſi'over
H/ords,
in our as well as over
Language, aH other
as well as inPnpductions
all others,ofI-ſ/ordrv
Human Kind.
have Thus
extreamly
vary'dlfrom their Original significations. Thus Knav'cjignijjr'd
origina no more thanfa Servant," Villain, a Country Steward, or
Villager : Yet, I lear, i ouſhou'd calla Man Knave, or ſiVillain,
it would not __muc ame-a' e. his Chſioler, to tell him, that theſe Wbrds
(ſinne Hundreds of Tea'rsſince) had'a very harmlefi signification; -
'Our proper Defign, therefore, is to conveya Grammayical Know
ledge of the'Mnguag'e we now ſþeuh, from whatever' springs' and
Sources deſcending'dowri to us, in the mqfl eaſy, familiar, and com
pendious Method that we could pofflhlyfind out. Nor could we hy any
means he divertedfrom' this genetj'aus Aim, hy any' Poor-Ambient: of
ſinning skill'd in the Foreign Terzns of the old Grangmarians; and
tho' we have not-rejected them out ofConternpt ofLearning(as they
call it) or ofthe 'Languages from which the are deriv'd,*yet we
touid' much' le/i 'refolve to-ſacriſice the Eaſe ofZour Learne' to a Cu
ſtom 'injurious to thegeneral Progre/i of thoſe, who are diſh-ous to,
[enow the Grammar of their own Mother-Tongue only. .
To this End, we have heen atſome Pains to Put all the Rules in
to asſmooth and ſhnorous Ver/e as the Nature of thesuhject wou'd
hear; and we hope, that this has beenfar fromgiving any Ohſcurity
to the Senſe ,- hue to give them the greater Light, unden eat/'Twehave
added anfeſuit
learned Explanation in in
Alvaruſſsſſ, Pro ise, Grammar,
according tozthe
whichWay taken
is not any hy that
uſed 'of
almoſt all the Schools 'if-Europe, except. England, but, commended hj
Schioppius, as the heſ-i practical Gtammarwfithe Latin Tongue.
It could not he avoided, intzthatſome aſ them m: t run kAhaW
niouſh than the reſt, hut we believe the Numher o them is notgreat.
m have never met with anyſolid Ohjectiqn againﬅ. this V/ay (ex
ceptſhrne People's Inahility to do the like) hee-an e,- indeed; its Ex?
cellence is in the very Nature of the Thing. For Vc'siþ is' far more
23.
P®REFACE. ix
eaſily learnt, and better retain'd, than Proſe; and Engliſh Verſe, by
Reaſon of the Rhimet, yield: a greater Affiﬅance to 'he Learne'
than Latin Vcrſe, one End of a Vcrſc recalling the other. An Au
zho'quooa' Reputation confirms our Opinion in theſe Wordr. All
Men paid great Reſpect to the Pocts, who gave them ſo cle
Iightful an Entcrtainment. The Wiſh' Sort took this Oppottu
nity of Civilizin the reﬅ, by putting all their Thcological and
Philoſophical In ructions into Vale, which being learnt with Plea
fiere, and retain'd with Eaſh, help'd to heightcn and pcrſitrve the
Veneration already, upon other Scorcs, paid to the Pocts.
By thi: mean: the Child, or Learner will be oblig'd to burthen
his Memory with no more than it abſhluteþ nec'ſſh'y to the Knew-
ledge afthe Art heﬅudiet.
Nothing being more neceffiny to acquire a clear Knowledge of my
Thing, than a clear Method, me have taken a peculiar Care in this'
Edition to obflr-ue all the Rule: of Method. ÞVe begin with what
i: firſt to be learnt, that what flllom ma be under/food ,- and pro
ceed that Step by Step, till we canst to the and moﬅ difficult, and
which depend: on all that goe: before it. V'e have reduced the
Tfflſu, which are plain and obvious, into a:ſmall a Number a: was
conflflent with Perſpicnitj and Diﬅinction ,*for our End being the teach- l
ing onl] the preſent Engliſh Tongue, we hold no Regard to my Term
whatſoever, which had not an immediate Regard to that .- Bſ 'his
man: we believe we 'na/ſay, flat 'me have deliver'd the' Learne'
fromſome Scom ofhard V/ordt, impos'd in other Gram mars.
The Text i: what is only meant to be taught in the Schooltg and
in that, me hope, no Teacher ofany tolerable Capacity, will find an]
Difficulty, that may not beſurmounted by a 'very little A plication.
The Notes have been ple/'ﬅernly miﬅaken, by a Man-t at ſhould
have known better Thiagr, fbrſuch Commentaries at the Dutch Au- -
thors have put to maﬅ of the Claffics, i. e. an Explanation of ob
feare Placet, difficult Expreffiom, hard Mrd: or war-loue Reading: 3
whereas thefi Notes conſiﬅ of more difficult Enquirie: into Grammar
in general; or ſhmetime: contain a Difence of Particulars in the
Text, and at other Timerſheu the Ana ogy between the Grammar
of the Engliſh, and that of' the Latin Tongue: All which muﬅ
be dl great Uſe to Men or V/omenof Judgment and Learmng, but
are not to be taught the young Beginncr, who/i Head cannot be '
jhppot'd ﬅrong enoughfbr Diﬅjuiſitiom of that kind. = \ P'
Having tal-en theſe Precautions in' the Grammar, we thought '
morſel-ver obliged to par ue them through the refl of'he Arts contain'd
inthir Volume 5 in I' ich me have had a peculiar Regard to the
Truth of eath, withont an] Reſþet'l to ſuch Book: as have been too
long in the Poſeffion of the Schoolt. Poetry, Rhctoric, and Logic
'J have
x FRsEJÞAPC e.
have generalh' heen taught in moﬅ of the Reſhm of Learning in Eu
rope, in the Latin Tongue: It wax, therefore, neceſſity to our De
ſign of accompliſhing our Engliſh Scholar, that he ſhould loſe no
Advantage which thoſe enjoy, who make theirfirfl Court to the dead
languages. Nay; we may without Vanity-fi' ,' that no Puhlicle
School in Europe hat an Coarſe of Poetry equal to what we give
here. V/ehave ſeen al that have heen taught, and not one ofthem
proceed: any farther, than the Art of Verſifying, by teaching the -
ſeveral Quantitie: of Words, and what each Son ofVerſe requires.
But thi: it the Art o making Poetaﬅers,- not Poets ;.of giving a
Tafle of Numbers, ut not of theſublimer Beautie: of the Authors
theyrefld, which are of the Magnitude ,- hy which meant we
qftenfind, that thoſe who have ſpent many Tears' in teaching Schools
authgzwoiyl' Judge: in the World ofthe very Authors thy' teach.
TfiPoen-y, he -at all to hefludy'd (for- which there are a thouſand
zrrefi-agahle Argumenn) it ought to he truly:taught,,whieh yet it
hat never been in any School: that we could ev'r heat-haf." In thin"
ArtþfPoetry, there are, vwe have fix'd the Rulerþf every Sortlof x
Poetry, which will e a great Diminution in Time of had-'Poets z'
and we haveflirther, we hope, given a Standard ofthe O uantitie:
ofout Tongue, which ifwezhave 'not perfectly ahtaine we 'nay
venture toſhy, that we are not arfrom it; ' ' *
The General Rhetorics t e School: in. England meddle onl
with the-Trojan; and Figure: ofWordt. and Sentencee, hue neglect' e
Cultivation of _-a young Invention. '. We know ſome ingeniou: Men
have di/allow'd qfþuttin any People on the Exerciſe o that Fa
culty ,- hutwe preſume, t at we ought todo in 'hie a: t e Touth of
Antiquity did in their Gymnaﬅic ExereijZ-sz th?ﬅaid not till they
wore Men of confirm'd Strength and Rohuſme s, ut hegan- in a more
tender 'Ageto make their Limb: pliant, an ſn to knit their sine-we' '
and Nervex, that the ſhou'd he without a Stiffnefi, which would
not he remov'd hy a ate A plication to that Art. Thu: hy uſing
Touth early to a Methodica Invention, Exerciſe and Time will give
av Readintſſ' and Facility infleing what all Subject: will afford aſ
Uſ? 'a Perſuaſion, which a Mind nnufizd to that way of thinking, wi L
me eaſily find out. ,. . .
W'e may farther venture to ſit , that velry few School: in Europe
can boaſt/i) a Logic, clear'd of the o dſfargon, and delivering
the direct1 way to Truth, not to uſeleſs Wranglex. This wax drawn
u'hy a very eminent Hand from Mr. Lock. Father Malebranch,
t e Meffleur: of Port-Royal, and/brae others, tho' we have ventur'd
to give it you ſomething ſhot-'er than it lJ in the Original. r
* \
Upon
lb -' Vi£l M i]- ' l."-'.' Hull; T
Ufffl 'his NPbletDcfign me: 'Efidtrfliskk

E DUC. t T.A.r>'5,
Toet-Lau'eat- to Her Majeﬅy. ' l a' . a

5312. ſſz) add) _;__z. Aſ 1.;t': :;*") ._'_'
m .:L£ :.>".' enſign-V' ..i.-. '3. (no -l

- N; Dgiijhlr'dtuafio'n emdridiis Piizei 'ell -.' -_' -*,
Fame Claps heer'ingsP-'End ſedntctlſisnikttqffie sſikfelsfi
Tells 'emy'the'ſuff'rin'g Muſt: ſſdreſſkefcfr'd Fſiſi j 1 _
To bcby IheirK'and'>Bfitain*sGdz{-*di'*znj's--He£r'd":'*? " . "f' "T
Whoſe judgmcfitiAWbmſſt o'nee W'Chfirms' Mankind' ſi 'ſſ'lf )
Can ſilence Slander; and HideEn-ſivyſſblffiflf' 'ſſ' "Low" I *'{'* 'V
.=.u.-L m T. RL'O. '02. v I. 'A zi wmzz 'mfz _
' . '= -, -* >: lm: .'.',-1-;*':,r; '31 '.!*.1:':..'J H')
To Grecian 'Hllls e'ur Tenth qoflmpsp. Bqamplil U, (a t
Supply'd with th'eſiſe Caﬅalianſislzrhigs at Hon'aez" ' ' '
Our Ladies too,vas_irr_1__l*lkzl.i.I_Z_A'_s Pay5,_ _, (1. 1 no, 57 3,
Be doubly'ſſCrſioWh'd; vwith Ba 5I .
MI N E R V A bids the'Muſe' j .' th.
qzazſiju w m.
A- 'i
To free Our injurfd Fair i'fifþnglſiScrvile A m,) "A,

And Cancel cruElſiPHOTSBUY Sctaliqheih'wfk ſi ' F ſi ſi
O wondrous Bleſſing! yet on Terms ſo cheap,

That lowefl Stations ſhall thjhdyantage reap;
The meam-ſe Briton: in' thiſſsfrjzemay ſhare,
Our ALBION beivzhaxLROME and ATHENS were.
, \3L1.1._'_zzl ' ſ
ax, ;-'
Then ſhy, what Thnnks, -wh_a__t Pralſes muﬅ attend
The Gen'rous Wits, whoſſthllfiſſcould condekend!
Skillthat to Art's ſublimeﬅ Orb can reach,
Emplofd its humble Elements to Teach!
A '
Ye'
On an Engliſh Edumtion.
Yet worthily Eﬅcemfd, becauſi: we know
To raiſe 'Hair Cam'y's Fame they ﬅoop'd lb low.
Shall private Zeal beﬅow ſuch Coſi: and Toil

To Cultivatc that long-neglected-'Soil _ - _ , ' ' 1 Y- .;* ,
Our Engliſh Language (ﬅor'd with all the Seeds
.Of Eloqucnce, but choak'd with Foreign' 'Weedsg
And Great BRIZFANNIA nor lechfife a smile.
To cheat theſe ſpkinging Glorics of our Iſle?
If only Martial Conqueﬅs we advance,
And yield the Muſe's Bow'xs tq vanquifltd-M; *
If her: we flx-onr Pfilarsof BWPH ' ' T
Will not rcſdnting Brimiznfs Grains flows, ' ' ,;-__
And, while on; 'troops pglitaz &Wah-sun, _' - -_ ' U "
Cry, Soztbg Yandalz Wfluzſioflu law-'me . . 'p 3.,
When Hdnduk all; ply flqqzzgolypw Manna - ;:.z -,:'* a: _)
And grow in Art: victonous, as in Arms,
Our Languagc tolaq'rachz prove; put: Walls: a ) Off,
No leſs dcfign'd quCongtxgfl quk,.£morz{c, 't "ſ A,
Till Learning's Banngrp tiuo' on: Realmz ye ſþxead,: ct
And Captive
"I'ho' Many." fi'Qm
Gallicſſ'rrbpþig's; _ -__ £_ , _z i, 13, __ '5 z' I;'
>.. _"1'*)'r_"'_-I'
"le Cfflqu'rine Wiyffiſſ. FFP-t' WWBPJHadh- a -
GRAMMAR'
OF TIIE
Engliſh Tongue',
PART L
CHAE L
R A M M A R doe: all the Art and Knowledge
* According to the Uſe of ever] speech, ſtead),
How we our Thought; moﬅ juﬅly may exprefi
In Win-ds, together join'd, in Smtemes.
[2] Into
NOTES.
[1] The modern, as well as old I cannot omit the learned and ju
Grammarians, have given us vari dicious Mr. J'abnfan's Definition,
ous Definitions of this Yew uſeful Grnmmar i: 'be Art of expre me 'be
AnnThat ofa certainAuthor ſeems Relation: of Thing: in Conjtruflinn,
defective, when he ſays, Grammar is will' due Accent in Speaking, and
the Art ofSpeaking z ſince'ti: plain Orrbograpby in m-iring,according 'a
a Maﬅery of it, is of more Conſo the Czdiom oftkoſe, wbofieLan 'rage
quence in Writing; the Solcciſms we learn. If he had ſaid of or r,
of Vulgar Diſcourſe paſſing unheed not Thingr, and uamity for Ac
ed, tho' they would be monﬅrous ce-zt, (which is a hing or Art:
in Writing. Of thls Opinion we which no Body alive underﬅands,
find the great Mr. Larke. ſmcellzttelates to the xmng andlfþl
mg
The Engliſh Grammar, with Notes.
'7
2
[2.] Into Four PM'M the Learn'd this Art divide:
The Firﬅ to Letters i: preciſely ty'd ,
The Second doe: to Syllables extend ,
The Third the various Rule: of Words commend;
The Fourth itſelfon Sentences doesſþend.
For in Engliſh, as well as other Languages, this Art conſiﬅs
of LETT ens, SYLLABLES, Worms, and SENTEN'CES.
The Second is produc'd by the various Conjunctions of the Firﬅ ;
the different Union of the Seeondbegets the Third; and the vari
ous joinings of the Third compoſe the Fourth.
ln the perfect Knowledge of theſe Four Heads conſiﬅs the
whole Art ofGRAMMAR.
Letters being evidently the"'Foundatidn of the Whole, ought,
in the firﬅ place, to be thoroughly conſider'd, and' all thoſe Rules
which Induﬅry and Obſervation have been'able to furniſh, laid
down in ſuch a Manner, that the Underﬅanding of the Learner
being in ſome meaſiire inform'd of the Reaſons of Things-may
not paſs through this Book to ſo little Purpoſe, as to learn only
va fewWords by Rete.
[3] A
ling oftheVoice, not thth'antity) Manner in which Men make uſe of
we think it the moſt extenfive De them to expreſs their Thoughts.
finition we have met with z but, in [22 Others divide Grammar in
deed,every Thing is extraordinary the ollowing Manner; as Ortha
in this Author's Book. And we are graphyz or the Art oftrue Spelling;
pleaſed to find, that ours (which Ortboepy, or exact Pronunciation,as
was made before we had the Hap to uantity and Accentz Etimolo
pincſs of ſeeing his Book) contains gy, or the Derivation of Words, to
the Scnſe of it. But to ſpeak, is to iſcover the Nature and Propriety
explain our Thoughts 'by thoſe of ſingle Words; and Sjnrax, to
sum, which Men have invented to join Words agreeabiy in Sentences.
that End. We find the moﬅ conve Or!hagraþhy,or$peiling, has rela
nient Signs, are Soundr, and the tion to Letters, both to the Know
Voice ; but becauſe theſe Sounds are ledge of their Figures, and the
tranfient, and paſs away, Men have Soundsexpreſſed by them, and the
invented other Signſ, to_rendcr them puttingrhem together to form Syl
more durahle and Cgenuanent, as 1ahles and Words. Orrhoepy directs
well as viſible, or hiects of the the PronunciationofSyllables,as to
Eye, which are the Characters in their Length or Shortneſs: Etimo
Writing, called by theGreeks 1951.',
lazy, or Deri-uation, regards Word: 5
ua-ra, whenceourTerm ofGram And Symax, Senremer. _
Mr. Job'ljbn,-inhij Giammatical
mar is deriv'd. Two Thingswe may
.confider in theſe Signr: The Firſt Commentaries, much better:
what they are by their Nature,that " From hence there ariſe four Parts
is as Sound: and Characten. The Se
5' oi'Grammar. Analogyfflhichtreats
cond, their Signijicatian; that is,the ** ofthe ſeveralPatts ofSpecchzttgir
, t e_
ſhe Engliſh Grammar', with Notes. 3
[3] A Letter, therefore, is a Character, or Mark, either in
Print or Writing, which denotes the Various Motions, or Poli
tions of the [4.] Inſh-uments of Speech, either in producing,
or ending of Sounds. Or you may term them Marks and Signs,
expreffing the ſeveral Sounds us'd in conveying our Thoughts to
each other in Speech.
A Letter is an uncompoandetl Sound,
Of which there no Di-vzſt'on can be fount-I:
Theſe Sound: to certain Characters we fix,
V/hich, in the Engliſh Tongue, are Twenty-ſix.
Of theſe Si s, Marks, or Characters, the Engliſh Langurlge
makes Uſe o Twenty-ſix, as will appear from the following
Alphabet. r
Of
'5 Definitions, Accidents and For of our Modern Tongue, the ſame
" mations. Syntax, which contains Sounds are often expreſs'd by dir
" the Uſe of thoſe Things in Con fcrent Chamcters; and different
" ﬅruction, according to their Re Sound: are mark'd by one and the
"lations Orrhography of Spelling, ſame Charact er ;/ ln the next Place,
*' and Proſody of Accenting in Pro Letter' are the signs ofSoundsmat
K nunciation." Our Diviſion is eaſi the Sounds themſelves: For th
ly reduc'd-to this,-f0r Orthography, Greek: ypdppa-mis from Writ i ny,
whoſe natural Place is firﬅ, as the and theLatinr,/i'em, fiom llile'rYlLlr),
Foundation of the whole, contains (as linen itſelf) or inemlo, ſo illa:
Letter: and &ſyllableſ. Analogy both Words ſignify that which is
Words, Syntax Sentenccs. As for mark'don the Paper. But if'tlu-le
Profatly, we preſtune it 'falls more be any Character,Sign and Murk,'
juﬅly (eſpecially in Engliſh) under that does not expreſs a Sound en -
the Art of' Poetry,as we have plac'd tirely fimple, but a Sound compos'd
it; but as much as relates to the and corn oundcd of Two or mon',
Pronunciation of Proſe is taken in and is r oluble into as many, it is
by Letterf, where their true Sound not ſo properly a Letter, as an Al;
is taught; and our Term! being bre-uiature of ſeveral Letter', or a
more plain and eaſy, and needing Contraction 'of them into one Note
no Explanation, we have choſe to' or Mark, containing in itſell'l'o ma
keep ﬅill to them. ny Letters, as its Power contains
[3] There are-other Definitions ſimple Sounds. This is plain in the
of Letters, as the following: A Latin 83', x, th'e Greek 2, o, g, and "
Letter may be ſaid to be, a ſimple un many others ſufficient] y known, l'or
commanded Sound of, or in, the they are compos'd ol an) (ad
Voice, 'which cannot be ſubdi-oided (u;,) (Beaﬅ-13) &do. On the con
into any more ſimple, and it gene trary, a ſimple Soundl tho' it be ex
rall mark'd 'La/'th a particular Cha preſs'd perhaps by diflerentCharn
ra er. This Definitionwctake to cters, yet it is robe eﬅeem'd but
err in two Particulars; firſt, tho' one Letter: For (th,) (ph,) no leſs
every Sound ou he to be mark'd 'than 4), 6, and f, are but ſimple
with a proper an pecnlhr Chane Letters.
ter, yet by the Corruption, or _Pn [4] The chief Inﬅmments of'
mjzjve Ignorance offlne finthters SPMDiſeouxſeorI-etters, are the
B 2. Lungs,
4. ſhe Engliſh Grammar, with Notes.
Lungs, the Wind-pipe, Throat, the different Parts oſ their Ages)
Tongue, Noﬅrils, Li s and ſeveral but chiefly from the Larynx, or
Parts ofthe Mouth. he Breath, or Knot of the Throat; For the Tone
that Air that is inſ it'd or breath'd oſ the Voice is more or leſs grave
into us, is blown rom the Lungs or acute, as the ſmall Cleft ofthe
throughthe Wind-p] , which ſur Throat opens more or leſs; and
niſhes the Matter o the Voice or this is the Seat of all Mufical Mo
Diſcourſe. For from the various dulations.
Colliſion oſthisAir or Breath,ariſes From the ſame Seat muﬅ we ſeek
theVariety both ofTones andArti the Reaſon of the Difference be
culation: And this Variety comes twixt a gentle Whiſper, and loud
not from the Lungs, but from other Talk. For if, When we ſpeak, we
Cauſes, as will anon be evident. make a tremulous Concuffion of the
For allthe Variation which Sounds Throat and Wind-pipe (that is, by
receive from the Lungs, is only reaſon of their Extenfion) it pro
from the different Force, with duces loud ſpeaking; but when the
which they ſend out the Breath, Throat and the Wind-pipe are leſs
by which the Voice becomes more ﬅretch'd, and more lax, it is Whi
or leſs ſonorous, or loud; for the ſparing. Butall Letters are not ca
Lungs perform in Speech the Of pable of this Diverſity, or Varia
fice of the Bellows in the Organ. tion ; but only thoſe, which we call
I knowAnatomilts have obſerv'd, Vowels, half Vowels, half Mutes
that we cannot ſo much as talk with (and ſuch as derive themſelves from
out the Concurrence oſ twelve or halfMntes :) For 11, r, c, or k, are
thirteen ſeveral Parts, as the Naſe, ſimply Mutes, and their Aſpirates
Liþr, Teeth, Palate, Jaw, Tongue, never admit oſ that Concuſſron :
H/unfim, Lungſ, Mtſcle: ofthe Che/i, nor is their Sound in loud Speeeh
Dia lzmgma, andMufc/e: of 'beBel different from what it is in a Whi
ly; ) at l have nothing to do with ſ er.
any Part, but what is immediately To this Head we may refer the
eoncerſſd in the Formation of Hoarſeneſs, often the Companion
Sounds, theObſervation of theMan oſ Catarrhs, which hinders that
ner of which, leads the Obſerver to Concullion of the Throat, and the
certain uſeſul Concluſions in the Wind-pipe. -
Subject we treatoſ. FartherEnqui The Articulation of Words, or
ries into other Partsconcern'd more the Formation oſ the ſeveral Let
remotelyin Speech, have little but ters, begins when the Breath has
Amuſements here, tho' of Conſe paſs'd the Throat; and is almoﬅ
quencc in theContem lation ofthe wholly erſorm'd by the Noﬅrils,
admirable Order of ature. Mouth, ongue and Lips. Tho'
- 'I he V ariety oſTones (that is, as theſe Remarks ſeem out of the
for as they relate to Gravity or A. way to the common Reader, yet a
cuteneſs, flat or ſharp) ariſes from indicious Maﬅer will _find it worth
the Wind-pipe. For asa Flute, the his while to ﬅudy this Point tho
longer and ſmaller it is, the more roughly. For by Rhomng what
acute or ſharp, or ſmall the Tone; Letters are formed by the Mouth,
and the larger and ſhorter, the more Tongue,Throat,Lips, (50. the Ma
grave and big the Tone is, that it ﬅer may give a t-Light to the
gives. The flame holds good in the Learnerjnthe oiSpelling, and
Wind-pipe ( whence, at leaﬅ, in rhaps the mofltertainflule of.
iome meaſure, ariſes the Variety of King it juſtly, becauſe m theſe
'ſones iu the Voices of ſeveral Notes we ſhall ſhew_h0w every
Men; or even of the ſame Men in Vowel and Conſonant is form'd.
[s] Tho'.
t .
t .
s l .
. _
. .
'
P .
0' -
'
-
O 1 v
' 1
0 " '
\
o o . p 'I I' . \
. a . . .
. .
I -
. '
'
r
.
I
ſ N
r l
'
. . ' '
. a a
\N
- . .
U
l
-
1 \ .
. A
u ' a'
. . 1 . J x I
.. . .
..
a u
.
. '
-
. .. .. a
p }/\. . . a . ..
. . nd
-
w i'
1. ſ. . .
l ' i '
A. .
- \ ' ' l any'
4 t o - .' .
- o 1 . . . . -
...
I o ' IN'
. - 4 n t '- -
' A i
\ l v
l
- . I'
\ a U' o
'
r . ſ d .
' I ſ
4 \ i."
. . .
. '
- \
I \
\ A t
I " '
-
a w. .A.
L 'Tu- \- " n' I ' ' p
' . .' I '..
. p '. . 1
a t 'o '- A
i
' 1 "'I w '
.P ' n .
1 \. . i - _ , . .
fl - I' l- .
' _ r . a
o n- a.
.
. . ,'
. - 0 . \
. x- -
i >' ..n U
o
' - i . I -
. ' o . a. - a. .
' I '
-
Q
a v '- '
e ' '
T -
. 0 R' . _
. u .
4 - u e a .
. .
. . w
l I
- .
a . '
u
- '0 p.
. \ - -
a , q 1 a.
' ,
1 I ' u
/ p 1. -
p '- I a
a . . . 1
1
i - a
_ A
\
a ſ
' a a
. -
i
\
._ _ X
. '327.
_HMnfiffieaephtienexnflaflveee ,
V .
,_ ,
i BLÞFLFH Hl BEÞM i t. _.>=......L
a
_,
_,
fflWfflMWH.H+obi.kl_ſhn 0.P,qnWHS_Ye*uP1x.Y
. w. V' t
3
CWS
tuft GTU Y 8 m
QG4SÞ>GBIÞYWVÞLQL®_G@t82.
&Tap.
in _ ex,
. stTwrw 0._v._.d\_\ .
4-wa
. _ A 4 _ ,.,.
a
1;,>MZT@EMMLLQW m n_o__w.flh_\ Aſ. V. 78,
,
WÞPRLZT Cut-a At t
The Engliſh Grammarz with Notes. 5'
Oftbe LETTERS. [7]
Old-Engliſh. Roman. Italian. - Soumled.
I A 'a*_£_a_ .a a
275 L B T B i- be. ell _
'if ſ o ſhe et: ice
15 des ed
e _
..:s_a:T_F-_:If ay fe - g* gbee eg got
8 'p H h fl b atcb ba each
EZZIILLi
LP_l.J_._-Lll__-_i£2_ se ____
IIK k £ k K_£<__ ka _____
BITLIZLH it;"
13 FD m M m fill cm me
en no fiv
rr A
BEFLFZL w eP _ſi
HQIZZNL m' law: "He"
R-'r in'
igDſssTJTsTF-eſh ſh w
T t tee et nd
ZUFU TT? TT "_

2-2 FVT77F 'va erv _
w H/ w dal/blew we m
ZZLZZZZLLL ſi"
IZLILLL w ye __
265 z Z z'Z z zed ze,0r62_______
6 The Engliſh Grammar, with Notes;
[5] Tho'it would be too much Judaſ: and Samaria, may be a Are
from the preſent Deſigrrfor me to ﬅionz ſince the Bible wrote in Let.
enter into the Enquiry, who was tex sis more likely to have inform'd
the Inventor of Letters, and What them, than the Hieroglyphiu of
_Nation had the Honour oſ firﬅ en Egypt. But when or whereſoever
)oying this Benefit, yetthat I may the Pba-nz'cian: learnt this Art, l
not wholly; diſappoint ſome, who think it is generally agreed, that
may expee this, Ilhall in a very Cadmur, the Son of Agenor, firfl: '
ſew Words let him know, That the brought Letters into Greece,
Cbinefe are allow'd the Palminthis whence in ſubſequent Ages they
Particular -, for their firﬅ King Foin, ſpread over all Europe.
who liv'd 14on Years before Moſeſ, Thus much l have thought fit w
500 before Mene: the firﬅ King of ſay on this Head that remains is,
Egypr, and 2950 before Chriﬅ, was That as the difference ofthe Arti
the Author of this Invention, and culate Sounds was to expreſs the
writ in their Language a Book different Ideas and Thoughts ofthe
called Texim, which is the oldeﬅ Mind; ſo it is certain, that one
Jll the World. Letter was intended toſignify only
Butthiswas in Parts too remote, one Sound; and not, as at preſent,
and which had ſo little Communi now to expref: one Sound, and then
ration with the World, that is, all another z which has brought in that
that World which was thenknown, Confufion, that has render'd the
that we may reaſonablymake ano Learning of our Modern Tongues
ther Enquiry after the Original of extremely difficult z whereas if the
Letters in the hither Parts of Afia, various Sounds were conﬅantly ex
Egypt and Europe. preſs'd by the ſame Numerical Let
"I'is more probable from the m, more than half that Difficulty
Mxmmier and Obelirk', that Hiero would be remov'd.
glyþkic: were in theſe Parts the firﬅ But ſince we are not here to re
Manner oſWriti ng, and even prior form, or indeed make a new Al
to Maſer; the Pyramid! and Obe phabet,as ſome have vainl ,againﬅ
lz'rk: being made, at leaﬅ in great the Stream, or full Tideo Cuﬅom,
meaſure, while yet the Ifi'aeþ'te: attempted 5 but to explain and de
were in Slavery to the Egyptmu, liver Rules abuut that which we
and by Conſequence not very well have, and according tothoſe Errors
qualitied for Inventions ſo curious and Miﬅakes which Uſe, theinvio
and judicious. __ lable Rule and Right oſ Speaking
Whether Cadmur and the wam and Writing, has eonſecrated, ſuch
rriam learn'd LETTERS fromthe an Endeavour Would be as uſeleſs
Egyptian, or their NEighbours of as ſingular,
[5] lt
The Engliſh Grammar, 'with Notes. 7"
C_.HAA_1_*.ſſ-n;,,_
Of J-Vo'w e ns-p [6]
Under Two Heads theſe Letters ﬅill are plac't,
Thefiz/Z holds Vowels, Conſonants the lafl.
Heſi: Twen -ſix Letter: are naturally divided intoTwo
Sorts, whic are call'd VOMII and Conſbm'm. Vowelx,
or perfect Sounds, being by Nature of greater Excel-.
lence than Conſhmnts, as founding by themſelves, and giving the
latter their Sounds, juﬅly demand our firﬅ Conſideration.
A Vmel, therefore, is a Letter' denoting a fiill Sound made in
the Throat, and can be pronounc'd without the help and join:
ing of any other Letter to it.
A Vowel by itſhlf compleat i: fbund,
Mde in the Throat, one full and perfect Sound, ,, \
Five Letter: we m" only Vowels tall, 1
For A, E, I, O, U contain them all. '
[7] In Ength we have but theſe Five Marks, or Character
of theſe perfect Sounds call'd Vowels, a, e, i, o, u, and y at the
End of a Syllable for i, which is only a differq'nt Figure, but
entirely of the ſinne Sound. When theſe Vowels end a Syl
lable, they are ufiially long, but generally ſhort in allothcr Poli
tions.
To
[6] It is of Uſe to obſerve,that the Tongue, the Palate z Which yet

the ſeveral Sorts of Sound: us'd in cannot make any one perfect Sound
Speaking,whi ch we callLetter:,are but by the ſame opening of the
form'd in avery natural Manner. Mouth ; that is toſay, theycan on
For firﬅ, the Month is the Organ ly ſound by their Union with thoſe
that fomis them, and we ſee, that firﬅ and only rfect Sounds z and
ſome are ſo fimple,and unmix'd,that theſe are call' Canſbnantr, or Let
there is nothing requir'd, but the ters founding with other Letters.
opening ofthe Mouth to make them [7] If we judge by the Cha
underﬅood, and to form different racters or Marks, we find that
Sounds; whence they have the there is not the ſameNumber of
Names ofVowelr, or Voice:,orVocoI You/et: in all Languages,and yet all
Sound', On theother Side we find, Nations almoſt a ree, that there
that there are others,whoſePronun are more different gounds ofVoweIr ,
ciation depends on the particular than they have common Characters
Application, and Uſe ofevery Part to expreſsthem._
ofthe Mouth,as theTeeth, theLips,
For
l
s_ The Engliſh, Grammar, with Notes.
To each of theſe, two diZÞrent Sound: belong;
One that is ſhort, am' er that i: long,- L
l
E
Five double V'ovvels add,cttoſill the Vocal Throng.
Each of theſe Ilii/(have two diﬅinct Sounds, that is, along i
and a ſhort Sound; the ſhort Sound is always made long by
adding (e) at the End, as Lad,j Ladez'Met, Men; Pip, P' e,
Rah, Rohe;
Vowels, Tan, Taneeach
compounded : ToofJI'wo-ſioF-theſe.
theſe w'e muﬅ --To
'add attain
Five dou le
tothe
perfect Knowledge of this, the Learner muﬅ firﬅbetaught the i.
true Sounds Of theſe Five Fowls, as they'lie ſingle, and each, by i
itſelf; for that is the' Guide Fto- arrive at 'all their Varia
tions_ ,' _ -.-. -,- l-'i _ (;_, i: .' t; 'u va,
- Beſidch the longhndiſhort, 'toct*(A)'does 'flzll- "fj'.We:r'n--_p.._-rſ-f
A Sound that? broad, arfin'all, ſhall,'_andcall; ' '.._ ' '
And in alland
A; Wall, V/ords,
Stall';rhat'end
in (ld), in nati-e ce),
a: haldjwill 'tell :* ' H"t :.'-_,
Betwixt a double (U) pladd*aſind*(R), " , * ſi '
A: XWarden,Ward, Warren, Warnr,'andwarm$1;.
(A) in theſe Words ſeems to hzſveſſgaiſſrtid broad Sound l
from the ancient Spelling; Which, even inſi theiDays þf Been l
Elizaheth, added a at) after "it, as'in' falle;v it then writ
ten tanlk, as in Aſrha'm and ſeveral other 'Writ'ers e'fore 1760,
t'- l
(A) beſides its ſhort and long Sound, has before (U or rather
double (l)' generally a broad, open or full Sound, as it has in'i.
Words ending in (ld), &re. but when the double (l) is partedr
in the Middle ofa Word it is pronounced ſhort, as Shallen', Tallow ,*':
'tis likewiſe broad When plac'd betwixt a (w) and (r), and like
wiſe in Mſh, Mtch, Wine', Wrath, &e. * X _-,. . - 5
(A) isfhor' when ſingle Conſonant: conclude, j ct- -'* ll
Or Two of the ſame into the Middle ctintrade, ' " i
Or ſeem in Sound t'ohtain the Middle Part,- i '
Bat yet the final (e) do's Length to theſſ impart.
[8] When
' ForthisR'eaſon Iam ofOpinion, ' If' therefore we' make this Divi.
ſays onrleame'd Dr.Wal/i1,that they fion oftheVowels,accordin g to that
ought to be diﬅinguilh'd into theſe Numbe'r nſvocal Sounds, as we find
Three Clnſſetz Gurtural, or Throaſ- them in "onr Titne, (as we ought)
Sounds; Palatine, or Sounds of the then 'will their Number be Nine,
Palate -, and Labial, or Sounds ofthe w'z. Three intheTbroar,threein the- '*
LiPſ, as they are form'd either_by Palate, and three in the Li 1', ac- -
the Throat, the Palate, or the Lips. cording to the three
ſi ſ
ſeveral egrees
cry
_
' l
in
The Engliſh Grammar, with Notes. 9
[8] When a ſingle Conſonant ends a Syllable, Bat, um, far,
ſe) is ſhort ; and when Two of the ſame Conſonants meet in the
Middle of aWord, as in better, cannot, Fdrrier, &e. and when
a ſingle Conſonant in the Middle ſounds double, as in hanz'ſh,
Dragon, Habit, &e. and when it precedes Two Conſonants that
end a Word, as Haﬅ, paﬅ, &e. But ſilent (e) ev'r after theſe Two
Conſonants, lengthens the V) as pafle, &te.
A ill 'mewhich
(Ink-Lard: long mqfl 'uﬅlHilahlepcompe/E,
but hine do ſu pqſe
Whem-ver ſilent (e) is in the elofi.

And when in th' End qf syllables, 'tix known
In Whrd: that hewe more syllable: than one.
(A) ſounds long, ſmall, and ſlender, xſl, in Words of one
Syllable with (e) at the End, as make, fate, late, &e. but this
-i's*thevnamtaluEffect of ſilent (e), which always gives length to
the 'foregoing Vowel, and ought never to bewritten whenthat
is ſhort, 'tislikewile long in the Ends of Syllables in Words of
many Syllables, as Cradle, Ladle, &e.
No common Wbrd in (a) can e'er expire,
And yet it: genuine Sound retazn entire.
(A) is obſcure, or not plainly pronounc'd, in the Word flou
fand.
None but proper Names end in this Vowel, except'theſc Seven
in (ea), which yet ſound (e), as Lad, le, Flee, Pea. See, Ten,
jeu 5 the laﬅ Word is out of Uſe.
Of the Vowel (E.)
[9] (E) i: of di e'en' Sound, and 'variom Uſe,
silent itſel , all Vowels doe: produce;
But leaﬅ itfilf; jet ſhmetime: it i: fimnd
To lengtbm ev'n it: own preceding Sound,
A: We in Sccne and Glebe, andother: find,
But (e) i: moﬅly o the ſhorte' kind.
But then its' Soun i: alway: clear expreſf,
A: in Whet, let, well, met, and reﬅ.
The
or Manner-s of'opening the Mouth; French generally do their (e)when
that: xs, by a larger, middle, and follow'd by (n)in tbeWord hind;
le r Degree of opening' it in thoſe ment, tho' ſomething ſh r and.
hme Places of Scars. clearer; or perhaps its mo uſual,
_[8] We generally pronounce (a) Sound in ou'r Tongue comes neareſt;
WLthamoreſmallandflendetSound, to the French Neuter, or open (e) z
thin mofl; other Natxonsz as the es in'the Word: Em', Tere, &or.
o
so He 'Engliſh Grammar, with Notes;
The Sound of this Voml is differently expreſs'd, and 'of
various and great Uſe in the Pronunciation of other Vowels ;
for, when hlent itſelf it lengthens them all, but is ſeldom
long itſelf, or lengthen'd by itſelf in Words of one, or more.
than one Syllable. < '
'- iIt: Sound i: alwdyxſhort, howe'er expreﬅ,
A: fret, help, leit, Beard, dreamt, and bleﬅz
Unleſs made long 5] ſilent final (e),
Or double (e) in Form or Sound it be.
ctA ſingle Conſonant at the End after (e) makes it ſhort, as in
Bed, fret, Den, &c. Two or Three Conſonants at the End after
it does the firmez (ft) as left, (le as held, (lm) as Helm, (lp)
as help, (ltj as melt, (my as Hemp, (nd as dent, 5ent,ct(pt) as
, kept, (rb) as Herb, (rd, as Herd, (rk) asjerk, (rm) as Term, (m) as
Hem, (rt) as pert, (ﬅfl as Fleſh, (:k) as Dark, (ſl) as erſt, beﬅ,
Hell. The Sound of (e) expreſs'd by (ea) in the Middle of &ve
ral Words is ſhort; as alread , Bedrd, Bearn, (a Child) Wea
ther, Treaſure, tledrzſe, DeartZ, dreamt, Earmj/l, Earth, (and
all deriv'd from it) Feather, Head, (and all deriv'd from it) Fea
lom, Leathery, Lead, Meadaw, Meaſure, Pearl, Peaſant, Plea
fitre, ready, Sednzflreﬅ, ſ read, and many more. "
It being thus natur y ſhort, it lengthens itſelf in Words of
one Syllable but in theſe Sixteen Examples,
' 1. Bede, , 9. Made, a Country.
2. Pede, Proper Names. 10. Mere, a Lake or Fenn."
3. Vere, 11. .Mete, Meaſure.
4. Crete, an Iiland. 12.. Rere, hinderrnoſlr.
5. Ere, before that. 13. Sune, in aPlay.
6. Glebe, Land; 1, _ * - 14.. Scheme, aDraught.
7. Glede, a Kite. - , * ' 17. sphere, a Globe.
8. Here, in this Place. 16. Theſe. - .
To theſe, in myOpinion, we may add there, were, and
where, tho' b a- different,v yet wrong, Pro'nuncration, ſome
ſound the fir (e) in theſe Words like (a) long. I
n
ex:<.=.-_-
or as the Irn-'am do their 6a). But 'with a clear and acutesound,z lure 7
yet not like the fat or groſs (al of Frbnqþ a), Maſtultne: but it:
vv___ the Germa'nr, whiehif long, we ex- arte ever has the ohſcure Sound
reſs by '(aſiu) o't ſaw), or if ſhort, bf the French (e),Fem1_m_ze,_z unleſs
b-WT.E_F._
gy ſhort'lo )., , ' z. when'ſhortze), goes before a), as,
' [9] his Yond is- prono'xe'd in Kertue and &ma-ger. '30le
'He Engliſh Grammafll Mitbeote's. 11
In Wor'ds of mare than one Syllablc', the (e) at the End
lengthens theſe Words, as, _ - - .
1. Adhere. 14.. Inmfere. '
2.. Auſiere.
3. Aponeme. 15', Intmene.
1'6.ſiNice'u, Crced.
4.. Bla home. . 17. Objime.
ſ. Co en. , . . 18. Porr're-ve.
6. Complete. 19. Precede.
7. Comede. . zo. Reade. . _ '
8. Canwne.ſſ
9. Concrete. , 21.
22.. Replete;
Revere. ct ſ '
1-0. Extrema. . 3 Sea/ere. '. ,
1 1 . erg, Lord. . 34. sincere.
12.. Impe'de, to hinder. 25. Superpde'; ->-' "
13. Intercede, mediate. 26. Supreme. ' _
No-re, That eamþlen; replete; be'n-"eme, ſupreme, are often
ſpelt compleat,
ſpelt both ways,replmt,
I wou'dextream, fizp'ream;"
not omit but they,v
them,- tho'ct ſince when
they are
in
mm, belong properly to the following Rule: _ , _ '
When long, acute, andclmr (e) ſimmlx we ſhe._ -,
A; in ev'n, evil, be, me, wc and he. _ * ,..u.
'
Ea, ie and double (e) are fbuml, '
Still to expreſs of (c) the longer SaM._ _
Cuﬅom lengthens the Sound of '(e) by theimproper (India
Vomel ſea) in all Words where it. does not ſound 01) ſhort; or
(e) ſhort, as, willbe ſeen when we come to that iinproper double
Vomel. ' " '-*
_ The Sound of (e) islengthen'd by (ei) in theſi: words only,
1. Come-it. 5'. Either. .-- 9. Raceipe. 4
2. Conceive. 6. Neither. lo. Seize.
3. Deteit. 7. Inveigle. (1 1. Weild.
4.. Deceive. 8. ReceiPt. \
(ei) lengthens the Sound of (e) or gives it' that of double.(e)
in theſe: . . .
1 . Atchie-uement. 9. Ceiling. 17. Griwom.
2.. Believe. 10. Field. 18.
3. Relief. 1 1. Fiend. 19. Liege.
4.. Beſiege. * _ 1' 2.. Friendſ. zo. Mulitier.
ſ. Bi'r. 13. Fromier. 21. Piece.
6. Brjz'. 14.. Grief. 12.. Piedmont'.
7. Ca ier. 15', Grie-uam'. 23. Pierre.
8 . Chief. 16. Griwe. 24.. Prieſt, -_
, 25. Re-_
I)
/
gz The Engliſh Grammar, with Notes,

15. Relief. . go. shriek. 35. Thiwe.
26. Relie-ve. 31. Siwe. 36. Thin/er .'
* 27. Reprie'ue. 32.. shield. 37, Thieviſh.
28. Siege. 33. Thie-muv 38. Yield. 'i
29. Shrie'w, 34.. Ihief. ' ',
In all other Words the Sound of (e) long exereiis'd by the
douhle Vowel (ee), as in Bleed, Creed, &cſiſxofl The Sound
of (e) in Stranger is obſcure. .
When (e) ends'Vhrds, k he: no Sound at all,
Except in Word: which 'me do proper all 5
Except it doubled he inT Form or Soundh
The i: to this theflle Exceptionfomd.
(e) itſelf, at the End of aWord, has' now no proper Sound
of its own, as in make, have, love, &c. except in the, which
is writ withafingle (e), to diﬅinguiſh it from thee 3 and ſome
proper Names, as Phaebe, Penelope, Paſiphae, Gethflzmane, and
in Epitome, &c. fortſe) fim le is ſeldom elſe pronounc'd at the
End of a Word, for he, me, e, me, he, and ye, ſound and WOu'd
þctter be writtenthebySound
Whem'er (ee) efſi(e} is in the End, '
Some qf theſe Letter: wi] exprefl't you'll find.
Y, ar ie, happy; ey, a: in Key, '
Double (e) agree ,- ea, m in Tea. .
But the Sound of (e) is at the End of many Words, tho' dif
ferently expreſsdz Firﬅ, and moﬅ commonly, by (fig as happy ,
holy, Mercj; theſe Words may be writ with (ie) or 0), as t e
Writer pleaſes.
zdly, By (e)), in Angltſej, Baleaney, *Hane)', Cook-ney, Hum
phrej, Key, Ran-fie), and many more; tho' Cuﬅom now begins
to prevail in the Omiffion of the (e).
zdlj, The Sound of (e) at the End is exfireſs'd by (ee), as in
Pharzflae, Saddmee, agree, Chuldee, Bee, Knee, and many more.
The Sound of (e) at the End is likewiſe e'xpreſs'd by (U), as
in Sea, Flee', Pea, Ten, Yea.
T I/Vhere
[10] The Uſe of .this (e) is the KVords mke,ane,Wi'ctze,&c.which are
lengthening theSound ofthe'fnrego- now Words_ of one SyUahle, were
ing Conſonant 5 And a very learned formerly Diſ-ſyllables, or Wozds of
Man is of Opinion, that it had this Two Syllablcs, m-ke, o-ne, fiſt-ye ;
Original. That it was pronounc'd ſo that the firſt Vowelv vermmatmg
but in obſcure Manner,like the (e) the firﬅSyllable,was therefore long; , j
Feminine oſthe French; ſo that Fhel and that obſcure Sound of thzgng
Where e'er thefilent '(e) a Pldce ahtninx, .
The Voice foregoing, Length andszftne/J gdim,
And after (c) and (g) this ſbftning Power remains. _
The ſilent (e), which is put at the End of Words and Syllables,
does not only produce, or longthen the foregoing Vowel, but
often renders its Sound more ſoft, as in Face and Lette, ſo in
Rag, Rage, Stag, Stdge, hng, huge. '
In Compound
Which in the Word:
Simple,it:insilence (e)itretains,
the End gains. ſ
It does the ſamEOffice in the Middle Syllahles, when it follows
(g) or (£), as in Adwnneement, Encazerngement ,- ſince (r) and (g)
are always ſounded hard, Unleſs ('e) or (i) ſoften them; as ſing,
ſinge, ſwing,ſwinge, Sal' A
I, O, and U, et th' End of ſlbrd: require,

The ſilent (e), the ſame do's (va) dg/zi-e.
The ſilent (e) is added to (i), (0), and (n), at the End of Words
becauſe the Genius of the Language requires it; and likewiſi: to
('u) Conſonant or (at/1), except when an (i) follows in the ſame
Word, asin living, thriving, &e. to avoid the Concourſi: of
too many Vowels; its preiizrv'd in Hammhle, ehnngeahle, &e. to
mark the diﬅinct Syllables. For (ie) we often now put 01), as
Merey for Mercia, and dy for die, &c.
In Cantpoundſ/les, the' of ohſcurer Sound, .
0" en'enſilent, (e) muſt ſtill hefiwzd.
- Tho'
(e)by little andlittle vaniſh'd ſo ſill',

could not be foin'd to thoſe \Vords
that in the End it was totally ne to make the forcgoingSyllahlc long,
glected, as the ſe) Feminine of' the' which is now its princinalUſe; he
French often is, the Quantiry of the caui'e the precedent Syllables are er.
foregoing Vowel being preſerv'd, ther not long, or made ſo by their
and all the other Lettcrs keeping Diphthongy, or double Votueh. Ano
their Sounds,as if the ( e) were like ther Proof ot't'nis is, that we find in
wiſe tn bcpronounc'd- And aﬅron the old Poets this (t) makes either
gerArgumcnt of this is, that we l'ec another Syllableor not,as tbeOcca
this mute (e) in the old Orthogra fion of the Verſe requires, Which
phy orSpelling perpetually annex'd happens to the French (e) Feminim',
to many Words, in which it ls now both in Verſe and Proſe.
conﬅantlyomitted,asD.1rke,Marke, But tho' this mutc (e) is not
Selfe,Leafe,Waite,and innumerable ſounded in our Time, yet is it'far
more, to which Words there is no from bcingofno uſe and ſuperfluous,
Reaſon to imagine, that it ſhou'd for beſides its demonﬅrating, that:
have been join'd, if it had not been theſe Words were formerly of more
pronounc'd Dar-ke, Mnr-lee, selfe, Syllables,than they are at preſent,
Lea-fe,Wai-re,&c. Forfms plain, it it yet ſerves-to theſe ' three Uſes:
C Irn/r,
14. The Engliſh Grammgr, with Notes.
Tho' (e) be not ſounded, or at leaﬅ very obſcurely, yet mufl:
it not be left out in Writing in the Middle of Compound-Words,
as namely, finely, (IN-ly, bumb'bmely; whereof, wherein, whereon,
&c. n'or after U) at the End ofa Word, anorher Conſonant pre
ceding it, tho' obſcurely ſounded, as Bridle, Rzfle, Bugle, &C.
for its Virtue ﬅill reaches the foregoin Vowelas to its Length
and Softneſs, unleſs where three Conlgnants intervene, as in
Fiddle,-Ruffle, &e. which are call'd a Syllable and half, tho' in
Reality they are two diﬅinct Syllables, as is plain from our
Verfis.
' When (n) conclude: a Word, the (e)'r obſſſmre,
Or doe: Perhaps no Sound At all endure.
The Sound of le) before (n) at the End of a Word is very ob
ſrure, or rather ſilent, asele-um,ſe1.*m, e'uen, Heaven, baundm,
bratt-71, See. and this is ſo plain, that in Verſe they are now al
_ ways Us'd for Words of but one Syilable. But proper Names
of Perſhns and Place; are an Exception t0'this Rule, as Eden,
Ibcn, &to.
ÞV/'aen (re) conclude: a Ward the Sound remove:
* Before the (r) and (u), it mcfftl] Pro-ver.
The Sound ofle) after (r) is ſilent, or paſſes into a precedent
(:z) obſcure; as Fire, ſounds Fi-ur ,- Deſire, Deſi-ur ,- more,
mo-urz, Man, Ma-m'; Rere, Re-ur, &C. The ſinne holds in
Acre, Maffiure, Meagre, Maugre, &c.
When (s) at the End o Pluml Wind: i: found,
It is 'lieſ/lent (e) a ordr no Sound.
(E_) is
firﬅ, To treſerve the Quzntity of Whenever there is neither of theſe
the 'ibregoingVowel, which if long Confiderations, it is redundant, ex
beforeqemains ſo, tho'that final or cept when it follows U), preceded
mute (e ) he pronounc'd. ely, To ſof by ſome other Conſonant, asinHan
ten the Soundoi'lx), (;), and Mr), dle, Candle, &e. here indeed the Uſe
as huge, ſince, brent/re, 'wreak/Je, is not ſo apparent as in the follow
feetbe, which that being away, ing Inſtances, yet it has even here
wou'd be pronounc'd lmg, finL, an obſcure Sound, and the ending
breathwrmtb ſectb,8<c. sly, To Conſonants cou'd not be pronounc'd
diﬅinguiſh (1') Conſonant from (to without it; nay, in Verſe they al
Vowel, as in lawe, Newe, fa've, &e.ways make two Syllables: So that
which wou'd elſe be lum, crau,fau, Dr. Williſ, who makes it here re
&e. but lo) Lionſonant having now dundant,iscertainly miﬅaken z tho'
a peculiar and erorer ChamCIer, it he is perfectly in the right in Idle,
may perhaps hereafter happen that Trifle, Title, Table, Noble, &c- ſince,
this mute (e) may be leſt out after as he obſerves here, the mute, or ra
If. ther the ohſcnre (e) produces it.
This
i
The Engliſh Grammar, with NOtes. 13'
(E) is ſilent when (e) is added to Ends of Words in Names
' Beherſi,
which &ce.
ſignify more
but the than of
Reaſon one;
thisasis,inbecauſe
Blades,theDfltleſ,
Word Glades,
had (e)
ſilent to'ſoften and lengthen- the Sound before, and the (3) is only
added to' ſhew that it ſignifies more than one. Thus in date-3,
him, takes, likes, ﬅrilm, Bcc. which you will find anon. to be
call'd, by way of Excellence, Words that affirm ſomething of
ſome Name, or Perſon. And tho' the Affirmation and Name
are often written with the (Lime Letters, as Trades ſignifying
many Trades, and mule-r, he trades; yet, beſides the Senſe, the
Writing the Name iNith a Capital'or great Letter, and the Word
of Affirination with a ſmall, (for ſo they ought to be written)
may ſufficiently diﬅinguiſh them. -
Nor muﬅ (e) final be omitted, tho' the Syllable, that goes be
fore conſiﬅ of a double Vomel, as, Houſe, cleanſe, Diffiiſh, Increaſe.
&C. and in Horſe, Nmﬅ, ijſc. '
But (e) between two (s's) at the End,
Da': to the Ear a certain Sound commend,
O'r elſe hetween c, g, ch, z, and s,
It flill another Syllnhle muﬅ expreſs.
Bnt hctere it is to be noted, that Words that have the Sound of
(:), or (.c) min led>in their Sound, (e:) then makes another and
a diﬅinct Sylla le; as after (e) in Traces, Pluces, Slicex, &e. af
ter (ch) in Breachex, Kenelm, Leather, Riches, &e. after-(g) in
Stages, Siege', ahliges, &e. after (5') in Ho'jſes, MI/fls, Cloſm,
Nofls, Rag/es, &e. after (z)' in nues, amazes, ſurpizer, &c.
[11] Oftlae Vawel (l).

When (I) precede: ght, and nd,
Gh, mb, gn, ld ﬅill long will he 3
Elſe it is alway: ſhort, a: you will ſee. ,
As for its being long when (e) ſilent concludes the Syllable,
as in Tide, abide, &c. that is according to the cneral Rule
of (e) ſilent after an other Vowel; the ſame 'wi hold of (e)
after (r) in Fire, De- ire, &e. Examples of the foregoing Rule,
are
This mute (e) in the Middle of in the Plural, Knife, Houſer, &e.
Words is ſeldom us'd, unleſs it wah [r r] When (1) is ſhort, lt ſounds
in the primitive Words a final (e), moﬅ commonly like that of the
as in Advancement, Changeable,&c. ( i) of the French, and' other Nati
itwas final in Advance,Cbange-,&c. ons, with the ſmall Sound; btit
But this (e) which is mute inWords when 'tis long, it is pronounc d
ofthe ſingular Number, is ſounded like the Greek (uſi
C aſ" [jz] Short
16 The Engliſh Grammar, with Notes.
are Delight, Eight, Mind, Rind, kind, high, nigh, ſigh ,- slimh,
deſign, mild, Child, except h'uild, guild. Short, as hid, did, will,
ſtill, win, guilt, Mint, fit, ZCC.
(I) before (r) the Sound of (u) does ſitte,
Extept in ir for in, as in irrcſolutc.
Irre-verent, irrevotahle, irretrie-uahle, irreligious, &c.
,\ (I) hefore (er) and (on) ﬅill ſhunds as (ye),
And after (ﬅ) the Sound the ſame will he.
Examples are Bullion, Onion, Comrnunion, Hollier, Collieri
Pannz'er, &e. Celeſſial, Chriſtian, Comhuﬅion, Qeflion, &c. and
ib it ſounds in Poiniard. "Pis obſcure in Goffip.
To ſhund like douhle (e), does incline,
As in Machine, and Shire, and Magazinez.
_ \ Like (a) in Sirrahz hut writ (oi) in join. ' z
And alſo in appoint, hail, hroil, faints, &e.
No Engliſh Whrd can end in naked (i),
It muﬅ add (e) or in their Room plate (y).
The (e) is added to (i) in the Conclufion of Words, and U)
often put in their Room, yet (ie) is better after (f) and (s), as
in crucz'fie, dignifie, tra te, huſ/e, Gipſie, &a. t Tho' Incuriouſheſs,
oftenin theſe Words, puts U),
[12] Of the Voice] (O).

(O) does expreſi three ſir-veral Sorts of Sound,
, l A: (e) in go, the Mouth ﬅill opening round:
Of (11u) in Folly, (u) in come and ſome,
And before (l) and ſingle (m), except in Home.
This Vowel expreſſes (o.)_ round in Roſe, (a) long in Folly,fbnd,
(u).0b('cure in come and ſhine, &c.
(O) In theſe Places ſounds (u) becauſe theſe Words were ori
ginally ſpelt with a (u) and not. an (o).
(O) ﬅill is ſhort, unleſſ when it is found
In one of all theſe ways to lengthen Sound;
When (e) a W'ord or Sylldhle does th'e,
Unleſs when douhle Sounds of Conſhnants oppoſe.
- It
[m] Short (o) is pronounc'd like ſ fie, arc: long(o) is pronounc'd like
thc German (a), or open or ſat(o), the Greek (e)) and the French
only it is ſhort; as in fond, moIIi- (au),.
[rg] 'The
The Engliſh Grammar;" with" Notes. 17
It cloſes in go, ba, Io, ſh, ma, no, who, do, tmdo, who/i), an;
or when it ends Syllables, as in gla-riou:,Sto-ry, &e. Exceptions,
as Body, Coditile, notable, &c. when the Sound of the following
Syllableis doubled.
WZen (0) before double (l) it: Place doe: lvolJ,
Or elſe before (ld) a: Scold, bold, Gold,
Before (lt) m molten, Bolt ,- before 5
(Lﬅ), as Bolﬅer, andfe-ueml maſire.
Examples. When double (U ends a Word, as Toll,PoIl, Roll,

mntroll, &ce. but thoſe were originally written with (0u,), and
yet retain the long Sound of the double Vowel. (lzl) as old,
Scald, bold, &e. before f'lt) and (lﬅ) as Bolt, Hair, Colt, Upiml
flerer, &e. '
Before (rd), (rge), a: Cord and Forge,
Ford, Sword, and gord, and likewiſe George and gorge.
Before (r1n), (rn), (rt), a: Storm, -
Forlorn, exhort, and other: may inform.
But ſofter and more obſcure in For', Comfort, Effort, which
has two ways of Pronunciation, the laﬅ Syllable being long, and
the firﬅ ſhort ſome times, and at other times the contrary, tho'
the firﬅ way is the moﬅ juﬅ and true Wantity, Pnrpart,Tmnſ
For', &e. '
Before (ﬅ) and (ught),- a: Poﬅ,
(But wit/an ſharpz-r Tone in Froﬅ, loﬅ, Coﬅ,)
Nought, bou ht, Thou ht, and after it w/om we 'view 7
The Sjllable c o/Þ up witZ double (u), A
A: 'me do in blow, ſhow, and know, find true.
If it be long by the Syllables ending with py), it will be no
leſs by adding (e) ſilent, whoſe Wality is to lengthen the fore
going Vowel, and which ought to be added in Bowe, blow,
Crowe, glawe, &ce. to diﬅinguiſh them from Words which have
the Sound of the proper double Vowel (ow)z as How, non', Cow,
&e. '
In W'ords of man syllable: (O) 'll be _
Obflure in Somz , when plac'd before a (P).
As for Example, in Biſlaap,_1>*iſlzopricle,- but in Words of one
Syllable it ſounds open, as in ﬅep, hop, floy, &e. It is like
wiſe very obſcure before 02.) at the End ot a Word, as iant
ton, Button, Button, Pmſſm, Capon, Falcon, &c. But theſe nrc
rather ſilent (o)'s than obſcurc says, the _ſc_cond Syllable being
' 3* r
18, The Engliſh Grammar, with Notes.
ſo much ſuppreſs'd, that it ſeems no more than the ſecond in
Heaven, e've'n, &ce. which Uſe has now made but one.
Whenfingle (11 or (m), or (r) purſue
(O), when it: plut'tl 'troz'xt (r) and double (u).
- When follow'd by (va) andſilent (e) 'me pro-tue,
(O) then'ſhund: (u), except in rove, Grove, ﬅrove; .
This is plain from theſe Examples: Colour, Columbine, Co
lon), &e. Comfort, tome,*Kingdam, Beſbm, Fat/ram, rtmdom, &e.
but commonly, &c. is excepted. Vſorld, Mark, V/orſhip, &c.
before (t/a), as Brotber, Mother, ſmother, &e. except Broth,
Cloth, Froth, Trotb, Wrot/z; but moﬅ of theſe have been, and
are ﬅill frequently written with (oa). (O) after (r*), in A-Pron,
Citron, int/iron, Iron, Saffron, is obſcure like (u), and in Rome
(the City) 'tis pronounc'd like (oo) in Room.
The Sound of (o) in th' End on ﬅill. muﬅ/enow
I: ne'er exprefi'd rim: make-la' by (OÞ
Except in do, unto, go, 10, ſo, and no.
(O) never ends an Engliſh Word, except before excepted, and
mulo, whaſh, (an antiquated Word) to, too, two, who, wo, mo,
(for more is a Word, quite out of. Uſe) the Sound of (o) being
there expreſs'd by (om), except in Foe, Toe, Doe, Roe.
[13] Of the Vowel (U).

Two Sound: in (u) We certainly ſhall ſind,
Rub's of tbeſhorter, Muſe the longer kind.
The long Sound is what- it bears in the ſingle Vowel, the ſhort
is more obſcure and lingual. The ſhort S'ounds are Dub "16
rut, Gan, Drum, burﬅ, muﬅ, Ruﬅ.
Long, wBen in I/le: of man) s liable:
It ends- a Sfllaole, twin Durab 5.,
This Vowel, when it ends a syllable vin Words of tnany Syl'
lables, is long; asin Curiom, vUnion, Importnnity, Furlom, Pu
rity, Seturizy,'8(c. But this long Vality of (u) in this Plane
ſeems to come from (e) final, under-ﬅood, tho' left out to avo1_d
the claſhing of two Vowels, for it might be Dureable, Imptmez
ty, &e. tho' "a following Vowel of any kind will, after aimgle
Conſonant, naturally lengthen the toregoin 5. except when
theSound of the following Conſonant is dou led, as iannrz,
* urze ,
[13] The (u) long isgronounc'd like the French (u), finall or
fie Engliſh Grammar, 'with Notes. 19.
buried, Study, &e. where the (u) is ſhorten?d and falls 'into the
Sound of (o) ſhort or obſcurc.
No Engliſh Word in (u) tun fhirl) enoC
It: Sound exprefi'd by (ew) or (ue) me
Except. you, thou and lieu, and this' one Word adieu,
Few Word: begin with, or fth' Middle have (eu).
Inﬅead of (u) in the End, we put (ew), or (ue), as Nephew,
New, sinew, rew, &e. and uecrue, Ague, Avenue, &e. Nor
is the Sound of (u) in the Beginning and' Middle of Words, in
many Words, except ſuch as are deriv'd fiom the Greek; as
Eutburiﬅ, Eunueh, Enphrutes, Eulogj', Eutj/clyut, Euphonj, Deute,
Deuteronomjl, Europa, Euroclydon, Euſkbius, Euſtuee, Euterpe,
Eutyehex, Feud, Grundeur,1>leuriffl, Pleuritick, R/zeumutiole, Rheu
rnutz'ſm, Rheum. *
Were e'er the (u)'i: long beſidex, 'tis foundct
Tbctut- it; own character denote: it: Sound.
Ar, ir, "or, 'with ure, and er,
T' expreſi the Sound of we oft prefer,
Vſlaen ut the End of V/ords, thut do eanſi t. ſi
, of man] syllables, the] ure pluck,
The Sound of (u) in-all other Plaees, but what are mentiondd
where it is long,. is expreſs'd by the Vowel it ſelf; but when'it
is obſcure and ſhort in the End of Words of many Syllables (and
ſome of one) it is ſometimes expreſs'd by (or), by the Corrupt-
ncfs of our Pronunciation 5 as in Altur, Angulur, Culendur, for
cular, Medlrzr, Pedlur, Pillur, Solur, &c., or by (ir), as Birth,
Dirt, shirt, Sir, Sirnume, to ſpirt, or ſquirt' Water, ſtir, Tloird,
Thirty, the Words deriv'd from it, &a. or by (or), as in Anoeſtorx,
Actorx, Adminiflrutor, Ambuffudor, Ancbor, Affeffor, Correct'or,
Counſellor, Oppreſflvr, &e. or by (ure), as in Adventure, Archi
tecture, Conjecture, conjure, Creuture, Feuture, Figure, Fracture,
Fumiture, Geſture, Impqfiure, Intloſure, Indenture, injure, join
ture, Juncture, Lecture, Lelſure, Munufucture, Mixture, Nature,
Nurture, Overture, 'Faſt-me, peradventure, Picture, Pleufiore; Po
ﬅure, Preffiore, Rupture, Rupture, Scripture, SculPture, Stuture,
Structure, Superſtrufz'ure, Tcnure, Tincture, Torture, Treuſure,
venture, Veﬅm'e, Verdure.
Theſe we have inſerted becauſe the (u) is ſhort and obſcure
tho' it have (e) final at the End, and ſerves therefore for an Ex
ceptiou to that Rule, as well as an Exampleof this;
Or by (er), as-Adder, Adulterer, Anger, a Tool, Balliflſſers, Bun
m, Fedden, Crezfler, Crupzzerz Daughter, slaughter, &c. [14]
CH A F.
zo The Engliſh'Grammar, with Notes;
liſh ſource any where allow, or'l'
[14]We ſhall here, at the End of
theVowe/r, ſay a fewWords of their know, 'except when the ſhort. (e)f
Formation, which well ﬅudy'd, will. immediately precedes theLetter(r),
(as we have obſerv'd) be a great As liberal, Virlue, Liberty, &t.
Help to theArtofSpelling.To pro The ſame Place is the Seat of the
ceed therefore according to the Di Formation of (o) and (u) obſcure,
viſion made in our Notes on Num but ﬅill with a leſs opening of the
ber [6] The Gutrumlr, or Throat Mouth , and it differs from the
Lenerr,or Vawelr,are form'd in the French (e) Feminine only in this,.
top or upper Part ofthe Throat, or that the Mouth being leſs open'd,
the lower Part oſ the Palate or the Lips come nearer together.This
Tongue, by a moderate Compreffion ſame Sound the French have in the,
of theBreath. When theBreath goes laﬅSyllables oftheWords fer-vireur,
out with afull Gnﬅ,or larger open ſacrificateur,&c.TheEng/zſh expreſs
ing of the Mouth, the German (a), this Sound by ſhort (u), as in turn,
or the open (e) is form'd. But the burn, dull, cur, &e. and ſometimes =
Frenchand other Nations,as well as by a Negligence of Pronunciationr.
the Germam, moﬅ commonly pro they expreſs the ſame Sound by (e)
nounce their (a) in that manner: and (au),asin came, ſome, done, com
The Eng lifl: expreſs that Sound, pany, countrypauþlfflcow', lowe, &e.
when itis ſhort, by ſhort (e); but and ſome others,which they ought
when it is longhy (..u)or(aw); but' more juﬅly to give anotherSound to. -
'ſeldom by (e). Forin theWords fall, The Weljb generally expreſs this
Folly, Call,CoI/ar,Law.r,Lafr,Caufe, Sound hy(y),only thatLetter at the
Coſr,and0dd,ſawd,jbd, and in many End of Words with them ſounds (f).
other Words like theſe, there is the The Palatine Vowels are form'd
ſame Sound of the Va-welr in both in thePaIate, that is, by a moderate
Syllables,only in the firﬅ it is long, Compreſſion of the Breath, betwixt
and in the laﬅ ſhort. And this per. the Middle of the Palate and the
haps might bring our former Divi Tongue: that is,when the Hollow
fi m ofSonnds into doubt, ſince that of the Palate, is made leſs' by the
ſuppoſes the Difference to ariſe raiſing ol'rhe Middle oftheTongue,
from their Length or Breviry ; 'than in the Pronnnciation of the'
whereas here we make the Sounds Throat, or Gnnural Saundl. Theſe
the ſame- But this muﬅ be horeun Sonnds are of three Sorts;aceording.
derﬅood of the Formation of the to the leſiening or cular-ging of the; _
Sounds, that is, the ſhort and the ſaidHollow, whichDifference may
long Sonnds are producd in the he produc'd two ſeveral Ways, ei
ſame Seats or l-'Iaces of Formation; ther by contracting the Mouth or
but in the formerRule, theI-Iearing Lips, the Tongue remainingin the -*
only as the judge of the Sounds, ſame Poſition ; or by elevating the
as they are emitted, not as to the hiiddle of the Tongue higher to
Place or'thcir Formation the Fore-parts oſ the Palate, the
ln the ſame Place, but with a Lips or Mouth remaining in the
more moderate Opening of the ſame State. This is done either
Mouth, is form'd the French (e)FC way, and it is the ſame Thing if it
minine,with an obſcure Sound: Nor were done both ways. ar;4.
is there any Difference in the For The Engliſh ſlender (A) is form'di
mation ofthis Letter', from theFor by a greaterOpening ofthe Mouth -,
mation of the 'foregoing open (e), as in But, bare, Sam,.ſame, dam,
but that theMouth orLips are more Dame, Bw", bare, ban, bane, Cro;
contracted in this, than in the ſor This Sound differr from the'fat or,
mer. This is a Sound, that the Eng open (ay Of theflermapgbyſſaxſhg;
The Engliſhv-Gnammar, with Notes; ar,
the Middle of the Tongue, as the (a) ſlender, very ſwiftly pronounc'd .
Engliſh do, and ſo compreſſmg the The Weljb expreſs this Sound
Breath in thePalate; but the Ger not only by (i),- and in the laſt
n'am, on the contrary, depreſs their Syllable by (y), but alſo by (rd),
Tongue, and ſo depreſs the Breath _which Letter they alway-s pro
into theThroat. The French enpreis nounce in that manner, and ſound
this Sound when- (e) goes before the Diphthongs or double Vowels
(no or (n) in the ſame Syllable, as an, en, like err-and ei.
Enrendement, &e. The Wellh and The thial, or Lip Vowels, are
the Italian: pronounce their (a) form'd in theLips, being putinto a
with this Sound. round Form, the Breath being there
In this ſameSeat the French form moderately comprel's'd. There are
their ſe) Maſculine, by a leſs, or the three Sorts or Claſſes of theſe, as
middle Openingoſ the Mouth,with well as of the former.
an acuteSound,as thelraliomfing. The round (o) is form'd by the
liſk, Spaniardx, and others, pro larger Aperture or Opening of the
nounce this Letter; for it isa mid Lips, whichSound moﬅ People give
dle Sound betwixt the 'foregoing the Greekw; the French with the'
Vowel, and that which follows: ſame pronounce their (au)-, and thev
But the Engliſh expreſs this Sound Engliſh almoﬅ always pronounce
not only by(e), but when it is long, their long (aj and alſo (ao), the (a)
byiea), and ſometimes by (ei); as as it were quite vaniſhing in the
Utterance; oſwhich the ſamemay
the, theſe, ell, Seal, tell, Tenl,ſteal,
ſet, Sent, efi, Beaﬅ, red, read, re be ſaid as was before on (ea), as
ceive, deceive, &e. But thoſeWords one, none, whole, Hole, Coal, Boar,
which are written with (en) Would thoſe, choſe, &e. The ſhort (o) is
really be more rightly pronounc'd, expreſs'd by the open one, as I have
if to the Sound of (ej long, the ſaid before, but mone rarely by the
Sound of the En'lzfl: (oxjuﬅly pro rough one. -
nounc'd, were added 5 as in all Pro The German ſat (a) is form'd in
baHlity they were of old pro the Lips, by a more moderate or
nounc'd, andas they are ﬅill in the middle Degree of opening 'em. The
Northern Parts. And thus thoſe ſame Sound is us'd by the [In/innſ,
written with (ci) wou'd be more Spaniardr, and not a few others.
juﬅly ſpoken, if the Sound of each TheFrencb expreſs this Sound by
Letter were mix'd in the Pronun ou,theWelſb by w; theEng/iſhgene
ciatinn. - but yet with a rally by oo, more rarely by u or on,
In the ſamectPlace,
as boon/boot, full, Fool, Pool,good,
leſſer opening of theMouth,( 1)llen ſtood, IVood, -Mon;{, Source, could,
der is form'd, which is a Sound very wouldﬅoould, &e. But do', move and
familiar with the French, Irolirmr, the like, are better enpreſ'si'd by
Spaniardſ, and moﬅ other Nations, round (o) than ſat (u).' 4
This Sound, when it is ſhort, is ex silent he), ſo much in uſe with
refls'd by the Engliſh by (i) ſhort, both French and Engliſh, iS'form'd
ut when it is long, it is generally in the ſame Place, butwitha leſſe:
written with (or ), not ſeldom with opening oſ the Lips. This Sound is
(ie), and ſometimes by am), asfir, every where expreſs'd by the Eng
fee't,fi' eel,_fill.feeI,fle[d,flill,fleel, liſh with their long (u), ſometimes
ill,eel, rn,feen, near, dear, hear,&c. by (toand (e-w), which yet are bet.
Some of thoſe Words which with ter pronounc'd by retaining the
this Sound are written with (ea), Sound of the ( e) Maſculine,asMnſe,
are often and more juﬅly expreſs'd Tune, Lute dure, muſe, mmſhrew,
by hee), and others ſpelt with (e), knew, &c. iForeigners wou'dobtain
Maſtulhte, adding to it theSound of the Pronunciation of this Lette? if
t ey
az The Engliſh Grammar, with Notes.
they wou'd endeavour to pronounce there were fourNames,then twelve, i
the Diphthongfiu), by putting the and atlaﬅ thirty-two; thus where
ſlender (i) before the Letter (u) or as the Arabtam, and perhaps the
(w)-, as the Spaniard in Ciudade, a ancient Hebre-zw, had only three
City z' but this is not ahſolutely the Vowels, or one in each Seat, now
fame Sound, tho' it comesyery near in our' Times we plainly diſcover
it; for,(iu) is a compound Sound, at leaſt three in every Seat; per
hit: the French. and Engliſh (u) is a haps our Poﬅerity may interpoſe
ſimple. The Waſ/I: generally expreſs ſome betwixt each of theſe.
this Sound by i-w,yw,uw, as in ſlit', But: all' theſe Vowels are capable
Colour z Ilyw, a Rudder z-Duw,God. ofbein g made long or ſhort,whence
We allow theſe Nine Sonnds to ariſes theDifference of Alantity in
beVowels, that is, diﬅinct, un long and ſhort Syllables, tho' ſome
mixt Sounds, nor do we know any of'em are very rarely long, as ob
more; for the En, lijb broad (i) does ſcure (u) and (e) Feminine: Others
not ſeem to bea imple Sound, yet are more rarely ſhort, as round (u)
We do not dcny,but that there may and ſlender (u), at leaﬅ in onr
now be in ſome Ptut of the World, Tongue.Butſomeoi'theConſonants
or Poﬅerity may diſcover more Vo are capable ofContradiction, and
cal Sounds in theſe- Seat: of Voice, being lengthened, (eſpecially ſuch
dan thoſe Nine which we have at make the neareﬅ Approaches to
mention'd, and ſo"tis poſſible there the Nature ofVowels) except p,t,k,
may be ſome intermediate Sounds, or hard c,which are abſoluthutes,
ſuch as perhaps is the French (e) nor have any manner of proper
Neuter,betwixtthePalatineVowel Sound, but only modify the Sound
(u) ſlender and (e) Maſculine; for either of the precedingvor ſucceed.
the Aperture or Opening of the 'ing Vowel:
Mouth is like the continu'd Alan Here we think it proper to bring
tity, divifible in infiniſum: For as all theſe Vowel: into one View,
inthe numbering the Winda, firﬅ rang'd in their proper Claffis.
Greater. Middle. Leſs.

_ Guttural or Throat
at flopen e Feminine o obſeme
- Palatine or Palate
i> a ſlender e-Maſculine 'ifflender
'a Labial or Lip
i-m o round 'if fat u flendet
[15] Theſe
ſhe Engliſh Grammar, with Notes. '23
r-C H A' P. III.
Of DOUBLE Vownns, proper and improper. 15]
When of two Vowels the compounded Sound
Full in one Sj'lluble i: flund
Of oth par-taking, yet diſhinct from all,
Thi: we a Double Vowel ﬅill do all.
H A T we call Double Vomelx, is, when the Sound of two

' Vowels is mixt perfectly in one Syllable, and indeed, makes
a diﬅinct Sound from either and all the other VOWOZJ, and would
merit peculiar Characters, if we were to form an Alphabet,
and not follow that, which is already in Uſe; by which we
expreſs theſe diﬅinct Sounds by the two Vomels, whoſe Sound
,comp0ſes them,- (ui) in fair, (uu} in laud or uppluud, (u) in
bleed, Seed, &e. (oi) in void, (oo) in Food, and (u) in Houſe.
But if the Sound of one i: heurdulone,
'Tis then improperlyſo call'd, 'me own,
.Iho' the Proper it before be one.
When two VOWeIs come together in one Syllable, and pro-3
duce no other Sound, but What one of the two gives alone,
then isthat not properly, but improperly call'd a Double Vowel 5
as (eu) is every where pronounc'd (e) long, the Sound of the
(u) not mingling at all with it, is entirely ſuppreﬅ; as in Meat,
.Pleaſure, Treaſure, &e. (ie) ſounded like (ee) in ſeen, as infiend 3
and (ei) ſounds only (e) long, as in receive, and (e)) in Kej, or
like (ui), and ſo make no proper Double Vowel, (Euu), (en/3,
(ew), lbund only (u) long, as in Beauty, Eunuch, few.
Hence it follows, that a true and proper Double Vowel muﬅ
conſiﬅ of two diﬅinct Vowels in one Syllable, yet making but
one Sound compounded of thoſe two Letters, and different from
the other ſingle Vowels 5 they muﬅ be in one Syllable, becauſe
two Vowels often come together, but make two diﬅinct Sylla
bles, as inuereul, unnuul, uguiſh, uloex, &e. f
O
[15] Theſe double Vowels are (or blending) the Sound of Two
commonly call'd '.Diphthongt, or Vowels in One.
compounded Soundx, as ſhaking in
[163 (u)' -
24. The Engliſh Grammar, with Notes.
Of the proper Double .Vowel (ai), or (ay).
six proper Double Vowels we allow,
* Ai, au, and ee, and oi, and 00, and ou,
At th' end qf Wbrdx (write ay, oy, and ow. v 7'_
ſ
The proper Double Vowel: are therefore only theſe mention'd
in the Rule. Firﬅ (ai), or (afiz for (ai) ends no Engliſh Word,
according to the former general Rule, that ('i) ends_no Word in
our Tongue, and (ay) begins none, except a Word of one Syl
lable; as ay in A] me! an Exclamation. This Double Vowel is
therefore written (ai) in the Beginning and Middle of Words;
but (ay) at the End.
In the Beginning, asAir, Aim, Ail,Az'd, butEigbtin Number,
'and thoſe Words that are deriv'd from it, have the Sound of (ai),
but are ſpelt (ei): In the Middle of Words, as Brain, frail, Af
fair, repair, but ſome few are ſpelt here likewiſe by (ei) for
(ai), as Conceipt, Reeeipr, Deceipt, Hei", Reign, Vein, I/l-Þiglur,
&e. (a]) is put at the End, as Dray, Clay, Pray, Play, Day, and of
all other Words that ſound (ai), except tom-gy, Grey, (Colour
and Badger) Grey/hound,- 0bq', prey, Parruey, ſterve), they, fro),
or treypoint, Whej.
Tho' ſometimes the Letters of this Double Vawel (ai) deviate
from their proper Sound, into that of (i), or (e) ſhort, yet is the
Spellingpreſerv'di11(ai), as again, Villaz'a, Faamain, V/ainſrot,
See
The finical Pronunciation in ſome Part of this Town of
'London has almoﬅ confounded the Sound of (ai) and (a), the
Maﬅer and Scholar muﬅ therefore take a peculiar Care to avoid
'this Error, by remembring that (a) ends no Englzſh Word, un- -
leſs before excepted - and however you pronounce, write always
Day, not daz and ſo/pf the reﬅ.
When (a) and (i) come together in proper Names, eſpecially
thoſe of Scripture, as Ya-ir, Mo-ſa-ie, Re-pba-im, &e. they are
parted, and make two Syllables.
Of the Double 'Vowel (au) or (aw).

The Double Vowel (aa) is expreſs'd at the Beginning and
Middle of Words by (aa), at the End by (aw), except in an',
awfal, awl, awkerd or awkward, &e. where (aw) begins the
Words; and Bawble, bawl, brawl, travel, dawn, dawm'ng, a
Flamn, a Sort of Cuﬅard; Hawk, and Words or Names deriv'd
from it; Hawﬅzr, Lanm, Prawn, Spawl, spanne, ſprawl, Straw
berry, tanmey, tho' in the Middle are writ with (aw), all other
Words are in the Middle as well as Beginning (aa), exſcep;
uc
The Engliſh Grammar, with Notes._ , 25
ſuch as by the Appoſition of (ll) to (a) ſound (au); as Ball, Call,
Hall, &c. Tho' the Sound of this double Vowel be the ſame
with (a) in all, ſmall, &c. yet *tis different from the common
and more general Sound of that Letter.
An begins a Word, as Andience, Authoriq, aaflere, augment,
&c. An is us'd in the middle of Words, as affimct, betauſe,
Cauldron, Caaſh, Cauſe), damn, debaucb, fraud, gaudy, jam-t,
mount, faundice, Laurel, Maad, Maudlin, pauſe, Same, Fault,
&ac. .
But am muﬅ always conclude aWord, becauſe our Langunge
abhors a bare nakcdu at the End of a Word, as Claw, Paw,
raw, ſaw, Law, &ce.
Theſe Two Letter-s are often parted in proper Names, and
make Two Syllablesz as in Archela-m, Hermola-m, &c. yet in
Paul, Saul, &t. it remainsa double Vowel.
Of the Double [ſo-we! (ee) [16]
The (ee) that was excluded heretofi're
From proper double two, 'me reﬅore.
Tho' (ee) has been excluded by an ingenious Gentleman, From'
the Number of pro er double Vowels, becauſe (ee) ſoundslikc
(i) in Magazine, S ire, and Machine, yet the ſame Reaſon
holding againﬅ (aa) much ﬅronger, becauſe it ſounds the flame
as(a) in all, call, fall, &e. we have thought it but juﬅ to
reﬅore (ee) to its Right, ſince it is a very diﬅinct Sound from
both the long and ſhort Sound of (e), which are native: That
in shire, &e. is borrow'd from this douhle Vowel, as that of
all, tall, ſhall, &te. is fiom (an)z theſe in (a) being much more
numerous, than thoſe in (i).
The ſingle (e) in Words of one Syllable moﬅly ſounds (ee),
'as me, he, ſhe, me, ye, be, bore, &ce. 4
Ofthe Double [ſowe] (oi) or (oy).
The proper double Vowel (oi) at the beginning, is written
by (oi); as Oifler, oil, &c. It is in the ſame manner expreſs'd
in the Middle; as Poiſe, Noiſe, Voice, rejoice, &te. This double
Vowel in many Words, has the Sound of (i) long; as in Point,
anoint, join', &c. _ (O_y) is written at the End of all Words;
as Boy, to), fay, dzflroy, employ, &c.
Of
[m] (ee) or ie, is ſounded like to fin, vin, as we ſhould do to ſeen,
the French long i, (that is, fiendcr i) ween; or pcrhaxs jien, vie', as we
for the French give the ſame Sound l d ) in Fiend.
D [17] U
26 The Engliſh Grammar, ioith Notes.
Of the proper Double I/och (oo).
Two VoWel: of a Sort no Whrd begin;
So (oo), in th* Middle only, is let in.
[17] As no Engliſh Word beigins with Two of the lime Let- .
ters, except Auron, Auronite, o cannot (oo) be put at the be
ginning of a Word, nor at the End, but of too in too much, and
when it ſignifies ulſh; and in Cuckoo, as ſpelt by ſome. The
Uſe therefore of (oo) is chiefly, if not only, in the Middle of
Words; as in Loom', uloof; boon, Reproof, Broom, Room, Food,
Tool, Tool, cool, Gooſe, and where the true and proper Sound of
this Vowel is ex reis'd, as it is in many other Words. This
double Vowel ounds (u) in theſe Wordsz they were an
ciently written with a (u) or (ou), in which the (u) only was
ounded.
But it ſounds like ſhort (u) in Floool and Blood, and like (o)
long in Door, Floor, Moor, Bcc.
A: other Letters the Office do of oo,
So that of other: [7] oo': Performed too.
And as the Figures of this double Vowel often-expreſs the
Sounds- of other Letters, ſo by the lime original Error of Pro
nunciation, other Letters expreſs the Sound proper to this double
Vowel; as (ou) in could, ſhould, would, &e. and ſingle (o) in
Z'Volf, Wol'ves, Rome, Tomb, Wizmh, approve," behove, move, re
prove, &ce. ' '
Of the proper Double Vowel (ou) or (ow).

- When (0u) retain; it: compounded Sound,
A proper Double Vowel it isfimnd;
But when the Sound of either isfitPPrefl,
Itſirk: t' improper, or do all the reﬅ.
This proper double Vowel (0u) or (0w) has Two Sounds,
one proper to it as a donble Vowel, or as compos'd of both
(o) and (u); as in Houﬅ, Mouſe, Louſe, Owl, Fowl, Town; to
how, Fowl, Bough,_our, out, &e. and another, which is im
proper to its Nature, thc Sound of the (u) being entirely ſunk,
as in Soul, Snow, know, &a. Thus, ii] Words ending in (ow)
-ol>ſcurc (o) only is ſounded; as in ſhallow, Sorrow, Arm-m,
' Bil
ſ
ſr7] oo is ſounded like the ſat n, French; as inthe Words good, flood,
uſ the"German, ſi and the on of th Root, Foot, looſe, Gm [x8] All
Billow; where the (w) ſeems only ut for Ornament-like,
meerly to cover .the Nakedneſs of mgle (o). This holds in
moﬅ Words of more than one Syllable. (0u) is alſo ſounded
like (u) ſhort in couple, Trouble, ſcourge, &e. in which the
Sound of the (e) is entirely ſunk, and leaves it no longer a pro
per double Vowel. Thus in you, your, and ſouth, the (u) is
ſounded long. .
ButInincould, would, Wa
the modern ſhould, and a few
of ſpelling and others,
ſounding,it the
ſounds
(l) is (oo).
leftſi'
out, and cou'd, wou'd, ou'd, ſoundscood, wood, ſhood, &ce. 'ſſ
" (Ou) the Beginning, and the Middle ter/ter,

And,ﬅill the End of Word: for (0w) forſuleex.
(Ou) begins a Word, as Ounce, our, out, and its Compourxds,
Ouﬅl, except Owl: And in the Middle of moﬅ Words; as
Hour, Flour, Mountuin, Fountuin, bounte, flounce, &le. except
Crown, Clown, Down, drawn, frown, Gown, Town, Bower, Down
ger, Dower,,Dowry, bowſe, dongſe, ſhwſe, Fowl, Howlet, Powel,
Ter-vel, .Trowel, Vowcl, blowſe, dronj/j, Currowſe, Cowurdice, En
dow'nent, lowre, Power, Tower, Howurd, Allowunce, Ad-vowſl-n,
Bowl, rowd, rowing, shooter, &ce.
This Sound is always at the End of a Word expreſs'd by (ow),
as now, bow, enow, &c. In ſhort, this is a general Rule, That
Whenever a proper double'Vowel loſes its native Sound, and
varies to any other ſimple Sound, it ceaſes to be a proper, and
becomes an improper double Vowel, as having only the ſimi
ple and uncompounded Sound of ſome one ſingle Vowel.
There is but one Exception to this Rule, and that is, when it
wandcrs to the Sound of another double Vowel, which is
only done by (0u), when it ſounds (oo) in could, would, ſhould,
&c. [18] .*
Of
[18] All other Sounds, beſides for ſubſequent Vowels: For in or',
thoſe enumerated in the foregoing an, or ay, aw, the (u) llender isſet:
Diſcourſe of fimple Sounds, are firﬅ; in ei, or ay, the (e) Ferni
plainly compounded, tho' ſome of nine; in eu, or ew, the (e) Maſ
them are commonly thought to be culinez in oi, ou, or ay, ow, the
ſimple. open (o) is ſometimes ſet firﬅ, as
'ſhe Diphthongs, or double in the Engliſh Words Boy, Toy,
Vowals," ai,ei, or', an, en, on, or ay, Soul, Bowſ, a Cup 5 ſometimes ob
r'v, oy, aw, e-w, ow, when they are ſeure (o),as in the Engliſh Words
truly pmnounc'd, are compounded boil, tail, Oil, Bowſ, Fowl, &e.
of' the foregoing or prepofitwe We grant by the Pronunciation of
Vowels, and the Conſonants y and ſome Men, open (o)is- us'd in theſe
Iv, which yet are commonly taken Words. -
D z "' But:
28 'Ille Engli o Grammar, with Notes;
Of the imffirofer Double [ſo-welt. [19]
Tb' improper double Yowel: we declare
Nine, a: (aa), (ea), (e0), and (eu) are
(Ic), (oa), (oe). (ue), and (ui):
Bat all their ſeveral Sound: here let a: ny.
The Juncture of theſe ſeveral Vmel: can neVer be properly
call'd double Van-ds, ſince they every one produce but the'
_Sound of one Letter; (tial) is always ſounded (ſh/d), as in
impartial, credential, &e. where the (U) is turn'd into (ſhſi 01'
the Two Vowels are divided after (ﬅ) or any other Conſonant
- but (f) and (e), and ſo make Two Syllables, as 'beﬅ/al. Thus
(10_) jollowing (t) and before (U), ſounds (flamſi as Conflitation,
PIJ/Erl'tlofl, &e. (io) retains the ſame Sound, when it follows
Angle or double (s), as in Alla/Yon, Aſiwfl'on, Compalſion, Suffu
, ſhm,
* But whereas ſome will needs diſcours'd of', and may be ſo reſerr'd
have it,that theConſonants (y) andl to their proper Placcs. The long
(ffl)donot at all differ from (f) and (f) of the Engliſh is plainly com
(u), or (as we write them) (z-e)_and pounded oſ the Feminine (e), and
(WL very ſwiftly pronounc'd ; it U), or ( i), and has the ſame Sound
may eaſily he ſound to be a manifeﬅ entirely with the Greek (u).
eror, iſ we nicely attend the For- The Latin £,Q, theEngſiſb ea, on,
When of the Words yel- and woe, ce, on, and ſometimes et', ie, on, an,
elpecrallyiſ we often repent Them; (thelikc being to he found among
ior he will obſerve, that he cannot' other Nations) altho' they are
paſs from the Sound of the Conſo. written with Two characters, are
nant, to the Sound of the ſollow- yet (at leaﬅ as we pronounce them
ing Vowel, without a maniſeﬅ now) but ſimple Sounds.
Motion of the Organs, and by that [19] They are juﬅly call'd im- '
means of new Poſition, which does proper, becauſe they are moſt un
not happen in the repeating of'the compoundcdin Sound, tho'writtcn
Sounds (eehnd (oo). with Two Vowcls. 'Tis probable
We are ſenfihle, that theſe which when this Spclling prevail'd, each
we call Diphthongs, or double Vo. Letter had aShare in theSound,hnl:
wels, in different'ſongueshare dſiif- Negligence andCoi-ruption of Pro
ſerent Sounds, ofwhich we haveno nunciation has wholly ſilenc'd one.
Bnlineſs now to treat; yet theſe Thisis remarkable, that in inoﬅ of
may all he found and diſcover'd a- them the firﬅ Vowel prevails, and
mong thuſe Sonnds, which we have gives the Sound.
4' m: 1: Dr. 'Wallis'r 'Uij-ruation, 'which we do no: tl-ink conclufi-ve
for what be bring: it, becauſe in the Inﬅance be giveſ, the (y) and 'be
(w) are plac'd before the V0 well, and 'ben they are Conſonann confefr'd ;
but 'when they tane after Vowelr, they have the 'very ſlime Effeff on the
Organſ, m (ound (u) liavez. For no Body center'd: that they are never
Conſonants, or that when_ conſonants, they areform'd in 'be ſame man
ner, at 'when Vcwels. '
- - [to] As
flon, Verſion, &c. Admzffon, Compaffion, Expreffion, _8tc. But
when (io) follows (fl), they are parted into Two Syllables as
in &le/lion, Camhaflionz and the flame is to be ohſerv'd after
any other Conſhnant. (Ua) are always ſeparated, except af
ter (g) in (gua), and (q) in qua; as Language, Lingual,
&c. oQualify, %ealiz}g &ac. except likewiſe When it follows
(ſ), and then it ounds (ſun ), as in perſuade, dzffeade, and their
Derivatives pe'fitaſrve, dtffieaſi-ue, &e. and ſun-vity, an obſolete
Word.
Next (u0) muﬅ always be parted, except after 01), which
can't be ſounded without (n), as in quick, Qality, &realm
quote, &e.
The improper double Vowels are counted Nine in Num
ber, as (aa), (ea), (ee), (n), (z'e), (ea), (oe), (ue), and (n).
(Aa) [hands (a), but it i: ſeldom found ;
(Ea) four ſeveral Why: declare: it: Sound;
(E) long, (a) ſhort, (e) ſhort, and double (ee),
A: in ſwear, Heart, Head, and in Fear you ſhe.
(Aa) is ſeldom in a Word but proper Names, and there only
ſounds (n), and is generally divided.
(Ea) is ſounded four ſeveral Ways, lfl, Like (n) long, 15
hear, ſwear, tear, Near,- zdly, Like (n) ſhort, as hearken, Heart,
and Words deriv'd from 1t, as hearty, heartleſr, Exc. alſo its
Compounds; as Heart-burning, Heare-eaſh, faint-hearted, &c.
I'll]- (e) ſhort, asalready, ready, Bread, Breaſl, Head, &e. 4thlj',
It ſometimes ſounds (ee), or (e) lon 5 as in appear, Arrear,
Fear, near, &c. Bead, conceal, Veal, gEan, clean, &ce. And ge
nerally the long Sound of (e), is writ (ea), as Feafl, Beflfl, &C
and the ſhort Sound of (e), as heſt, Gaejl, &ce.
(Eo) (e) ſhort, and double (e), 'me find, "
A: well a: (cu), to firmed long (n)'s inclin'd.
(Eo) ſounds (e) ſhort in Feo ce, feopardy, Leopard, Yeoman,
(e) (Euſi
long Oſſr
in (eW),
People,ſound
Feodary, an (o)asſhort
(n) long, in George.
Deace, Denteronomy, Plea
rifie, &a. .
(Ie) ﬅrand: (y) in ending Wordrz and (e)
Short and long, or double (e) 'twill he.
(Ie) is ſounded (e) long in Cieling,Ca_/hicr, Field, Fiend, From
tier, &e. but (e) ſhort in pierce, fierce, Scc. It is us'd likewiſi:
for (y.) at the End of,Words, - -
' Dz ' (Eil
30 The Engliſh Grarnmar, with Notes.
(Ei) ſhunds (ai) along in feign and eight,
Itſhunolr (e) long in perceive, Deceit.
(Ei) ſounds like (ui), or (u) long, in Reign, feign, Eight,
weighty, &C. It ſounds (e) long in deceive, perceive,Deceit.
This Rule is general, That the Letter which ives orpredo
minates in the Sound, is always plac'd firﬅ in t eſe improper
double Vowels.
The (a) to (0) in (oa) 'me apply,
To make (0) long, andſilent (e)ſupply.
In (ii-1) the (u) ſeems added only to make the (u) ſound long,
ſupplying the (e) ſilent, it giving the ſame Sound, as in Clouk
and Cloke, upProuch, hrouth, Coufl, door, flour, Gout, hour),
LMd, Maur, Onk, pouch, roum, Soul, a Fiſh, Toad, iI/de: (va)
has a peculiar broad Sound in broad, uhroud, Grour 5 and that of
(ui) in Gaul.
The (o) and (e) alternately prevail: ;
In (0e) when thirſounds, then thutflillfuilr.
In (oe) ſometimes the (e) prevails, and the (o) is ſilent; as in
OEwmmy, OEdiyus, OEcumeniml, OEconomiml; but in Croe
(of Iron) Doe, Foe, Sloe, Toe, V/oe, the (e) is ſilent, and the (o)
produc'd; theſe latter being Words of Engliſh Origin, as well
as Uſe, the former of the Greek. shoe, and Woe, to make
Love, ſome write with (oo), leaving (o) bare, contrary to the
Genius of the Engliſh Language; whereas the Diﬅinction Wou'd
be preſerv'd, and the Sound juﬅly exprefi'd, by adding (el To
the (oo).
(Ue) one Sylluhle weflldom ſound,
(U) after (g) to burden (g) i: hound.
Few Words have (ue) ſounded as one Syllable, as Guelder
land, Guerkin: ,- gueﬅ, for gueﬅ, is wrong ſpelt, tho' too much
us'd of late by the Ignorance or Negligence of Authors, or
Printersz for its true Spelling is gheſi: ln all which the (u)
is only added to harden the Sound of the (g), the (e) only
being ſounded; tho' (gue) in Guerdonſounds (gue), as do
the Termination, or Endings of ſeveral Words, as Apologue,
Cutulogue, tollegue,
flgue, Intrigue, collogue,
Leugue, Lemlogue,
Plugue, Prologue,Diulogue,
prorogue, Epilogue, Fu
ctRogue, Sjnu
gogue, Thoologue, Tongue, Vogue. At the End of the followin
Words (e) is added to (u), not only to cover its Nakedne s,
according to the Genius of the Tongue, but- ſometimes to
produce the (u)_z as in nen-ne, Awnue, me, due, en/he, reﬅ-"ne,
Glue,
The' Engliſh Grammar, 'with Notes. 3!
Glue, Hue, Perdue, purſue, Reſidue, Retinue, Rue, ſpue, or fpew.
ſue. But (ue) in all other Words are parted, nor make any man
ner of double Vowel, as in Affluence, Crueltj, Cruel, &e.
(Ui) three ſeveral Sorts of Sound expr'fl,
A: Guile, rebuild, Bruiſe and Recruit tenſe/i.
The improper double Vowel (ui) has Three &veral Sorts of
Sound, 1. as (i) long, in beguile, Guide, D'ſguzﬅ, quite, &c- 2-
(i) ſhort, in Guildfl'rd, build, "build, &e. 3. (u) long, as in
Emifl, Recruit, Fruft, &e.
C H A P. IV.
Of the CONSONANTS. [20]
A Conſonant m proper Sound obtuim,
But fi-om it: founding with, its Name it gaine,
And jet it 'varies e-ve'y Vowel': Sound,
W'bether before, or after it, 'rix found.
H O' a Conſonant be a Letter that cannot be ſounded,
T without adding ſome ſingle or double Vowel before or

after it, and therefore derives its Name fi-om conſhund
ing, or flunding with, yet r'nay juﬅly be defin'd, A Letter ſhew
mg
[zo] As the Vowels were divi twix': the Na/iril; and the Mouth.
ded into three claſſes, ſo we divide But we believe this Diverſity of
the Conſonants into the ſame Num the Direction of the Breath wholly
her; the Labial, or Lip; the Pala proceeds from the various Pofition
tine, or Palate -, the Guttural, or of the U-vu/a. -
T/Iroa! Conſonants, as they are Since therefore the Breath ſent
form'd in theTbraar,Pa/ate, orLip: -, out in this threefoldManner may be
that is, while the Breath ſent from perfectly intercepted thrice in each
the Lungs into theſe Seats, is either of theſe Scars, there areNine diffe
intercepted, or at, leaﬅ more forei rent Conſonants which derive their
bly compreſt'd. Origin from them, and which, ſor
But it is beſides to be remark'd, that Reaſon, we call primiriw, or
that we ma obſerve a trip/e Dire elos'dConſonants: But iftheBrcath
flion oftbe rearb. For firﬅ, it is be not wholly intercepted in theſe
all directed wholly to the Mouth z Seats, but only more hardly com
that is, ſeeking its Way or Outlet preſs'd, find, tho' with Difficulty,
thro'the Lips; or ſecond, it is al ſome Way of exit; various other
moﬅ wholly directed to theNoſtrils, Confonants are form'd, according
there to find Paſhge out z or third, to the various manner of the Com
it is as it were equally divided be Pl'CffiOB', which Conſonzmtsſhwle1
a
ing the kveral Motions and Configurations of the Parts of 'the
Mouth, by which the Sound of the Vowels is varioufly deter
min'd, are firﬅ divided into ſingle and 'double 3 the double are
a: and 2., the reﬅ are all ſingle; and theſe are again divided into
Mute: and Liquids; Eleven Mutes, and Four proper Liquids: h,
s, and w, are Neuten, as not ﬅrictly adhering to either. -
'Ihe Conſonants 'me may divide
Into Mntes, Liquids, Neutersz and beſide
V/e muſt for double Confonants pro-vide.
Ele-uen Mutes G RA M M ARI ANS do declare,
And but Four Liquids, l, m, n, and r.
Behind the Mutes the Liquids gent? flow
In'verted, from the Tongue they wil not go.
Cozl/bnunt: are divided into Mette: and Liquid: call'd alſo' Hogſ
'Vowe r; the Mutcs are, h, L', d, f, U, g, ſ, A', P, q, t, and are ſo
call'd, becauſe a Liquid cannot be ſounded in the ſame Syllable,
when a Vowel follows it, as (rpo).
The Liquids, or Hul -Vowel:, as they have ſome Sort of ob-u L-aL t
ſcure Sound of a Vowe attending their Pronunciation, which is

likewiſe imitated in. their Names, as el, em, en, an ſo the
Name of Liquid imports the eaſy Motion, by which they nimbly zfln
glide away after a Mute in the ſame Syllable, without anyſtand,
and a Mute before it can be pronounc'd in the ſame Syllablc, as dſ;
pro in probable.
(C) the hard Sound of (k) will e-uer keep -=-.52.egſi, .:.rH
Before (a), (o), (u), (l), and (r) z us creep,

Clear, Cup, Coll, Cat: Before (e), (i), um! (y),
Or ev'n the Commu that doe': (e) implj,
It mofll] take: theſofter Sound of (s);
A: City, Cell, and Cypreſs muſt tenſe/3.
When final (C) without un (e) i: found,
[ar] 'Tis
Theherdgenuine
,- but ſilmt
and(e) natural
give: ſofter
SoundSound.
of (e) is þhard, '
like (k),>as when it precedes (e), (a), (u), (l), or ('r) 5 as in þ
Cat, v
ſhall call deriv'd, or open Conib- tho' it muﬅ be confeſs'd, that: there s.e.-3.
nants. As to the particular For- is ſo much the leſs need of a new
mation of them; ſee the Notes, at Character,as the Rule is ſo gefferal
the End of the Chapter. as to admit ofno Exccption. Some
[21] The Frem h expreſs the ſoft affect. to imitate the FrencbWay of
(e) by thisFigure(e)forDiﬅindion, Spellmg here, and write Publique
which Character won'd be of uſe ſorPub/ick,n0tconſideringthat they
iſ it were intreduc'd among, usz uſe (qu) becauſe they have no (ie),
[21] The
The Engliſh Grammar, withNotes. 33
Cat, Coll, Cap, clear, creep. But before (e.), (i), and Or), and
when there is an Apoﬅrophe or Comma above the Word, de
noting the Abſence of ('e), it is generally the Sound of (:), as
Cell, City, Cypreſſr. If in any Word the harder Sound precedes
(e), (i), or U), (kl is either added or put in its Place, as Skill,
skin, Publie/z: And tho' the additional (U in the 'foregoing
Word be an old Way of Spclling, yet it is now very juﬅly lett
off, as being a ſuperfluous Letter; for (c) at the End is always
hard, without U) or the ſilent (e) to ſoften it, asin Chaee, Cle
menej, &e.
Moﬅ Words ending in the Sound of an, ere, ice, oire, at',
muﬅ be written with (ce/l, not (ſe ), except abaſe, ahflraſe,
haſe, caſe, ceaſe, amuſe, conciſe, debaſe, decreaſe, Geeſe, im
haje, enrreaſe, 'nor-riſe, Paradiſe, profaſe, promiſe, recluſe, Trea
tz'ſh, abuſe, dlſaſe, excuſe, Houſe, Louſe, Mouſe, refreſh, aſe, cloſe,
00 e.
Moﬅ Words ending in anee, enee, inee, once, and ame, muﬅ
be written with (til between the (nj and ('e), except durﬅ, con
denſe, dl/þenfe, immenſe, incenſe, tenſe, intenſe, prayen e, ſajþenﬅ,
ſtll (C)
e.
before (h_), has a peculiar Sound, as in chance, Cherry,
Church, chalk, Chip ,- but in Chart 'tis like (k), and in Chonl
in Muſick.
The genuine Sound of (S) i; ﬅill acute
And hiffing; but the Cloſe that doe: notſhete,
There 'th ohſrure, andſoft Pronoane'd like zed,
Andſbmetime: 'mixt Two Vowels when 'tirſpuL
(S) being ſo near akin to the ſoft Sound of (c), we thought
lt naturally follow'd that Letter in our Conſideration, tho' not
in the Alphabet. When (.r) therefore keeps its enuine Sound,
it is pronounc'd with an acute or hiſſmg Soun , but when it
cloſes a Word, it almoﬅ always has a more obſcure and ſoft
Sound like (2._), and not ſeldom when it cornes between Two
Vowels, or double Vowels, when it has this ſoft Sound, Propriety
and Diﬅinction require, that it be writ with the ſhorter Cha
racter of that Letter, as hie, adviſe, &ac. and with the larger
in all other Places, as hiſ', als-viſe, if written with an (U and
not with a (e), as it too often is. There are but Four
Words of one Syllablc, which end with hard (:), for, this, thar,
m.
That (S) with (C) you may not ﬅill confound,
To learn, and mind thefollowing Raleryoa're hound.
r
37
34. The Engliſh Grammar, with Notes;
By Vowel: follow'd," (ſi), (ti), and (ci), alike
Mth theſame Sound do ﬅill the Hearing ﬅrike.
In Word: deriv'd the] keep a certain Law,
ImPor'd by thoſe from whence their Sotmd they dram.
thcyein (de), (ſ), or (ſc) do end, '
To their-Deri-vati-ue; the] (ſi) commend ,
Ifwith (ck) or (ce) their cloſe the] make,
Then the deriv'd (ci) will ſurely take,
But with (t) or (te) the] do conclude,
Then with (ti) Deri-vative'rendu'd.
[22.] si, ti, and a? ſound alike, as in Perﬅealon,:Muſitian,
Section, Imitation, &e. Theſe Words are all deriv'd from others,
and therefore when the Original Words end in (de), (5)ſſ, or
-(/[e), then (ſi)Confuſhn,
zon, confuſe, is ue'dz See.
as perſuade,
If withPerſuaflon, confeſr,orConfeſ
ſſ(ce), or (tle), hard
(c), then (ti) is_ us'd; as Grate, Graciour, Muﬅck, Muſieian,
&C. But if with (t), or (te), then (ti) is us'd, as Sect, Section,
imitate, Imitatian, &c. except ſubmit, Suhmiffion, permit, Per'
mt ran. '
Tho' this Letter ſeems very regular in its Sound of (ſe)in the
Beginning, and (es) at the End of Words, yet it is too apt tobc
miﬅaken for (c), eſpecially in the Beginning :* Yet by the follow
ing Rules and EXCCPtionS, the Miﬅake may be obſerv'd2 to be?
remov'd. -
Moﬅ Words beginnin with the Sound of (s) before (e) and
(i) muﬅ be written Witfi (:), except theſe with (e) before (e).
Ceaſe, Cedar, Celandine, Celery, celebrate, Celehration, Celc
rit), Celeſlial, Celz'hacy, Celihate, Cell, Cellar, Cellarage, cement,
(leg/"e, Cenſor, cenſhrious, Cenſure, cent, Centaurs, Center, Centþ
no j, Knot-graſs, an Herb; Centorzy, or Centaur), an Herb;
Centrj, Centurt'on, Century, tepha ic, Cere-tloth, eerernomal,
ceremoniom, Ceremonj, certain, certainlyxCertzzſitate, eertgſy, ce
rulean, Ceruﬅ, Cefi, Ceffatz'on, Ceffion, Cetraeh, Finger-fern; and"
theſe roper Names, Cemzps, Celſar, Centhrea, Cephar, Cerberus,
Cerint m, Ceres, Caſhr.
And
[22] The Reaſon to thoſe who from a Latin thﬅantive ofthe fiffl;
know Latin, is much eaſier; for if Delenfion ending in (ca) or (Ue),
they are deriv'd from a Latin Su or of the ſecond Declenſion ending
pine ending in (tum), then (ri) is in (irum)or(cium),then (ci) is us'd,
us'd, as Narum, Nation zbut if the as Logiea Lagieian, Gratia Graci
Supine end in (_ſum), then (fi) is our, Vitium Viciouſ, Benefieium
us'd; as Viſum, Vſſan; Confeflium, Beneflciem, &a.
Confeflion. _ If the Word be derlv'clv
[23] This
= The Engliſh Gram'mar,v with Notes. 35
_ And theſe of (e)-before-(i).
Cicatrice, Cicely, ſweet and wild Herbs; Cieling, Cicbſio'y,
Cileire, Drapery of Foliage Wrought on the Heads of Pillars;
Cina'erc, Cinnabar, Cinquefoil, Cinnamon, cinque-parts, Ciperuxh
a ſweet Root; Cion, or Scion, Cipher, Circle, Circlet, 'circu
lar, Circaic, circulate, Circulation, circamcifl," and all Com
pounds of cirmm ,-_Cz'/Zern, Citarion, Cicizen, citrine,
or cicrean, Citron, Cit'ral, a ſort of Cucu'mberz Citadel, Cicffl,
cines, a ſort of ſmall Lceks; Ci-vet, Ci-vilian, Ci-vilit , ci-vilize 5
and theſe proper Names, Cicero, Cicllia, Cilicia, Cim rians, Cim
mejians, Circe, Cirencefler, Cisbarj, Clffic, Ciſh-rtian, Monks,
Cichcrides. ' _
And theſe likewiſe are excepted of (c) before O),
qbele, C cladec, C cle, Cjclometry, Cjcloþs, ngnetx, Cylin
irt'cal, ij al, cynica , Cjnnic, Cjntbia, Cyprian, Cypreſs, ercne,
Cril.
The Sound of (ſ) in the, Middle of Words is uſually writ
ten with (ſ) except Acerbitj, Acetoſizy, adjacent, Anceſſors,
antecedent, Artificer, cancel, Cancer, Bene/icence, Chancel, Clean
cellor, Chancellorſhip, * Chaneery, conceal, concede, conceit, Can
ceicednefl, conceive, conſinr, Agreement or Harmony in Mu
ſick; concenter, concentric, concern, Chalcedonj, Concernmenr,
conccrt, Cancertation, an affected Word, Conceffion; Deceaﬅ,
decede, an affected Word,- Deceit, docei-ue, December, Decenc ,
decennial, decent, Deception, decepti-ve, Decertation, an affected
Word for ﬅriving; Decefflon, as bad a Word for departing;
exceed, excel, Excellency, except, Exception, Exceſi, Grocer,
Grocery, immarceffible, a pedantiquc Word for incorruptible;
imperceptible, Incendia'y, Incenſe, incarccrate, incentive, inceſſ'
ﬅint, inceſſantly, inceﬅuam, Innocence, innocent, interceie, In
torccffdr, Interceffion, intercept, mer'cena'y, macerace, Mercer,
Merce'y, Magniſicence, magnl'ſicent, Munzſicence, mantficent, ne
ceſſary, Necefficries, neceffitate, Neceffitj, neceffimm, Necroman
cer, Larceny, Ocean, Parccl, Parcelx, precede, precedential, Pre
cedence, Precedent, precepti-ue, Preceþts, Predeccffm, ſincere,
sincerity, Saucer, Sorcerer, Sarcere/L, Sorceiy, Macedon, Macc
donia. Before ſi) in the Middle, as Acid, Acidity, Accident,
ancient, Angliaſm, Galliciſm, &c. in czſm; anticipate, artifi
cial, affliciate, andaciom, Aadacity, beneſicial, calcine, calci
nate, Coancil, capacious, capacitate, Capacity, conciſe, cruciare,
trucic'7le, cracifl, Crucifix, decicle, decimal, decimate, Decima
tion, deciplzer, Deciſion, clcciſive, Deficiency, delicious, docible
Docibilitj, efficaciom, efflcient, ſpecial] , Exceptian, Exerg/Y),
x
36 The Engliſh Grammar, 'with Notes.
Egrciſi, Exciſe-ma'n, Exciſion, excite, excruciate, explicite, fect'
H' for feajihle, gracious, implicitly, implicit, incapacitate, In
capacity, inauſþicious, incident, incidentallj, incirsle, Inciſion,
Inciſure, incite, invincible, judicial, judicious, Loquaciy, medi
-cinal, Multiplicity, municipal, Nuncie, officiate,_offlcious, pacifj,
paci c, Parcimonj, Particide, Participate, Peneil, pe'ffiicacious,
Petjþicacitj, per-vicacious, pertinacious, Precinct, precious, Pre u;.
'41
cipice, precipitate, Precipitation, preciſe, preciſely, prejudicial,
proficient, Pronunciation, provincial, rapacious, Ratiocination,
r'eciprocal, recital, recite, reconcile, reconcileahle, Rouncivals,
ſagacious, Sagacity, Sicily, Simplicity,-ſbciahle, Sociahlemſr, So
ciet , Socinians, Soleciſm, ſolicite, Solicilation, Solicitor, ſhlicitctus,
Sol titude, ſhlſlicial, jþacious, ſþecial, speciali , fpecifical, spe
cies, ſþecific, Specimen, jþecious, Sufficiencz, ſuflZient, ſuperciliaus,
ſupe'ficial, Superficies, ſuſpicious, tacit, Taciturniy, Turci/m, Ve
racit
hoﬅ , Vi-uacit
Wordys . ending with the Sound of (fl) or (fl), muﬅ
be written with (e)) except quflaſj, buſj', Controverſy, Cour
teſy, Daiſy, Ecﬅaj), eaſy', Epilepjjl, Pan/je ſpelt likewiſe, tho'
wrong, Fanc , Frenjj, or Frenzj, Gipffl, greaſy', Herejj', [inw ,ar'_.
criſj, jealoujz Leproſy, Palſj, Panffl, a Flower, Pleuriſjv, qu,

Noſegay, and Motto of a Ring, Poeſz'e, Poetry, putſjl, queajj', i'._ 4AxL_
Cauffl, to Propheſj', Cauſej, cIumſey, Kerſej, Linſej-woolſej, Malm
ſex Tolfln Whimfl'j
In moﬅ Words (fl between Two Vowels has the Sound of :
Qz), except
under (e). thoſe enumerated
ſ in the Rule about ate, ece, &e.
Moﬅ Words ending in the Sound of arce, erce, orce, urce,

muﬅ be written with (f) between the (r) and (e), except
* umerce, _Di-uorce, Furce, fierce, Force, pierce, ſcarce, Scarcitj,
Source.
After (ou), (f) ſoft, a'nd not (e), muﬅ be written,- as
Hauﬅ, to Houſe,- Mauſi, to Mouſe; Rouſe, to Ran/e,- unleſs pry-
(ie) interpoſes, and then it muﬅ bewith (e), as Bounte, Flame,
Ounce, &e. A.,.
All Words of one Syllable, that end with, and bear hard
upon the Sound of (f), muﬅ be written with (ſir), except
this, thus, us, and Tes; but iſ they are Words of many Syllablcs,
or more than one, and end with the like Soundin (n:), the
(e) is not double, but (e) inſerted before; as amhiguour, barba Lau4.;._
rous, &c. '
r . cr) be,
ſhe Engliſh Grammar, with Notes. 37
(T) before (i), t' another Vowel join'd,
To ſhund like th' Acute, and hiffing (S) we find:
Bat when an (x) or (S) do's (i) precede,
For it: own Sound it ﬅrenaoaſh' do's plead.
(T),- when (t) comes before (i), follow'd by another Vowal,'
it ſounds like the Acute, or Hiffing (:), as in Nation, Potion,
expatiate, &e. but when it follows (ſ) or (x), it keeps its own
Sound, as in Beﬅial, eQueﬅion, Faflian, &e.
(T) with an (h/l after it, has Two Sounds, as in thin, the
Tongue touching lightly the Extreams of the upper Teeth; and
the Teeth,
then, wheremaking
the TonElme Mixturethe
e reaches of (d).
Palate, and the Root ofſ
(H), tho' deny'd a Letter heretofizre,

W'e to the Alphahet reﬅore.
(H), tho' excluded the Number of Letters by Prſſian, and
ſinne of our Moderns on his Authority, yet in the Hebrew Al
phabet has Three Characters; and beſides ſome obſeure Sound of
its own, it mightily enforces that of the Vowels, andis mani
feﬅly a Conſonant; after (w) it is pronounc'd before it, as
when, white, ſounds hwen, hwire; (le) before (n) borrows its
Sound, as Knave, Knight, hna-ue, hnight. 'Tis indeed ſometimes
near ſilent, as in Honour, Hour, &e. but ſo are many other Con
ſonants in particular 'Pofitions.
(X), and (Z) are doahle Conſbnantr;
The the Pow'r of (C), or (ks), vaunts,
The ſecond that of (ds) does hoaﬅ,
The Force of (d) i: non' entirely loﬅ,
Or rather to a flrenaous hifflng tqſl.
(X) and (Z) are double Conſonants, containing Two Powers
under one Characterz the former (n), or (k5), the latter (dr)
tho' the Sound of the (d) be not now heard, and only a ﬅrong
Sibilation or Hiffing be diſCOVer'd. The former expreſſlng
ſin) or (n), cannot begin a Word, except ſome proper Names,
Xanthe, Xanthur, Xantippe, Xantippm, Xenarchar, Xeneader,
Xeniur, Xenocrater, Xenophaner, Xenophilur, Xenophon, Xero
lihia, Xerxenina, Xerxes, Xyflm, Xiphiline, and ſome few
Terms not vary'd from the Greek (this Rule meanin only'
Words purely Native, and not relating to Art) and en s only
ſome, not all of that Sound; which is expreſs'd Six ſeveral
Ways: (Ifl,) At the End of ſhort Syllables by (clu), as Backr,
Necks, Stickr, Rockr, Ducks, grioks, Maria, &e. (th Aht
' * ſ e
the End of Syllables made long by a double Vowel, it is expreſi'd by
(les),as Books, Leo/er, breaks, ſpeaks, &c. (zdly,) By double (cc) in
the middle of Words where (e) or (i) follows, as Accelerate,
Accent, accept, Acceptation, Acceſi, acceffible, Acceffion, acteſ-'
jbry, or acceſſhry, Accedence, Accident, accidental, inacceffible,
accident, accidental, ſucceed, Succeﬅ, Succeffion, ſuccedaneous,
ſuccefiful, ſuccinct, Succinctneſi. (4thlj,) By (ct), in Words
ending in Action, Ection, Iction, Oc'hon, UEZion, and Unction;
as Extraction, Per-fection, Prediction, Concoction, Deflruction,
Compunctionz only except Complexion, Reflection, a bending
back, but more properly Re ction, when it relates to Thought;
Connexion, Cruczfixion, D uxion. (ſthl)r,) By (ct.r) at the end
of ſome Words, as Abflractr, Acts, Collects, Contracts, Defects,
Effects, Irflſects, Objects, Projectr, Subjectu he aflkc'fs, corrects,
inﬅructs, or aZ'ecteth, &c. the (th) being now entirely chang'd
into (s). (6t ly,) Laﬅly, the Sound of (le) muﬅ be written
with (x), in the Beginning, Middle, andEnd of all other Words,
except Ecſlacy. Atter- (ex) never write (r), and ſeldom (e), but
in except, exceed, Excefi, ExciſZ-, excite, &e. and (c) after (ex),
comes before (u), (cu), (cl) and (ch), having a full Sound, as
..'xcommunicate, excuſe, exclaim, exchange.
(K) bZ'ore (i), (e) when hard, is ſeen 3

And efore (u), as know, kill, keen.
as (K)
keep,begins
kill, all Words
know, of a&e.
knack, hard
norSound
is it before (e), before
ever put (z') and any
(u), uſſ_
Conſonant but (u), and then with ſo much Conﬅraint, that it r'
Almoﬅ loſes its Sound for that of (h). a
Before all other Conſonantr (e)'s plac't, .
Altho' the harder Sound is there expreﬅ. a
'l
And if the Sound of (le) comes before any other Conſonant, it
is expreſs'd by (e), as in character, clear, cringe.
The Sound of (k) at the beginning of any Word or Syllable
before (u), (e) or (u), is always expreſs'd by (e), as Cat, con,
Cup,- or when a ſilent (e) fo lows (k), as ſpake, ſpoke,- or (u)
in the middle, as ſþea/e, bleale, &e. and then (le) is written ſing
ly without (e) final. lIſ
To (y) a double Nature does belong,
A: Conſonant and Vowel in our Tongue;
' The firﬅ begins all Words, yet none can end,
4
The Jaﬅ, it for the Gloſe does ſtill contend. l
,_,-_.
,v ,.
[13] (17j
[23] (r) is both a Vowel and Conſonant; as a Vowel, it
has appear'd to an ingenious Author to be ſiiperfluous, yet it_
is of great Uſe in our Language, which abhors the ending ot
Words in (i); and when the Sound of (i) comes double, tho'
in Two diﬅinct Syllables, as in dying, frying, &e. When it fol
10ws a Conſouant it is a Vowel, and when it precedes a Vowel
it is a Conſonant, and ought to be call'd (je ), and not (wfiz
and tho' it ends ſo many Wo:ds as a Vowel, it can end none as
a Conſonant.
At the End of all Words oſ one Syllable U) has a ſharp and
clear Sound, as 5), dy, dry, ſly, why, ſhy, thy, &e. But at the'
End of Words oſ more Syllables it generally ſounds obſcure,
like (e), as eternally, glorioufly, gadlj, &e. except at the End of
Why-ds of Affirmation, as apply, deny, edify, &e. ) only pre
cedes Vowels, and ehiefiy (a), (e), (e); and thele it alſo Fol
lows and incorporates with them into double Vowels, for (u)),
(e)), (or), have the ſame Sound with (ai), (ei), (oi); but the
former are more us'd at the Endof Words. In the Middle of
Words it is not ſo frequently us'd for a Vowel, except in Words
of the Greek Origin.
And the ſinne Right the double (u) demands;
Begim a: Conſonant, a: Vowel ends.
[24] 07), This Letter in its moﬅ general Ufi: is a conſo"
nant, going before all the VOWels, except (u); it likewiſe pre
cedes (r), and follows (.r) and (tb), as Want, went, Winter,
Math, write, thwarc. It foHOWs as a Vowel (a),* (e), (e), and
unites with them into the double Vowel: (aw), (ew), (ow?, as
Well as (u) z as fine, firm, ſaw, few.- But in (00. it generaly is
obſcure, e pecially in Words of many Syllables, as in shadow,
Widow, &e.
It likewiſe, as has been obſerv'd under'M), goes before (h),'
tho' it be ſounded after it, as in when, what, &e.
(Va) to the (f) in Nature it allſd,
And to it: final, hat (e) alway-ty'd.- 1'
[U] (Wh
[29] This Conſonam: is ſounded do, Iinguaduadeo, and others after
like the German U) Conſonant,that , g,f. e generally make this
is with a Sound 'moﬅ nearly ap- Letter a Conſonant, yet its_ Sound
preaching an extream rapid Pro- is not very different (tho' it does
nnnciation of the Vowel (0. The ſomething differ) from the German
Arabian: expreſs (y) by their ye, or Vowel, the fat or groſr (u) very ra
our (w) by their waw. pidly pronounc'd.
in] The (w) is ſounded in Eng
liſh as (u) in the Latin Wordsqzian- v E- e. [as] The
40 I'he Engliſh Grammar, with Notes.
[aſ] (Va), or (V) Conſonant, as 'tis call'd, is near akin to
(f) .- It never ends a Word without ſilent (e) after it, nor is it
ever doubled, however ﬅrong the Accent may be upon it; in
Engliſh it only goes before VoWels, it likewiſe follows U) and
- (r), as Cal-ues, Car-ue, &e.
(C) 'varies with the Vowel ſtill its Sound,

soft befbre ( i), (e); before the reﬅ hard's found.
By (h) and (U) 'tis harden'd, as in Gheſs
And Guilt, and as flame other Wards expreſs.
(C) chan es its Sound according to the Vowel it precedes,

for before a), (a), (a), it has ahard Guttural Sound, as Game,
-Gold, Gum: But this hard Soun'd is melted into a ſofter, by
-(e), (i), or (y), as Gentle, Danger, Ginger,- but it is harden'd
here by the Addition of (h) or (a), as Gheſs, Guilt, &c. It
retains its native Guttural Sound before (e) in theſe; Altogether,
Anger, Anger, beget, Conger-eel, exegetical, Finger, forget,
gear, or geer, Geeſe, geld, Gelderland, Gelder Roſe, Gelding,
ger, gewgaws, heterogeneous, homageneal, heterogeneal, homa
geneous, Hunger, Hanger, Hungerflrd, linger, longer, Monger,
ſpringeth,- obſolete, ſtringed, Vinegar, winged, wringeth, wrong
,eth, now written wringr, W'rongs, younger,- but a Singer with
a Voice, and a singer byFire; a Swinger on a Rope, and a
Swinger, a great Lye, muﬅ be diſtinguiſh'd by the Senſe, or the
old Way of Spclling the ſoft Sounds, by adding a (d) after the
(n), as indeed they ſound. (D) before (g) always ſoftcns the
Sound of (g), as Hog, hodge, Log, lodge, Dog, dodge, &a. (C)
is hard before in the following Words; as Argyle, begin,
Gibberiſh, Gibble-gabble: Gibjons, Giddenr, Surnarnes; giddy,
Gifl, gig, giggle, giglet, Gilbert, gild, Gilder, Gildon, a Sur
name, Gillet, a Surname 5 Gills, guilt-head, Gimlet, gimp, gird,
girder, Girdle, or Girdle',- Girl, girt, Girth of a Horſie; Gith,
gittern, gi-ue, Gizzard; with all the Compounds and Words
derived from any of theſe.
Two ( gg) 's together make both hard remain,
Tho' (i), or (e) or (y) be in their Train.
When
[zs'] The Uſ) Conſonant we proaching the Letter(f);_yet (f)

pronounce as the French, Italians, and (e) have the ſame Difference
o'naniardx, and other Nations do, which m and (h) have. \
t' it is with a Sound very near ap
[26] If
,-. - 1: a - I ' '
ſhe 'Engliſh G'rammar, roztb Notes. 41'
Whenever Two (gg)'s come together, they are both hard, .
'tho' (e) '(i) or O) follow.
If the Primitive or Original Word end in hard (g ), allWords
derii'fd from them do the ſame, as Dog, dagged, &e. but moﬅ
of theſe latter are under the former Rule, becauſe moſt of them
double the (g). (N) between the Conſonant' and (g) hardens it;
as ﬅronger, longer, ſinger, &e.
(Je)': alway: ſ t, a Ver-'nel ﬅill preceder,
And in a Sylla le the foremoﬅ leads.
All V/ordr, where-e'er this ſhfler Sound we ſee
Befire (a), (o), and (n), are writ with (Je).
(Z) (j) Conſonant always begins a Syllable, is ever plac'd:
before, never after a Vowel, and has an unvary'd Sound, as
being pronounc'd every where as ſoft (g) in Ginger; but when:
the Sound of ſoft (g) is at the End of a Word, it is expreſs'd:
by (g), with ſilent (e) after it, Rage,- Sage, Whge, &c. or with'
(dg), as Knowledge, &e.
All Words beginning with this ſoft Sound before (n), (o) and
(u), muﬅ be written with (je) as well as all proper Names de
riv'd from the Greek and Hebrew.
Many Words which now begin with a (g) before (e), were.
originally ſpelt with (T), as few-leman, not Gentleman; and
ought indeed, to be thus written always, which wou'd avoid
Confuſion in the Spelling. '
( 07) in its. Sound, is always ſhunded kue,
An ne'er i: 'rit without a following (n).
(Z) Sounds (kue), or (que), and has always (n) after it, and.
begins all Words with that Sound. It ends no Word without
(e) after krand that in but a few Words of French Termina
tion, as Antique, oblique, pique, harque, cinque. [26]
To
[z If the Breath directed ebro' If theBreath reaehes not theLipr,

tlel ouib to theLipr,be intercepted but be wholly intercepted in the'
þythe cle/ing of the Lipr, the (P)* (Po/are, by moving the Ti of the I
zxfoim'd; the Greek by), the He. Tongue to the Fore-partie the Pau
bre'w (Pe). The &diam- have not late, or, which is all one, to the
this Letter, but ſubﬅitute in its Roots ofthe upper'reeth,theConſo-'.
Place (Be) or (Phe)-, the Per/iam, nant(T) is form'd; the Greek (T)Þ
beſides Bhis ((Z)/w) of the Arabianr, the Arabian (Te) or (Ta), &e.
have their (H), which they diﬅin- BntiftheBreath donot even reach r
guiſh from (Be), by putting Three ſo far, bntbe intercepted at the ton
Points under it. of theThrc at, by moving the hinder r
E .3 Part c
To theſe we ſhall add ſome Rules relating to Conibnants
join'd together.
(Gh) in the Beginning does exPre/i
(G) hard, a: in Ghoﬅ we find, and in Ghefi.
Elſewhere this (h) we moſily non' omit,
Yet by it the s llable a Length does get.
In Northern arts this very (h) is found
PVith a much ſofter Ajþirate to Sound.
In the Beginning of Words (gh) is pronounc'd like hard
(g) .- Elſizwhere
plies, 'tis now
that the Syllable almoﬅ
is to wholly left But
be lengthened.ſi out, ſome
but yet it im
(eſpecial
ly the Northern People) ſound the (h) With a ſofter Aſpira
tion; as in Might, Light, Night, Right, Sight, sigh, weigh,
Might, though,- (but the Three laﬅ Letters in this Word, are
now by the Politer thrown away as uſeleſs) Thought, wrought,
taught, &e.
(Gh) ſbmetimes will ſhund like double (f)
As Cough, tough, rough, enough, trough, and laugh.
' 'LWhen enough ſignifies Number, 'tis ſpelt enow.
(Ch) Zroduces a compounded Sound,
Whic from (ty) maſt ficrely may rebound,
0' from (til-i), as in Church 'rit found.
We muﬅ except Words that are deriv'd from the Greek and
Hebrew, eſpecially proper Names, and where a Conſonant fol
lows, for there they ſound harder, like ._(c) or (k).
g. -- (Sh) like (ſy), (ph) like ( f) me find,
;1-> And the (th) i: of a double Kind ,- z
Sometirnes a ſhfter. Sound, akin to (d)-,
Somnimes a ﬅranger, that': akin to (t).
(IN Sounds (dh) ſometimes, where it has a ſofter Sound,
zs it has in the followin Words: As thou, thee, thy, thine, the,
dhix, that, thoſe, theſe, t ey, them, their, there, thence, thither,
whither, either, whether, neither, though, although, but in theſe
Two laﬅ it is enerally left out. And in ſome Words in
(ther), as Fat , Mother, Brother, Leather, Feather; and in
fifldctfb, Breathe, Wreathe, hathe, bequeathe, Cbthe.
Elſewhere it generally has a ﬅronger Sound; as in with, with
out, within, through, think, thrive, throw, thruﬅ, Thought,
Thigh, Thing, Throng, Death, Breath, Cloth, Wrath, Length,
strength, thick, thin, &ce.
PART,
l
.'fle' Engliſh Grammar, with Notes. 43
Part of the Tongue to the hinder ink, Iynx,&c- ſo in band, band, ran;
Part of the Palate, (k) or hard (e) is from what it is in hang, bank, rank,
form'd, and the Greek (u), &c. The &e. Nay, the Sound of this Letter
Welfl: always give their ( c) this hard is vary'd in the very ſame Words:
Sound. Theſe three Conl'onants we For (u) ſounds 0therwiſe_in [on-ger,
call abſolute Mutes; for they give ﬅranger, anger, drinke' 5 in-grua,
no manner oſ Sound in themſelves, can-grim; but otherwiſe in longer,
nor indeed can give any,becauſe the ﬅrong er, ang-er, drink-er; ing-rue,
Breath no way gets into the free mngrua. So we hear ſome ſaying
Air, for it neither gets out by the in- num, tanquam, nun-quam, &c.
Noﬅrils, nor by the Mouth. While others pronounce them as if
If the Breath, equally divided be they were written ing-warn, rang
tween 'be Noſtril: and 'beMaurb,be wam, nunq-wam; or ink-wam,
interce ted by the cloſing of the rank-warn, nunk-wam. When (u)
Lips,t eConſonant (B) is form'd, is pronounc'd in the former, the
the Greek ( 8), the Arabian Dal, &e. Extremity of the Tongue always
But iſ the Breath be intercepted in ﬅrikes the Fore-part of the Palate
the Throat by the hinder Parts of near the Rootsoſthe up r Teeth ;
the Palate andTongue(G)is form'd, but in the latter, the ame Extre
the Greek fit), &a. The Wel/b al mity oſ the Tongue rather depends
ways give this hard Sound to their to the Roots of the lower Teeth ;
(G). And theſe we call balfMuler but the Hinder-part ofthe Tongue
for they make a little Sort oſ Sound is rais'd to the Hinder-part oſ the
in the Noſe, which can be heard by Palate, and there intercepts the
it ſelf Without the Aſſutance oſ the Sound; to wit, it is form'd in the
Sound of any other Letter, Mouth in the ſame manner, as (g);
If the whole, or, ifyou leaſe,the but it has the ſame Direction of the
greaterPart oftheB reath divided Breath with (u). And this, if we
tothe Noﬅrils, only in its PaflZige are not deceiv'd, isthat very Sound
ſtriking the Air that remains in which many wou'd give to the
theConcave or HollnwoſtheMouth, Hebrew y, when they teach us to
the Lips being juſt clos'd, (M) is pronounce it by ng, ngb, gn, ng/m,
form'd, the Greek (u), the Arabian &je. for they infinuate ſomeSound,
Mim, &e. But iſ the Cloſure or In which does not perfectly agree with
terception be made in the Fore-part either (u) or (g), but hasſomething
of the Palate, (N) is form'd, the common to both. And we know
Greek U), and the Hebrew and Ara not but the Spaniardr mean the
bian Nun. But if in the Throat, ſame Sound by their (h')mark'd thus
that is in the Back-part of the Pa over-head.
late, that Sound isform'd which the We call theſe Three Conſonants
Greek expreſs by (y) before ſhe), balfVawe/r -, for they have a greater
( ), ſhe), (£).: And the Latznr of proper Sound than thoſe which we
aid by (g), as Age/liﬅſ, agcepr, ag ately call'd Half-Mater.
gulur, &c. tor Antblſer, ancepr. an Theſe nine Conſonants, which we
gulur, as Triflian and Varro aſſiire have diſcours'doſ, are form'd by a
us. Which all now write with (u) total Intetception oſthe Breath, ſo
before the ſame Conſonants, eſpe that it has no manner of Paſſage
cially in the ſame Syllable -, ſuppoſe through theMouth, which therefore
a), (a ),(x), and (e),(g),(c z1), gre we nam'd clar'd : But the ſame For
normc'd with a hard, that ls t eir mation remaihing, zſ 'be Breath
genuine Sound. For the Sound of hardly prefl'd, ye' (tba' with Dzffi.
(u) is different in the Wmds rbm, culty) find an Out/et, thoſe Conſo.
ſin, in; fiona tlnt mfing,fingleffink, inants are form'd, which we call
open'd',
44 YZze Engliſh Grammar, with Notes.
open'd,which are the A pirare: of all which now are writ give, Heaven,
thoie (except the bal Vowel: (from &c. The Arabian! and Ter-flux: have
whence they are deriv'd .- Mote ful' not this Sound: And the Turkr pro
'le and thin, if the Breath goes out nounce their Vaw in this manner,
by an oblong Chinlt,$litor Creviee ; and as a great many, the Van ofthc
or more roſr, ifit go out by a round Hebrew: ( which ſome think more
Hole. hey are referr'd to the properly pronounc'd as the Arabic
ſame Claſſes their Trimiri-ve: were, Wa'w, or w). And we doubt not but
as being near akin to them. We 'the Walic (f) had this Sound z for
ſubjoin no Aſpirarer to the half ſince the Greek: had before the Cha
[ſo-welt', not that there is noSound racter (QL there was no manner of
when the Breath breaks from him need to mvent a new one to expreſs
that is about to pronounce them, the ſame Sound. Beſide: <Pn cian
but becauſe that Sound has not yet, owns, that the Latin (f) ha for.
as far as we can diſcover, obtain'd merly the ſame Pronunciation,that
any Place in the Liﬅ, or Catalogne is, the ſame Sound, that was after
of Letters; for it expreſſes theLow wards given to the (71) Conſonant;
ing of an Ox, or the Human sigh; and ſo the Letter (f) paſs'd to the
that is, ifthat be made in the Lips, Sound of (w or (la/2),
this chiefly is in the Palate or But ifthe Breath make its Way
Throat. out through a roundHole,the Engliſh
Ifthe Breath eſcape the Mouth, (w) is form'd, and the Arabian
when we are going to pronounce (um-w), which Sound many give to
the Letter (p), its Aſpirate (f), or the Hebrew (vdu). But the German
(pb),that is, theGreek( ),the/lra (w) ifwe miﬅake not, has a Sound '
bian (Pbe), the Welfl)( ), isfbrm'd compounded of this and the former
and pronounc'd; nor is it of Con Letter; that is, by placing that be.
iequence, whether the Breath gets forethis; ſo that the Engliſh wou'd
out by a longiſh Chink, or by a ſpell that with man, which the Ger.
round Hole ; for tho' that: Way the man: expreſs by wa. This Sound is
Sound is more fubl le and fine, and not very different from the Englzfly
this moregroji, yet the Diﬅinction (ao),the French (0u),:md theGerman
of both is ſo very nice and ſmall, groſs or fat [u] moﬅ rapidly pro
that we doubt whether they in any noune'd- For this Reaſon ſome have
Language areexpreſs'd by different thought it a Vowel, tho' it be in
Letters. Reality aConſonant z yet it muſt be
Ifthe Breath break out by aChink, own'd Very near akin to a Vowel.
when we are going to pronounce The Wel/Hmaltc that a Vowel, as
(h), it formg the Engliſh (e) Conſo well as this a Conſonant,expreffing
nant, &je. TheSpanmrd not ſeldom them by the ſame Character(w),but
gives the ſame Sound to (h), uſing when 'tis a Vowel, it is accented
tthettcrs( b) and(-v) promiſcuouſ over-head, and ſounds long -, in o
ly.The Wel/b expreſs this Sound by therPlaces'tis aConſonant,itsSound
(f), and the foregoing Sound by being ſhort ; as, Gwydd, (which is
(f). The Engliſh Saxomeither had two Syllables)aGooſe -,e;-w*yr, croo
not this Sound, or expreſs'd it by ked; qw'yr, Men. Whenever this
(f) in Writing, for they knew no Sound in Latin follows, ſ, , g, as in
thing ofthe(-v)Confonnnt z and they ſuadeo, ſguzmdo, linzua, r, mofi:
wrote many Words with (f) (as the take it or a Vowel, and perhaps
Engliſh did after them for ſomeAges) ſome, who wou'd have it a Conſo
which are now written with (71) nant in the Engliſh Words wade,
us much as thoſe which ﬅill are perfivadg, ſway, &t. and yet the
ſpelt with (f) z a' gif, Heafen, &e. Sound is the very ſame in both
Plates,
Plates. But the ſubjoin'd Vowel in this with (D), (S), as is plainfrom
the Diphthongs or double Vowels their Writings, (tho' they ſome
(au),(eu),(ou),tmly pronounc'd, is times confounded theſe Characters)
no other than this very Conſonant; but in following Ages the Engliſh
as any Man may ſee by conſulting expreſs'd both Sounds by (p),
the diſcerning Gula/ter, in hisTrea which by Degrees, degenerate into
riſe of double Vowelr. the Character (y), which in very
If the Breath more grolly goes many Manuſcripts perpetually bc
out by the Hole, when we are go gins thoſe Words which now are
ing to pronounce the Letter(T),the written with my), And hence
Greek (e)is ſorm'd,the Arabic(Tbe), ſprung the Abbreviations of the,
&c. and the Engliſh (Tla), in that, 'bau,by },_)'y, _y TheWelſb
Thigh, thin, thing, though', throng 2 expreſs the former Sound by Mr),
The Anglia-Saxon: formerly ex. the latter by hid), only ſome pre
preſs'd this Sound by this Note tend thatit is betterwrittenbwdb),
(P), which they call'd Spina, or the who have not been able to alter the
Thou: The Welfl: always write it old Or'bagrapby. But we( as we have
with (rb). obſerv'd) expreſs both Sounds by
But if the Breath on this Occa my), hut erroneoufly, ſince neither
fion go more ſubtilly out of the of them is a compounded Sound,
Mouth by a Chink , that Part of the but evidently ſimple, varying or
Tongue which is next to the Ex deſcending almoﬅ in the ſame man
tremity, being lifted up, that the ner from the Sounds of (d) and (!) ;
Breath may, as it Were, be flatted as (f) and (o) do from the Sounds
or thin'd, and preſsd with a wider, 0f(/>) and (b). We grant, that by
but groſs Form, the Greek (e) is the ſame Reaſon, that (pin is writ
form'd,the Hebre-wSamecl: and S/zin, ten for (f),(bh),(rb) and (ii/1),migh':
the Arabic Sin and Sad y the Latin alſo written, that is in ſome
Fnd finglyb (ſ), pronounc'd with meaſurc,to ſhew the Affinity and
lLnghlZ Sound, that is, a ſharp, a Derivation of the AſpirateLetters,
rmy, or firidulourpr kiſſing Sound 5 to thoſe from whence they draw
a; m the Words, Ter, t u, m, thuſ, their Original. But it is evident
ill, le 1, ſend, ſtrong, &e. With this from the following Words, that the
Soun we alſo pronounce ſoft (e) genuine Sound compos'd oſthc Let
before (e), (i) and (y)-, as in ters, is plainly different from that
"race,Mercy,(Peace.fince,Principal, ofthe Aſpirate Letter , as Cob-bam,
(Ft The French ſometimes give CbanbamJVit-bam,Mair-bam,Wad
ſhe (e)the ſame Sound when it has bam, Wood-houſe, Shep-lzerd, Clap
a Tail, as in Gar-pon. bam, Meſr-bam, &c. And thus we
"them-eath get out oftheMoutb find entirely other Sounds in Oc
la Hole in a groſſerManner,when bam, Block-head, Hag-Irerd, Cog-bill,
you are about to pronounce (D), [louſ-bold, Diſ-honour, Mflbap, diſ
If forms the Arabic Dbal, the He honeﬅ, di -bearren, Majfbam, Can/3
ble'w_DaIet}!, the ſofter (D) of the bam, W'i -/7eart, &e. than thoſe
&Pan'ardr s that is, as that Letter is which we commonly write with
pronounc'd in the Middle and End (ch),(gb),(ſb)z But the French, the
"ſ Words, as Majeﬅad, Trinidad, Flemingr, and many others, do not
&6. The Engliſh write this Sound at all, or extremely little, pro.
"I the ſame Manner as they do nounce either of thoſe Sounds
another, which we have lately which we expreſs hymn 5 and while
mld'd; that is, with ( rb) in thy, the French endeavour to pronounce
"He, ybir, rim', &e. The Angles-'x it, they utter (t), the Fleming! (n),
vhwnte that Sound with ly), but: and ſome others (ſ)- Yet it ishno:
ar
hard to pronounce theſe genuine with the harder Sounds, they are
Sounds,iſwe wou'd but take a more thus made Verb: or Wordr, to 'wi-va,
peculiar Care of, and have a nearer to live, to ſtrive, to balm', to cal-ye,
Regard to theirFormation ; that is, to ſave, to brearlze, to Clotbe. The
all the Parts of the Formation re Italian: (eſpecially when it is dou
main the ſame as if we were go bled) expreſs (z) ﬅronger, as the
ing to ronounce U) and of), only Hebrew (y), (/z): Thus not a few
we ſu er the Breath to go out of pronounce in Latin- Words, when
our Mouths here, and not there. (i)goes beforeſi ) and anotherVowel
We muſt alſo take heed, that for follows; as Tiazza, Venetic, they
want ofAttention, the Parts oſthe pronounce Tiaſza, Venerzid, &e.
Tongue next to theExtremity riſe a We may add to (d), or, if you
little, and ſo form the Letters (ſ) pleaſe, to (u), two other Letters
and (z); foras (ſ) is to (e), ſo is form'd in the ſame Seat, that is, in
(z) to (a'),as we flnll now explain. the Palate, oiz. U) and (r). We
If when you are about to pro chuſe rather to join theſe Letters to *
nounce (d), you extrude the Breath (d) and (u), than to the Letter (e),
in a moﬅfidnle manner, as it were by reaſon of the Concuſſion of the
thin'd by a Chink or Crevice, (the Larynx, orWind- pipe, and the Emo
Part next to the Extremity of the tion of the Breath to the Noﬅrilsin
Tongue being tothatEnd lifted up) their Pronunciation, of which the
the Latin (z)is ſorm'd,theGreek(z). Letter (!), and all that are deriv'd
the Hebrew zain, and the Arabian from it, are utterly incapable.
(u), which Sound the Engliſh ex The Letter ( 1) is form'd if when
preſs by their ( z);but they, as well you are about to pronounce the (dj
as the French, do ſometimes expreſs or (u), you gently ſend out the
this Soundby (f), eſpecially when Breath from one or beth Side: into
it is placed between two Via-welt, the Mouth, and by the Turnings of
and in the End of a Word, as in the Mouth to the o en Lips, with a
Pleaſure,Eaſe,La-rw,&c. And when Tremblingoſ the ongue. And the
a Name or Noun,with hard [r]in the Sound ofthis Letter, if we are not
laﬅ Syllable is made a Verb orWord, deceiv'd, is the ſame in a l Lan
then this Verb orWord is pronounc'd guages, as the Hebrew , and
with ſofi: (ſ), (that is z); ſo a the Greek 74.
Houſe, a Louſe, a Moufe,aPrice,/1d But the WeIfl) have another and
vice, (or ad-Ui e, according to ſome) ſtronger, tho' a kindred Sound to
th ', in our pinion, the (e) ought this, which they write with a al),
to ke in the Name, as a ſar to diﬅinguiſh it from that of the fin
ther Di inction of the Name from gle ( l), by the Breath's being much
the W'ord orVerb) cloſe, Brafl,G/afir, more forcibly preſs'd into the
Graflr, Greaſe, and with hard ( ſ) -, Mouth, whence proceeds a more
but to houſe, to loufe, to mouſe, to frothy Sound, as it were, compound
priſe, or prize, (tho' Prize with a ed of (e). ). But this Sound, we
[z] ſignifies a Purchaſe, a Caption think, no other Nation knows, un
of ſome Ship, &So. or the Reward of leſs perhaps the Spaniardr.
ſome Action, or to be obtain'd by TheLetter(r),which is generally
ſome Action, Go) to adviſe, to call'd the Dog-Letter, is likewiſe
cloſe, to braze, &e. are pronounc'd form'd in the Palate 5 that is, if
with ſoft (ſ) or (z). But other Let when you are about to pronounce
ters in the like manner have an (dj or (u), the Extremity of the
analogous Alteration. Forſrom the Tongue being turn'd inward by a
NamesWife, Life, Smſe, HaIf,Calf; ſtrong and frequent Concuflion,
ſafe, Breath, Cla'b, are pronounc'd beats the Breath that is going out: ;
from
He Engliſh Grammar, with Notes. 47
from which Conflict that horrid or Vowels in the direct Line, butthey
rou h Sound of the (r) proceeds. ſet the (P) after them, it'we are not
An the Sound ofthis Letter is the miﬅaken, and this makes them uſe
ſame in all Nations, as the Hebrew (b) for a Note of an Hundred; for
Re/b, and the Greek (p). The WeI/b what 15 now written Hung, was
frequently ſubjoin (h) to this Let formerly written .H'u-r"- Bm?
ter; and their (r/i) anſwers the we can ſee no manner of Reaſon
Greek' aſpii'ated (þ). They tell us, why (In ſhould not be a Conſomnt
that the Americnm bordcring on in all other Languages ; for it visby
New-England, or at leaﬅ a great no means to be rejected from the
Part of them, cannot pronounce Number of Letters, becauſe the
either an (l) or (r), but ſubﬅitute Sound of it is ſometimes not ro
(u) in their Place ; thus,f0r Lobfler, noundd by the French, and lgme
they ſay, Nob/lan. others z for that is no more than is
If the Breath, being more ﬅrictly common to many other Letters,
.compreſs'd, breaks out moreſubxilly, eſpecially ofthc Hebrm,and other -
when you are about to pronounce Oriental Tongues, which are quie
01) or hard (u), it forms the Greek ſcent or ſilent: Nor becauſe it does
(x), the Arabian (eſ/a), truly pro not hinder the Elifion of the forego
nounc'd, Go. that is by a middle ing Vowel, when another Vowel
Sound betwixt (e) and (h) -,and this follows in the ſubſequent Word;
Sound is very familiar to the Ger for (m) wou'd then lie under the
man; and Welflv and they both ex ſame Fare, and( ſ) anciently did
preſs it by cb. 'But it is quite laid not hinder thisContraction. But we
aſide in Englzjb; for our cb is a muſt confeſs, that there is ſome
quite different Sound, as we ſhall doubt whether theLatim, who were
ſhew hereafter. ſuch mightyEmulators of theGreek,
But if the Breath go out in a allow'd (1.1) tobea Letter or not, e
groffer manner, and leſs impreſs'd ſpecially when we find the Gram
(by reaſon oſ the morelax Pofition marian: ſo earneﬅly denying it,
of the Tongue, and larger Exit for with Triſcian at the Head of them.
the Breath) the Latin 01) is form'd; lf when you are about to pro
and the Hebrew and Arabian Uſe) nounce (y), or the hard (g), the
and the Greek aſpirate Spirit. And Breath being more hardly com
this Sound is common to moﬅ Na preſs'd, goes out by a more ſubtile
tions. But the Bench, tho' they Chink, as I may ſay, or Slit, that
write ſly), ſeldom pronounce it. The Sound is form'd which is expreſs'd
Difference between the Sound of by gb. The Engliſh ſeem formerly
this and that ofthe foregoingLetter to have had this Sound in the
is only this, that the Breath in the Words Light, Right, Nigbr,Daugh.
former is expell'd with a greater ter, &e. but now they only retain
Force, and by a narrower Paſſage, the Spelling, entirely omittingthe
asit were through a Chink, and i_s Sound z but the North.Counr')-Pco
therefore nam'd the double Aſpz ple, eſpecially the Soon, almoﬅ rc
rate; this more fi'oely,and as 1t were tain it ﬅill, or rather ſubﬅitutethc
through a Hole or large Paſſage. Sound oſ [bl in its room. The Irijh
The Greekr, as if it were no Let in their [gh] have exactly this
ter, (becauſe its Sound isbut ſmall) Sound, as in Logb, a Lake, St. It
call it an Ajþirarion, and (at leaﬅ differs from the German [ab] as [5]
nowe-days) ſet it not down m the does from leg, that is by the Dire
direct Line oftheLettergt-ut ut lt ction o' the reath to the Noﬅrils,
over the Head of a Letter: he' which neither [t] nor [dy] can do.
ſhzmedy they did ſet'em before the But' the German: generally write
by
48 Tbe Engliſh Grammar, with Notes.
by (cl') thoſe very Words which ready obſerv'd; another which was
the Engliſh write with (gb), for us'd for (f) Vowel, and differing
their Nachr, mht, llecht, from the fox mer only by the Point
over it; and a Third ( 3 ), which
fcchten, tocbter, anſwer our was always put for ( y ) Conſonant,
Night, right, light, fight, Daughter; and which was found in thoſe Words
an there are many more Words of which we now ſpell with gb: But
the ſame kind. 'ſhe Latinr, Greekr, theLibrarykeepers,oflatterTimes,
Hebre-zwand/Irabiamknew nothing ignorant of the Matter, have by a
of this Sound. The cPerſiani pro very graſs Error ſubﬅituted in the
nounce their G/mfwith this Sound, room ofit the Character ofthe Let
which is diﬅinguiſh'd from the Ara ter ( 2), when they made thoſe mon
bic Kef by Three Points over it. ﬅrous Words thouzt, ſouzt, &je.
But if the Breath go out more
freely, and as it were through a ſor thought, ſang/7', &e. or rather for
more large Hole, the Engliſh (y ) thauyr, fimyr, &e. as they were then
Conſonant is form'd; the German us'd to be written by ( y ) Conſo
(j ) Conſonant, the Arabian_ſye ), nant, as we may find them in the
which Sound many con'tend belongs Impreſſions of Chaucer, and others
to the Hebrew (jod). For thisSound of the old Poets. We muſt alſo add,
is very near akin to that of the that not a few Words, which we
Vowel ( i) ſlender, moﬅ rapidly pro now ſpell With (y ), the old Saxani,
nounc'd. The Diphthongs, as they and now moſt commonly the Ger
man: wrote with g 5 for our Words
are call'd at', ei, oi, or ay, ey, oy, are
promiſcuouſly written by (f) or Slay, ſayl, fay, pay, day, rain, and
( y), eſpecially by the Engliſh and many more, are partly by the An
the French. T is not only put for glo Saxom, and partly by the Ger
(f) at the End of Words, but inthe man: written bchlagen, ſegel,
Middle, when (i) follows the Sound ſeger, ſag, tas, tegem. And
of [i]-,asdying, lying, &c. the An on the contrary manyWordswhich
gla Saxon, and after them the En are now written with (g ), were
Iz'fla, for many Ages, always put a formerly written with ( y ); as,
goint o\er (y), when it was us'd again, againﬅ. given, &c. were an
for the Vowel (i), thus ( y-) gently written ayen,ayenfi,yeoven,
But it ismanifeﬅ, that there is a c.
great Affinitytetween this Letter Thus we have run through allthe
and g and gb, from thoſe Words, ſimple Sounds that we know, and
which are now written by gb, as have given Rules for their ſeveral
light, migbr,fbougbr, &c._ being in Formations, and diﬅributed them
the old Manuſcripts written with into their ſeveral Families and
fy), in the ſame Character, as yet, Claffes; and as we have ofthe Vo
yonder, &c. For they had a Three wels, ſo ſhall we here ofthe Conſo
tbld Figure, one (y), which we nants, give you a Plan, which your
now expreſs by tb, as we have al Eye may view all at once.
-,wv=-5
Conſonants,
,4_J
. 2714- Engliſh'Grammar, with Notes.. 49
C
/
Mute --.__>£. a' l r

Lahizil or Lip Half-Mute _-B] V l W
Conſonants! l ſ Half-Vowels
Mute - Mla Lm'ZiTz
-_- TlS 1TH'
Half-Mute _* Dl Z 'DH
Palatine or Palate z
H'elf-Vowel _- N] a sly;
- Mute' ClCH] H
Guttural or Throat ffalf-Mute _'G[GH[ ſ
-__.____,
Half-Vowel -- nl aSigb
ſubt'il,
more graſſ,
mare
w
'sozerzdzv
Aswe have ſaid ſomethingofthe with them (with a Note of Produ

Compound Sounds of the Vowdls, ction over the following Vowel
we ſhall add a Word or Two here Sian, Habit), is a. Monaſy/Iable, 'but
ofthe Compound Conſonants. The Sion ( Mount Sian) a Word of Two
Engliſh [j] Conſonant, or ſoft [gL Syllables.
or big), is comfgonnded of [d] and TheEninfl: [cb or [rch],ſounds
[y] as is plain om-j'ar, jay,gentle,' [ty],fo_r Orcbara', ich, &a. ſound
Iadging,which ſound Dyar, Dyoy, art-yard, Rir-ye:, &c. The [tall-anſ'
'gem/e, lodyin , &e. the Arabian pronounce their [e] thus tei'ore [e]
jien, (which getterztho' it deſcend and [i]. The Terfian: to expreſs
fromthe Hebrew Gimel, retains not this Sound; beſides the Arabic Al
its Sound) and the Italian Gi. phabet, make uſe of their [che],
The French [j ] Conſonant and which, lay-'having Three Points he
ſoft [5] is compounded of the Con neath it, lS diﬅinguiſh'd from the
ibnants [zy]z for thEir J'e, j'z age, Arabh: Gjim. Iſbefore the Engliſh
aye, &c. are'Zye, azye, &a. the Teſ Word yew, You ſeverally put d,t,_/*,
jiam exprefi this Sound by their z, it wilibemade dye-w, tye-w, e-w,
Zye, which is diﬅinguiſh'd from zye-w, which is the Engliſh', ew,
the Arabian Ze, by having Three che-w, ſhe-w, and the Bench Jew. *
Points over it. Play. , _
The German [ j] Conſonant is The [X] of the Latinſ, and al
plainly a. ſimple Sound, that is, as moﬅ all other Languages, and the_
we have ſaid, the ſame with the GraekſZJ, is compos'd ofſdlſucl
Engl/Z/b ſ y ]. This Letter is not known to tha
The Engliſh [flthhe Erencl: [th] Hebrewnner the Oriental Tongues,
the Gernian [ſcb ]. the Hebrew and but in the Room of it they wriu:
Arabic [ſhin] ſound un, for the thoſe ſimple Letters, of which it '
French Chambre,'thc Engliſh ſhame: compos'd,which the German: like,
and the Ger_man IZ'lmm,iſi()\llld Syam wiſe often do, for their chr, wacbr,
be' Dame', ſyam. The PVeljb ex ſecbryferhﬅ, &e. arc the Engliſh
preſs the Sound by [ſi 1, wherefore F Ox,
go - He Engliſh Gramrhar, 'saith Notes.
Ox, wax,fix,fixt 3 the Weljk al not yct examin'd the Analogy they
ways. write this with Lcfl. - . bear to. the Sounds they repre
The Latin [k] was anciently put ſent. We have already ſaidpthat
[en] and thcyKromikuoufly wrote Soundr are taken- for the Signs of
Galendt and alendeez but it now our Thoughts, and that Men in
generally has the ſame ſimple-Sound vented-'certain Figures to be the
with the Greek De), whence it is Signs dſ thoſe Soundr. But where:
deriv'd,- or the Latin [c], and it as theſe Figures or Characters, in
'wou'd be plainly a ſupafluoucht their firﬅ Inﬅitution, ſignify im
ter, if[naiways retain d its genuine mediately only the' Soundr, yet
Sound; and therefore 'the Weflh, Men often carry'd their Thought:
whoſe [c] has alway$ on! conﬅant of- the Characters, to the. very
Sound,ha=ve no ſuch Letter,fas well Thingſ, which the Sound: ſigni-v
as ſome other Nations. fied, whence it comes to paſs,
The Latin [g] ofold, zmt foiſon), that the Characters may he conſi
or rather [cw1,.which has always der'd two Ways, w'z. either as they
ſu] after it,'has t'hevery ſameSound ſimply ſignify the Sound, or as
with [o] ox'ſ/e), and is-a ſuperfluous they aſſrﬅ us in conceiving that
Letter. The Welfl: have it not,but which is ſignify'd by the Sound.
always put for (y), ſow), or [ab-w), Four Things are neceſſary to
And thednglo Saxon! wrote upon), give them their Perfection in the
that is, C-wen for Quart. ' firﬅ State.
- The Engliſh [wb] ispronounc'd
perfect] y wajand theAngla-Saxom at) That every Figure or Che;
us'd to lace them ſo; and we can ra cr mark or denote ſome Sound:
not tcl , how the ſucceeding Eng that is to ſay, That no Character
- liﬅ' came to im'ert the Poſition, he ſet down in any Word, but
and ſet the [w] before the [hi what is pronounc'd. -
But this is worthy our Otſcrva (e) That every Sound, 'which
'tion,That the Conſonants ſ y] and is expreſs'd in the Pronunciation,
[w] tho' it be not minde-1, moﬅq be mark'd with ſome Figure: That
commonly are ſuhjoin'd to kindred is to ſay, That we pronounce no
Conionauts before kindredVowels; thing but what is Written.
that is, fy] is often ſubjoin'd tothe (y) That every Figure mark
Gutmral Conſonants ſo), [nghen only one ſimple, or. compounded
p Palatine Vowel follows ; for can, Sound. -
ger, begin, &e. ſound as iſ they were (4) That 'one and the ſame
written cynn, gyr', begyin, &e. for Sound, be not nuuk'd hy more Fi
the Tongue can ſcarcc paſs from gures than one. '
theſe Guttur'al Conſonants, to form
the Palatine Vowels, hit it muﬅ But conſidering the Charaf'ers
"Fronouncc (y), But it is-nOt ſo bel in the ſecond Manner, that is to
ore the 'other Vowels, as in call, ſay, as they'- help us in the Con- i
Gall,go, Gun, Gaafe, come, &c. [IV] ception of thoſe Things, which i
' vis ſometimes ſubjoin'd tothe Lahial the Sound; ſignify, we find ſome- *
zor Lip Conſonants [p] and (h),eſpc times, that it is for the hetter,that -
cially before open [c]z as For, Boy,the foregoing Rules are not always ,
boil, &e. which are, ſounded as if ohſerv'd, eſpecially the firﬅ and?
ſpelt thus, Twax, B-woy, bwoil,&c. the laﬅ. - .' ' '
but thisis not always done, notr by Becauſe firﬅ, it often happen?
'all Men. in thoſe Langnages, which are de
We have (Page z-) conſide'r'cht., riv'dſrom Others, that there are;
"terges tthigns of Sounds, but have certain Letters,.'Which axe not:
. pn-Þ
'i
He, Engliſh Grammar, with Notes. 5!

pronounced, and which, for that Tho' what we have ſaid be ſuf
reaſon, are oſ no manner of no to ficient to ſhew, that the Uſe ocht
the Sound, but are yet uſefill in ters which are not pronouuc'd, is
helping us to underﬅand that which not ſo great an lmpechction, as is
the Words ſignify. As for Exam generally imagin'd, at leaﬅ in thoſe
le, in the Frencb Words, Clumpr, lnﬅanccs and Particulars ofWordc
empt, and Charmſ, the [p] and dcduc'd from other Languagesz yet
Et] are not pronounced, which me it muﬅ be allow'd, that there are
Uſe to the Significationþecauſe too many crept in by a Cor-roptidn
by them we find, that the firﬅ which has ſpread itſelf through
come 'ficom camþur, and lemþur, ſcveralLangua es. Thus it muﬅ
the latter from mmur. ' be conſcſs'd, t r it is a certain
In Hebrew itſelf there are Words Abuſc to give the Sound of ſi) to .
which differonly by one ending in (e), before an re) and (i), and oſ'
Alepb, andthe other 'in Hamecb, pronouncing (.rc) before the ſame
that are not pronofince'd; as Nfip, Vowels otherwiſe than before the
which ifiesto fear or jre'ad, and others; of having ſoftned the r),
ſ'm', m t raw,fling, calf, &c. ' betweenTwo Vowels; and di'ng
Hence 'tis plain, that thisAhnlc ing (1) the Sound of 0) before (i),_
of Words (as'tis call'dſh not with follow'd by another Vowel, as
out its Benefit to the Language Gratia, Action, Diflion, &c.
The Differcnce between the Ca Some People have imagin'd, that
pitals and ſmall Letters, may ſeem they could correct this Fault in the"
to ſome a Contradiftion to the Vulgar Tongucs, by inventingnew
fourth Rule, That one and 'be ſame Characters, - as Mr. Ladwick has:
Sound be not mark'd 'with more done in his univerſal A/p/Z-aber, and
than one Figure : And for this Rea: Ramu: in his Crnmmar of the
ſon, they urge that the ancient, as French Tonvne, by retrenChing eve-
well as the Beſent He'mw, had ryLetter that was not pronount'd,
none of this ifl'erenccz and thiſ: and writing cvery Sound by that
the Greek: and Roman', for a long Letter, towkich thc Sound to Be
Time, made uſe of only Capital expreſs'd was proper, as by placing ,
Letter: in their Writing. But this an (r)beſorc (r') and (e), and not a
Diﬅinction is of great Advantage (e) and the like: But he, and all
and Beauty, in mingling with a othersof his Mind, ought to con
pleaſing Variety the (Iapitals and fider,that beſides the Diſad vantage
ſmall Letters, in the beginning oſ this would he to theVulgarTongues
Periods, proper Names, &a. and for the Reaſons urg'd before, they
to diﬅinguim Names from Words would attempt an lmpoifibility ,-v
of Affirmation, and all other Parts and they little think how difficult a
of Speech. _ _ _ thing it is, to change, and bring
Beſides, this O'mectmn wrll hold the People of a whole Nation (a
againﬅ the Diſſerence of Hands, or the change of a Character they
Figures of Writing or Printing, as have been us'd to, Time out of
the Roman, Italic German, &Be. Mind; and the Emperor Claudiu:
in the lmgrelion oſthi: very Book, found himElf diRpointed in an
or any ot erLanguage,.andent or Attempt ofthis ture, and was
modern, which is vers; uſefiilly fain to lay aſide his Defign of in
employed in the Diﬅin ion,eithcr troducing a Charabter he had pre
of certain Words, or certain Diſ r .
murſes and Sentences, which con All that can le done in this Par
veys theForce and Energy intended ticular, is to retrench by degrees
by the Author, to the Reader, and all thoſe Letters, which are of no
does not at all change the Pronun Uſe, either to the Pronunciation,
clarion. or the Senſe, or Analogy of Lan
F 2. _ guagos,
guages, as the French and we have to learntheir Alplmber over again,
begun to do ; and to preſerve thoſe or be puzzled to read what Would
that aie uſeſul, and to ſet ſome then be written or printed. And
certain ſmall Marks to diſtinguiſhindeed, the Rules we have given
them from thoſe which are not in theſe Caſes, will (we perſuade"
pronounc'd, or which may intimate our ſelves) be of more Uſe than
to us the ſeveral Pronunciations of all theſe Project: for directing the
the ſame Letter. But even this Learner. Yet, to omit nothing
labours under a Difficulty' not to that has been offer'd with any Pro
'be remov'd but by degrees, and in bability, we ſhall add the Method
many Years; for the altering any of a Punch Author, to this End;
of the preſent, or adding any new a Point above or below will ſerVe
ChamClers at onCC, wou'd be of for the firﬅ Caſe, and when (e) is
no manner-'oſ Uſe, while all the ronounc'd 1ike(:), it may have a
chief Byoks of the Languagc are all added- and when the (g)is
without theſeMai ks orAlterations, rononnc'diike (j) Conſonant, its
and ſo many People muﬅ be oblig'd an need not be quite clos'd. ſ
fflſi PARTIL
_CHARM.
AOf SYNLNLABLES.
A Syllablc'r a 'and per ed Sand.

In which tbeſingle, or one doufl e Vowel': flmnd;
Or either 'oix'd with Conſonants, andſþoke
: branes Breathing, In in Cloke.
Ill Syllable is a compleat Sound utter'd in one
Breath, which ſometimes conſiﬅs of one Vowel,
lor double Vowel 5 ſometimes of one Vowel, or double
Vowel join'd to one or more Corzflmmr, not exceeding Seven
inNumber. - - '
this Definition-it is plain, that one ſingle Vowel may
compoſe a Syllable; as the firﬅ Syllables in the following
Words, Asbmbnm, Eternal, I-wry, o-rt'em', U-nity. But no
Num
[il The Word SYLLABLE is ir a literal or Articulate 'Bicepſ an

deriv'd from the Latin Syſltzba, and individual South for every Syl
that from the GreekWOi'd a-unaBÞ, lablemuﬅ fall underthe ſame Ac
from 'uuA-idthsw, which "is to' cent, for as many Vowels, as may
cuniprehcnd; ſo 'lmtlszllaþa inſhe occur in a Word, to be pr'oduc'gl
Latitude ofttherm,mny be'taken nndptdivers Aceent's, orwﬅh ſc
for any Comprehenfion or Connec 'veral Motions oi'the Breathing, ſo
tioningeneral, but in a Gum-na 'many Syllables; and on the con
tml Senſe, only for a_Connection trary,tho' there be ſcveralNoyvels,
of Letters in one Sound. Sea/i if they are pronounc'd under on
ger has defin'd a Sfl'able to he an Accent, and with onc B'reathin ,
Element unde: oneAccent', that-is, > they. make but one Syllabl'. -
what can be pronounc'd at fonoe := ln-cvcry word, therefqe, there
Pnſcian more plainl has it, Cow, are as many Syllablcs, asthere an:
'prelm'ſio Li'eramm, e. a-Compe Vowels fim le or compoimd, and
ben/'um of Letter: falſing unde-r 'one each oſthelc in' its Fm'rnzltion, re
rk'cevlr, and praduc'd by one Mo quires a diﬅinct Motion oſ the Pe
tion oana/biug. Yet this has been c'oral Muﬅ-los. Thus a, a, a, make
rejected by d'mn'c Gan M m A nuns' TizxeeSsdlablcsform'd 'by ſo mar '
as imperfect, and _ excluding all Motiqgsp- diſtinguillfd by ſma)
Syllahles.nfone-l.ettcr: .Anot'ner Stdpgizetq mate
'* a cl l Lay:
' 'rath-m.
Bmfl h
basldcjin'd it thus, A SY Ll-ABLF.
54 He Engliſh Crammar, with Notes.
Number of Conſonants can be ſounded without a Vowel,
for tho' after;the Mutes and Liquids, (H), (u), in Tuble'and
Arre, the (e) be quieſcent, or at leaſt obſcure, yet that
Sound, which is expreſs'd by thoſe Conſonants, is deriv'cl,
from that (e), by which, making a Sort of Sound, we think
(bl) and (u) are not juﬅ Exceptions made to this Rule; for
from Verſification it is plain, that Tableis compos'd of a long
and a ſhort Syllable.
As man] Vowels us emit u Sound,
So man] Syllables in Word: ure found.
As many Vowels, or double Vowds, as are found in any
Word, of ſo many Syllables is that Word compos'd, except
any of the Vowels be ſilent or quieſcent, as the final (e) and
ſome VOWcls, which make the improper double Vowels, the
Rules of which have been already given in the Firﬅ Part,
treating of LETTERS, and the (e) 'which is added to
ſome Syllablcs in the Middle of Words; as the (e) in Ad
'numement and Rudesby, which ſerve only to lengthen the
foregoing Vowel. Except likewiſe Words ending in (u)
and no (.<) coming before (e),- as Names, Trudes, &cbut if
(:) or the Sound of (:), comes before (u), it is another Syl
lable; as Ho'ſcs, Affes, &c. Fates, Ruter, Pages, Prizer:
And when (u) follows (g) or (q); as in Quart, Guide, Guilt,
&c. and when (e) is followed by (u), as in e-vm, Heaven, &e.
but when this (e) is generally leſt out, they become one Syl-_
lable, every where.
Eight Letter: in flow-e Syllablcs m' find,
And no more Sy ables in Word: ure join'd,
[a] As there are but Eight Lettersin any Syllable, ſo lus
no Word above Seven or Eight Syllables (and few in Englſh
ſo many) as Re-can-ci-li-u-ti-on, In-cam-pre-benzfl-bi-li-z.
-To divide Syllables juﬅly in Writing, eſpecially w en Part
of a Word is written in one Line, and Part in another, this
isageneral Rule. _ _ __, U
When unjflngle Cbnſonant i: ſeen, _z *- ' _-,_'_£ _ a
single or double Vowel: plac'd between, ' a '* .
(ſhe Conſonant divide: ﬅill with the luﬅ,
But to the the (P) and (X) join juﬅ.
'When
ing, whereas one (h) of the ſame begin with a Conſommt, allowing
length, is form'd but by one. Alepb to be one, and aSyllable has
[zj in Hebrew, all the Syllable' never more than one Vowel-ſ A
3] t
The Gramm'ar, with Notes. 55
When a ſingle Conſonant comes betWeen Two Vowels, or ſi
between a. _ le and' double Vowel, jomuﬅ in the dividing
SyHables be jolp'd tq the latter. -.- v. w
Except When'(x)- cry-(m comes between __Two Vowds; for
they are join'tho the firﬅ, as in Eye-ample, Ongn, 'ty-on; ex
cept Su-pinq. , . - ' * ſ
In Cbmpound Waſ-1: it: own will eath retain,
The ſame mfilz'tianal Ending: muﬅ obtain. '
Except Compounds, 'gwhere each Word compyumdingrctains
its proper Lett'efsz 'akin-arm'd, un-uſiml, i'i-urez ad-om, with
out, with-in, Safe-UA lo-u rily, namelefi, &e. , -- <
When a Word receives an' additicmal Termination, or End
I'ng; as (ed) Wing-el; Off) Deliverffliffl; (et/a) Deliver-ed,- (for
which Delivers, is now written, and the former endin in
tirelyſame)
e',- rejcctcd) (qfl) Deliver-qh (ing)'\ Deliveng
Deliver-duce. ſi -,* (er) De i-uer
The Conſonants- þreceding (l) and (r), - V"
Follow'd by (e) 'ne-un: are. ___ , . _ X
As iiI-flz- a-'rſh-Heſi; Terffle ' Mi- icte, BZC But'.this.£&em.s
ſhdfided in that of initidl 'dþnſdngnts._. , . - _ 1.' .
Eva' Conſonants'te'tz'vixf 'rub Wwþlipladt,
'. Buf'tbq/Zz
'ſi/72] begin
thata mnſiuo
WL þwfiz'e'w'e' lnflf , " ct , ,
V/orilii allſibegip, ſi * ctſi
Cap ne'er a' Syllable, withoutfiſisſiin. '_ ' _ -
When TWO Co'n'ſong'ntg came be'tvjve'eh TWoſiVOWels, if they .
be ſixch as can begin a chd; they vboth go to _the latter Vo
wel; but ifþthey firﬅþVewe,
one joyningthc cannot be inanddWox-d,
the otherthey" muﬅ be . parted;
thelztter. ſ ' * *
To m'akd'jhis' the plainer, w'e ſhall' here entlmerate the
double Conſonantsr that can begin Wax-ds;v whichyoy quely
eaſily' know
audiſ by pufting (e)',Wyfiſſ'inffl
they' naturally'hnd' "or" an bthenYov'vel, after Sound,
one a'rticuhte them; ſ '
they can be in a_ Word; if not," they muﬅ, 'be 'parted£_into dſ
ﬅinct Sylla es." ' '*"®3'"" "ſi '* a *
beſTheſZ: Conſonants that begin Words, are 'Thirty in
. .,.\'\*
'..
.nz: t. _ 31. GBkz-l'f 1- G'. * any: -.I " '
Cl. Cleir Pl. 'Pli-mi >*
' '- 171. .Fllet. _ 'nr'n si. Slight *'
iX \- E .
Br. Bruce Gr. Grave

Cr. Cram] Pr." Prince
Dr. Dr] - Tr. 'Ire/1'
Fr. Frafl ' '7 \ .Wr. Wmth
c/a
36 The EngliſhGramaar, with Notes.
. ..4 1 v Ch. Ciſwm'g'av " Sn. Smm 3 -
' DW. Dwarf -:.".* ' Sp, Spmx 4 L. . A '
'_' '- ' gvi. gmiw s 1-"0' Sq. z&It-65 ' r, r:
-. . '* . Se Kn- ZKnflTe._ z '. ſLL: aſ I -_ ..'
a. men _* Sw. Sweer '

ſi. [fit * '. A th. this.
ſh. ſhaw 24 ' tw. two
ſmi ſmart A! Wineſ1 ' _ _
. I
ways-WÞ-rd?VKFneffithifiszflT-WWÞFSÞ '® '
-.' 7..2' Silk', Sdmmz
.ſi * Sat. -, Street'
->. '-' ' . Slm shrine
Skr. shrew'
__ spr. Sp'fead _*\. '
U In flwrt, all.this Rules: izquþrizezl inthjis; that a' Male and a

waddfofiov'rkxgvne anothelrg'gq tbgeþh'tlf with thqlaﬅ Vmgct,
but all double-am want; in thc'Mi dleþefidcska're divided. '
To this, aslw'e fasſſthq 'fotmkrfllxflc'a 'this'EXFe t£pn holds,
That Compounds
and additional 'kecgarddiffinct
Endin'gs each its' Faﬅ;
Syllablcs, '* L ' dhſctvedz
But ſuch Conſonants as cannot 'begin a WoidQ' begin
'Q Syllable, and muﬅ therefore be parted in Divſifionqſ
Syllablcss Is inſdrlom- for Sid) can't begin xa'Wotdiflfljþ
Wipe', Trunfpet) Zrdem; camdid, dc-carffi,ſwag-ger, Exit, fſſ' X
.,W}_16g Three py more; COnſona'ntsrmegt' in 'the Middlgbfk
_Word, thalt' Word £is_f'g}:'nerally1 archoundJ 'and ghefefgtg
each'ke'eping'it's ownzþ'gencra'ny ſthe firﬅ Coh'ſonant' goeſ. to
the fikſi Vowrl, and the edge:-v to the lattcrz as in Conzþra'ct,
In-ﬅmctim,&c. ſſ . ' -. '
Two Voml: 'meeting dnb'w'irl: its full' Sat-114. _ _ ,_
. Away: to (make Dwfflllgble: are &and. . ..
If Two Vowals come together, and both fully ſounded;
they muﬅ be divided, and make TWo Syllablep, as Re-mter,
Mu-tml, &c. ->\'* A .\ *: >
Ilaeflzllowing Obſhrjvatiam relating ta- &llnbbsnar to the Pra
mmciation o Letters, a: they are fluid 'in Syllablcs, and not
ſingl] A) t mfil-vex, we. thought more 'proPcr for this Place,
than where the] hazvexbeen plac'd by others,- for to tall: oſif the.
Pronumiation of S llaHex, before t/n Learner- [quem nant n
Sfllable is, flemijgmetkiflg Prepqfleromz, - '
The
___..___--=H
H'be Engliſh Grammar; with Notes. 57

The Sound of (ſhaw in Words of more Syllables than one
is wnuen in ſome by (ti) before'(al), as Credential, Equi
noffial, Eſſential, Nuptial, Impartial, &c. Some others wri'te
(ei) before (al), as, Artificial, Benefiml, judicial,- Prejudizjinl,
and
theſethe
are Reaſon
deriv'd, is,
endthat the primltive
in (n) Words, fief-diſh
Mmfice, 'Beſimſicq &orn'whence &a.
or from the Latin Words, in'z which as (t), 01- (t is us'd,
continues in Engliſh,
The Sound as ),'fudicinl,-ſiom
of (ſly/m fudiciatis,
muﬅ be written Man)&to. -
as Arſſitbme_
tirian, Grecian, Lagz'cian,f Magician, &c. from Aritbmm'c,

Greece, Lagic, and Magic, and ſo all others from the (e) in-La
kin, except Omm, Prxiſiam'Teztinn, Egyptian, A um, &a.
The Sound of (ſlutte) is expreſſed by (ti)- _ (nte), in
Gratiate,_ expatime," negotiate, vitiate; &cl._except emitting,
affiuiate, mm eate.- 4 3? T -_ > s -
The Sound of (ſhent) is Written by ſhent), in Ancient,
Proficiem, &c. (tient), in'PmieZt, Impan'mt, &e. and ffiimi)
in Ommſcimt, &a. _ '
The sound of anm, orſlmn in the End of Words, muﬅ be
Written (n'oW with t) except All-ſhy, Animduerſim, Aſcau
flmzA erſio'z, dun-m',Cmclgfio'z,'Cmdqfl-entiong
p' fi mſiCq'm'puqun, Circmifibm-Colhfim, Cdlu/fm, Come
Chſſ ſi ',*an
tuſim, Can-'whim
fuſim, 5 Deciſion, 'Do'm'j/iaiz,
Dir'ſenlſſſ'cdmſi-I?f/Z-'u'j/t'vtl,v Deluſianz
Djffianſion, vwfflz;
Diſþcrſm,_1)£ſentiam
' nſmprffizſſm, DivtſſmctTDi-vffm; vie-'Man * Effl'ﬅon,
EmuM'on; Erffmlmſim, Evnfmz'Exafion, Eitluﬅon, E'xmr
fiM, Expanfiop, Exflofim,£3£ulſion, Extezzſim, Extruſian; Illu
, Immcrſz'on,
Immerflon, Incium,Inqaflſimg
Inmum chluſim,Irriſim;
Incurſim, Inkeſian,
Manſion; Injþcrfim,
Omtſion, Oc
ciſion, otclxq'i'omfe gn, ferſ' tomrPra-uffim; Repebe'ſſm,'_1<c
,' &Pan/fen, Su ,- Verſion :' To thdfi: add the
ing words-2 in-(ffiwf-L as; 4:dequ ſcmmſſ'an,.' pompouſ
fim; CMEWmXCM-'gfflns Ca ' Conflfflm, Decgffon, De'r
Prgffloy', * 'Wahſflrp'nffonz Jaw-Efflux, Jwctch "Mſſms
Omiffion, Oppnffimz Paffim, Pe'jpufflanz Permxſffia't, Hot-efflux, Pra;
fiſh, Progrqfflan 5' Seceffion, S'ffi'on, Succeffion. * * "
The following iWo'rds written (ſitian j, thoff moﬅ of .thelikc
Sound are,
P'ctffl'im D'ſſ ſpel; (chi-m) as Pm'tiam
W>ſi*%W5= =Acqzaſnim, Conþofiti'm,
IBWM'ZQWS Do
[Uſ-"V
ſith-is fame-num m'WP/Þſitim- [3.] ; ' . _' ' A; '
i >i --.' *' "ſun .z ;:__--£
V g--'-T£}-WH;, . \ .-.%
'J ſi . PART
58 The. Engliſhv Grammar, 'with Notes.
[3] At the End oſthis ſhort Tart join theſe into one Syllable which
'tis impoſſible for them to o, and
of our Diviſion,we ſhall lay down a
new Method of leaming-to read in the muﬅ expreſs this one Syllable
all Languages, as we find it in a by ive Syllablenwhich was not de
French Author, and which perhaps ſign'd, whereas they ſhould teach
an ingenious School-Maﬅer may vthem to expreſs every Syllable in
improve to the Advantage of his tirc at fitfl Sight, without diſmcm
Scholnrs: To which we ſhall add, bringit; and to do this, they muſt
'hat ' Mr; Lad-wick, our own proceed gradually: Firﬅ beginning
Countryman, has advanc'd on the with the moﬅ ſimple Syllabler, and
fame Head. , ſo by degreesproceeding tothemore
This Method (ſays our Author) diffiflflt and compounded, till they
regards chiefly thoſe who cannot can readily pronounce a whole Syl
mad : It is certain, that the Learn lable at fiiﬅ Sight; Even the moſt
ers find nogrent Difficulty in learn difficult that are.TothatEnd lecau
ing the Letters themſelves, but the the Pri'mnerr be thus contriv'd z at
hardeﬅ Labour and Pains they go theTop ofthe Leaf let all the Va
lthmugh, is in joining the Letters wels be plac'd flngly in Order, as
together in Syllables. For every they follow in one Rank, and in the
,_1-etterhas its peculiatNamemhmh Lſame plate Syllables, lfl. Of one
is pronounc'd differently by itſelf, Vowel, and oneConſonqn' following
from what it is in Conjunction with it, throughout all the Variatimls;
other Letters, for Example, If you then oſ one Canſanant and an:- Vowel
teache. Child to pronounce Fryin a followin that. zdly, OfrwnC'onſo.
Syllable, you fixﬅ'mahe him pro 'man be re, and one Fo'welfollew;
nounce eſ, er,15' which muſt per ing' throughout the LxVaniations.
fectly ccgietfnndhunyhenhe. es. sdlz,0f one Vowel, and them
to join t eThreeSoundgtogWr; fourConſonanrt following; and
out of them to form the Sound of 'brae Confihgmþ'gomg beflire . _
tbeSyllable by. 1 ' m ramztouomfng. my, afar-e,
The ſamcflbh'vetion ismade by M,and The' Conjoun: going
Mr. hid-mid; As the prddnt Al before 'Vowel zendOu, I', Me,
pbabmſiays he,are imperfect, ſo are or Four Coxjinumu followmk stir/1,
alſothe Tiimmerx, or firﬅ Book: Oſ ſome Syllablbs with Dip hong:
wheteinChildren aretaught to Spel and fiipbthongs, For Example; -
and Read: "Firſt, In not having: a. e._ 1. it. &no. ſi
AI'MN. nd- Secondly .- ab. ed, ib. "cingv ' fat, 'Itch
n not beingdigdte?in ſuch aMe: ad. 1ed- ad. "d," - he.
thod, as is fit ought
and proper
to betotaught.
teach 'ct"Þ (51. 'me bi:v Bujmwbui
them as the? Hid: '14- ildz. Mi- 'lit-IGLCF
For the uſha Way of teaching to , du. 'dom dri. d'o. dry kc. .
ſpell,isto diſmembet everySylhble balm. balm; MYmLÞoIMjbulzz 'fig
(ofmore than oneLetter) into many
Syllables,hy expreſiing everyLetter After this, pllace a Number d'
apart, and Syllabicatly; and the Words of Two, but, a: Found-'la
Conſhnants with ſuch a Vowel, as Her, from the more eaſy, to the
they are ordinarily nam'd widtand mote difficult Exprezfione without
then uiring them to join all heed to theirsignifieofionzz tho'
theſe Sy lables into one Word. _ i inoun iniom, iſtliere could be
But how prepoﬅerous this Me ſome Or ersnd 'Connection in thek
thod is, onelnﬅance for all will ma Signification,it would help theMe
nifeﬅ. Suppoſe the Monoſyllable mory: Further, let there follow
Brand, to be ſpell'd,they will teach ſome Words of ſeveral Syllahlcs,
vthem thus to diſmember it -, Bee,er, with thcAccent varioufly lac'd, as
a, en, dee, and then require them to on the fir/I, ſea-and, and r ifd, &c.
Thue
T/je Engliſh 'Groin-Hide; with Notes. 59
Thus far M. Ladwick, who pro The more, unuſual Sound is
ceeds farther, but that relat' too Jmewn toall by common Practice. '
mudi to -th UnivetſI-l Make' p Thus none can fail to lmow
cannot have a Place here. _ which is the longeſt and moﬅ 'm- .
To this we ſhall addſome Rules uſual Sound, and that is ſufficient
of Spelling, which tho-'we did not almoﬅ in all Caſes, becauſe the
thinkfull enou hof Demmfirationl Length and Unuſualneſs of' the
to be inſerted m the Body of the Sound cauſes it to be the harder
Rules, yet fincethey really afford Sound,which is the third Thing to v
Matter of Speculation ſufficient to be obſerved in this UniverſalRule.
employ the curious ſſeueher , or , But: maketheUſeofthisRule
Leamer 'of his Mother Tongue, 'and Comple' , bedauſeit may happen
m_ay,perha£s_þ_e_rendred copy-le of that ſome Words (tho' not mgny]
mprovement, we all hereſſaTl'H';l nihſiy'ſhilnſſclivers Ways, andyet ex- ,
They were given us by oneDr. jane', preſstbe ſame Numberof Letters,
who (as we gueſs ing-hie, Name she-a and-that in the ſimeManner, either
ing a Wax/man, may, in ſon'ie at? long' o'r ſhort,and Both Sounds alike
ticulnrs of his Book, he miiled by uſual, as in Anger, and uſ;
the Pronunciat'ion ofhis (ii-in Finger, and ſin-gar, &e. i will
Tongue; yet is his Book worth' he.tn'efillto,.1<now,whith in Iſu a.
on' Conſiderntion._ But this will Caſe isxheeaflecmd ſleaſanten m.
begainexj from his Obſewations. ple Sound, and toawhieh harder and_
' s Nſaxims
Word: a're, firſt,Wfirk't-ſiitr
'wi-re Originally Thiſ lgl/ hflrſhegS'mmclls they are ſo' lilfle, di
tateey area to exca _
&an. Tho' thislmay'be diſpqted£ Sonmiswith 'em. r - - "
yet the Conſequenee is not fiyggeat, \ ( ., " A . ' :
as to make us enter into the Con -Ais much eaſier than E or 0; B',
troverſy. * *' ' 'I _ v thanTP; D, than 'For tb' in tho' ;
His next is,T/zat all Ter'mr Which E,than I, 0, U; E E',than E, I, 0;
bewſince alſer'd their'Soflni-lxthffl iG, than'C'for K,*or hard C, or et: in ,
Ogigm oi'theDifficnlty of Spelling) che-w -, M, ng, than Nz On, than O'
d'd it for Eaſe and Pleaſure.z. t _ or U; Sir, thaan or-S', Tin The,
From the hardenbmflzer longer, than To 5' ſhort U,than A, E, I, 0'-,
ruthe eqfierffileaflmtefian' "flJbrtEf V,- thnn Foer; Z, than S in ſo.
Sounds, which For-that Reaſon be Simple Sonn'ds are eaſier than
'Fame the more uſual. From hente Compounds, Compoundsof Tvio
It follows,;T/.1at .nll W'ard: 'time can Sounds, than Compounds of me,
In' flunded ſeveral Way, muſi'be and ſo on; and Compounds of eaſy
V'n'tteu according 'o 'be ſ'a/de/i, Sounds, than Compound: of hard
barſbe/i, lorn-zeﬅ and mu/i lnnuſzml Sounds. -- -
Sound. And this Rule, he aſſures Double Charactemane to be ree
us, is without Exccption in our kon'd asſingle, if they have but
Tongue. _ _ ' - _ . one Sound. ' - X þ
The. longeſt Soimrl is that, which We'have omitted the particular .
expreſſes moﬅ ſimple Sounds, or Prooſs of theſe Rules, which the
founds the ſame Number 'after 'the 'R'eadermay conſulc his Book for, if
longeﬅ .manner .-,. thus, if.yon ſay his-Curiofity prompt. him -, this be
agen and again, it muſt he written ing ſufficient to give Ground 'to his
again; lecauſe it ſounds more Let Enquii'y -, And we believe, ,in>try_
ters, The ſame may he ſaid of ing, he will find 'cm 'ſometimes
Fawr and Ev'n-am;- . * pretty true, iſ not always. a
- The End of the Seaand (Pa/'L -

O
PART
'*t
'FPARE'HL
'-_QfVVQFÞ&f£fl{lJſi'
A 3' "uſ
-
'
A'W) 1? zD; r;
l 'ct' ſi' ' A 15..AP'YZF
\'- 4 q SJN TAQÞU c Till-os',

- - Ex'come pow'r ſſfrom mccr Sounds, to [a] V/onk,
.- which co'nvey ſomething to the Undcrﬅanding:
' For by-th'cſe wc are able to expreſs ' out Thoughrs,
nor Sentiments, of fall'
undqrfqndſi vAll that' w'e indeed
Knowldga ſee; ſeely hear,itstaﬅe,
draws touch,
Original' or
from
the Senſesz and our Perceptz'on, fudgmem, 'and Reaſhning, undEr
-_ " ceedſifromct
which the theſe
ſeveralNot_i_ces
Claffizs, of
orThings,
OTders of
andWords,
Beings,areran
and t 'd,
eir pro
Rc
** 'Iations to each other, and have no other 'Sourcez By theſe we
ſ. "A"
know, that there" are Thingszi'hat theſe Things have certain
. 3 Walities, Beings, Action5,-or Paſſions, dye. whence it ſeems
'pretty plain, that The Mrzþ, which are to expreſs our Senti
ments' of theſe Things; muﬅ bear ſome Propor'tion and Like- r
_ne£s to the Things. _thcy__are to ekpreſs. Btiingv thereforcjn
.Coh*rerſhtion, or I/Vrz'ti'zg, to exlpreidor ſignify all the Objects
_ War Senſes, and the' ment'aLL crantellectual Dcductiohsfrom
,, them, Word: are naturally, to that End, to be divided 'into
_' -Four original Claſiks or Ordcrs, i. e. Thing, or rather the'
AName: of Things the oGLmlities of thoſi: Things, the Circum
' flflncex, Actiom, Paffiong, and Beings' of Thingrſwith their Re
- . lation', Regaidr,
Scntences. . andyConnec'h'am
- to, ' andwith
' eai'h
* ſi' OtherX in
According to this,-thcre-arq FouLParts of Speech, or Four
Heads,- to which every Word 'in 'all Languzges may be reduc-H.
_ 'He Four Pith: ofspeech.

.L_.
[szAMi-zs. 'AFFlaMA'r-rows. '. .
QU A'_L'lTlES. PARTICLES, or'thc Manneiaf War-ds.
- It
A'
A.-..'., '-' *'
la;
The Engliſh Grammar, with Notes. 6:
- [1] It may herehe preper to ex many Words may be form'd of
plain, ,what we mean by a Word, three Letters; that is to ſay, Fiſ \J
which we think mayhe thus defin'd: 'teen thouſand and fix; and Twen
A diﬅinct articulaterSound, which ty-ſlx times as many more may
Men have made the axdible Sign of 'he made of four ſeveral Letter',
[mue one of their Tboicgbſr. Or if ithat is, Nine hundred thouſand
we rather take it from Words, as 'thirty-fix; and ſo on in Proportion.
Written and sinken, we may define Fromthis manifold Generation of
itthus, Mrdr are diﬅinct articu Words, from the various Comhi
hue Soundſ, implyi'tg by common nationsof Letters, we may judge
Confem, ſome Thought: or Opera of their vaﬅ Variety, as being in
tion' of 'be-Mind expreft'd by ſame deed dlot much leſs than infinite
certain Maria', figure-r, or Cham 7 is] In all Langmges there are
cter: agreeden bylMeJ', a: 'be 'vi Namer, anliu'e' and Affirma'ian! t
fllzle Sign: of thoſe Sound: and 'Namer ſignify Thing; &in/iden
Tbougbu. = . - - a ſignify the Manner or Qpalitiesof
A This laﬅ Definition ineludes thoſe Things; Affirmationt affirm
Words in both Senſcs, that is, both ſomething of them, And there
as Spakea and Written. are other Words, which ſignify
a] Manheing a Converſſhle An' neither of theſe, but the Relationof
mal, and form'd ſorSociety, there one to the other, and thoſe are the
was a Necefiity of ſome Way or Manna-i ofqu-Jr : But theſe Rela
Means of conveying the- Mind, or tions of Words to Words are of ſe
Thoughts of one Men to another; veral Kinds, which are expreſs'd by
which tho' it- might he in ſome ſome of theſe Particles, or ſhort
meaſure done by the'Lyes, Hands, Words,. aſ, to, for,- 0, by, with,
Fingers,Motions and Geﬅimlations through, nt, &c.-, of which in Can
of the Body, Sc- asin the Pantn ſtructwn. - n- _
mimes of the Ancients, and Mutes 1 It; is nue, that ſome havecndea
of the Seraglio &30. yet thoſe being vour'd to reduce all Words to three
more imperfe , aszwell as more Claſſcs, which we jhall conſider in
crook-leſome and tediousp Nature, our Notes; but others vainly leaſt,
(which always chooſes the eaſieit or. _ ,tocqntract 'em ye. eld.
and moſt efficacious Way) directs ſcr into Twa, either ignorant ofthq
Maan to impaitthe Sentiments Operations of the Mind, which they
of the Mind, rather by the Voice, were invented to expreſs,and which
endure Motions of the Tongue, can never-be brought into thathm
which are more eaſy in the ſeveral Paſs, as will be plain from what
Variations oſSoundsthanany other ollows, or for want of conſidering
Way. For this Reaſon, Men have what they ſay,, or to be thought
diﬅinguiſhed every Modification of Men of wonderful Penetration by
the Voice by a particular Letter, ignorantHearers.ThoſcGentlemen,
Lgfwhich we have already diſcouts'd who have with great Clearneſs of
a: large, both in the Text, and the Reaſon propos'd themunder Three
Notes),
had ſſmanyand
in tho? theſeyet
Number, Lettersare
are thev Heads, have, however told us, that
ſome Philoib *crs, have thought
by their variousflonjundtions, ſuf themſelves oh ig'd to add a Fourth,
fident for all the Languages that diﬅinct from the, other Three, as
.,ever were, or ever can he in the U will a pear from the chuel.
niverſe.They are indeed liut Twen War I having ſomething corporeal
ty-fix in our Tongue, and,Yet they and ſomething ſpiritual in 'em, we
may be ſo variouily diſpos'd, as to may ſay, they conſiﬅ of Soul and
make more, than five Hundred and Body. Thc'Ideas ofthe Mind, when'
Seventy-ſix ſeveral Wordspf twa they- command the Organs of the
Letters, and Twenty-ſix times as Voice, to form ſuch soundS, WfflCh
'* - a ' - > ate
62 Y'be Engliſh Grammar, with Notes.
are the andible Signsofthok ldeas, ſer a Third, as when we have judg'd
are the Soul ofWords ; but Sounds that Virtue is Praiſe-worthy, and
form'd by the Organs of the Voice, that Paiirnce is a Virtue, we infel'
are the material Part, and may be and conclude that Patience is
call 'd the Body of Wordr. Praiſe-Worthy.
We ſhall therefore here conſider Hence we may eaſily obfirrve,that
them, as they are ahttracted from this 'bird Operation of the Mind,i'
Sound,in theirRelation to theMind but an Extenſion of the ſecond. It
of Man, and in whichwehave the will therefore be ſufficient for our
Advantage of all other Cteatures, reſent Subject, to conſider the firſt
anda very ﬅrong Proofof our Rea ji'wopr what oſ the firﬅ is contai n'd
ſon ſhfperior to them; that is, hy in the ſecond; for it' we ſeriouſly
the U e we make of Wordsto con attend' what paſſes in our Mind, We
vey our'rhoughts to each other,and ſhall find, that we very rarely con
that ſurpriſing Invention ofCombi. ſider the ſimple Perccption of
ning Six and Twenty Sound: in ſo Things, without affinning ſome
multi lltious a Manner, aawe have thing 01' other of it, which is the
ſaid; which we diſcover the Va )udgmcnt.
riety 0 our Thoughts, and all our This Judgment we make of
Sentiments on all manner of Sub Things,as when we ſay the Earth i:
jects,tho'thcre beno real or natural round is call'd a *Pra a/irion; and
Likeneſs betwixt the Words, and thcr ore e'etyPro ition natural
Operations of the Soul of Man ; but ly incliides TWo ermr, one call'd
only Signs by Compact and Agree theo'nbject, which is the Thing, of
ment, to figniezfflu Thoughts. which the Aflirmatian is, as 'be
Words ther re,being(as isſaid) Earth -, and the other is call'd the
invented to expreſs our Thoughts, A'tribine, which is the Thing that
it follows that we cannot perfectly is affirmed of the Subject, as round ;
diſcover the different Sorts andSig and then,ii,which is the Connexion
mifications of Words, without firﬅ betwixt theſe Two Terms.
conſidering what paſſes in our But it is eaſy to perceive, that
Minds. theſe Twa Terms do properly he.
It is agreed by all Philoſophers, long to the firﬅ Operation of the
that there are Three Operations of Mind, becauſe that is what 'e can
the Mind, viz. Percep'ion, judg ceive, and is the Object of' our
ment, and Reaſoning. Thoughts z and that the Connexion
PERCEPTlON is the ſimple belong: to the ſecond, which may
Apprehenſion ofany'l'hingpr Qua he properly call'd the Action of'the
lity of a Thing, whether purely Mind, and the Manner in which
int/lectufl, as when we ſimply we think.
think of the Being, Ererm'ry and And thus the greateﬅ Diﬅinction
Decree of God; or Corporenl, and of that which paſſes inour Mind, i'
[Hare-rid, asa Squa'e, a Circle, a to ſignify, that we may conſider the
Horſe, a Dog. Objects of our Thoughts, and the
J UDGMENT affirm', that the Form andMannerof them,nfwhich
Thing we perceive,is ſo, or not ſo: the chief is the Judgment. But
as, having the Ideas oſ the Earth we muſt beſides refer thither the
and Roundnefi, weaffirm, that 'be Conjunctionr,Dirjunctiom,and other
Lia-lb ir round. the like Operations of the Mind, a'
By REASONlNG,we drawCon well as all the other Motions ofthe
ſequences to evince the Truth, or Soul, as Deſires, Commands, Inter.
Fallacy ofaconteﬅed Propoſition, ro ationx, &je.
by comparing it with one or more rom hence it follows, that Men
incontefiable Propoſition'; or in wanting Signs to expreſs what
ſhort, from Twa Judgments, to in paſſes inthe Mind,the moﬅ gent-Sal
1
Me Engliſh Grammar, with Notes. 63
Diﬅinction ofWords, muﬅ te of' Verb; (call'd in the Latin Partici
thoſe which ſignify theObjects, and ples), Fare-plac'd Wardx, (or Prepo
Manner of our Thought', tho' it fitions), and added Wardz, orAdo
frequently happens, that they do 'verb-t), Thoſe of the ſecond, are
not figni 'y theManner alone, hutin Word: of Affirmatin, (or Verbt)
Conjunction with the Objects, as jaining Wardr, (or Conjunctions)
we ſhall ſoon demonﬅratez having and Interjection', a' the old
already ſhewn, that the Know GRAMMARIANS call'd them
ledgeof what paſſes in the Mind abſurdly, dlﬅinguiſhing than into
is neceſſary for the underﬅanding a peculiar Part of Speech, which
the Principles of GRAMMAR. are plainly only added Word: of
The Word; of the firﬅ Claſs, are Paſſion, which all derive them
thoſe which we call Name-r, Pur ſelves, by a neceſſary Conl'cquenoe,
fonal Namer; QUALITIES de from the natural Manner of ex
riv'd from H'ard: afAffirmation, or preſſmg our Thought'.
CHA P. VI.
Of NAMES. [I]
Whatfer we ſee, feel, hear, or touch, or taile;
Or in our Underﬅanding': Eye i: plac'd,
N A M E S properly we tall ,- fin- always they
Some certain Image to the Mind convey ,
lb Man, Horſe, Houſe, Virtue, andHappincſs,
And allſuch Want', a: Things tlzemſelwt expreﬅ.
[2] A ME S expreſs the Thing: themſhl-uu, that is-cvery

Thing, that is the ObEct of our ſeveral Scnſes,
Reflection. and Under-ﬅanding; w ' ch canveyin-g ſome cer
tain Idea or image, to the Mind, they want not the Help'
of any other Word to make us underﬅand 'em. Thu; when
we hear any one ſay, A Man, a Hon e, a Horſe, Virtue, Vice,
Happineſj, &a. we perfectly undcrﬅ what he means.
Bgfizre the N A ME S, a, an, or the, may, be,
But Thing you never after them mnfie.
[3] Since
[r The
fimplle Words
Objed thatThoughts,are
s of our ſignify the Noun, as it is call'd in the Vulgar
Grammarr.
And thus the Grnm
in allLanguages, but En liﬅ), call'd mariam have rnade a Divifion of
NAMES; but our firﬅ ormers of NAMES, calling the Name oſ a;
Grammar, either out n"'Affectation Thing orSubﬅanOLPa Noun _Subflan
or Folly,corrnpted the Latin Word rive, and that, which ſignifies the
Nomen, into the barbarous Sound Manner or Qualiry, a Nazm Aſ
G 2. Jectwe.
jecti've. But theſeadditionalTerms flanccy, and the [Manner of Thingſ,
oſSuIzſr-zn'i-ue and Adjecti-ue ſeem or Accidentſ, that the Snbſmnce:
to us ſuperfluous, and burthenſome ſubſiﬅ by themſelves -, but the Ac
to theMinds ofthc young Learners, cident: ſubfiſt only by and in the
without any manner of Benefic to Subſrancw. -
theUnderﬅanding zſor the different This is what makes the principal
Nature of the Two Words is ſully Difference betwixt Words, that
capreſs'd by the Terms NAMES ſignify' the ſimple Objec's of out
andQUALlTIF-Sfflnd it is vain to Thouglrts; the Words which figni
do that by many, which may bc ſy Subftance', or theThings them
Fdone by few. Nature is ſimple in all fclves, are call'd Name: or Su mu
her Operations, and he is the beﬅ 'i-ve Nameſ; and thoſe whic fig
Engineer, who produccstbeEffe :t, nify Accidentſ, by expreffing the
Subjectr,
wn lithe ſcwcﬅWhecls,Screws, &je. dents with
agree, are which theſe Acei-'
call'd Qqaliuſier or
Thoſc,who uſe theſe Tcngs, give
this Reaſon for them, that they are (according to the common Way)
g'dlllfl flicteflizlerj or (as ſome) Ad Adjeffi-ve Nameſ, or Adnrtmes.
r Thisisthe'firſtOriginalofName-r;
realm, becauſe having no natural
Subſtancc of their own, they ſubſiﬅ both Subſranti-ve and Adjecti-ve, or
by nodring but the Naim Subfran Name: and' anlizier. But we have
tive, to which they are' join'd, as not ﬅopt here, for leſs Regard has
in theſe Two Words, round Earth, been bad tothesignification,than to
the, laﬅ is the Subfiamiw, and the the Manner of ſignifying. For be
firﬅ only ſignifies the Manner or cauſe the Subﬅance is that, which
anlity of its Being: That is, the ſubſiﬅs by itſelf, theAppellation oſ
Adjective, Adrrame, or zmlity *Subfi*anti-ue
þ Name: has been given
cannot be but by itſelf in any Sen to all thoſe Words which ſubfiﬅ by
tence; it won'd not make Senſe, it themſelves, in Diſoourſe, without
Wou'd convey no Idea to the Mind-5 wanting'another Name to be joi n'd
for to ſay a Round,aW/.vite, aBlack, to.them, tho' they did only ſignify
c Crooked, &r. is to ſay nothing : Accidents. Thus on the contrary,
It requires therefore ſome Name, or even thoſe Words, which ſignify
Naun Subſmntiw, asthey call it, to Subﬅances, are call'd'Yidjecti-vel,
bejoin'd to it, to make Senſe, or when by their Manner offignifying
form any Idea; as around. Ball, a they may b'e join'd to other Name:
white Horſe,a black Hnr,a 'crooked in Diſcourſe : As the Warriour God,
.Sti:k,' are true Objects of the the Bowye' King, and the like,
Thongbts, and every Body under which imo' they are call'd Names,
ﬅandsthem: But if you ſand/Van, put togetherbyAppofition,degene
la Horſe, a Houſe, &c. We perfectly rate here lainly into the Sigmfica.
know what you mean; and there 'tion of nalities belonging to the
fore ſhbſiﬅing by itſelf, in good Nameſ, and are therefore Name:
Senſe it is call'd a 'Subﬅancive degenerated into QaIi'ier, or sub.
Name, or in the vulgar Phraſe a fraud-ver into Adjecti-uer.
A'ann Subfranti-ue. ' But the Reaſon, that renders a
[a] The Objectsofour Thoughts Name uncapable of ſubfiﬅing by it
ſelf, iswhen, beſides itsdiﬅinct sig
are either Thingr, as the Sun, the
Earth, Water, Fire, Air, Wood, eke; nification, it has another more con
which we generally call s U B fus'd, which we call the CONNO
STA. NCE; or the ſummer of TATION of a Thing, to which
' Things, as to lie-round, red, bard, that agrees, which is meant by the
zknowmg,-&c. which are call'd AC diﬅinct Signification. -
LIDENTS. .A nd there is this dif Thus the diﬅinctSignification oſ
ference betwrxt the Thingſ, or Sub. Red, is Rednefr, but it fignifiesstbbe
, 3 fi . u -
'.
He Engliſh Grammar, witb Notes. 65

Subject oſ that Redneſs, confiis'dly, can have no Relation to any other
which makes it not capable of ſub Subyect. By chi; Means, tþcſc
fiﬅing by itſelf inDiſoourſo,becauſe Words have obtain'd what is peeri
we muſt expreſs, or underﬅand the liar to Suhﬅantives, viz. to ſnbfik
Word which ſignifies the Subject: by themſelves in Difltourſe.
As, therefore, that Connotatwn 'Tis for this very ſame Reaſon
makes the Adjectiw, or anlicy, that certain Namer, and Per-ſand!
ſo when that is taken away from Namer, or Prdnaum are taken dub
Words, which ſignify Accidenu, fmmi-vely, becauſe they relate to a
they becomeSuÞfmnriw-I orMmm : thﬅance ſo general,thatit iseafil
As from Colon r'd, Colour -, from Red, underﬅood, as our Country, Earr
Redne r ; from Hard, Hardneſ! 5 is underﬅood -, Judea, Praying (p
from rudenſ, Prudence, &e. On the underﬅood,
contrary, when you add to Words And we have obſerv'd, that An'ſi
ſignifying waſrancet, that Camom jection or Qqalitie: have Two Sig
zion, or confus'd Signification of a nificationszonc diﬅinct oftbeForm,
Thing,to which the Subſrance: have and one confuſed oſthesubjec'l : But
Relation, it makesthemddjectioer, we infer not from thence, that th
or Qui/rieſ, as Man, Manly, ſignifying the moﬅ diﬅinct Signi v
Mankind, &c. cation,are alſo the moﬅ direct 3 for
The Greek: and the Latin! have they ſignify theSubject dimctltho'
an infinite Number oftheſeWords; more confus'dly,but the Form only
as fen-ent, aureur,, baoinur, vituli indixectly, tho' more diﬅinctly.
mn, &c. but they are not ſo frequent Thustite ſignifies directly ſome
in the Hebrew, nor in French, and thing that ba: Whitenefl', but in a.
many of the vulgar Tongues; but very confus'd Manner, without de
in theEng/iſh,we think,they are not noting in particularany one Thin'
more rare, than in the dead Lan that may have Witeneſr, and ac
guages. fignifiestite-nef: only indited-ly,
Again, if we take theſe Comma but in as diﬅinct a Manner asthe
tion! from theſe Adjecti-ue: or an Word White-neﬅ itſelf . >
lm'e: form'd of Na'HEI, or of Sub There areTwo Sorts ofIzlearpne
flamiver, we make them new Sub repreſents to us a ſingle Thin , a'
ſtand-ver, which we may properly the Idea ofone's Father, Me' eme.
tall Deri'va'iver, and ſo Humanity Friend, his own Horſe, his town
comes from Humane, and Humanu: Dog, &Je. The other Idea preſent'
from Home. to us ſeveralThings together,but of
But there is another Sort of the ſameKind,as theldea oszm in.
Name-r, which paſsfor Subﬅantives, general,Horſes in generalſſg'c. Sne
tho' in reality they are Adjectives, not havin differthamerfor theſe
ſince they ſignify an accidental different dear,wecall the Namesd"
Form ; and beſides,den0tc a Subject ſingle Idear, proper Namerz as the
to which that Form agrees .- Such Name of Plain, which agrees to one
are the Namesof the ſeveralOffices, particular Philoſopher, ſo tom-lo,
and 'Profeffions of Men 4 as King, to one City; and thoſe- Name'
Philofopber, Painter, Soldier. &e. which fignify common Idearugenc
but the Reaſon why theſe paſs for ral, or appellative Names,_a' the
thﬅantives, is,that they can have Wotdle, which agrees withal!
nothing but Man for their Subject, Mankind -, of theſnmekindm th:
at-lfflﬅ, according to theordinary Words Lyon, Dog, Horſe, dtc. yet.
way of Speakiag, and the firﬅ Im the proper Name qften'belongs zta
poſition of Names, ſo not neceſſary Jeveml at the ſame Time, asPeter,
to join their zSuhﬅantives with Jal'n, Ram', _ &Cdl'ffltflhls is only
than, ſince they maybe underﬅood by Acddenr,h,y reaſon thatmm'
without any Cotzfnſion, and they newer-men the Fame Name; 'hue
ii 3 'Ben
I
Since Name: expreſs the Thing: themſelves, you cannot
put the Word Thing after 'em, without Nonfimſe. Thus you
Cannot Man Thing, Virtue Thing, and the like. -
They alſo admit of a or the before 'em, or an, if they
begin with a Vowel. . . 4
1 Of Names three ſeveral sort: there are,
t A: Common, Proper, Perſoml, declare.
v There are Three Sorts of NAMES; Common Name;v are
ſuch as agree to, or expreſs a whole Kind, as the Name
Horſe ſignifies 'ry Horſe, your Horſe, and all the Horſe: that
are - -
Proper Name: diﬅinguiſh Particular: of the Kind From each
other; as Caeſar, Pom ty, Cicero, diﬅinguiſh thoi'e'from all 'the
reﬅ of Mankind. T e ſome holds of the proper Names of
Cities, Dwm, Mountaim, Ri-uen, Countries, &c. '
u-z Petſſmal Name: are us'd, when We ſpeak of Perfim: or
Things, to avoid the Repetition of the ſime Word, and ſup
Ply the Place of Names of Men, Women, and Things.
Two different Reading: different Numhemſſ ſhow,
V And which no other Part of speech doe: know,
, [3] Neither in eneral ſignifying either one, cru'more of the
Lime kind, muﬅ; ve Two different Numbers to expreſs this
Difference; as, the singular, which ſignifies but One, and the
Plumlz which ſignifies _more than one; and all Name: diſcover
this Diﬅinction of Number, by the changing their Endings;
zs Mon,LOne Man; Men, more thanþOne.
' This likewiſe gives another >Mark to diﬅinguiſh Names
from-the Other. Parts of Speeeh: For tho' the Affirmatiom
have Two Numbers, yet are they not thus diﬅinguiſh'd; as
Woſhallfec, when we come to. 'em. There are Two more
Diﬅinctionsv of Names; Which .come properly after all the
Parts of SpEech, becauſe they depend on the Knowledge
Of, 'em. o -
To singular Names me aim), odd on (s)
' When 'me the Plural Number would expreſ: 5
' Or (es), for more delightful eozffl Sound, A
5. x; Pſ/herieyer the Singular to end i: fimml, _'
, 4_jnſi(e,x), or (ze), (ch), (ſh),_>or (s),
--.. (Ce),-(ge), when they their ſofter Sound canﬅ r.
ſ The'Sz'ngulor Number is made le-ol by adding. (y) to the
singular; as Tree, Treerg Hand, Hands; Mile and Miles:
But
' when'the' Neceffity' of* Pronmiotion
'_ _ requires
ſi " it inPlace
the
ſhe Engliſh Grammar, with Notes. 67
Place of (:), we muﬅ add (u); that is, when the Singuhr
ends in (.r) or (ſe), (ze), (x), (ſh), (u), (eh), or (ge) pronoun
ced ſoft, as Horſe, Horſes; Pox, Faxes ,- Fiſh, Fiſhes, and Fiſh;
Maze, Mazesz Prince, Princes; Tench, Tenthee; Page, Pngu;
by which means the Pluml Numberv conſiﬅs of Two Syl
lables, tho' the singular is but one; as all the foregoing Ex
amples ſhew.
V The following Example: are yet ſken,
[When for the (s) the Plural end: in (en),
A: Oxen, Women, Chicken, Brethren, Men.
Cow has the Plural Come, or Keen, or Kine;
And jb he: Sow the Pluml Sows, or Swine.
Ox, Chick, Man, and-all deriv'd from it, as Horſemnn, Foot
man, &e. Woman, Child, Brother, have the Plural in (env) ,*
tho' Brethren ſignifying both Brothers, and Siﬅers. has like
will: Brothers; and Swine ſignifies both Male and Female,
and with (e) before it, is us)d for one Hog, or Sow. Chicken
is ſometimes_lik_ewiſiz uſed for one Chick: Deer, Sheep, Fern,
are the fiimc in both Numbersz of the Singular with (u)
before them. "
To theſe Irre lars ſinne more mld yet,
A: Louſe, Liee5 Mouſc, Micez Gooſe, Geeſeznnd Foot, Feet 5
And Tooth, Teeth; Die, Died; andnlſb Penny, Pence,
Deri-v'd from Penny's Critiekrſhy, long ſince.
The Names, whoſe SingVnr: end in (f) or (fe),
Their Plurals have in (ves), 'me alway: ſee;
As, Calf, Calves, Sheaf, sheaves; half, halves; and Wife,
'* Wives;
Leaf, Leaves; Loaf, Loaves; Shelf, Shelves; ſelf, ſelvesz
' Knife, Knivcsz
Add unto theſe Wolf, Wolvcsz Thieſ, Thieves; Life, Lives.
Smff has Sea-vex, tho' the double (m Sinffular generally makes
double Of) with (.t) in the Plural;' as Ctff; slafi", Mufl; &e.
Miﬅ'hief is us'd both Miſchie'ue: and Mifihizfl in the-'Pluralz
(fl and (u) are ſo nearly related, that they eaſily paſs fiom
one into the other, in 'all Languages. nt l ._
Exeept Hoof, Roof, and Wharf, and Prooſ, Relief,
Ruff, Cuff, Skiff, Muff, Dwarf, Handkerchief, and Grief.
There may be ſome others of the flame Kind, theſe are
enough to make good the Exception in the Sound of thoſe Sin
gulars that end in (:) and (th): There is a like Softning or
Alleviation. whithout chmging the Lettgrsa As lie-fiſt: Hot-[415.
- as
as it were HMZeS, Path, Pathsz Cloth, Cloths, or clearly;
Earth keeps its harder Sound when 'tis us'd in the Plural,
which is but ſeldom.
Cuﬅom, to 'which all Lady-'ger mnfl'hm,
Doe: to ſome. Name: no-Singulm allow.
Uſe has in Engli , as well as other La wages, deny'd
the Singular Number to ſome Words; as Amm s, Alpr, Aſhn,
Bench, Bellows, Breeehn, Calendr, Creffer, Goodr, (meaning
Things poſſeſs'd by any one, as the Goods of Fortune) En
tmilr, Ider, Swallow: of every Kind, Names, Stiſſorr, S'mffen,
Shem, Tongs, Lungr, &e.
To other: ſhe, with arhitmry V/ill,
Denie: the claim of Plural Number ﬅill;
All Proper Names 'me in this Rule contain,
The Name: of Liquids, Herbs, mofl Som of Groin,
'Fat unctuous Matter, Wax, Pitch, and Glue,
The Name: of Virtues, Vice, and Metals too.
As we have ſome Words, which have no Sin lar Number',

ſo on the other Hand, we have many more wit out a Plural,
ſome by the Nature of the Things ſignified, others by meer
Uſe. Thus all proper Names of Men, Women, Mountains,
Rivers, or any other Creature, to whom, for Diﬅinction, a
proper Name is given; as Bueephalu: to the Horſe of Alexan
der the Great; Theſe have no Plural Number, becauſe they
naturally agree but to one: For when w,e ſky, the Ceſrm, the
Alexander-r, the Mordaunts, and the like, it is figurativel , in
cluding under thoſe proper Names all thoſe who re emble
them in their Valour, Conduct, Virtue, eye. except Alpr, and
perhaps Pennines.
To the e we may add the Names of Virtuer, Vim, Hahin,
abﬅract Walitiesz of Metalr, Herbs, Spim, Liquids, unctuous
Matter, Fat, Wax, Pitch, Glue ; moﬅ Sorts of Grain, as When',
Rye, Barley, Dan-nel, except O/m and Tares, (Petm Beam, and
Vetohe: are Pulſe, not Grain, tho' ſet down by ſome for 'em)
likewiſe Chaff, Bran, Meal. The Names of Spices, as PepPer,
Ginger, MAN, Cimmron, except Clove: and Nunneg: : Of
Herbs and Drugs, Coehineol, Sotherwood, Grafi, Madder, Rue,
Mg/S, Fennel, RoſZ-mmy, mhfwort, Cli-ver, Sage, Far/Io),
Spike'mrd, Spimuh, Sea/or), Hellebore, Hemlock, &e. except Coi
wortr, Leebs, Artiehoakr, Cabbage', Nettles, and thoſe whoſe
Names are compounded with Foot or Tongue, as Cronfl'ot, Adj
den-tongue; _0ſ Liquids, as Air, choler, Blood, ngfl, or new
Wine
Tbe, Engliſh Grammar,,'witb Notes. 69
Wine, Bear, Ale, spittle, Snot, Swear, Urine, Vinegar, Milk:
Of Unctuous Matter, as Honey, Butter, Fat, Greafle, Amber,
Wax, Marrow, Pin/7, Roſin, Tar, Glm, Lard, Dirt, Sulphur,
Birumen, Brimﬅone: Of Metals, as Lead, Braﬅ, Pewter, Tin,
Copper, Silver, Gold; add Ivory, fet: OfVirtucs, Prudence, Ju
flice, Cbafliy; and of Vices, Pride, sloth, En-uj: Of abﬅract
Walities, Wiſdomerobitj, Modeﬅj, Bnſhfulng/Ic, Swiftneſi, 'Bold
mfx, Can/fancy, Courage, Ardour, Candour, Contempt, Palenefl,
Fame; add to theſe, Iſimger, People, angar, Offipri'rg, Bull,
Duﬅ, Soot, Wool, lzt'c.v -
The beﬅ Rule for this is, That Things that are ſmall and
undiﬅinguiſhable, want the Plural Number; but thoſe which
are larger, and more diﬅinguiſh'd, have it. A!
Thus much for Names Common and Proper; we ſhall con
clude this Head with a thorough Examination of the third
Son, call'd Pnfimzl 'Names."
'
[4]
, . \
The:
then other Name' are added, which As for Common and Aye/[ative
determine and reﬅore the uality Mrmer, they ſeem all naturally to
of a proper Name. Thus the 'ame require a Plural Number, yet are
oſC72ar1e: is common to many, yet there ſeveral which have none, whe
if you add the (;d),it becomes pro ther by the Influence oi'Cuﬅom on
per to the King of that Country ly, or ſomc Reaſon ; ſo the Name:
where 'tis ſpoken. Nor isit necell of Gold, Silver, Iron, or other Me.
ſary ſometimesjto makeany Addi-. tals, have ſcaree any Plnral in any
tion, becauſe the Circumfiances of. Language. The Reaſon of which
the Diſcourſe ſuffieienrly denote the' we fancy to be this,That becauſe of
Perſon that is ſpoken oſ. the great Reſemblance there is be
[3] The common Namer, which tween the Parts of Metals, every
agree to ſeveral, may he conſider'd Species thereof is nor conſider'd, as
ſeveral Ways: For Fifſſ,Tth may having ſeveral Individualsunderit.
either be apply'd to one of the This is very palpablc in theB-eneh,
Things,to which theyagreepr may* where to denotea ſingular Metd,
all beconfider'd in a certain Uni-y we add the Particle of' Partition,
ty, which the Philoſophers call de L'Or, de L'Argenr, 'du Far, Gold,
UNIVERSAL UNlTY. edly, Silver, Iron, as we ſay Ironx, but
They may. be apply'd to ſeveral to then it ſignifies not the Metal it
gether, conſidering them as ſeveral. ſelf, but Inﬅruments made of
To diﬅinguiſh theſe two Sorts of lron; the Latin 0221.: ſignifiesMo
Ways ofSigmfying, two Numbers ney, or a certain founding Inſtru
have been invented, the Singuldr, ment, like the Cymbal, &it.
as a Man -,theP/_ural, as Men. Nay, But this Difference of Number in
the Greek: have yet another Num the Names, is expreſs'd by a Diffe
ber, call'd the Diml Number, or rcnce of Termination or Ending,qs
ſignifying TWo; theHebrew: have is expreſs'd in the Text. But tho'
the ſame, but that is only when the szalnier ſhould have a Plural be
Words' ſignify/a Thing double ei cauſe they naturally implY an un
ther by Nature, as the Eye', the certain Signification of a Subject,
Handr, the Feet z or by Art, as which renders them capable of a
Scifl'ort, Tongr, &a. greeing with
ſi
ſeveral Snbjectsl.2as:
'70 The Engliſh Grammar, with Notes.
leaﬅ a' to the Manner oſfignifying, Girl; Brotber, St'fier; Butk, Do: ;
tho' in Effect they did only agree to Bull, Cow; Bil/lock, Heifer - Crack,
one, yet in En liſb there 15 no dif Hen z qu, Bitch; 'Dun-le, brake;
ference ofthe ermination or End Father, Mother; GoZ/Þ, Gander z
ing, to diﬅinguiſh this Agreement. Hor e, Mzre; Hurban , 'fe- 5 Lad,
There are Three Thing' more, La r;King,deen; Man, Woman;
which are Caſt, Declen inn and Maﬅer, Dame ; Nepbew, Niece ;
Gentle-r, which the Bag/if) Name! Peacock, cPea/'en 3 Ran', Dwe -, Son,
have not. But the Caſel of the La Daughter ; Uncle, ctum ; Widawer,
'in and Greek expreſſmg the Rela Mdaw; Mzard, V'itcb -, Batcbelar,
tion' of Word to Word, and their lin'd, Virgin ; Knight or Lord,
Dependance on each other, we ſup Lady. But-the following Twenty
ply thatwith greater Eaſe by Pre four Femininesor Females, medi
ſitions, as by of, ra,far, from,_&c. ﬅi liſh'd from the Males, by the
ut theſe having a peculiar regard Vanation of the Termination of
to the Conﬅruction ofWords join'd the Male into (eſr.)
in Sentence', we ſhall refer our
Lenrner to that Place. Abbot Abbeſ:
Tho'we have (inour Language) Actor Actreſr
no Note ofd ifl'erence of Gender, ciſi Adulterer ſhin/'refl
ther by the End ing or Termination Ambaſſador Ambaflkdrefi
of the Word', or any Article proper Count Cavitieſ:
'o them, yet we thought it proper Deum" ' Deamneſ:
in this general View of GRAM Duke Dutcbef:
MAR, whichwcgive you in theſe Electar Electrjfi
Noteſ, to add Dmcthing on this Emperor Empre I
Head inrelation to otherTongues. Governe' Governe/i
The Adnamet, or Adjective Heir lyfe-ire?
Namer,or, asWe call them, ngli e-w me r
n'er, naturally agree to ſeveral,:md Zion Lioneſ:
there-flute it has been thought fit, Marqui: Mtrquer, or
'both for the avoiding ofConſufion Marcbioneſ:
'nd the Ornament of Diſcourſe, Maſter Mifirefi
'ith Variety of Termination: to Prince Princeſ]
invent aDiverſity in theAdjeHi-ver, cPrz'or Triorefi
Adnamel, or Quiizier, ſuitable to 'Pan-on Tarroneſr
the Name: or &Manſ-ver, with Toe' lPruſſe-ſ: v
'hied they agree.
Trapber 'Propbeteſſir
NowMen having conſider'd them. Sbepberzl Sbepberdefi'
ſalves, and ohſenſd the conſiderable Tutar Turorefl
Differenoe ofthe twoSexes,thought Vifl'nn' Viſcoun'eſr
fit to vary the ſame Adjective And twoin (u), a'
Names, by giving them different Adminiflrarrix, Execu'rix.
Terminations, as they are diﬅbrent
ly apply'd to Men or Women, as This is all, that our Language
whenwe ſay in Latin, bamu Vir, a knows, of any Thing like the Gen
good Man,in theMaſculine -, ſpeak ders,which is only a differentWay of
ing ofa Woman, they change the 'expreſſing tthale and theFemale,
vII'S-ndin of the Adjet'h'w or Qlafi but the old Languages have gone
ty, an ſay balm Melier. farther : For as ſome Adjecti-uer or
But in Engliſh we are more ﬅrict Lia/iſle: might have Relation to
in this; for We expreſs the-difference other Things beſides Men and Wo
oſ Sex by different Words, and not: men, it was thought neceſſary to
by the Yariation of Epithem or appropriate to them, one or other
Jubﬅanxwelz as Bear, Saw; Boy, ofthe Termination: invented for
Men
The Engliſh Grammar, with Notes. '7 I
Men and Women: Hence all other AdjeHi-uer or Qynlirie: taken Sub
Names, or Subﬅantives, have flnnti-uely, becauſethey commonly
rang'd under the Heads of Maſcu filbſiﬅ in Diſcourſe by themſelves,
line orFeminine, and ſometimes in and have nodifferentTerminations
deed not without a plauſible Rea accommodatod to the differentGen
ders, as Victor,ViHTrſix,Rex,Re5ina,
ſon, as in the Names of Offices pro
perly belonging toMen, as Rex, - Piflo', Pifr'ix, and the like.
dex,&c. ( which, as we have b ote We ought alſo here to obſerve
hinted, are but improperly Slibfian from hence, that what the Grain
river) which are of the Mzſculine maria'u call Epitene, isneta diffe
Guide', becmſe Home is under. rentGender, for fix/per (a Fox),tho'
Rood.
Few-leInOffice:
the ſame
are Manner, all the
of the Femzſinine it indifferently ſignifies either the
Male or Female, Is really of the
Gentle', as Mater, Uxor, Regimz, Feminine Genderin the Latin, and
&e. becauſe Mulieritsmde'rﬅood. thus in French the Word At' 1'
But this happens in other Caſes (an Engle) is truly Feminine,
meekly hyFane'y,'ithout any other cauſe the Maflmline or Femlnkt
Reaſon, than the'l'yranny of Cu Gender in a Word, doe' not ſo pro
ſtom, and therefore it varicsnccord ly regard itsSignificationpathat
ing to the Languages, or eyen ac r ſhould be ofſuch a Nature as to
cordingto theWordsintroduc'd fi'nm join 'ith Adjective or an'i , in
one Lan rage into another. Thus the Maſculine or Femlnme emit
Arhor, a ree, is Femr'nine in Latin, nation as either doe'occur: And ſo
but Arln'e is Maſeuline in French, in thcia'in, cuſtom, 'fig/"lie, m.
and Dem (aToothfis Maſcullne in ſoner, or Ware-'man or Cen'ine',
Latin, and Feminine in French are really Feminine, tho'they fig:
(Denr). Nay, that has ſometimes nit'y Mcn. This is what is common
ehang'd in one and the ſame Lanv in the Genders to all Languagcs
guage according toTimesandOcca. that have them.
lions. Andthns according toPriſci. TheLatin andGreek in theNcnter
an, Al-vur in Latin, was anciently Gender do not regard them, having
Maſculine, and after'srd: became no Relation to theMale or Female
Feminine; Navire (a Ship) was an Sex,but whatFancy gives them,and
ciently Feniinine in French, but is the Termination of certain Words.
now Muſt-Mine. ſ4) Tho' we think it pretty ob
The ſameVariation ofCuﬅom or, vious, that (PerfonaINamer are not
Uſe has made ſome Words, which a different Part of Speech from
'ere formerly certain, oſa doubt Namer, notwithﬅanding ſome, who
ſnl Genderſheingus'd as Maſculine are wedded to the old Way, only
by ſome, as Feminine by others, as becauſe it is old, yet we ſhall here
he, or 'me Finir in Latin, or le or add the learned Mr.70hnſan'sProoſ
la Come in French. of this Truth. (Bononn (ſays he in
his fiﬅbAnimadverfion, 40.) quafi
But the Gender, which is call'd
doubtfiil, is however not ſo com pro Nomine: I! i: put fir a Noun
mon as ſomeGramm-zriam imagine: then it ſeem by 'be None, and our
ſor it properly helongs only to the Author (LILLY) it i: mue/'7 like
Names of ſome Animals, which in a Noun in hi: Definition of it, ſb
Greek and Latin are romiſcuonſiy like indeed, that it iſ 'be ſame:
The an/ Difference ber-win 1' and
join'd both to Maſct ine andFemi
nine Mjecti-ue: or &la/inn, to other ouns, ir, that it 'gnifier a
expreſs either the Male or Female, (Per an Trimnrily, and econdarily
as Box, Canir, Sin, &r. a T ing, which i: Voſſms'r Defini
There are ﬅill other Word', tion aſ it. Palmario Nomen reſpi
'hich they place under the Neutcr cil, I ſuppoſe, Nor-nen Perſonre, ſe
Gender, but they are properly only cundario rem,11nalag. lit. r. cap. _3
* and
L.
'72 The' Engliſh Grammar, with Notes.
Ihree Perſons only me? Longdage'elaim:,' "l
' Which we expreſſ ſtill' chVfolloiszg' Nh'mes;
'" I, Thou, and He; She, "It, e,*Ye, and They,
Ifyou to theſe will ddd,Who, What, you may,
[5] Since in Diſeourſe whatever isdlnd, is lpoke either
of ourſelves, to another, or of a third, it is neceſſary, that
there be Three Perſonsz 'I, the firﬅ,_thbr4,' the ſecond, and he,
. . ._,, e,
and
e * e'ifirfi nifiNation
Mdergt/JE a Pero hfffiq itNoun,
muſt' our ſelveshfipul' Ptp -Namez,and
[gab 'Ppr on i." o'Thin , filth a for that Reaſonthe, anon-e oflche
firﬅ Perſon was introduc'd toil-and
hi' a! may he eanfiderdalane by in. the; Place of his_Namq who
the' l aderſtanding, and he the Sub ſpeaks,.as I, We. _ _ .
jaﬅ bfa Pronouſſn,j'orſithere
jtaintive 'Medieval mean 'he areSub
alſo And'on thevotherHand, to avoid
the 'toofr uentiujkepetition of the
Pronqrms Adjectiize. Indeed, thi: Name of ,_Perſ n to whom you
fart ofS 'ech i: in order of Nature ſ algthou or you, Pronamer of the
'the firﬅ [grim for 'when Adam and [good Perfon) were invented.
Eve were only"in the World they And laﬅly, toavoid thetoooften
' eeded no orherkName but, and repeating the Names of other Per
Short to ſþeak to. one another, and ſom orTbings of which we diſcourſe,
' Aho e Name: 'ty/Ere no' gie-en them the Bet-ſone] Name-1. of the third
(drofany Neee ny, flePronoun Perfon were invented, as He, She,
'thergZore i: a 0un,onl) alPetibnal it, who, What. ' ' , .
gle, elſe, ur'dP-when We peak of Theſe' Per-florid, Nomer perform
._ hings fer-fiendly, 'to 'which (upon ing the Office, and ſhpplying the
the Mtliip'lieation of Mankind) Place oſotherNamer,they haverlikc
Two' added the proper. Name to, di them two Numben, that which fig
flzngutgvaeffons by, andalſo parti nifies one, vand
moreſithan gite, that
(i. e. which
the Si ſignifies
ular),
cular 'ngs, which are a: it were as Lthoſſn, you, he; and the lurol,
'ſpoken of erfonally, when the-yore
'ſpoken o 'particularly And thy' s we, ye, or w, and Jhey. Tou
_'-we fiiul Nouns ru'd in 'he-firﬅ Per (as lus been aid) is us'din the Sin
ſon, a: Romulus Rex Regia Alma gular for thou and thee, as well as
affero. L'v. i. xx. alſo Anobal pcto in the Plural for ye.lThus in French,
pacem. I .l, 30. and Cal ius re vour' 'For tu and thy.
cenſui.at the End erence's In other Langnages, which have
Plays. And thus fat/Mr. jolmſon, Genderr,the Pronaun: have the firme,
which is ſufficient to ſhew, that we the' firſt and eeond'are common,ex
have juﬅly lae'd them here under cept in the ebr'e-w, and thoſe Lan
the Head 0 Names. gwages whiehimitate that in (which
Lz] The frequent Repetition of the Mafculine is diﬅinguifizfd from
the ſame Wotds, being as diſagree-s the Feminine, but in the Eut/ill:
ahle,asit is neceſſary for us to lpea kj We'have no_Genderr,,as has -cu
_oﬅcn of the ſame Thing, to awoidz, ſeen in'xhei'oregoing Notes. .'I'he
this,there are, in all known Lan ſame play he ſaid of Caſes. There
guages, certainWords eﬅabliſh'd tq is this to be obſerv'd in theſe Per
ſupply this Defect, and remove this? ſonalNamer, That theTermination
Indccorum, which are call'd Proj changes in both Number; when it
name-r, for Name', Perſonal Namer; Comes after a Verh or 'Yard of Af
or as vulgarly in Engliſhffironoum: firmation, asI, me; we, ur; thou,
In the firſt Place it has been ob' her,
'hee th:y,ſſz*hfm
z you, or ye,5 you; be, itA
except him; ſhe
which
ſerv'd, that it would be tedious a;
w ell as indu'ent to be oiten training does not vary. [r] In
ſhe, or it, the third of which all other Words but I or thou, with
the Plurals, are. If we ſpeak of a Male, we lay, he; if of a
Female, ſhe, if of Things that have no Sex, we uſe it. The
Plural Number of I is we; of thou, on and ye ,- tho' by Cuﬅom
we num, when we ſpeak but al]one Perſon, thou being ſel
dom us'd but to GOD, as Wilt thou, 0 Lord! and on ſolemn Oc
caſions to Princes, Remember, O Prince! that thou art horn a
Man ,- otherwiſe thou is never us'd but in Contempt, An er, Diſ
dain, or Familiarity. He, ſhe, and it, have (in the Plur Numz
ber) only they.
Theſe Names in hath the Number: we allow
A leading and a following State to know;
The leading State is I, the following ME, i
The following State i: US, the leading WE,
That THOU and THEE, YE, YOU, HE, HIM and SHE
HER; THEY and THEM; who and whom 5 but WHAT;
To 'vary like the refl do not think fit. (and IT,
Thoſe Perſbnal Name: have in both Numbers a double Form
or State, the firﬅ is what we may call the leading State, as I;
the ſecond the following State, as ME. In the Plural Number
the leading State is We, the felle-ming Us. The Second is in the
leading State TH o U, in t e following TH EE, in the Plural
TE and YO U. The third is in the leading State HE, if we
ſpeak of a Male, in the flllowing, H I M ,- or S H E, H E R, and
in the Plural THer, THEM, which is the Plural of HE,
SHE, and I T, which never varies its Endin , and is in both
Fates I T, when we ſpeak of Things of neit er Sex. WHO
m the leading State or both Numbers has WH OM in the&fil
hwing State in both. It 'is call'd the Interrogati-ue, becau it:
asstieﬅions ofPe'jfbn: or Indi-uidaal: (as, Who i: there, Peter P)
asWhae does of the Kind, or Qalit] 5 and alſo in the Order of
a'I'hing; as, What is that e it is a Book; What are thou? in the
Order of Number, the firﬅ, ſecond, third, fourth, &a. (which
is the ſame in both the leading and following State, or indeed,
like 12) It has no State.
But to make this the plainer, we ſhall lay down a Vicw of
alltheſe Perfimal Name: together, in both their States.
Perfil'{ Sing. { I Ille
Plur. WP U'
sin _ Thou. Thee
erſ. 2.. { Plu? { Te Uſ
t He IIIſim
Parſ. 3. -{ JHK- -{ Sbe Her
Plur. The] The"
Perſons who
i nterrog.{ Things lem 'whom
3 \ CHAP.
C H A P. VII.
Of QUALITIes.
W'e've ſeen, that Names the Things themſelves expreſi,
Quilitics the Manners of thoſe Things eoafeſu
And on the Names intirely do depend,
For without them the can no Senﬅ: pretend:
As round, black, w ite, ſwift, crooked, ſquare,
Mogfl (to be under/load) to Names adhere.
[1] A MES, as we have ſeen, expreſs the Thing: them
ſelves, Qalitie: are the Manners of thoſe Things,
as good, had, round, ſquare, &c. For Example, The Being of
Wax, is the Subﬅance of Wax, or Wax it ſelf, without regard
to any Form or Colour, and is what we properly call the
Name; the Roundneſi, Squarcneſs of the Figure, (which may
be abſent without an Dctriment to the Being of the Wax)
are the Manners of the Being; as to be ignorant, or know
ing, are the Manners or Walities of our Being,- thus we ſay
a round, black, white, &e. Table; Table is the Name, and
round, black, white, &a. are the Valities of that Name.
And ſince theſe Words are added to Names, to explain
their Manner of Being, in reſpect of ſome Quality, Num
ber, Figure, Motion, Relation, Poﬅure, Habit, (y-c. as a cun- '
ning For, the third Heaven, a crooked Crab-tree, a ſwift Horſe,
a Golden Candleﬅitl', &e. they are properly call'd Walities,
and are incapable, preſerving their Nature, of being added
to any other Part of Speech. '
Thing, that to follow Names did ﬅill dat),
Dne: afier Qualities good Senſe ſapply,
A' black Thing, white Thing, good Thing may cen-uince,
This make: that underﬅood, and be good Senſe.
. Your
, .
(11 In out Note: onv NAMES, the GeneralGRAMMAR. But we
wc have likewiſe deliver'd ſuch cannot omit Mr- Jol-njon's Proof,
Sentiments of anh'xier, underthe That the Adjectivc ar ÞIBUW i! a
Title of Adjtcti'ver, Adnamer, &C. different cPart of Speec from the
'as are ſufficient to be ſaid on thic Name or Subſmmi-ue. Grammati
Head,at1caﬅ as far as relates to cal Commcncaries, p. 8. T/ge Ad
jective
ſhe Engliſh Grammar, 'with Notes. '75
jective (no doubt of it) requires a Here it thena 'very different End
Subflanti-ue to be join'd with it in and Intention in the Uſe of theſe'
Spcecb, to which it may adhere. Wordt, and that i: one good
But the Queſtio" it, 'whether it be Ground of tonſtitutiug different
a Noun, or Name ofa Thing;rhat Tartt of Specch. But then, not on
ir, whether it he equally ſo with the ly the End in signification, but
Subﬅantive ;for if it he not, there i: the End alſo in Conftruction it very
not an unequal Participation ofthe different, and that i: the other
Genus between theſe Two, and ſo Gr'O'Ind of making different Parts
the Divi/ion it imperfect and Equi of Speech. For I know no Reaſon,
vocal : That it, theſe Two have not why any Body ſhould he troubled
'be fame Genus, and therefore can with the Diſnnction oſ the ſeveral
not he the fame Tart of Speeeh. Parts ofSpeech, but to know their
Now, IſupPoſe,thatnoBody willſay, different Signiflrationr and Con
the Adjetnve it equally, or a: much ctructiont in general, or how gene
the Name of a Thing at a Subﬅan rally to make uſe of them in
tive. The Subﬅantive repreſent: all Specch.
that it e/jeiztial to the Nature of the Tho' this be a Demonﬅmtion of'
Thing, at Homo, a Man, repre the Difference between the None
ſent: Animal rationale, or a ratio and Qtality, or Suhftanti-oe and
nal living Creature; but Bonus, Adiecti-ue, and that they are Two
Good, repreſent: only an accidental different Parts of Specc'h; yet ſmczr
&la/fly, 'which tho' morally ne what follows proves the Far/iciple
ceſſary, it not naturally ſo, .hut and Adjefli-ve to be one Part of
merely accidental. So that tho' a Speecb, we ſhall purſue ourlenrncd
Man may be call'd Good, and there Author's Diſcourſe, only adding,
fore Good, in game Sex/e, may he that Scioppiut long ſince eontended
ſaid to he hit ame, yet it i; not for the ſame Thing in his Inſtitu
equally at much hit Name ar Man, tionet Grammn'iec Latin-e, in the
Yl'lf laſt repreſenting all that i: ef beginning of' his Auctaarium, p.
fenrial to hit Nature, the other only 161. of the Book. '
'what i: accidental. For Adjectivum Now the Conſtruction of a Sub
corner from adjicio, and there can ﬅantive i: it: Governmenr, I>y which
be no need of adding any thing to it i: govern'd in ſuch Cafe ar it:
theSubﬅantive, but what it acciden DePendence require: in it; few.
tal, for what it neceſſary and eſſen ral Relation' that it may have in a
tial, it in the Subﬅantive already. Sentence: Whereat the only Con
7Tir therefore a ſufiicient Defini ſtruc'lion of the Adjoctive iſ it: A
tion of a Subﬅantive, That it if the greement with itt Subﬅantive, or
Name of a Thingzbur that it may being govern'd by it, ſo at to a ree
he known 'what it meant by Thing, with it in Cafe, Gender and um
I have added, which may ſo ſhbfiﬅ her, whatever Relation it he in, or
in the Imagination, as to be the whate-ver Cafe it he in by that Re
Subject of Predication: And the lation. And tho' Subﬅantives he
true Definition of an Adjective. iſ, Put in Appafition with other Sub
that it is aWord added to the Sub 'ﬅantives and agree with them, yet
ﬅantive, t'o declare ſome additional thit i: no real Objection, ſuch Sub
Accident of the Suhſtanti-ve conſi ﬅantives becoming Adjectives by
der'd by it ſelf -, as of Qnalityfflro that very Uſe, at an Adjective or
perty, Relation, Action,Paflion, or any other Part of Speech become: a
manner of Being. I have added Subﬅantive, when it it uſ'd like a
conſider'd by it ſelf, becauſe the Subttantivc; that it, conſider'd a:
Relation. of Subﬅantives, at conſi a Thing. NOW in thit the Parti
der'd in Sentencer, it declar'd by ciple and the Adjective both a ree
Prepoſitions and not hy_A.djodl1ver-l at-'well in Sigm'fication at Can. Yf"
LL zr ction
You may know this Part of Speech, by putting Thing aſ
ter it, which it will bear with good Senſe, as a good Thing, a
black flying, a white Thing, &e. nor has it any different End
ing to expreſi one and mony. And as it cannot be under
ﬅood, or convey any ldea, or Notion by it ſelf, (as we can
not in Sc-nſe ſhy, a black, a white, &c.) without being join'd
to ſome Name, (as ahlack Horſe, a good Man, a white Houſe, &c.)
ſo it bears all Far-title: expreſſmg different Relation: of Name:
with the Name to which it belongs; for it can do nothing
nor ſignify any thing, without a Name expreſs'd or under
ﬅood, as, to hit 'be whitei (Mark) is underﬅood; to hond one
Green (Turf) is underﬅood; refuſe the evil (Thing), and
chOOſe the good Thing), is in both Places ſuppos'd.
In ct ities'm different Number: are,
A: t eir un-unrj'd Endings ma] declare.
This is ſpokeas to their Forms in our Langu e; for in

other Languages, where they have various Terminations, they
have Numbers.
Three kind: of (Lialities there are, we know,

Which from their Name: immediate-I] do flow:
Firﬅ, from Poſſeſſion, 'me poſſeffive call,
Andfrom all Names hj adding (s) do full. h ſ
T ee
ction. T'e Adjective declare: an that that Different i: no' ſufficient

accidental Difference of the Sub to make them different Parts of
ﬅantive, ſo doe' the Participle. The Speech, [ſhall ſhe-w in my Animad
Adjective denominatei the Subﬅan 'verſion uPon the Infinitive MOOd ;
tive by that accident-1! Difference, which, notwithſtanding it: Can/ig
ſo in ſome Senſe become: it: nification of Time, I ſhall pro-ye to
Name, ſo doe: the Participle; un he n Subﬅantive. And therefore,
Ieſ: any one 'wi/[ſhy than: trotting if Con/ignification of Time 'will not
Horſe doe: not a: much denominate unſubſtantive thuſ, a: agreeingUin
'he Subﬅantive ar a white Horſe. the general Signiflcation and ſe
The Adjective agree: 'with in Sub of a Subﬅantive, foneither will the
ﬅantive in Conſtruction, and ſo doe: like Can/ignificarion of Time un
'be Participle. The on? Diference adjective the Participlc which a
bet-ween them ir, that r e Participle gree: in general Signi ration and
ir ſaid to ſignify ſome diſtinct Conjunction with the djective.
Time. I ſhall conſider that hereaf Thus far Mr. johnfon; and he
ter, but if that Difl'erencr he ſuf makes his Word good in Animad
ficient to make them 'wa Parts of verſion, from p. 341, to 350; which
S eeh, the Adjective and Suhﬅan he may conſult that is not ſa
tive muſt he two different Parts, be tisfy'd with what we have pro
cauſe ofa greater Diſerence. But due'd from him on thisHead.
[e] Thoſe
The ' Engliſh Grammar, oath Notes. 77
Theſe Pofleffi-ue leitier, or Qalitie: of Poſſeſſion, are
made by any Name, whether singular or Plural, by adding
(:)'or (e.<), if the Neceſſity of Pronunciation require it; as
Aſan's Nature, for the Nature of Man; Men: Nature, for the
Nature of Men. Whllefs Poems.
But the plural Name in (s) doe: end,
The (s) poſſeſſivc and that (S) it join'd.
If the Plural Name (as it generally does) end in (:), the:
two (n), (that is, that which forms the Number, and that
which. forms the Poſſeſſion) join in one, or rather one is left
out for the Ealincſs of Sound; as the Lord: Houſe, for the
Houſe of Lordr ,- the Common: Houſe, for the Heatſ? of Common,
inﬅead of the Commom': Houſe, the Lorde's Houſe.
The ſame in Proper Names i: often found,
For the more eaſj/ Flaming of the Sound.
The ſame is often done in the Singular Number, When a
proper Names ends in (r), as Priamas Daughter, Vetm: Temple,
for Priamm's Daughter; or Venur's Temple. Tho' the full.
writing is ibmetimes preſerv'd, as King Charler's Court, and
St. jamex's Park, and the like. [a]
Whene'er Two Names compotortded we do ſhe,
The i: alway: deem'd a (Lump
This is the other Sort of Qalitier, that derive themſelves"
immediately from NAMES; as Sea-fiſh, Self-Lo'vepRiverfiflr,r
Turkey Voyage, Sea-Voyage, Homer-made, &If-murder. Munflaugh
ter, Gold-Ring, and. this ſort of oaalitier'Dr. Walli: calls 're-
ſþefli-ue ,- in which, almoﬅ all other reſpects (but thoſe of p£>
ſZffi-ve eQualitiee) are implfd; which are yet more diﬅin ,
when they are requir'd to be expreſs'd by Particler. This"
is nothing elſe, but the Name put after the manner of a,
'QMZ-Zly, and join'd.to. the following Word, by this Liriehsi;
[a] Thoſe, who have imagin-'d ception of the Uſe-ofthe (:) where
that this (r) was pnt in the Placeof there is occaſion, yet we muﬅ deny
hiſ, (the firﬅ Part beingcut off-by that theretdr'e it ought almws to
ApÞere/ir) ,and that therefore the be done and toſ'gnifv thehbſenee
Note of Apo/iz'oj-be ought always of in), for it isjoin'd oftento the
to be expreſs'd or underﬅood, are Names of XVomen, and to cPlurnl '
extremely out of the Way in their Namer, where hiſ cannot be (up-w
Judgment. or tho' we do not de pos'd to be without a palpahie Sole
ny, but
may the Note
juﬅly lac'd cifln -,-and 'in the Words men, yonrr,
of the A lit:ﬅrophe
(ibmetiin'en
their', ben, . where ſure no Body
n'ere,_to give a more difim pet con'd ever drawn them] ſhou'dtez:
11.; . man-e
'78 The Engliſh Grammar, niith Notes.
Mark call'd Hyphen, to incorporate it, as it were, into one
Word, and which is ſometimes done without that ſhort
Line.
As ualities from Names, 'me/he, do flow,

Thuflvme to Pers'nal Names me likewiſe owe ;
As our, ours 5 their, theirs; her, hers; my and mine;
His, your, yours, and its, and whoſe, thy, and thine.
Theſe are Perſonal Poſſcffives, and my, thy, her, our, your,
their, are us'd, when they are join'd to Names, as This zs ny
Her/i', This is my Hat. But mine, thine, hers, yours, theirs, are
us'd, when the Name is underﬅood; as This Horfi is mine,
This Hat is thine; that is, This Horſe is m Her/le,- This Hat is
thy Hat, &e. Thus own cannot follow t e latter, but the for
mer, as we ſhy, not yours own, or ours own, but your own, and
our own. But mine and thine are moﬅ commonly us'd, when a
Name follows, that begins with a Vowel; as my Arm, or
mine Arm,- thy Aunt, or thine Aunt. We ſhall put them all in
one View, as we have done. the Perſonal Names.
without
the
the
with
Name Name
Sing. My Mine
Parſ: 1' ſi: Plur. z Our Ours
Sing. Thy Thine
Pan z' { Plur. i Tour Yours
His
Perſ- 3- g
si
Plfiz
. {
He'
Their
Hm
Their:
Theſe by no means ſubfiﬅing by themſelves, nor ſignify

ing any thing without Reference to ſome other Name or
Names, are properly Walities, [z] '
Ano
[3] The Demonﬅratives thiſ and For they are not put: for a Name or
that, and their Plurals theſe and Suhfmmi-uez that is, they do not:
thoſe, 'he ſame,and the Relative or ſupply the Place oſa Name (as is
Interrogative which, are by no eſſential to a<Proname,_ and which
means Tronames, but Adjectiver, the very Denomination oath:
or
,.___
The Engliſh Grammar, with Notes. '79

Another Sort of (Dalitles there are,
V/hich being, doing, ſuffering, declare,
And Time implj, as preſent, paﬅ, to come,
ln ſome more plainly, more ohſcure in ſbme.
In ſing) it ends, when doing i: exprefi'd,
In d, t, n, when ſuffering': conflfi'd,
Theſe Qialities are, what the old G RA M M A R I A N S
.call'd Participles, and a modern Author has continu'd under that
Name, notwithﬅanding what Mr. Yohnſbn, Scioppz'm, and others
have ur 'dz but without any Reaion produc'd for ſo doing.
But we in convinc'd, that thoſe Reaſons are not to bean
ſwer'd, bcldcs ſeveral more, which might be produc'd; as
Words which ſignify Time, Action, &e. and et are allow'd, on
all Hands, not to be either Pnrticiples, or o Affirmatian, ven;
ture to call them o unliries.
We have not in the Verſe ſaid any thing of the Ending when
it betokens Being, becauſe that is confin'd to that one Word, and
therefore needs no Rule; and is only being and been. I being
ſick, ſentfar a Doctor. I have been a Soldier. It ſignifies doing ,
as, I am hearing a Song; I was tuning my Harpſiehord. It ſigni
fiesſuflring ,- as, I was beaten, I war abus'dz and the like. [4.]
. (A)
Word demonﬅrates to be neceſſary The Word own very often em
to it) but they are added to Name: phatically ſubjoin'd to Name! and
or Suhſtanti-ver, as the Walitier "Proname!, is likewiſe an/Idjective 5
or Adjecti-vez are; as thzr M'an, , aslyour own Horſe, my own Good',
that Mm, the ſame Man, Ifthey A exander': pwn &word.
ever occur without their Name; or The Word ſelf, tho' plac'd by
thſta'lti'vel, which they often do, ſome among the Praname: (becauſe
the Suhfmnffw: are always under 'tis generally render'd into Latin.
ﬅood; thus we ſay, one, all, many by the Word ipſe, is yet plainly a
otherr, the Learned, the Unlearned, Suhſtamive or Name, to which
omitting or leaving out the Sub there is ſcarce any Word directly
ſmnti-vet or Nameſ, and yet theſe anſwers in the Latin, that which
Adjecti-ve: are not put into the comes neareﬅ to it is Perform, or
Number ofTronamer. 'Prapria (Per-ſond; as thyſelf, my
Which, isthe ſame in both Num ſelf, ourſelveſ, yourſelveſ, himſelf,
bers, and is us'd, when we ſpeak of itſelf, t emſelver, are we confeſs.
Tbingr, as who and whom are,when us'd for his-ſelf, itſelf, their/'elves 5,
we talk of Terfam. but interpofing awn,we ſay hi: own
We muﬅ obſerve, that what is feſf, it: ownſelf, their amuſe/ver.
us'd Adjectively, when it ſignifies In the ſame Senſe we meet in the
Wah'gand is in a Veﬅion, as in Greek Poets, 'le BIHAS Shapen-re;
'what Man? that is, what kind of' as Bfn 'Hpmmqinc Or szxn'og,
Man, or in Numberthefirﬅ,ſec0nd, Hercule: Loſe, Her-rule: himſelf,
and that is often us'd for which,and Her-cular bit ownſelf.
ſo 'a an Adjcffive. [4] The time,_that is imply'd
t is
L
The Engliſh Grammar, with Noteſſs.
80
(A), (an), and(thc), we Qualities 'na name,"
Becauſe their Uſ: and Nature aret eſame.
Theſe Signs "of *Names (a) and (th-e), have the Nature of
Walities, for they are added to Names, nor ſubſiﬅ or convey
any Idea without them, and pay the ſame Attendance on the
Narues.
The Uſe of theſe Signs are worthy Remark; for (a) before
a Conſonant, and (an) before a Vowel, extend the Si nification
of a Name to any one, and ſo to all, one by one, o its Kind;
but (the) reﬅrains it to ſome Particular, and by that Means
makes a Common Equivalcnt to a Proper Name.
But ſince theſe Sign: tlon't Individuals.ſhew,
The ne'er hefiare a Proper Name can go 5;
Nor hefare Pers'nalNames and Qualities, -
Nor when the Thing in general me. expreﬅ,
Nor hefore Names of Virtues, Herbs and Vice.
But theſe Signs, not denoting Individuation, are not fit be
fore Proper Nar'nes, as Peter, ſfohn, William, &e. Nor before
Perſonal Names or anlities. Nor are they us'd, when the
Name expreſſes the Thing in General; as we fay, Man being
mortal, ſhon ſade: away and diet; not the, or a Man, and we
ſay, Virtue conſiﬅ; in the Mean, not a, or the Virtue, &e.
Theſe Sign: ſignifying Particularity, we fry, the Juﬅice of God,
ſince that is particular. Nor are they ſet before the particu
lar Names of Virtues or Vices, or Herbs, Metals, &c. as we
ſay, not a Temperance, a Sloth, a Hyſſh , a Th me.
(A) and (an) ſometimes ſignify one, as al to' a Man. [7]
The is a Demonﬅrative, and ſignifies the ſame as that, but
leſs emphatically. It denotes the Determination 'of one or
. more,
thk ſort oanli'y orAdjecti-ve is to he King, 'tis an uncertain,wan
generally obſcure in Engliſh, and dring and undetermin'dWord z but
rather plac'd in the Word of Affir. if you add '(the) to it, and ſay,'ti: a
mm'on, which is generally plac'd 'Iſappineſt to he the King, it deter
with it -, hilt in 'the Latin we' agree mines it to be' the King o'fthe Peo
With Mr. Johnſonagainﬅ Sane le mention'd before. So that theſe
tiut,ThattheTime is ſignify'd pret ittle Signs contribnte much to the
ty lainly by the PArticiple. . clearneſs of Diſcourſe.
[2] Namtxs generally ſignify The Latin; have none of theſe
Things in a general and unli'nited Sign: or Ar-ticler, Whence Sea/i
Senſe, but Signſ, or A'm'clet (as ger filfly concluded, that they were
ſome call them) reſtrain and deter uſeleſs; butheis indeed a Critic
mine the Signification of Names, ehat very often is imthexwrong : i
and apply them to a particular And here 'tis plain from the In
"fling, lfwe ſay, 'ri-r a Hazþinep ﬅances given, that they atenecefl'a
rr
more, to which the general Word is actually apply'd. Thus
We uſe the Word Earth, when we deſign the Species or Ele
ment; but the Earth, when we mean the Globe of the Earth
(which is a certain determin'd Individual) 'tis plac'd with
both in the Singular or Plural Number, becauſe we may ſpeak
determinately of one, as well as more lndividuals. .
As neither of theſe are fix'd to a Word of a general signifi
cation, or proper Name, ſo are they not us'd when any other
Wality is preſirnt, that virtually contains 'em; as, a Man, one
Man, ſbme Man, an] Man 5 the World, this Mrld, for here one,
flme, any, this, certainl imply a and the.
There are, beſides, ome particular phraſes, as man] a Man,
ne-uer a Man, which differ from man] Men, no Men, as wet]
Man from all Men,- the former ſ niſy man) Men, all Men,
no Men, ſeparately, or taken diﬅinctye the latter conjunctl ,
or collectively. Nor are the followin ahſolute] unlike theiz,
when (after ſuch, and the Particles 0 Compari on, at, ſh, too,
and ſcarce any others) the Quality (n) is interpos'd between
the Name and its Quality, (which is uſually put after it) as,
Such a Gtfi is too ſmall a Reward for ſh great a Lahom', and a:
great a Beneſit. -
When (lUALITIES fbr NAMES me e'er flndſet,

The) then the Propem'n of NAMES 'will get.
Qalitie: are ſometimes put for Name', and then they aſ

ſume their Rights and Properties; tho' ſome contend, that
the Name: are always underﬅood, tho' not expreſs'd, to make
'em ſubſiﬅ in good Senſe.
ry to the avoidingAmbiguities.The In fine, the Article/ or Sigm are

Greekt have one 6, ii, 'ra- Tho' not put to the Qualitie: or Adjac
theſe Signs ſhou'd not he put before tt'wet, becauſe they muﬅ receive
proper Names for the Reaſon gi their Determination from other
ven, yet the Greek: do ibmetimes Name: or Subſtan'ivet. Or when
put the Anicle to the Trapet-Name: we find them ſet teſore Qali'iet
of Men, as 6 omix-xoq, and the or AdjeHi-vet; as the Black, the
Italian! do it cuﬅomarily, as I'A White, &e. then are they ſet for
rinflo, II Taflb, l' Ariſtotle, whiCh Namet, or Subflantin/Zſ The
the French imitate in thoſe Word' White means as rrmch as hireneſt,
or Name', which are purelv oft/a or elſe the Subſtamive is nnder
liar' Original, but in none elſczand ﬅood; as the Black '5 the black
we put them to the Names of Ri Mark or Sp'. '
Ten', as the Thamct, the Ouze, the
Rhine, &c.
M'ſr
Moﬅ aC'Yoalities hy Two Degrees do riſe,
Or fall as much in Number, Bulk, or Pricc;
By adding to its End or, er, or eﬅ,
Which hy ſbme little Words is elſe exprefl;
As wiſe, wiſer, wiſeﬅ, and moﬅ wiſe;
But (very) oft the Place of (moﬅ) ſupplies.
Qualities have- yet another Difference from Names, for
they admit by the Variation of their Endings, or by the
Addition of ſome little Wards, Degrees of Compariſon. For
ſignifying Manners, or oVealities, they naturally muﬅ be of
ſeveral Degrees, which increaſe twice, by adding (er) to the '
(LUALITY it 'ſi-elf, and (eﬅ). Fair is the Quality it Half; for
Example, its firﬅ Rifing or Degree is Fairer, and 'the next,
beyond which there's. none, is faire/i. Theſe again are form'd
by little Wards, Without altering the Ending or Termination
of the cQuality; as, fair, more fair, 'no/i or 'very fair.
All Words therefore, whoſe signification will admit Increaſe,
and conſequently in good Senſe will ſuffer theſe 'Words (more,
moﬅ, or very) beſhre 'em, are Qualities, that have their De
grees of Compariſon, or of Increaſe and Decreaſe.
Theſe Three alone irregular are found,
Good, bad, and little, alter Name and Sound.
Theſe Three have an irregular Manner of Leing compar'd,
as good, hetter, heﬅ ,- had, or ill z worﬅ' (and worji'r) 'worﬅ 5 little,
hfifi (or leffir) leaﬅ.- To which add much, (or may) more,
me .
But there are ſome Qealities, before which you cannot in
good Senſe put more, or maſſ, as all,ſbme, any, &e. for we
cannot ſay, more all, moﬅ all, &e. Much, more, and moﬅ,
when they are joined to Names of the singular Number,
ſi nify anntity; as much, more, moſt' Wine.- But when the
ame join'd to them is oſ the Plural Number, they ſignify
Number, as much, more, and moſt Compan 5 but much is
chang'd into main, when Numbers are ſignified. Thus the
guality ALL, join'd with a Name of the Singular Number,
re ates to Quantiry, as all the Wine; but with a Name of the
PluraI Number, it ſignifies Number, as all the Children. Every
is never put with a Name of the Plural Number, as every Man,
not e-uery Men. Thus enough ſignifies OQuantisy, whole Plu
ral is man', which ſignifies Number 5 I ha-ve Wine enough, I
have Books enow. ' _
When the Quality NO has no Name after it, we ſay none 3
as, Is there no Wine? There's none.
' C H A P.
The Engliſh Grammar, with Notes. az
C H A P. VIII.
OfAFFIRMATION.S.
[r] E come now to that Part of Speech, which is the
Soul _of a Sentencg for without this a Sentence
cannot ſubliﬅ, ſince nOthin can be ſpoken, that is affirm'd
or deny'd, without it. T e Latin; call this Part of Speech
Verbum, from whence our Engliſh Grammarians very awkard
2' have borrow'd Verb, which all other Nations, that borrow
om the Latin, call in their own Tongue Word, for that is
the plain Engliſh of Verbum: The V'ard was us'd by way of
Eminence; but if our Grammarians had us'd V/ard inﬅead of
Verb, tho' it would have been more eaſy and obvious to the
Learnſſs Memory and Underﬅanding, yet it would require a
long Explanation of its Nature, as a Part speech, nothin .
of that being contain'd in its Name; but t ic very Eſſence o?
it is expreſs'd in the Term Affirmation, ſince all Words of this
kind do affirm Something of SOmething; as will be plain from
the Notes on this Head.
[a] An'
[i] We have thus far explain'd Subject, as round. And beſides theſe'
thoſe Words, which ſignify the two TCMI, there is in that Prepo
Objects of our Thoughts, towhich fition another Word, which is the
Indeed the Prepofitions andAdverhs Connection of thoſe tonerms, andx
belong, tho' the Order of the Text which is properly the Action of the
has poﬅpon'd 'emz We now come Mind, which affirms- the A'ttrihute
te conſider thoſe Word', which ſig of the Subject. Men are therefore,
nify the Manner, as Verlu, or Affir under an equal Neceflity of invent
maxia'u, Canjunr'ham, or joining ing Words, that mark and denote
Words, and Imerjectiom. the Affirmation, which is the prin
The Knowledge ofthe Nature of cipal Manner ofourThoughts,as to
the Verb, or Affirmation, depends invent thoſe, which mark the Ob
Oſ' what: has been ſaid at the begin jects of 'em. And this third Con
ang of theſe Notes on Words, and ncctive Term is whan is generally
tout is, that the judgment we make call'd a Ve'b, but morejntelligihly '
PfThingsms when I ſhy, the Earth an AFFIRMATION, ſince its
'I round) neceſſarily implies two chiefUſe is to ſignify the Affirmati- t
Terms, one call'd the SUBJECT, on zthat is, to ſhew, at the Diſ
which is the Thing of which the conrſe in which this Word is us'd, is
Affirmarion is made, as the Earl/2; theDiſcom-ſe of aMan,who not only
and the other the ATTRIBUTE, eonceives Things, but mdges, and
Much is, what is affirm'd of the affirm; ſhmething of'em z in whils;
34, The Engliſh Grammar, with Notes.
the Verb, or Affirmation is diſtin Verb, without joining any pan'
ghiſh'd from ſome Names and Am cular Attribute, there Wou'd be no
litics, which ſi nify Affrmation need of more than oneVerb in each
likewiſe; as A rmam, Affirmntio, Language, which is that we call
becauſe they do not fignify,that the Suhﬅautive.
Thing is become the Object of our _ zdly, They haue join'd the Sub
Thoughts, 'by the Rcfledion ot'the ject of the Propofition on certain
Mind, and therefore do not mark, Occafions, ſo that two Words (nay,
that he who uſes thoſe Words aſ even one) may make an intire Pro
firms, but only, that he barely con Kſition -, two Words, as ſum Home,
Ceives an Affirmation. cauſe ſum not only ſignifies the
We have ſaid,that the chichſt oſ A mation, but includes the Sig.
the Verb, is to ſignify the Affirma mfication of the Pronoun, or Perfo
tion, becauſe we ſhall ſee, that the naI Name, Ego, I; WlllCh is the
Verb is likewiſe made uſe oſ, to Subject ok'the Propoſition. And in
ſignify othchotions ofthe Soul, as our own Tongue we always expreſs
to de ire, ra pray, to command, &e. it, 1 am a Man. One Word may
likewiſe expreſs an intire Pro _
but lt is only by changing the ln
flcction, and the Made. We ſhall fition ; as, vivo fedea, &e. I'Egr
at preſent only conſider the Verb in theſe Verlu include both the Afflr.
its chief Uſe and Siguification, marian and the Arrribure, as we
which is that which it has to the have already ſaid; and being in the
lndimtive, or firfi State, Made or firﬅ Perſon, they inclurle the Sub
aner. 1e;t likewiſe, as, I am living; I
Accordingto this Senſe, it may am fitting: And hence comes the
be ſaid,'that the Verb or A rmation Difference oſ Perſons, which is ge
ought to have no other U e, but the nerally in Verhs.
marking the Connection wemake gaily, They hare alſo join'd a Re- *
in out Minds, between the Terms of lation to the Time with reſpect to
a Propoſition. Thus there is only the Thing affirm'd z ſo that one
the Verb eſſe, to be, (which is call'd Word (as cznaſ'i) ſignifies that I
a Verh Subﬅantive) thatremains in affirm to him, to whom I the
this Simplicity: And further, wc Action ofſupping, not for the pre
may ſay,that even this Verb is pro ſent Time, hut the paﬅ, Tl-ou baſt
rly thus ſimple, only in the third fupp'd. And from hence the Verbs
erſon ofthePreſcntTenſe orTime, derive their Diverfity of Times,(or
eji, it, and on certain Occafions: as the Vulgar has it,Tenſes) which '
For as Men naturally incline to is alſo generally common to all '
ſhorten their Exprelſwns, they have Verhs, or Words oſ Affirmation.
always join'd to the Affirmation ThePiverfity of theſe Significa
other Significations in the ſame tions, yom'd in the ſame Word, is
Word. ifl, They have join'd that what has hinder'd a great many, '
of ſome Attribute, by whichMeans otherwiſe of very good Capacities,
two Word: then make a Pro ſi from rightly underﬅanding the Na
zion; as when 1 ſay,Petm: vwir, ture of the Verb ; becauſe they have
Peter liver, becauſe theWord viviſ not conſider'd it according to what
(or lives) inclndcs hoththe Affirma is effi'ntial to it, which is the Affir
tion, and Attritute oſ being alive, mation, but according to the vari
ſmre it is the ſame thing to ſay, ous Relations accidental to it, as a
Peter liver, and tPeter ir living; Verh, or Word of Affirmation.
thence ariſes the great Diverſity of ThusA'ri lot/e, confining himſelf
.'Verhs, in every Language -, where to the thir Signification, added to
as it the generalSignifimtion ofthe that which is cſſerrtial to it, defines
4 Blrmation were only given to the! a Verb, Vax figmficanr cum Tem
- pore,
The Engliſh Grammar, with Notes. '7 3
pore, a Word, that ſignifie: 'with Verhr active, ſignify Actiont, and
Time. Others, as Buxtorfiut, adding thoſe oſVerbr paflive Paſſions, as
to it the ſecond, defines it, Vox much as the Verbr themſelves from
flexili: cum Tempore, (s Ter-ſone', which they are form'd, and there
a Word that hat divert Inflectiont is no Reaſon to pretend, thatfluent
with Time and Ter/in', does'not ſignify a Thing'that paffis,
Others have confin'd themſelves as well as fluit. To which may he
to the firﬅsignification,added to the added againﬅ the two firﬅ efini
Bſſential, which is that of the At tions of the Verb, that the articl
tribute; and conſidering, that the pLels ſignify alſo with Time, there
Attrilmtet Men haile join'd to the 'nga preſent, aEaﬅ, and a future,
Affirmation in the ſame Word, are eſpecial y in the atin and Greek,
commonlyA ctives andPaffives,have &c. And thoſe who (not without:
thought the Eſſence of a Verb con Reaſon) believe, that a Yocarive
ſlﬅsin ſignifying the Action! and Cafe is truly the ſecond Perſon,
'Paffiann And in fine, uliut Sca eſpecially when it has a different
liger thought,that he ha diſcover'd Termination from the Nominative,
a great Myﬅery in his Book of the will find, that on that Side there
Principlet of the Latin Tongue, by wou'd be but a Different-e oſ the
ſaying, that the' Diﬅinction of more, or the leſs, between the (Par
Thingsinto Permanente: 83 fluen titiple and thel/erh. And thus the
IPJ, Thingtpermaneht or Iafling, or eflkntial Realon,why a Participle
fix', and paſſingmrthar paſ: away, is not aVerb, is, that it does not.
wasthe true Original of the Diﬅin ſignify the Affirmation; whence i'
ction of Name', or'Nount and Verbt comes, that to make a Propoſition,
or Affirmntiom; ſince Name: are which is the Property of the Verh,
to ſignify the former, and Vetlu the the Partici le muﬅ add a Verh,that
latter. But we maycaſily perceive is, reﬅore t at which was taken a
that theſe Definitions are falſe, and way, by turning the Verh into the
do by no means explain the true Partitiple. For how comes it that:
Nature of the Verb. Term: 'tri-vit, Peter liver, is aTra
The manner ofthe Connection of poſition; and Term: tri-vent, Peter
the two firﬅ ſhew it ſufficiently, be living, is not ſo, unleſs eſt, it, le
cauſe 'tis not there expreſs'd what added, as Petru: eſt wit-vent, Peter i:
the Verb ſignifies, but only that living, - but becauſe that Affirmati
with which. it ſignifies, wiz. Cum on (which is in vivit) was taken a
Tempore, cum Perform; the two way by making the Particiþle oi
latter are ſtill worſe, having the eent ? Whence it appears, that the
two great Vices of Definitions, Affirmation, that is, or is not found
which is to agree 'regne amni, ne in a Word, makes it to be, or not
eſali. For therearel'erbtwhich to be a Verb. n
ignify neither Action: nor Pafliom, Upon which we may obſerve en
nor what paſſes away, as exiſtlit, paſſant, that the lnfinitivc Made ar
te tit, rivet, a] et, rape', m et, Form, or Mood, which is very often
glbetſ, wiſer: darest, &e. oſ which a Noun or Name, (as when we ſay
we may have occaſion to ſpeak elſe in French, [e Boire, le Manger) is
where. different from Participles, the Par
There are Words, which are not ticiples being Noun Adjectives, or
Verlu, that ſignify Actions andPaſ what we call Qui/Her: But the '
ſions, and even Things tranſient,ac lnfiniti've Moodt are Noun Sub
cording to Scaliger's Definition. flantivet, or Name: made by Ab- .
For 'tis certain, that Tarticiple: (traction of thoſe Adjecti'ver; in
(or (Lualities deriv'd from Verbs) the ſame manner as of Candiduſ, -
are true Noun', and yet thoſe oi Candor is made, and of "Wire, *"
I Witite
Whitenefr. Thus ruber,a Verb, fig tum De Ignatiane Perſoncc, (But a
nifies i! red, including the Affirma Word zgniffying the Affirmation of
tion and the Attributez rubem, the fame Attribute, wilb the Dejignn
Participle ſignifies only Red, with. tion of Perſon, Number and Time.
out Afiirmation, and Rubere taken We may likewiſe tranſrently ob
for a Noun, ſignifies Redneft. ſerve, that the Affilmation, (as
It ſhou'd, therefore, be allow'd a 'tis conceiv'd) may be the Attri
conſtantRule, that confideringflm hute of the Verb alſo, as in the
ply what is eſſential to a Verb, the Verb Affirmo, which Verb ſignifies
only truev Definition is oox figmfi Twa Affirmatiom, one regards
cam Affirmarivnem, a Word 'bar the Perſon ſpeaking, and the
ſ'gnifie: an Affirmation, ſince We other the Perſon ſpoken oſ, whe
can find no Word, that marks an ther it be of himſelf, or of ano
Affrmation, vbut what is a Verb; ther. For when we ſay, Term: aſ.
nor any Ver-II but what mnlks it (at flrmat, it is the ſame as to ſay, Pe
leaﬅ) in the Indicative, or firſt rrur eﬅ nflh'mam, and then e/i
Meed: And there can no manner of marks our Affirmation, and the
doubt be made, thatifaWord were Judgment we make concerning Pe
invented, as Eſſ wou'd be, which ter and qfi'z'rmam, that we conceive
ſhould always mark the Affirma and attribute to CPeter.
tion,without having anyDifl'erence The Verb NEGO (on the con
of Time or Perſon -, ſo that the Di trary) contains by the ſame Rea
verfity of Perſon ſhou'd le marlfd ſon an Affirmation and Ncgation.
only by Naum or Namer, and Pra Fc': it muſt 'be farther obſerv'd, '
ndmu or Terfmml Name', and the that tho' all Judgments are not
Dlverſity of Times by Adverln or qffirmativefind that there are ſome
added Wordr, (as in Engliſh) it Ncgatives, nevertheleſsI/'erbr never
wou'd however 'be a true Ver/7. As ſignify any thing of themſelves,
in the Propofitinns, which the Phi but Affirmations; Negations are
loſopheis call eternally true, as God only mark'd by Particles, or little
is infinite, Body is divgible, 'be Words, as non," ne, band, &e. on
'whole is greater than it: * art: 5 the by Nouns that imply it, as Nullur,
Vford (h) implies only the ſimple nema, &e. which being join'd to
Signification, without any Rela Verbr, change the Affirmation into
tion to Time, becauſe 'tis tme a Ncgation, as, no Man i: immar
to all Times, and without our ral, Nullum carf-uſ eſt indiwfibile.
Minds ſhipping at any Direrſity of Tho' mnch of' theſe Notes, which
Parſon. relntc to the Knowledge of the
Thus the Verb (according to what true Nature of a Verb, may
iseffimtial to it) is a Word 'but [ib ſeem to (and indeed in many
'u'fler Affirmaſion. But if we Things do) relate more to the dead
Would jorn its principal Accidents, Languages than the living, yet
it may be thus defin'd, Vox fi m'fi there is nothing advanc'd which
cam Affirma'ionem, cum De 'gna will not be uſeſul to the Student
tiqne Per-ſome, Numeri (5 Tempo of GRAMMAR, ſince by theſe
ris, a Word wlzichfignifie: Affirmet Ohſervatiom he will enter into the
tion wit/1 the Defignation of 'be very Eſſence oſ the Art, and ſee in
Perſon, Number and Time, which what itis ſounded on the Nature
agrees properly with the Verb Sub oſ Things; and we are very cer.
fiami-ue. But for the others, in as tain, that great Part of theſe Note:
much as they differ by that Union are equally advantageous to our'
Men have made of the Affirma'ian underﬅanding the Nature of our
with certain Anributer, they may own Words, and in what they are ,
be thus dcfin'd, oxfignificanr Aſ. ſounded on the general Reaſon of
firmationem altcuju: Attribu'i, all Languach. *
[2.] We
The Engliſh Grammar, with Notes. 7 5,
[2.] An Affirmation (ar the Wbrd do's ſhow)
Something affirmr, and doe: Number know,
[3] And Time and Perſon; whether it expreſſ
Action, Being, Paffion; or their V/ant confefl.
An Affirmation is a Part of Speech (as the Word imports)
which affirms ſome Attribute, with the Deſignation of Time,
Number, and Perſon, expreſſmg being, doing, or ſuffiring, or the
Want of them, or the like.
Tn'o Times the Engliſh Language only know,
The the preſent, next the paſſing ſhow: :
And the h] diff'rent Ending: are made known
By addmg (d), or (ed), are moflly ſhown;
The preſent Love, the_paſſ1nglov'd do': make,
Or elſe flame other Affirmations take
Before it, which it: different Times declare,
And in the Rules of Affirmation ſhare.
All Affirmation: affirming in Time, this Time is exprefi'd
either by different Endings, as Low, Io-v'd, or loved,- burn,
burn'd, or burned,- or by putting other Affirmations before
them, which alſo expreſs the Manner of the Affirmation, as
have, ſhall, will, might, wou'd, ſhoa'd, &e. as will be ſeen in
the Sequel.
In Engliſh we have but two Times diﬅinguiſh'd by the
different Endin s; the pro/int is the Affirmation it filfl as I
love; the ſecong is the pnffing, as I Io-u'd: All other Times are
expreſs'd by the 'foreſind Words.
The Perſonal Names the Perſians do expreſi,
As, l, thou, he, we, ye, and they conflfl.
With theſe their 'various Endings too agree,
A: me by love, loveﬅ, and loves may ſee.
The Perſons of the Affirmations are always expreſs'd by
thePerſonal Names I, thou, he, in the singular, and We, ye,
Pryou, and they, in the Plnral Number; the two firﬅ reach
ln only themſelves, the third all other Names, 'becauſe all
of er NAMES are of the third Perſon. They alſo vary their
Endings in theſſ ſecond and third Parſon Singularz as I love.
thou loweſt, he loves; me, ye, and they love, in the preſent
Time, and I loved, thou loved/t, he Io-uedin the paffing'Time;
the Soldier fighte, God prevails. I Io-ve, beſides the firﬅ Per
ſon, denotes the Time When I love, that is, the preſent Time
when I am ſpeaking,- but by. adding (d), it ſignifies the Time
PRffing, aS-I loved, lade, or didlo-ue. -
In. ' [4.]'1he
[a] We have in the 'foregoing properly agrees only to rational
Notes obſerv'd, that the Diverſity oſ and intellectual Beings, and ſo is
(Perſanr and Number: in Affirma proper but to the Two former,
n'am or Ver-In, proceeds from the ſince the third is for all other Sorts
joining in the ſame Word the Sub of Things, and not for Perſons only.
ject of the Prnpofition, at leaﬅ on By that wc ſee, thatnaturally what
certain Occafions. to the Affirma we call the third Perſon ought to
zion oper to the Verb, to ſhorten bethe Theme of the Verb, as it is
the flpreffion, (tho' this will not alſo in all the Oriental Tongues;
hold in moﬅ Modern Tongues, at for it is more natural, that: the
leaſt in none which want Variety Vcrb ſhould ſignify properly the Af
of Terminations,to diſtinguiſh the ffirmationpvithout making any Sub
Perſons, (which we do by Perſonal ject in particular, and that aﬅer
Names) for when a Man ſ ks of wards it be determin'd by a new In
himſelf, the Subject of the ropoſi flection, to include the firﬅ or ſe
tion -.IS the Pronoun or (Perfonal cond Perſon ſor a Subject.
Name, of the firﬅ Perſon va, I, This Diverfity of Terminat ions
and when he ſpeaks of him to for the firﬅ Perſon ſhews, that the
whom he addreffes himſelf,the Sub AncientLanguages had a great deal
_ ject oſ the Propoſition is the Pro of Reaſon not to join the Pronau'u
noun or the lecond Perſon Tu, thou, ofthe firﬅ and ſecond Perſon to the
you. Verb, but very rarely (and on parti
" Now that he may not always be cular Conſiderations) contenting
oblig'd to uſe theſe Pronouns, it has themſelves to ſay, video, 'vide-r, 'vi
been thought ſufficient to give to demm, videlif, becauſe theſe Ter
the Word which ſignifies the Af minations were originally invented
firmation, a certain Termination, for this very Reaſon, oiz. to avoid
which ſhews that it is of himſelf a joining the Pronouns to the Verbs ;
'Man ſpeaks, and gthat is what is Yet allthe vulgar or livingLangua
rall'd the firﬅ Perſou of the Verb, ges, and ours eſpecially, always
as Video, I fee. pain tþem tob their Verbs; for we
The ſame is done with reſpect to ſee,ay, &c.ee,t
the (m ceſ', or
Reſaſon an ee,may
ofywhifch 'we
him, to whom a Man addreſſes him
ſelf; and this is call'd the ſecond he, or rather plainly is, that our
Per-ſon, vider, 'Pan ſeeﬅ, or you ſee. Verbs have no diﬅinct Terminati
And as theſe Pronouns have their ons to expreſs the Perſons without
'PIm-a I', that ſignify more than one, them.
as when a Man talking of himſelf But beſides theſe two Numbers,
joins others, as ur, we; or of him, Singular and P/m'al, which are in
to whom he ſpeaks, hy 'oining o Verbs as well as Nouns, the Greek:
thers, as you, to two di erent Ter have a (Dual Number, which is
minations in the Latin, are join'd proper only to two, but this is not
to the Plural, as videmnr, 'we ſee, ſo Commonly made uſe of, as the
videtir, you ſee. other two.
But becauſe often the Subject oſ The Oriental Languages thought
the Propoſition is neither a Man's it &roper to diﬅinguiſh, when the
ſelf, nor the Perſon to whom he A rmation related to the one, or
ſpeaks, 'tis neceſſary not only to the other, and to the Maſculine, or
reſerve theſe two Terminations to Feminine; for this Reaſon they
thoſe two Perſons, but that athird gave the ſame Perſon of the Verh
be made, to he join'd to all other two Terminations to expreſs the
Subje zts ofa Propoſition. And this two Genders, which indeed is a
is what is call'd the third Perſon, as great hel in avoiding Equi-vacah.
well in the singular Number, as [3] he Signification of the
Plnnlz tho: the Word Parſon Time, is another Thing, which we
have
775'e Engliſh Gi-ammar, with Notes. '77
have ſaid to be ioin'd to the Affir theſe Tenſes,with aRelation to an
mation of the Verb; for the Affir other by one Word, other Infle
mation is made according to diffe ctions have betn invented in the
rent Times, ſince we may affirm a Verbs or Affirmations, which may
Thipg iſ, waſ, or 'will be: whence he call'd the Compound Tenfu, or
other lnflectionsare given to Verbr, Timeſ. ,
figniſyingtheſe ſeveralTimes,which The firﬅ is that which marks
our Engliſh Grammnrians have by the Paﬅ, in relation to the Preſent,
a tarbarous Word call'd Tenſer. and 'tis call'd the Preterimperfect.
But there are but threeſimple Ten Tenſe,ur Time, becauſe it marks
fer, or Timer, thePrefent, as amo, not the Thing ſimply and properly,
I law), the Tafl, as amaw, l have as done, but as imperfect, and pre
loved; and the Furure, as amaba, ſent, with reſpect to a Thing which
I will (or ſhall) love. ls already nevertheleſs paſt. Thus
But becauſe in the Paﬅ one may when I ſay, Cum in'ra'oit carnabam,
mark, that the Thing is but juﬅ I war at Supper 'when he enrer'd,,
paﬅ or done, or indefinitely, that it the Action of Supping is paſt in
was done; it from this proceeds reſpect of the Time, of which I
that in the greateﬅ Part ofthe Vul ſpeak, but I mark it as preſent in
gar Languages there are two Sorts reſpect of the Thing, oſ which I
of Preterit: or Faſt Timer, one that ſpeak, which is the Enn'ance offucb
marks the Thing to he preciſely a one.
done, and is therefore call'd Defi The ſecond Compound Time, or
nite; as, I have written, 1 have Tenſe, is, that which doubly marks
ſaid; and the other that marks or the paﬅ, and on that Account iscal
denotes it done indcterminately, led the Preterpluyerfcct Tenſe, or.
and therefore call'd Indefinite or the Time more than perfectly paﬅ;
Awiﬅur; as, I wrote, I waſ), I Ca-nawram, I budſupp'd 5 hy which
din'd ; which isproperly only ſpoke I denote my Action ofſupping,nor
of a Time, at leaﬅ oſ a Day's Di only as paﬅ in it ſelf, but alſo' as >
ﬅance from that, in which we ſpeak. paﬅ in reſpect to another Thing,
But this holds truer in the French which is alſo paﬅ; as, I had ſupp'd
Language, than in any other, for wben be enter'd; which ſhews my
in that they ſay, Tecrivir bier, I Supping was before his Entrance;
'wrote Tej'ierdny, but not Y'ecrieir which is alſo paſt.
te' Ilium, nor TetriviI-cerre Nuir, The Third Compound Time is'
but jay ecrit ce Matin, fay ecrit thgt which denotes the Future with .
cene Nuit, &c. reſpect Io the Paﬅ, viz. the Futul'e
The Fumre will alſo admit of Perfect,- as Cwmwero, 1 ſhall have
the ſame Differencesz for we may ſupp'dz byiwhich Iv makay Adh
have a mind to denote or mark a on of Supping as Future it ſelf, and'
Thing that is ſuddenly to be, Pa'ſs'd in regard to another Thing
Thus the Greek: have their Paulu to comc,that is to follow, as when'
pof: future ,_ &Ar'yav (404va , [ſhall have fltpp'a', be 'will enler;;
which marks the Thing about to be which is to ſhy, That my Supper
done, as gfifinuzy, I am about (which is not yet come) will he paſt.
'ar/0 if: And we may alſo mark when his Entrancc (which is alſo
a Thing, that is ſimply to happen not yet come) will be preſent.
as, gon'qag, I 'will do It; amabo,} Thus a ſourth Compound Time
'will ſave. may be added, that is, tliaowliich
This is what-we may ſay of the marks the Future with Reiation to -
Times,orTenſes of Verbs, conſider. the Preſengto make as many-Com
ing 'em fimply in their Nature, as pound Futures as Com pound I'z etev
Preſent, "Faﬅ, and Future. But be rits, or Faﬅ Times, or Tenſes; and
cauſſ it hasbeenthought fit to man: perhaps the ſecond Future of the-
1 3 , Grec
'78 He Engliſh Gramm'ar, with Notes.
[4] The ollowing Nine are qf ma general Uſe,
An various Meam'ng: in t e reﬅ produce ,
Do, will, and ſhall, muﬅ, ought, and may,
Have, am, or be, this Doctrine will diffilayl.
For theſe Neceffity, or Pow'r, or Will,
And Time, or But] are expreffing ſtill.
Of Affirmations, the following Nine are moﬅ generally us'd,
being placed before all other Affirmations, to ſignify their
Time, Power, Will, Liberty, Neceffity, Duty, be. Of theſe
therefore, it is neceſſary we firﬅ treat.
Do does the Preſent Time with Force exPrefi, i
And did the Paſſing ſhew: m with no le/i.

Do is, and denotes the preſent Time, which in the paſſing
Time changes its Ending into did: Both theſe are us'd to
expreſs their ſeveral Times with the greater Force, Diﬅinction,
and Fulneſsz as I do law, I do not love. Thus did expreſſes
the paſſing Time emphatically, except when whilﬅ goes before
it, for then 'tis but imperfectly paﬅ, or affing. The Perſonal
Endings of this Affirmation, are, I do, t an doﬅ, be doet, ſingu
lar 5 we, ye, and they do, plural.
When do ſignifies Action, as, I-do ſuch a Thing, it admits
theſe other Affirmations before it, to denote its Time and
Manner of doing. Will does the lame, when it ſignifies wilL
ling, as, I will thi: to be dame 5 tho' this is ſeldom found in our
preſent way of Writing.
Will i: the preſent Time, and wou'd the paﬅ,
But before other Affirmations caﬅ
The Time to come by bath i: ﬅill expreﬅ.
. Will
Greek: mark this in iti-Origin,z guiſh the ſeveral Time! or Tenſer;
whence it comes, that it almoﬅ al- upon which we muﬅ obſerve, that
ways preſerves theFigurative of the i the Oriental Tongues have only the
Preſent; nevertheleſsintheUſeofi Paſſ and the Fumre, without any
it, it has been confounded with the of the other Differences of impar
former; and even the Latin makes: fect, prererpluperfect, &e. which
uſe ofthe ſimple Futurc for that 5 renders thoſe Languages ſubject to
as, Cum meum-verb intrabir, You will 1 great and many Ambiguities, not
enter Iwhen
which I have
mark my fupp'd;
Supper by'zſi
as future to he met within
Differences of theothers.
TimesBut
(intheſe
our
in itſelf, but as preſent when you Tongue eſpecially) are clearly de
enter. noted by the Allxiliary Verbt, and
This is what has given Riſe to very few Alterations ofthe Termi
the ſeveral lnflections of Verbl or nations, as in Latin -, as isſhevm
Affirmatiam, that they may diﬅin- in the Texr.
[4] In
) The Engliſh Grammar, Notes. 79
Will is the preſent Time, and wou'dthe paﬅ, of this Affirme
tion; but they ſignify the Time to come, when they are
plac'd before other Affirmztions, as, I will lawe, I woa'd lo-ue.
Its Perſons are, I will, thou wilt, he will, ſing. we, ye,thej will,
plur. Will implies the Inclination of the Agent.
The flame Rule hold: qfſhall, and ſhou'd, we find,
Since all 'he Time to come alone intend.
shall is the preſent Time, and ſhoa'd the paﬅ; but it ſigni
fies the Time to come, when added to otherv Affirmations;
as, I ſhall low, I ſhoa'd loue. shall is ſometimes left out, as,
If he wite, for Yf he ſhall write, he have written, for he
ſhall have written.
In the Per an zm l ſhall aretelly:
In will a Thu-Cana- fie a Prſmi/'e dwelle.
Shall in the Second and the Ihird doe: threat;
Will ſin-ply then fa'etell: the future Fear.
We uſe not ſhall and will romiſcuoufl for one mother,
for ſhall in the firﬅ Perſon imply foretellsz will implies a
Promiſe, or a Threat. In the ſecond and third Perſon, ſhall
promiſizs, or threatens, and will only ſimply ſoretellsz thus,
I ſhall barn, you will, or, thou wilt barn, he will harn, we ſhall,
ye will, they will barn,- that is, I foretel this will be. I will,
you ſhall, or thouſhalt; he ſhall, we will, e ſhall, the] ſhall
an? that is, I promiſe, or engage, that ſgch a Thing ſhall
one.
Wou'd and ſhou'd foretels what was to come, but with this
Differcncc, arm'd implies the Will and Propenſion of the A
gent 3 ſh'u'd, only the ſimple Futurity; as, I waa'd barn, Iſhaa'd
nrnz rather than turn, I wou'd hurn; the Fire were ahout
me, I ſhow'd harn.
shaa'd ſeems likewiſe, in many Places, to be the lime as
ought; as, I have heen ahlig'd to Ro er, and ſhou'd now return
the obligation. The Perſons of the e are, I ſhow'd," thouſhow'd/t',
he ſhau'd, I wo'ld, thou wou'aſſt, he wou'd.
woa'd,
PVe, ye, and they, zſhmz
The Time to tame 'no t ahſhlately note
Bath ſhall and will, nt wou'd and ſhou'd do not,
But with Conditian Time to come expreſi;
f/Vhieh Dzfiþrente they every-where eonfefi. _
shall and will denote abſolutely the Time to cdmcz ſhon'a
and wax'd do it conditionally.
May
v80 The Engliſh Grammar, with' Notes
May doe: the Right, or Poffibilityz
And can the Agent': Pow'r to do,
. May and can, with their paſt or paffing Times might and toa'd,
imply a Power; but with this Diﬅinction; may and might
are ſaid of the Right, Poffibility, and Liberty of doing a
Thing; can and arm'd of the Power of the Agent; I can harn,
I taa'tl ham, I ma har'a, I might barn,- that is, it i: paffihle ar
lawful fbr me to gem. The Perſons are, I may, than may/Yf,
he may z we, ye, and they ma . I might, thou mightfl, or you
might, he nght ,* we, ye, an they mz' ht. I tan, thou canﬅ, he
can,- we, ye, and they can. I toa'd, f/OV readſ/I, he toa'd, we,ye,
and they coa'd. May and can are us'd With Relation both to
the Time preſent, and to come; coa'd from can and might
from may, have Relation to the Time paﬅ and to come.
Muﬅ the Neceffity doexflill denote,
'Andﬅill the Duty 'me expreſi hyought.
Muﬅ implies Neceffity, I maﬅ ham; ought implies Duty, as:
I ought to ham. But theſe two Affirmations have only the
preſent Time, and their Perſons are only expreſs'd by the
Perſonal Names, for it is now quite obſolete to fly, thou
oughteﬅ, for itnow changes its Ending no more than-maﬅ.
Have (When with Oiialitics of Suff'ring plac't)
Denoter the Time t at perfectly i: paﬅ ,
And that by had i: moﬅ directly ſhown
The Time, that more than perfectly is gone.
Shall, and will have, do ﬅill the Time declare,
That will he paﬅ hefore ſhme other: are.
Ha-ve (join'd to a leity that ſignifies ſuffering) denotes
the Time perfectly paﬅ, that is, that which is now paﬅ. Had
marks the Time, that is more than perfectly paﬅ,ſiozr ſome time
paﬅ, that is, 'at the Time when it was ſpoken oſ; as, I hat-e
burn'd, I had, burn'd. Thus ſhall have, and will have burn'd,
denote the Time, which will be paﬅ before another Thing,
-which is to come, bappem, or is. As when I ſhall have read a
Page, I Trillﬅmt the Boa/e. The Perſons of theſe Affirmations X
are, I have, thou haﬅ, he hat,- wa, ye, and the have. I had
thou [earl/i, he had;.-m,-ye,- or yea, and they h
'ſ/Vhene-uer 1va, Poſſeſſion does denote,
, Thefiz Affirmations it admits, elſe not.
When have ſignifies Paſſ/fiery', as I have a Hotfi, I have a
Commiffion, and the like, it admits ſome of the NineAffirma
tions we have been treating of before' it, to expreſs its Times,
Manner, &ye. elſe not.
Am,
Am, or be, ﬅill in their Nati-Ue Smſe
Being import; but then thy' ﬅill diſpenſe
The Affirmation to the Ziiahty
(Without it leg/t) that ſu ring doe: imply.
Am, or he (for they are the ſime) naturally, or in them
ſalves ſignify being; but join'd to, or ſet before a anlity fig'
nifyingſuflring, reﬅore the Affirmation offiefferz'ng, which as
a gnaw] it loſt,- as I am burn'd, he muſt he burn'd. It had
therefore a double Formation.
singular, Plur.
In the preſent Time Am, art, is,
be, Luﬅ, be, are.
he
.
ln the paſſing, or paﬅ Time
was, ma , was,
were,we-£,were,} were.
I am burn'd, than art burn'd, he is burn'd, I n'ere burn'd, I

was burn'd, I ha-ue hem burn'd, I had been burn'd, I ſheu'd he
burn'd, Iſhou'd have been burn'd.
All other Engliſh Affirmatiom, having no other differing
Endings to ſignify all the other different Times, which are
in Nature, muﬅ of Neceſſit ſupply that Defect, by making
uſi: of one or more of the e Nine foregoing Wordsz for be
ſides the pra ent and the paſſing Times, which the Engliſh di
ilin iihcs y varying the Ending of the Affirmatio't, there
lS efutare, or Time to come, the Time perfectly paſt, and
the Time more than perfectly paſt; all which theſe little Af
firmations eaſily ſupply.
Where-'er theſe Affirmations do precede,
The fading; of thejollewing have no need
To
Thechange at all, at
Uſe quers'nal thoſe muſt
Enacting: waſ]. ſtill,
te fulfil
Whenevcr theſe fore oing Affirmati-ue: are plac'd before
any others, they not onfy change their own Pe'ſbnal Endings,
but hinder the following Affirmatiom from chan ing theirs, as
I do leve, thou doﬅ la-ue, he doe: lo-ue, we, ye, anfthey do love;
not I do lime, thou doſt loweſt, he doe: la-uee, &c. But the Per
flmal Name is often left out, when the Affirmatiort implies Ex
Ol'tation or Command, as barn, for burn thou, or ye.
by We have(d)ſhewn,
adding to the that Affirmatiam
preſent, for their
or by changfhlg paſhttg(d)Time
(e) into or
(edli as, I leve, I lov'd, or lewd,- I barn, I burn'd or barneſ;
but the (ed) is now almoﬅ wholly left out, except in winged;
and a very few more; and therefore it is only on account of
ſome old Books, that we mention it here.
* Theſe
Theſe Perſonal Endings are not only omitted after the Nine
Affirmations, but after if, thar, tho', altho', whether, &e.
But when the preſent end: in (d) or (t),
The paſſing Time the ſame we alway: ſhe.
When the preſent Time ends in (d), or (t), the paffing has
the lame ending,- as, read, ſpread, mfl, hit, ſmit, and ſome
others, which are diﬅin uiſh'd only by the Pronunciation, tho'
they were doubtleſs ot old readen', ſþreaded, caﬅe-1, hine-4',
knitted, &e. And if they were ﬅill ſpelt with a double Con
ſonant, it would be much better for the Diﬅinction, tho* this
Defect is fully ſupply'd by the former Nine little affirmafiom
of Time, (75.
Other Exce tion: to thi: Rule we find,
Which to t e following Liſl are moſt.l conſign'd.
There are ſome Affirmatiom, which are irregular in this
Matter, or are Exceptions to this Rule, but this Irregularity
reaches only thoſe, which are Native, and originally Eng
liſh Words, and of one Syllable, or deriv'd from Words of one
Syllable.
The firﬅ Irregularity, and that which is the moﬅ general,
aroſe from our Wickneſs of Pronunciation, by changing the
Conſonant (d) into (t) as often as by that means the Pro
nunciation is made the more expeditious,- and indeed ſeems
rather a Contraction, than an Irregularityz particularly af
ter r, ib, ſh, ſ; le, p, x; and after s, and th, when pronounc'd
hard; and ſometimes after I, m, 72, r, when' a ſhort Vowel
goes before,- for theſe Letters more eafily admit a (f) than
a (d) after 'em; as, pluc't, [nate/it, fiſh't, wak't, dwelt, ſmelt,
inﬅead of plac'd, ſnatch'd, fiſh'd, wak'd, dwell'd, ſmell'd.
But (d) remains after the Conſonants 5, 12, w, 2., s, th,
when they have a ſofter Sound, and whetya long Vowel pre
cedes I, m, n, r, for they more. eaſily unite an ſi incorporate
/
with (d) than (t), becauſe of the like Direction of the Breath
to the Noﬅrils; as you may find in the Notes to this Gram
mar on the Formation of thoſe Letters; thus, liv'd,ſmil' raz'd,
belie-U'd, &c. from live, ſmile, nue, believe.
Except when the long Vowel is ſhortned before I, m, n, r,
or when (h) and (a) are chang'd into (p) or (f), and the ſofter
Sound oF (:) paſſes into their harder, as, felt, delt, dremt,
mew, left, bereft, &c. from to feel, deal,'dream, mean, len-va,
&erect-va, &c.
But
ſhe' Engliſh Grammar, with Notes. 83
But whenſſ (d) or (t) go before, and are join'd by (d) 01
(z), (in this contracted Form), they incorporate with the
radical (d) or (t), into one Letter; that is, if (t) be the radi
cal Letter, they unite into (t), but if (d) be the radical Let
ter, then they incorporate into (d) or (e), according as this,
or that Letter is t e eaſier to be pronounc'd, as read, led,
ſpread, dread, ſhred, tread, bid, hid, chid, fed, bled, bred, ſþed,
ſlrid, ſlid, rid, &e. (which, doubtleſs, were originally, read'd,
bid'd, &e. as it were, read'd, bid'd, &c.) from to read, lead,
c'þread, ſhed, dread, ſhread, bid, hide, chide, feed, bleed, breed,
ſpeed, ﬅride, ſlide, ride, &e. thus, eaﬅ, hurt, coﬅ, burﬅ, eat,
beat,ſweat, ſit, quit, ſmit, writ, bit, hit, met, ſhot, &e. (tho'
perhaps theſe Words wou'd for the Diﬅinction of the paffing
Time from the preſent, be better ſpelt; eatt, heart, bin, hitt,
&c.as it were,.eat't, bit't, Kt't, &c.) from theſe WOR D S, to
uſ', hurt, cqſl, burﬅ, eat, beat, ſweat, fit, quit, ſmite, write, bite,
hit, meet, ſhoot, &c. thus, lent, fine, rent, girt, &e. for lend'd,
ſend'd, &c. from to lend, ſend, rend, gird, &C.
Tho' this Irregularity be ſometimes loﬅ, and the regular
Spclling obſerv'd, as plac'd, fiſh'd, &c. yet 'tis but ſeldom, and
in few Words. -
There are not a few other irregular W O R D S in the paffing
Time, but thoſe, which are more particular and ſpecial, may be
reduc'd to their Claffits; as,
1. Whn, ſpitn, begun, ſwam, ſlruele, ſung, flung, flung,
ning, wrung, ſþrung, ſwung, drunk, ſimk, ſhrunle, ﬅank, hung,
wine, run, found, bound, ground, wound; many of them are
Eikewiſe ſpelt with (u), as began, ſang, rang, ſtrong, drank,
fame, ran, and ſome others, thq' not ſo often; from to win,
ſhin, begin, ſwim, ſlrihe, ﬅir/e, ſing, ﬅing, fling, ring, wring,
ſpring,ſ1oing, drink, ſink, ſhrinh, ﬅink, hang, come, .run, find,
find, grind, Wind, &ce. ' i * ' "
2. Foaght, taught, raught, ſbught, beſhught, raught, bought,
thought, thought, Wrought ,- from to ſight, teach, reach, ſeek, be
]Þeth, catch, buy, bring, think, Work ,- yet ſome of theſe ſome
times keep their Regularity; as reach'd, beſeech'd, eateh'd,
Work'd, &c. '
z. Took, ſhook, fbrſhok, woke, awoke, ﬅood, broke, ſpoke,
bore, ſhare, ſwore, tore, wore, wort/e, aloue, ſtrove, thro-ve, dro'ue,
lime, roſe, 'at-tye, ſmote, wrote, bode, abode, roſe, choſe, trod, got,
"For, forgot, rod,- ſome likewiſe write thrive, riſe, ſmit,
Wit, abid, rid, &c. others from them by (a), as brake, ſpake,
[We ſhare, ſware, tare, ware, tlave, gar, begat, ſorgar, and per
l'APs ſome others; but this Way is ſeldom, and very uino
' tcz
lite, the preſent Times of theſe Words are, rake, ſhake, for
ſake, make, awake, ſtand, break, ſþeale, hear, ſhear, ſwear, tear,
wear, meam, olea-ue, (to cling to), elea-ue (to ſplit), [tri-ye,
dri've, ſhine, riſe, artſo, ſmite, write, bide, abide, ride, chaſe (or
chooſe) tread, beget, forget.
4.. Give, bid, fit, having their paſſing Times, ga-ue, bad,
ate.
ſ. Draw, know, ſnow, grow, throw, blow, crow, fy, ſlay, flee,
I), make their paſſing Times, drew, knew, ſhew, (or rather
ſnored) grew, than? ble-T, (or ratherflblow'dzl) crfiow, (or rather
erow'd5)
Theſe 2ijen', en', the
all,flor aw,mojſl't
a , jlzart
ee (orat leyaﬅ,flc:f
e) ,- theom go, Conſe
moﬅ went.
quence of all the irregular WORDS in the Engliſh Tongue,

When Affirmations are together join'd,
To, ﬅill between them does it: Station find.
When Two word: of Affirmation come together, before the
latter the Sign (to) is always expreſs'd or un erﬅood; as I love
y to read, I dare fight; in the latter, (to) is underﬅood, for it
means, I dare to fight, as, do, will, may, can ,- with their paffing
Times, did, wou'd, ſhew'd, might, toa'd, and muﬅ, bid, dare, let,
help, and make.
CHAP.
9
[4] In this Place we ſhall alſo Timey, making ſome ſerve for ſun
add what we have to ſay of the ple Affirma'iom', as 'o-ueor, lov'd ;
Meed: or Form: of Verbr, as Af and others for thoſe Affirma'ionr
firmatiom. We have therefore al which were modiſy'd, as, might
ready ſaid, that Verbs are of that have lov'd, 'would have lov'd -, tho'
kind of Words that ſignify the Man not conﬅantlyobſerving the Rules,
ner and Form of our Thoughts, the they made uſe of ſimple Inflections
chief of which is Affirmation : to etſrP-uereor,
as, ex reſs modified
for erſ? Affirmatiom,
'vere-ar 3 and
And we have alſo obſerv'd, that
they receive different Inflections, 'tis oftheſe latterSort ofInflections,
aceordingas the Affirmarion relates that the GRAMMARIANS make
to differentTerſon: and Time: 5 but their Mood call'd the SubjunHi-ve :
Men have found, that it was proper Moreover (beſides the [Win-nation)
to invent otherlnflections alſo more the Action oſourWill may be ta
diﬅinctly to explain what pa s'd in ken for a Manner of our Thought,
their Minds. For firﬅ they obſerv'd, and Men had Occafion to mark
that beſides fim le Affirmations,as what they would have underﬅ00d,
he lover, he lo-u d, &e. there were as well as what they thought.
others conditional and modify'd, as Now we may will a Thing ſeveral
Tho' he might have lov'd, tho' he Ways, of which three may be con
'would have lov'd, &e. and the bet ,fider'd as chief: t
ter to diﬅinguh'h theſeAflirmariom
from the others, they doubl'd the ſir. We would have Things that
Inflections of the ſame Tenſer or do not depend on ourſelves,and then
' ' ' we
He Engliſh Gramm'ar, 'with Notes.
We 'will it only by a ſimple wiſh the Fnture, it thencehappens, that
95
which is explain'd in Latin by thethe Imperati-ve and Fu'ure are of
Particle Urinam, and incur-Tongue ten taken one for another, eſpecial
by 'would to God. Some _Langua
ly in the Hebrew, as non occider,
ges (as the Greek) have invented
particular Inflections for that t you 'ſhall not kill, for kill no' :
which has given occaſion to the Whence it comes to paſs, that ſome
GRAMMARIANS to call them GRAMMARLANS have plat'
the lmperaIi-ueamong the Futurer.
the Optati've Mood: And there's in
French, and in the SPanzfly, and Oſ all the Moods we have been
Italian, ſomething like it, ſmee ſpeaking of, the Oriental Tongues
have only this latter, which is the
there are triple Teiiſes; but in o-x
Imperative : And on the contrary,
thers, the ſame Inflectionsſerve for
the Subjunctive and Optatrve; and the Vulgar Tongues have no parti
for this Reaſon one may very well cular Inflection for the Imperativc,
retrench this Mood in the Latin but our way of marking it in the
Conjugations; for 'tis not only the
French, is to take the ſecond Perſon
different way of ſignifying, which plural, and even the firﬅ, without
may be very much multiply'd, but the Pronouns that go bcfore 'cm :
the different lnflections that ought us Van: aimez, Tau love, is a
to make Moods. ſimple Affirmation; aimez an Im
perative. Noiu aimonr, We love;
2.. We 'will ſometimes after ano
ther manner, when we content our aimdne an Impeiative: But when
ſelves with grunting a Thing, tho' we command by theSingular,which
abſelntely we would not do it; as is very rare, we do not take the ſe
when Terenee ſays, Trofnndar, per cond Perſon, Tu aimez, but the firſt,
dear, perear, Let him lov'ﬅ), ler/rim arme. "v i,
fink, let him periſh,&e Men might There's another Inflection of a
haveinvented anlnflection to mark bVerb, that admits ofneither Num
thisMovement, as well as they have er nor Perſon, which is what we
invented one in Greek, to mark a call Infinitive; as eſſe, e/t're, to be;
fimfle Deſire, but they have not be amare, aimer, to love. But it mufl:
done it, and make uſe of the Sub ohſcrv'd,that ſometimes the Infi
juncti-ve for it; and in French and nitivc retains the Affirination, as
Engliſh we add qu'e, Ier. Some when l ſay, Scio 'no/um eſſe fn
GRAMMARIANS have call'd giendum, l know the Evil is to be
this the Potential Mood, Mediu avoided; then often it loſesit, and
Porentialir, or Modnr Conee ionirl. becomesa Noun,cſpecially inGreek
and the Vulgar Tongues, as when
3. The third ſort of Willl'lg is, we ſay, Le boire, le manger, and
when what we 'will depends on'a
Perſon, ofwhom we may obtain it, alſo je 'vieux boire, volo bibere :
ſignifying to him the Deſire we for 'tis as much as to ſay, Volo pa
have rim: he 'will do it. This is tnm, or potmnem,
the Motionwehavewhen we coni his being fiippos'd, 'tis deman
mand or pray. 'Tis to mark this
ded what the Infinitivc is properly,
when 'tis not a Noun, bur retains
Motion, that the Mood call'd Impe
its Affirmation; as in this Exam
rati-vewasinvonted .- It has _no firﬅ
Perſon, eſpecially in the Smgulor, ple, Seio mit/um e e fugiendum s'
I know of no Body that has taken
becauſe one cannot properly com
'mond one's ſelf z nor the third in Notice of what I am about to ob
ſerve, which is, that we think the
ſeveralLanguages, becauſe we don't
properly command any but thoſe lnfinitives among the other Moods ,
to whom we addreſs and ſpeak. of Verbs, what the Rclative is a
And becauſethe Command or Deſire mong the Pronounsz for asthe Rc
lative has more in it than the other
in this Mood has always regard to Pronouns, thatit joynsthe Propoſl
K tion
"fi-l
'96 Zhe Engliſh Crammar, with Notes.

ztion in whiehit is to another Pro But we mufl: obſerve, that the
oſition, ſo 1 believe the Infinitive, Hebrewſ, tho'ffiheyſpoke in ano
eſides the Affirmation ofthe Verb, ther Language. (as the Evangeliﬅs)
miay join the Propoſition, in whichv make very little Uſe of this Union
-it is, to another; for Scia is as good oſ Propoſitions, but always relate
vasa Propofition of it ſelf; and iſ Diſcourſes directly as they were
ayou add- malum eſi fugiendnm, made,io that the 67' (quoao which
"twou'd he two ſeveralPropofitions; they frequently us'd, did often ſerve
but putting eſſe inﬅead of eﬅ, you for nothing, and did not join Pro
vmake thelaﬅPropofition but a part poſitions : An Example of whichis
ofthe firﬅ. And thenceit is that in St. john,\ch. r. Miſerunt 7ud.ei
in Bench they almoﬅ always ten ab Hieraſolymir ſacerdore: 65 ſcri
der the Infinitive by the Indicative hru ad Joannem at interragarent
vof the Verh, Ye ſcay, que le mal eﬅ eum, Tu qui; e: ? Et cauſe-flitſ e/i
fair, and then this que ſignifies on (5 non negzwit; (3 confejfiu efi quit:
ly this Union ofone Propofition to (o-n) Nun 'firm ega Chrifim. Er
another; which Union is in Latin interrogaverunt eum, Aſ: ergo?
contain'd in the Infinitive, and in Elia: e: in? Et dixit, Nan firm;
French alſo, tho' rarely, as when' ſPropheta er tu? Et reſþandir, Non. ,
we ſay, Il croit ſcaooir fouler According to the common Uſe of'
choſe-"1. . our Tongue, theſe Qiigtions and
This way of joining Propofitions Anſwers would have n related
by an Infinitive, or .by quod' and indirectly thus 2 The) ſent 'a ark
que, is chiefly in uſe, when we make John 'who he waſ? and he confeſr'd
one Part of a Diſcourſe have aRela he 'waſ nor Chriﬅ. And they de
tion to another; as if I would re manded, who he 'was then, ifhe war
port, that the King ſaid to me, je Elias? and he ſaid, No. If be
'vom- donn'ra nne charge, I ſhall 'war a Prophe': 2 and he reply'd, A'o.
not generally doit in theſe Terms, This Cuſtom is even met with in
The King ſaid to me, I 'will give prophane Authors, who ſeem to
thee a Faſt, le Roy m'a dit, je 'vani have borrow'd it alſo from the He
donnem nue charge, by leaving brenn: And thence it is that the
the two Propofitions ſeparate, one on had often among them only the
for me, the other for the King, but Strength of' a Pronoun, depriv'd of
ſhall join 'em together by a Qge le its common Uſe of Connection,even
Roy m'a dit, qn'il me donnem une when Diſeourſe is reported not di
charge; and then it being only a rectly.
Propofition, which is ofmy ſelf, I We have already ſaid, that Men
change the firﬅ, je donneray into. have, on an infinite Number of
the third, iI donneray, and the Pro Occafions, join'd ſome particular
nonn vour (ſignifying the King Attribute with the Affirmation,
ſpeaking) to the Pronoun me, (ſig made ſo many Verbs different fi'om
nifying my ſelf) who ſpeak. . Subﬅanti'vef, which are to bel-bond
This Union ofthe Propofition is in all Tongues, and that they may
alſo made by ſi in French, and by be call'd Adjecti've; to ſhew, that
an in Latin, in relating anlnterrſh the signification, which is proper
gativez as any one may demand to each, is added to the signification
of me, Pou-vez vourfaire rela, Can common to all Verbr, which is that
you do that? Iſhould in relating it of Affirmatian. But 'tis a vulgar
ſay, On m'a demandefi je pauwir Error to believe,that all theſeVerbs
faire cela, I 'war aſk'd, If I could ſignify Action or Paflion z for
do that : And ſometimes without there's nothing a Verb cannot have
any Particle, by changing only the fotits Attribute, ifthe Affinnation
Perſon; as, He aſk'd me, Who are be join'd to the Attribute. Nayzfve
you ? He med me, 'who _I man, -A_ J _ CC'
&716 Engliſh Grammar, with Notes.
ſee that the VerbSubﬅantive Sum, the Action, but a_ Lia/fry; as,
1 am, is frequently Adjective, he All'e , u i: wbzrewzr'er, it irgreeu ;
cauſe inﬅead of taking it to ſignify' friget, it i: cold, &e. Or ſome Si
t-he Affirmation limply, the moﬅ; mation; as, Sedet, beﬅ/r -, full, be
general ol' allAttrlbutes is join'd to i frandr, jacer, be her. Or has ſome
it, whichis Being; as when I ſay,l relation to Place; ſide/t, be i; pra-
ItF'ink, therefore I am; I am ſig ſent 5 ubeſr, be iſ abſent. Or ſome
nifics fiun ent, 'I am a Being, a other State or Artribute; as, 23;"
Hung z Exi/io, ſignifies-alſo firm ejbitſhe ir quiet z Bxcelliſſhe &rue/p;
exiſtent, I am, I exi/i. Prz-e/i, be i: ſuPez'iar; regna', be
However that does not hinder, i: King.
lut that the common Divifion of The other Verhs New-er ſignify
the ſe Verbs intoActiveszzfli-vqand Affianr, but ſuch as do not paſs in
N- mer, may be retained, Thoſe a Subject different from him, who
Verbs are operly call'd Active, acts,0r which do not relate to an.
Which figni A Afltan, to which is other Object; as, To dine, to ſup,
oppos'd LPayio'n 5: as, To bear, to be 'a march, to ſpeak.
beaten; 'a love, to be beloved . Nevertheleſs, theſe latter Sorts oſ
Whether thoſe Actionr be deter Verhs Next-r, ſometimes become
min'd to a Subject, which is called Trmg/iri-ue, when a Subject is given
mal Action, as, To bear, ra break, them; as Ambulare viam, where
to kill, &e. or only to an Object, the Way is taken for the Subject of
which is called intentional Action, the Affion ; often alſo in Greek, and
as, Ta love, ſo know, ro ſee. ſometimes in Lmin, a Suhjectisgi
Whence it is, that in feveralLan ven it, beinga Noun form'd of the
guages, Men make uſe ofthe ſame ſame Verh; as, Pugnare pugrmzu,
lVord, by giving it ſeveral lnflecti. fer-vire fer-viture m, Air-vere vimm.
ons, do ſignify both the one and the But We believe theſe later lVays
other, calling that a Verb Active, of Speaking ware occaſion'd only to
which has an Inflectien, by which mark' ſomething particular, that
the Action is mark'd, and la Verb was not intirely contain'd in the
Paffive, that which has an Inflecti. Verb, aswhenone would ſay, Man
on, by which theTaflTan is mark'd z leadi- a ſhameful Life, which is
Am, amor ; 'vex-hero, verberor. not imply'd in the Word 'vi'wre -, it
This was the Cuﬅom inall the an has been ſaid, 'vie-ere viram beatam ;
cient Languages, Latin, Greek,and as alſo Servire 'duram Scr-vr'tutem_.
Oriental; and moreover, theſe lac Thus when we ſay, 'aim-re viram,
ter gave Three Actives to the ſame 'tis without doubt a Tleonaſm,come
Verb, with each their Paſſive, and from thoſe other Ways of Speaking s
a Reciprocal between both the one For this Reaſon (in all the new
and the other; as, J'aimer would Languages) we avoid joining the
be,whicb ſignifies the Action ofthe Noun to the Verb, as a faulr,and
Verb, on the Subject of that Verb. don't ſay, for Example, To fight a
Butthc vulgar Tongues of Europe great Figbr.
have no (PaflZ-ue, and inﬅead of that By this that Ogefflon may be re
they make uſe of a Participle made ſolv'd, whether every Verb not Paſ
of the Verb Active, which is taken five govern always an Accuſative,
in a Paſfive Senſe, with the Verb at leaﬅ underſtood: 'Tis the Op'r
Subﬅantive, fie ſuiſ, I am; as, l nion ofſome very ableGRAMMA
am beloved, Jefiti: aime; Je ui: RIANS,but for our Parts we don't
battu, I a'm bearen, &e. hus think it. For firﬅ, The Verbs that:
much for Verbs, Active and Pafflve. ſignify no Action, but ſome Condi
Neuten, call'd by ſome GRAM tion; as, quiefcir, earl/fir, or ſome
MARIANS Ferlm intrunfirivaflre Quality, as, albet, calet, have no.
two Sorts -, the one does not ſignify Accuſativethey can govern -, andfor
K r. the '
the reﬅ it muﬅ be regarded, whe Verbs have ſometimes more Per.
ther the Action they ſignify has a ſons than the GRAMMARlANS
. Subject or an Object, that may be think of, as may be ſeen in the
different from that which acts. For Method. Latin Remark: on Verbr,
then the Verh governs the Subject, Chap. 5. But what we may Con
where this Object has the Accuſa fider here, and which few Perſons
tive. But when the Action ſigni have taken Notice of, is, that it
fied by the Verb has neither Sub ſeems they are call'd Imperſonaſ,
ject nor Object different from that only becauſe implying in their Sig
which acts, as, to dine, to ſup', nification a Subject, which agrees
proudere, ca-nare,&c. then there is only to the third Perſon. 'Twas
not ſufficient Reaſon to ſay they not neceſſary to expreſs the Fact,
govern the Accuſative: Tho' thoſe becauſe 'tis remark'd enough by the
GRAMMARIANS thought the Verb it ſelf', and thus the Affirma
Infinitive of the Verb to be under tion and Attribute have been com
flood as aNoun form'd by theVerb, priz'd by the Subject in one Word',
and by this Example, Curro, they as Puder me, that is pudor tenet, or
will have it curro t'urfum, or eurro, eﬅ tenenr me; Pa'nitet me, Pdnt!
turrere : However, this does not ap babet me; Liber mibi, libido efl
Fear to be ſolid enough,ſor theVerb mihi: Where it muﬅ be obſerv'd
rgnlfies everyThing ; the Infinitive that the Verb eſi is not only ſimply
ſignifies taken as a Noun, and ſur the Subſtantive, but ſignifies alſo
ther, the Affirmation and Defigna Exiſtence. For 'tis, as if 'twas ſaid',
tion of the Perſon and Tenſe. As Libido exiflir mr'bi, or eft exiſten:
the Adjective candidm, white, ſig mihi. And thus in other lmperſo
nifies the Subﬅantive drawn from nals reſolv'd by eſt, as Iioet mihi,
theAdjective (to wit) eandor,w/:ire for lieitum eſ' m'hi, apartet orare,
neſt, and alſo the Connotation of a for OPXU eft orare, &e. As to Paſ
Subject, in which is that abﬅract; ſive Imperſonals, Srarur, curritur,
wherefore, there's as much Reaſon 'vi-uirur, &e. they may alſo be re
to pretend, that when we ſay,Homo ſolv'd by the Verb eſt, orfir, or exi
mndidm, oandere is to be under fn'r, and the Nouns Verbaltaken of
rA!u_bM-c_L.A4
ﬅood, as to imagine that when we themſelves, as Sta'ur,that is,Statio
ſay currir, eurrere is to be under fir, or eſt facta, or Exifri' -, Curri
ﬅood, - tur, curſur fit; Concurritur, con
The Inflniti'ue (which we have curſur fit; vivirur, vita eft, or ra
been explaining) is what properly ther vira agirur. Siflc Womenſ?
ſhould be called a Verb Imperſonal, 'vita eft talir, If Life- i: ſuch. Mi
ſince it marks the Affirmation, f-re aivirur, cum medtee vieitur;
which is the Property of the Verb, iſi: is miſerable when too
and marks it indefinitely, without much ſubjected to theRlulesoſPhy
Number and Perſon, which is pro ſick, and then eſ' becomes-a Sub
perly to be Imperſonai. ﬅantive, becauſe of the Addition of
Nevertheleſs the G R A M M A. mifere, which makes the Attribute
R I A N S generally give the Name of the Propoſition.
of lmperſonol to certain defective Dum femitur libidini, that is,
Verbs, that have hardly any thing dum fer-vitieſ exhibotur l'bidini,
'but the third Perſon. when a Man makes himſelfa slave
There are twa Sorts of theſe to his Paſſions. By this methirncs
Verbs, the one have the Form oſ may be concluded,theVulgar Lan
Verb: Neurer, as Peniter, Pudet, guages have not properly Imperſo
piger, Iioet, luber, &e. the other nals, as when we ſay in Freneb, it
are made oſ Verbr (Paffiz-ve, and re. ſmit, iſ muſt, il eft Per-mix, 11 me
tain the Form, as Staſur, ourrirur, plaiſr, for il is there properly' a
qmamr, oi-uimr, &e. Now theſe Relative, which always ſerves m
ﬅead:
YZe Engliſh Grammar," 'wit/actNotes.
99
ﬅead ofthe Nominative oftheVerb, c/Lﬅur, orCa/or eſt,orfit, or exiſ'ir .
which generally comes after in the And ilfaz't c/zaud, that is to ſay, il,
Conﬅruction, as if we ſay, il me 'c-'-aud (il calle) or le tband 'ſe
pa'ir defaire cela 5 that is to ſay, il fair, to ſay exiſn't, eſt. Thus we
de faire, for the Action ar 'be Mo alſo ſay, ilſe fail tard, for il Miſ
tion to do that pleaſe! out', or eſ! da, that is to ſly, il 'ar-de (le tard,
man Plaiſir, 'tis my Pleaſure. How or the Evening) fefnz'r. Or as is
ever, this il (which flaw People in ſaid in ſome Provinces, il r'en 'an
our Opinion have rightly under Yard, for il rarde, [e tard r'en 'va
ﬅood) is only a Sort ok'Prononn, for wnir,that is, theN ight approaches :
id that, which ſerves inﬅead oſthe As alſo il eft jour, that is, iljaur
Nominative underſtood, or imply'd (or theDay) eſt, ii. II eſſfix lrenrei,
in the Senſe,and repreſents il,ſo that that is, il tempt/t'a- beure: eft z The
'tis properly taken from theArticle Time or part of the Day call'd Six
il, of the Italiam ; inﬅead of which a Clock,is. And thus in other the
we ſay le; orfrom the Pronoun illa, like Terms.
from whence we alſo take our Pro Tho' we have no Turliciple! in
noun ofthe third Perſon il 5 il aime, Engli/hhut what by the beﬅ Judges.
il Þarle, il calm, &e. are reduc'd toQLm/it ier,yct to carry
For the Palſive lm rſonals, a on this general Grammar, we here
mamr, curri'ur, expre s'd in French add ſomething onthem : Participlek
by on aime, on court; 'tis certain are true Noun Adjectives, and
theſe Ways of Speaking inour Mo 'twould not be proper to diſcourſe
dEm Langnages, are ﬅill leſs Im' of 'em here, if they had not ſurh
perſonal tho' Indefinite; this an, a near Relation to Verbs. ThisRe
is there or My', Homme, and con lation conſiﬅs (as we have ſaid) in
ſequently ſerves-inﬅead of the No th'at they ſignify the ſame Thing as
minative'to'the Ve'rb: All this re the Verb, except the Affirmation,
htes particularly to theFreneb,and which is taken away, and the De
we have leſs ofthe lmperſonal than ſignation of the three different Per
they, but'tbe ſame Reaſons will re ſons, which follows tbeAffirmation;
movea1rs,juﬅly a ply'd- And one For which Reaſon (when 'tis re
may alſo obſerve, t at the Verl s of ſror'd to it)we do the ſame thing
the Effects oſ Nature, as, PI-n'r, by the Participle, as by the Verb 5:
ningi', grandina", may be explain'd as amatu: ſun', is the ſame thing as
by theſe ſame, in both Tongues. amor; and ſum amanl, as amo.
As 'Pluit is properly a' Word; in And this Way of ſpeaking, by Par
which for Brevity ſake the Subject, ticiple, is more uſual in Greek and
the A'flirmation, and Attribute are Hebrew, than in Latin, tho' Cicero -
included, inﬅead of Pl'ruia fir, 0_r makes uſe of it ſometimes.
ndit yond when We ſay it Raim', 'r Thus the Participle retains the
Snow. it Hail:,-&'c. it is therefore Attribute of the Verb, and alſothe
the Nominative, that is to ſay, Defignation of the Time: or Tenſe,
Rain', Sno'wr, H-filr', &e. included there being Participles: of vthe Pre-
with meirVerbSubﬅantivee r or fu uſent, the Preterit, and the Future;
ir; as if we ſhould ſay, ilp me eſt, eſpecially in Greek. But this is not
le Neigeſe fair, for id quod dici'ur always obſerv'd, tho? ſomev Parti
pin-vice eſ', id quod votatur nix fit. 'cip-les join often allSorts ofT'enſks ;>
This ls better ſeen in theWay of as for Example, the Palſlve Parti
Speaking, where the French join a ciple Amamr, which in moﬅ
Vetb with their il, as i/fm'r cbaud, GRAMMARIANS paſſes for the
ileft tard, il eſ' ſix beurer, iI eſ? Preterit, is often ofWell-reſentme
jour, &e. For 'tis the ſame as may urc- asamaru: ſum, amatm ere.
he ſaid in Italian, il mld' fa, tho' And on the contrary, that of the
in uſe- we ſay ſunply, fa mldoz Preſent, as maw, is often- of the
K 3 fPffi
roo He Engliſh Grammar, with Notes.
Preterit, Aþri ſuþer ſe dimicant,l more Diverſity either oſ Gender or'
indurame; attritu arbarum raſiraI Number, in which it differs from
Plin. That is to ſay, paftquam in the Participle in no', mmmu, ama
dura'uere, and the like, NauMetb. ta, amatum.
Lar. Remarq. on Partici les. We know very well the GRAM
There areActive and aſſrve Par MARIANS are pnzzled a littleto
ticiples, the Active in Latin end in explain the Nature of the Gerund a
an: or enr, turram, dorem; the and that ſome very able ones have
Paſſwe in ur, amatuſ, dactur; tho' thought 'twas an Adjective Palfive,
there are ſome of theſe that are whoſe-Subﬅantive was the Infini
Active, to wit,thofe of Verbs Depo tive of the V erbz ſo that they pre
nent, as Locutw': But there are tend for Example, that ten-pru- e r
ſome alſo, that add this Paflive Sig* legend;" Libror, or Liln-arum ( or
nification, que tela dal: eſtre, qu"il both theone and the other is us'd)_
faur qne cela fair, that muﬅ or is as ifit were temPnr eſt legendi
ought to be, as are the Participles 72? legem Mrot 'vel librarum.
in le', nmandur, that 'but aught to There are-two Speeches, to wit,
Z'e belov'd; tho' ſometimes that tempur le endi rs'legere, whiCb is
Rage' Signification is almoﬅ quite the Adjegtiveand Subﬅantive, as if
b . it was legend-e lectianix, (5 legen
* The Property of Participles of Librox, which is the Noun Verbal,
Verbs Active, is to ſignify theActi that then goveins the (hſe of the
en of the Verb, as 'tis in the Verb, Verb, as well as a Subﬅantive go
that is to ſay, in the Courſe of the vems the Genitivc, when we ſay.
Action it ſelf; whereas Verbal lilzrorum for Librar- But conſider
Nouns,that fignifyActions alſo,ſig ing every thing, we don't ſee, that.
nify them rather in the Habit,tha-n this Term is neceſſary.
in the Act. Thence it is,that Parti For x. As they ſay of legem',
oiples baye the lame Regimen as that 'tis aVerbal NounSui ﬅantive,
the amam Deum. Whereas Ver which as ſuch may govern eithen
bal Nonns have the ſame Regimen the Genitive, or even the Accuſa
as Nouns, amatar Dei. And the tive, as the Ancients ſaid, curatz'o.
Participle it ſelf, has the fime Regi ban: rent; Arid tibi ban: tactlo
men as Nouns, when it fignifies ra eſt zPlaut. We ſay the ſame Thing,
ther the Habit than the Act oftheof' legendum, that 'tis a Verbal. -
Verb, becauſe it then has the Na Noun Subﬅantive, as wellas le ere
ture of a. ſimple Now-Verbal, as and that conſequently it may alſ
amam' 'Ulſſnſlſ that's attributed to legere.
We have ſeen, that by taking a- ' 2.. Thereis n'oGround toſa:y,that.
'ay the Affirmation fiom Verbs, a Word is underﬅood when 'tis ne
Active and Paifive Participles are "ver exprefi, and cannot he expreſt
made, which are Nonn Adjectives, without apparing abſurd- Now
retaining the Regimen oftheVerb, never was an Infiniti've join'd to.
at leaﬅ in the Active. its-Gerzmd : andif one ſhould ſay
But there are in Latin two Noun Iegendum-efſ legem, it would appear
Subitantives form'd, one in dum, altogether abfirrd therefore, &30.
called a Genmd, which-hasdivers 3. Ifthe Gemn 'legendmn were
Caſes, dum, di, do 5. amandum, a van Adjective Paſſive, it would not.
mandi, amando, z but it hasbut one be different from the Participle le
Gender, and one Number, in which endur -,- for what Reaſon therefore
it diffirs fi-om the Participle in dur, flid the Ancients, who underﬅood
amundzu, nmanda, amandum, :their Tongue, diﬅinguiſhxſierunds.
Another in um, called- Supine, from Participles LWe believe there-
which has alſo two Caſes, tum, tu, fore the Gemudis a Noun But-Ram
Human', amamz. but. it. has no. -'\V*' ' tive;
The Engliſh Grammar, with Notes. rot
tive, which is always Active, and Ilfaur combattre; and in Engliſh,
which differs from the Infinitive, 'we ought tafighr.
only conſider'd as aNoun ; becauſe But as Words do not always e
it adds to the Signification of the ſerve the Forcev for which t ey
Action oſ the Verb, another of' the were invented,.this Gerund in dum.
Neceſſity or Duty ;-.:xs if one Would often loſes that Oporrer, and pre
ſail', the Action that is to be done, ſerves only the Action ofthe Verh -,
which ſeems to be mark'd by the Qyir talia fanda Temperer a La
Word Gemnd, which is taken from crymir; That is to ſay, in fandoz
gerere, to do; whence it comes or in fare' talia.
that jn'gnand'lm eſ', is the ſame As for the Supine, we agree with
Thing as Pugnare oportet 5 and the thoſe GRAMMARIANS, that it
Engliſh and Frenchwhich have not is a Noun Subﬅanrive, which isvpnfi
this, render it' by the Influiti-uefind' five, _whereas the Gerund inour
a Word which ſignifies aught to be. Opimomisaiways atiive.
CHA P. IX.
OfPARTICLES, or Manner-s of W o-r. os;
.'BCjircumﬅance
PARTICLES and;theſe ﬅ-ueml
Manner Thing: are
of Words are ſhown,
done;
And then to every Part of speech are flame;

Or elſe they do denoteaf Words the State,
And haw each Word to other does nelate e
i
Or Sentence,_elſe to Sentence the] my;
And their Dependance an each other me.
[1] 'ARTICLES (that is little WORDS) or Manner: of
v WORDS, have theſe ſeveral. Offices: ifl, They
expreſs or ſignify the Circumﬅanee or Manner of Woe-ſly; as, I.
[Mayor-dearly,- explaining (when Jom'dv to an Wrmatwn) hour,
When, where, or whether, or no one is, does, or ſuffers; as,he reade
well; he dance: ſcurvily; he ſings now; the Play is. acted here;
it is a Doubt Whether he ſing: or not. It is. join'd to a QUA
LITY; as, he i: very happy ,- he i: alwaysflmmata. ,* a Woman truly,w
loving i: ever diſhppointed ,- a W'z' e ſeldomſeoldingj: (very rare, &CL
'Tis ſometimes join'd to it elfz. as, I live very camortahly;
They farther denote, or ſhew the State of Mrdx, and-.t eir Re
fermee or Relation to eachother z as, Steghen gem over HighgaZ-w
Hi a
[1] We have already oBſerv'd, lationS', that Things have to one
thatCaſcsandPrepoſitionspr Fore- another.. in all Languages theſe
a/ac'ilWard;,vzlere invented for the- Relations are: Ihewn. by Prepoſi
anurc,t_ha.t
' - - lbſitcithWſhc'R
'- . . c-- thflS.,. Lel The:
'
\
ma ſhe Engliſh Grammar, with Notes.

Hill; james went under Temple-bar; Mzry want through the
Hall,- Suſan went to ſ-Veflminfler, fi-om St. Yames's Bark; the
King dwell: at St. Tumex's; Henry live: in the Drum, but Matthew
Without, or out of it, &e. It connects Senteuccs; as, Roger went
to his Caunhy-lyouſe, and ﬅudj'd there the whole Sea/in: ,* Peter
alſh accompt/ty'd him; nor war there 'my thing wanting,- neither
did Ralph ſin] long behind.
[2] They are therefore divided into three _Sorts, or rather
rang'd under theſe three Heads; the firﬅ ſhewing the Mannerr,
or ozmlitie: of War-lnby bein added to them; the ſecond
denotes ſome Circumﬅances o Affiam, and join: Words to
Words, and little Members of a. Sentence to each other; the
third joins Sentence to Sentcnce, as greater Members of a.
Theſe fi'om the other Parts of speech are known,

Becauſe before them tle? do ﬅill otſiznnd
from, diſhnm, all
By, with, for, throug
'Thoſe Names, 'bie/3 we the Perſoml do cell.
_,[z'] The Deſire Men have to ſignify the Form of our Thoughts,
ſhorten Diſcourſe, gave Riſe to Ad and not properly their'Objeets, are
'verb/3 for the greateﬅ Part of theſe the Conjunction or joining-Wordr,
as et, non, waſh/i, ergo, &e. and, not,
Particlel, are only vto ſignify in one
Word, what could not elſe he vor, if, therefore, becauſe if we con
done without a (Prey a/ſrion and a ſider Wcll, and reflect juﬅly, we
Noun; as Sapien'er, for mm ſa ſhall find,tha': thefePalticlesfigniſy
iemia, with Wiſdom'; l-odz'c, to nothing but the \ery Operation of
Hey, for in her die, in rbi: Day. the Mind, which joins or disjoins
And this is the Reaſon, that/in Things, which we deny, or which
the mlgar Languages the greateſt we conſider ahſolutely or conditio
Part of the Adm-rb: arc generally_ nally; for Example, Therein _no
more elegantly ezzplztirr'd by the Objett in the Worldlies out oſour
Nann and the Trepqflti'on; thus We Mind; which anſwers the Particle
rather ſay'twe ſpeak generally, for Nun; but it is plaim-tliati: denote: -
it holds not always) 'wit/7 Wiſdam, nothing but the Judgment, which'
witlzTrudenee,evizb*Pridc,wiI'-Mo. we make, to ſhew that one thing is
dlratfon, than wiſely, -1'Þl!l'<'}1ſ[_$', not another.
Prondly, moderately; tho in Latin Thus Ne, which in- Latin is a
it is generally more elegant to uR: Particleof Interrogation, as Ailne -,
the Adve'br. ' Do ymfay it? is not the Object of
Thence it is, that a Nmm or our Mind, lvur. only mmks the-Lia
Name, is often taken for an Ad tion of our Soul, by'which we deſire
verb; as Inſrdr in Latin, primnm, to know ſomething. And the ſame
or Prima,partim,&c. Thus in French may be ſaid of all Words of lnter.
De m, de/ſmu, dedanr, which are rogation, as Quit, que, quod. '
in eed Nounr. Theſe two Sorts of Interjections are Words that fig
Particles, which we have juﬅ re nify nothing Without us, hut they
mark'd on, are concemed in the Ob are Words, or rather Sounds,which
jects of the Mind, not intheActions are more Natural than Artificial,
or-iudgment. which expreſs the Emotions of our
- he ſecond Son: of Words,which Soulsz as alar! wan ma! ab! &e.
This Part of Speech is eaſily diﬅinguiſh'd from the reﬅ',
becauſe in good Senſe they cannot admit theſe Words, qf, to,
far, O, with,hhy,_fram, through 5 nor the Per onal Names, I, thou,
he, we, ye,
fooliſhly, &e.t nor
ey 3 for we cannot
I fboliſhlyz ſay, offboheiſhl , to fooliflaly,from
thaa- fooliſhly,
This firﬅ, with Affirmation and if: Name,
Make: perfect Sea/e, a: Peter (lowly came;
Am] by its anſwering te the flee/lion: How, .
And ire what manner, do they ﬅeer the Plough?
You may know the firﬅ, by its making complete Senſe
with one Affirmatian and its Name; as, A Philq/bpher ſpeaks.
wiſely; A wiﬅ: Man li've: happily. And by anſwering the
Weﬅion How .? or after what Manner? This Part of speech is
ſometimes join'd to a Name or aality to expreſs their Man
ner, as, too mach a Philoſbpher: egregioaſly impudent. But here
indeed, and in moﬅ Caſes, a Wort! is expreſs'd or underﬅood,
to which this alſh relates.
This Sort the Manner, Time, and Place impb',
A: hy the flllowing Scale you will deſery.
This Sort relates either to the Manner, Place, or Time.
The firﬅ expreſſes the Manner of being, doing, or ſuffering Ab
ſhlately or Comparatively.
r. laﬅ-any.
1. Certainty; as, Verily, tral , undoucttedbf.
2. Contingence; as, Happiy, perhapx, chance, per
chance.
3- Negation; as, Not, in no wiſe.
Natural Powers, or Habits; as, Wffely, liberally,
BY
Senſible Impreſſions; as, Brightly, haﬅily, bitterly,
5" may, ſmoothly;
zſhſſions of the Soul; as, Merrily, joyfielly; as, Ha!
ha .' he ! Wondringly, as, Lo .' 0! oh I Scornfully,
6
as, Taſh ,* Lovingly, as,Ah! Hatefully, as, Foh i
Somowingly, as, Alas! ah! Noe's me!
Il. Comparati-ueh.
Excefsz as, very, exceeding , taa- mach, more, miſfi
' as more hardly, ma
By '2. Defect; as almoﬅ, well nigh, little leſx, leaﬅ of all.
ſi Likeneſs, or Equality; as ſi', alike, as it were, as.
Unlikeneſs, or lnequalityz as, otherwiſe, dlflhrtntl/W.
4" far otherwiſe. III. Of
r ** '*_*'l
ro4. The Engliſh 'Grammar,' with Notes.
Ill. Of Place.
f
Preſence in a Place, anſwering to the (lueﬅion
thWPas here, there, elſizwhere, every where, no
1. where, ſbmewhere elſe, oha-ue, below, within, with
out,- or to thc (lueﬅioſh with whom? as, toge
ther, at once, apart, ſeveral'g,
Denote 2. Motion from a Place; as whence, hence, thence.
gMotion towards a Place; as V/hirherwonls, hither
3 worth, thitherwardx, otherwnnl, toward, upward,
backward. V
The Way to a Place-5 as Whither mony, thir, that, or
4 another may. Tho' theſe are ſcarce to be allow'd
Particles, _or Manners of Words.
' The Term or End of Motion, as whither, hither,
Lf' thither, whitherto, hitherto,
IV. Of Time.
Being in Time; as, when? either the Preſent, as
now, to do) 5 the. Paﬅ, as already, reſtenlay, before,
long ſince, heretofore, the Future, as Ta-morrow,
Denote not ye', afler, hereafler, hencefbrwnrd.
Duration and Continuance; how long ;? a long while,
2" Z ſlowly, quicklj, ſhortly, hitherto.
erciffitudc, or Repetition; how dam)- vften, ſinne
3. times, ſeldom, daily ,- yearly; by tnmr, alternately 5
once, twice, thrice, ten timer, &c.
Thoſe that are deriv'd- from &talk-in, which admit De ees
of Compariſon, dotthe lime; as hardl , more hordl , mo , or
'very hardly.
The ﬅrond Sort, thar/hew of Word: the State,
And how th V/ord to Others door relare,
Yon in the flllawing Catalogne will find,
And how 'in Uſe and Meaning i: to each offign'zl.
OF] denotes Relations betwixt the Word that goes before,
and the Word that follows it, whether that Word be
Name, Quilt), or Affirmotion; as, the Son of Adam,
but this properly belongs to Conﬅruction, to which we
refer you.
It ſignifies concerning, or the Objects, or Matter about
which you ſpeak or write; as, a Treatiſe of Virtue, or on
ex concerning Virtue. ' Th
e
The Mette; as, a Cup of Gold.
The Means, (or WITH) to die if Hunger
al; ſignifies AMONG; as, of Five Horﬅs, Four were
in .
THRQUGH ; 'tis of God's great Merty: But this is a
Vulgariſm; and ſcarcc worth Notice.
FROM, South of Windſor.
OFF] ſignifies Separation and Diﬅance, and has its Oppoſitc
in ON, which implies Continuation; as, to Put off; to
Put on ,- He put offhis Hat, he ﬅood off to Sea. It ſigni
fies Delayz He put me offfrom Day to Day, he is off and
on with me. .
FROM] implies the Term from which, or Motion, and is op
pos'd to TO; as, He went from Hackney to London;
from Head to Foot, from firy'l to laﬅ, from hence to
thence, &c.
It ſignifies OFF; as, He took 'ne from the Ground', or
fiom off the Ground. Out of Sincerity, I ſpeak it from
my Heart.
TO (Unro, not much us'd) ſignifies Motion to, I go to Wind
ſhr 5 faithful to his Sovereign." ,
IN] to Day, i. e. in this Day, To-morrow.
FOR] ſhe had a thoaſhnd Pound: to her Fortune.
BEFORE] you promiſe me to my Face.
ABOUT, or concerning] speak to the Head va agreed
on.TOWARDS] ſiIXthanlc you fbryoar Kindnefl to me.
TILL, or until] The bMeeting is put off to No

vcmber. 1" , ,
In Compariſhn OF] He is nothing to Hercules, or in
Compariſhn of Hercules.
MAY, can or will] Ihave nothing to comfort me,- i. e. that may,
can, or will comfort me. _
TILL, or Until] is only ſpoken of Time, He play'd till Eight
o'Clotk.
Before] He wou'el not remove his Marte's till (or un
til) his Contrihations were paid.
FOR] denotes the Purpoſe, End, or Uſe, Benefit or Damage for,
Go. George got a Houſe for Step/un,- the Ad'UOL'flN plead:
for his Client. ' _
Oppos'd to againſt] William i: for me, john zs
againﬅ me.
Fitncſs, Inconvenience] as, 1th Hat is too little ſon
me.
Ex
Exchange, or trucking] as, He had Barley for hie
Hepr. i
.1n place, or inﬅead of] Harry did Daty for john.
Diﬅribution] I appointed one Raom for every Cam
Pa Yn. regard or conſideration of] as, He liv'd high
enough for his Eſtate.
In conſideration of] fame: was rewarded for his
Valaur.
During] He was Captain of the Fart, for Life.
Noltwithﬅanding] For all his conceited V/iſdom, he war
a Foo .
BY] The ſeveral Meanings of this Word are ſeen in this Sen
tence: He was ſlain by his Enerny, ly (near, or beſide) a
Spring of Water, hat wounded firſt by hir own Fear, and
then by hi: Enemy': Sword.
In] By Da , by Night.
WITH] 'ſhews the nﬅrument, or Means, and Concomitance;
He was flain with a Sword; he abide: with me', he
purg'd with Tallop.
THROUGH] implies the Cauſe, Means, or Medium, but
' chiefly the local Medium, tho' it ſignifies the Moral
and Natural likewiſe; as, The Bear/1: of the Sun with
inn-edible speed paﬅ from Heaven, through the Air re
the Earth, endu'd with Light and Heat, by (with
through) which it comfort: m, and quicken: the Plants,
which God ha: prepar'd for m, and given to m, fhr our
'(Ue, and his Glory.
AFTER] oppoſes before, relates to Time and Place, the Po
fleriority of the former, and Inferiorit of the latter:
After Chriﬅmas, come: Hillary Term 3 t e sheriff is after
the Ma or.
Forfshe pine: after Melonx.
IN, INTO] denotes Time, Place, the Manner of being,
thinking, doing; with the Motive, Cauſe, or Means
of doing; John lives in the Caſtlez William goe: into
the Country ,- in Winter z in the City. ,
Poﬅure, Diſpoſition] To ﬅand in a decent Pq/Z'ure;
he i: in his cloak.
The Motivc] He did it in Revenge.
_ Among] Harry has not Sohrz'er] in all hi: Medira
num.
Manner of Change] He change: Water into Wine.
ATl
AT] implies Nearneſs to a Place, Time, Price; the lnſh-u
ment, Cauſe, Manner, We. At School, .at Weﬅminfler,
at the beginning, at the bottom.
Near, cloſe by] He Watches at the End of the Street.
For] He diſþos'd of his Titkets at a good Rate:
What do on ſhll this at?
With He plays at Bomls, at Cardr, at Dite.
' According to] At my Pleaſure;
On, or Upon] Baniﬅer is good at the Plate; Peter
is a Marlſman at Shooting.
Employment] To be at Stady, at Sapper, at Prayers.
WARD] tis always put after a Word; as toward, homeward,
Hea-u'mvard, and implies to.
A ter theflz former Particles ſlillſet
T e Perſonal Names, all in the following State;
The Pe'final Names coming after any of theſe Particles, are

to be put in their flllowing State; as, before me, not I, againfl
Him, not He,- after Whom, not Who.
There are many more of this Sort, but we ſhall be content
with theſe, as well as Dr. Wallis, ſince abundantly ſufficient
for our End: For the reﬅ, we ſhall refer you to a Treatiſe
of our Engliſh Particles, which we ſhall publiſh as a Supple
ment to the Study of the Engliſh Tongue,- as Tarſelinas, and
others, have done to that of the Latin.
By the third Sort of Particles is ſhenm 3

How Sentences Dependante may be known,
And to eath other Sentences we join. _
The third Sort of theſe Particles, or Manner: of Whrds;

join Sententes together, and let us ſee by that the Relation of
one Nation to another, and the Dependance of one Sentence
on another; as, and, alſh, fla as ,- nor, neither, but, unleſs, ne'uer
thelefl, home-ver, otherwiſe,- hiſa-ue, except, tho', altho', whereaszl
ſince, likewiſe, thereupon, &c.
What elſe is neceſſary to be known in Grammar, concern-3
ing theſe Particles, will be ſhewn in the following Part of out;
Divifion of Grammar, under the Title of Sententes.
The End of the' Third Part. '

L Pan!
PART IV.
CHA P. X.
OfSENTENCEs.
Jt leaﬅ, Three Mind: a Sentenre muﬅ contain',
H/br'ch muﬅ ſhme Sentiment or Thought explain.
Sentencc comprehends at leaﬅ Three Words, by which
A ſome Sentiment or Thought of the Mind is expreſs'd:

Nor can it be without one Affirmatian, and a Name
ſignifying the Subject of that Affirmatian, i. e. a Name of
which ſomething is affirm'dz as, a Lye i: abominable.
[r] The Conﬅruction of the Sentencc, is the regular Con
nection of the Word-s in the Form of Nature, which is gene
rally more regarded by the Englſh, and other Modern Lan
guages, than by thoſe of the Ancients.
A Sen
[X] As we have done in our Reaſon why the Adjective is to a.
Notes on the Parts of Speech, or gree with the Subﬅantive in Nnm.
W'nrcls, ſo we ſhall here add the ge her ; that is, that one be ut either
neral Notion of Grammar in the in the Sing'ular or Plura , as the
Syntax, or Conﬅruction of Words other is. Becauſe the Subſranti-ve
together in a. Sentcnce, according is theSubject that is confuſedly,tho'
to thoſe Principles of' the Art, directly mark'd by the Adjectiw.
which we have drawn from Reaſon If the Subfranri-ve marks many,
eſtabliſhed. there are many Subjects of' the
- The Conﬅruction of Words, is Form, mark'd by the Adjeflie-e,
generally diﬅinguiſh'd into Can. and by Conſe ence it ought to he
cord and Governmem; the firﬅ, by in the Plural ffiimber, as Hamine:
which the Words ought to agree dacti, learned Men. But there be.
among themſelves, and the ſecond, ing no Termination in the Qui/fly
when one cauſes any Alteration in in Engliſh, to diﬅinguiſh the Num
the other. her, it is only imply'd in Reaſon,
The firﬅ, generally ſpeaking, is the ſameWord ſignifying theSingu
the ſame in all Languages, becauſe lar, as well as Plural Number.
it isthe natural Order, which is in The Diﬅinction ofthe Maſculine
the general Uſage, the better todi and Feminine Gender, obliges the
ﬅinguilh our Diſeourſe. Languages which have diﬅinct
Thus the diﬅinction of the Two Terminations, to have a Concer
P 'um bers,$ingular andPlural,isthc dance or Agreemcnt between the
Name
The Engliſh Grammar, with Notes. rog
Name and Quzlity, or Suhflanti-ve cauſe it is the proper Office oſthe
and Adjecti-ue in Gender, as well as Verb to affirm, and therefore it:
Number. muﬅ have ſomething to affirm of,
The Verhr, or Affirmntion: for which is the Subject or the Nami
the ſame Reaſon are to agree with native of' the Verb: tho'before an
the Noun; and Honaum, or Name-r, Infinitiv'e, there is an Accuſative,
and Prrſonal Name: in Number (not a Nominati-ue Cnſc) as Stin
and Perſon. Petrxm cfl'e dactum, I know Peter
But ik'at any Time, in Reading, to be learned. But this of the Ac
you meet with any Thing that may cuſative relates only to thoſe Lan
appear contrary to theſe Rules, it guages which have that Caſe.
is ya Figure ofDiſcourſe, that is, The Third, that there can be no
by having ſome Word underﬅood, Adjecti-ue or Qna'iry, which has
or by conſidering the Thoughts not a Rcſerence to ſome Sub mn
more than the Wordsthemſelves, as m/e or Name, becauſe the dje
we ſhallſee anon. Ctive marks conſuſedly the Subl'mn
The Conﬅruction oſGovemment 'me or Name, which is the Subject:
on the contrary, is intirely arbi of the Form that is diﬅinctly
trary, and for that very Reaſon is mark'd by the Adjective or uali
different in all Languages. For one ty; as Doctur, leam'd, muﬅ ve
language forms their Government re ard to ſomeMan who is learned.
och imen by Caferz others make he Fourth, That there never is
uſeo little Signs or Particles in a Genitiw Cafe, which is not go
their Place, which yet do not mark vern'd by ſome other Name or
all the Caſes, as in French and Spa Noun,hecauſe that Caſe continually
m'jh,they have only de and a, which marks that which is as the Poſſd'
mark the Geni'i-ve and Da'i've for, ſo that it muﬅ be govern'd by
C'aſe: z the Italian: add da, for the the Thing poſſeſs'd. For this Rea
Ablative, the Engliſh have of, to, ſon, both in Latin and Greek, this
for, from, by, &e. yet none for the Caſ: is never govern'd properly by
Accuſative,and the ſame ſometimes a Verb. This Rule is with more
for Two Caſes. Here you may look Difficulty applyd in the Vulgar
hack to what has been ſaid on the Tongues, becauſe the Particle or
Caſes, and forward to what may be Sign of, which is roperly the Sign
added in the Appendix of Prepa oſ the Geniti-ue uſe, is ſometimes
fitionr, to the ſhort Remark on put for the Prepoſition of, and de
them in their Places. French, for ex and de.
Yet it will not be amiſs to oh The Fifzh, That the Government
ſerve ſome general Maxims, which oſVerbs is oftentimes taken from
are oſ great Uſe in all Languages. divers Sorts of Refcrcnces, included
The Hip, That there is no Na in the Caſe according to the Ca-_
minati-ve aſe, or firſt State of the priciouſneſs of Cuſtom or Uſage,
Name in any Sentence, which has which yet does not change the Spe
not a Reſerence to ſome Verh or cifick Reſerence of each Caſe, but
Affirmation, either expreſs'd or un only ſhews, that Cuﬅom hasmado'
derﬅoodz becauſe we never talk choice ofrhir or that, according to
merely to mark the bare Objects of Fancy.
out Conception, but to expreſs our Thus in Latin we ſay, Yuoare
Sentiments of what we conceive, aliquem, and Opirulari alicm', for
which is the Office oſ the Verh or theſe areTwo Verbs of Aid, becauſe
Affirmarian to mark. it pleas'd the Latin! to regard the
The Second, That there is no Government ofthe firﬅ Verb,as the
Verb or Affirmatian, which has not Form, to which the Action paſſes ;
its Name or Nominati've Ca e, ei and that of' the ſecond, as a Caſe of
ther expreſs'd or underﬅoo 5 be L 4a Attn
s
no The Engliſh Grammar, *- with Notes.

A Sentence is, or ſimple, or compound,
Still in thefirſt, One AFFIRMATION'sfband,
And of the Sahject too, One NAME expre/i'd,
Or underﬅood, a: i: hy all confeﬅ'd. _
Sentences are twofold, ſimple and compound,- a ſimple Sen
tenee is, where there is but one AFFIRMATION and one
NAME of the Subject of that Affirmation, either expreſs'd or
under/food.
A compound Sentente i: of Two compos'd,
Or more, hy Particles together elox'd.
Or Conjunctive (Lialities eamhin'd,
A: In th' Example: you may quickly find. _
vA compound Sentence is made up of Two, or more ſimple
Sentences join'd to each other b ſome Pay-title: or eon'anflive
UALITY; as Pride, and t on walkeſt. Thi: is t e Man,
w o did the Savage kill.
Of the Conﬅr-uction of N A M E S.
The NAME, the Subject ofthe AFFIRMATION,
Beflzre it generally aſſume: it: Station.
The Name or Perſhnal Name, of which the Wrmation af
firms ſomething, is generally plac'd in Conflruction before the
Affirmetion; as, I am happy. Suſim love: Roger. The Parſon
preacher. The Book is read.
Exeept Command, or flee/lion he imply'd,
Then to the Name Prem/'enee is den 'd.
Bat may, can, ſhall, will, ought, wou'd, and do,
Before the principal Affirmation go,
N'n doe: the Name hetmeen them take it: Place,
' - Elſe will the Style want all it; Proper Graee.
Ex
Attribution, to whirh the Action Sometimes theſe different Regi

of the X'erb has a Rcſcrencc. - mens ofthc Verbs cauſe anAltera
Thus in French they ſay, Servir tion in the Senſe, in which the uſe
Qlelqu'zm, and Servia a quelque of' a Languugc muſt be conſider'd z
\ C/oſr, tOſL-I'Ue one,
to n Life. ſi toferve for, or as for Example in Latin, Cavere
alicui, to watch, or he careful of
Thus in _S,7aniſh the greateﬅ Part the Preſervation ofone -, but cavere
ofthe Ver/7: Active govern indiffe aliquem,
But in thisis we
to muſt
le aware
alwaysof him.,
have a.ſi
rently a Dalive, and an ,Aceuſa
rive Cnſe. ._ _ particular Regard to the Uſage of
Thus the ſame Verb may receive all Languages.
ſeveral Govcrnmcnts; as Prieﬅ/ire <We have in the Tent fiid what
alicui, or aliquem, and thus they is neceſſary for the Knowledge of
for Example ſay, Eripere morn' a the Figures of Speech,-to which wej
liquem, or aligucm a moſte, and refer yor
llic like. [z] Theſe
A
The Engliſh Grammar, with Notes, nr
Exccpt when a Yieflion, Command, Permiffion, or Cancer:
flm, be imply'd, for t en the Name is put after the Afflrma
tion, or betwixt one of the Nine Affirmations; Do, may, can,
will, ſhall, ought, &e. as, Does Stephen write? Will ye depart 3
Burn I 3 Burneſt' thou 3 or Doﬅ thou burn? &c.
If of the Nine, Two do at once precede
The principal Affirmation, then take heed
The Name between thoſe Two obtain its Lot',
Cou'd I have gone? cou'd Celia have forgot; '
But if the principal Affirmation, have Two of the Nine be
fore it, then the Name is ſet between them; as,
Cou'd Caelia have firrgottm me, ſhort
Might Roger hat/e gone out of Town ?
When the Command the ſecond Perſon takes,
The Pers'nal Name then no Appearance makes.
When the Command, Permiffion, .Conceffion, &e. is in the
ſecond Perſhn, the Perſhnal Name, which uſually goes before
the Affirmation, is oſten- omitted or underﬅood; as barn, for
burn thou; or you, or ye.
In other Perſons there is frequently a Circumlocution by
the Affirmation let,- as, let me burn,- let him burn, let them
burn. Let him ask as often as he will, he never ſhall' obtain,
Let me do what I will, it is to no Purpoſe. As for ask I, or ask
he, &e. tie-ver ſh often, &ce. it is Barbariſm, and never us'd by
any good Author.
When did, might, ſhou'd,wou*d, couFd, and'had andwere,
,. If do imply; and alſo after there
The Affirmation goes before the Name z,
By Way of Emplraſis 'twill do the ſame.
When the paſſing, or paﬅ Times of do, may, can, will,.ſhall,
have, am, ſupplics the Place of, or implies the Name' is. ſe:
after the Affirmation, and alſi) there is us'd', as, Had he (for if
he had) ask'd, he had obtain'd. Had I (for if I had) heard this,
I wou'd nor have been ſh complaiſhnt.. Were I a* Prince, L nuou'd
govern better. There fell a 'Zhouſbmd Men. on the Spen. There
.is Cold in the he, (or-'Cold is in the Iteſi The ſime is likewiſe
done by Way of Emphaſſs ,- as, It was Mordaunt, who conquer'd,
Ifwasv the Church t'hcttfellt.
This happens. ſometimes, when there' are- none of the-ſi:
þſhnfiderations 5, as, ſaid 15, fitidlhe, then follow'd Bebm'dera,
L3 TO,
na The Engliſh Grammar; With-Notes.
To, and an Affirmation me know ' _
Will fitr the Name to th' Affirmation go,
Aml to a Sentence we the ſame allow. _ *
Inſtead of the Name that goes before thedffirmatioa, and
of which the latter affirms ibmething, ſometimes another
Affirmatim,
ſomething affirm'dwith 'toofbefore
itzſi as, itz,
to ſupplies
dame is its Place, asto play
wholeflame; having
is
delighzfitl ,- to conſider is aſhfal. , _ ſi
A whole Sentcnce is the ctſame; as, That the Day i: broke,"
i: wit-lent, ſince the Sun ſhine-3. In ſhort, whatever' will an
ſWer to the Weﬅion who? or what? will 'ſupply the Office
of the Name to the Affirmation. , - - ' -
The Pers'nal Names, orfbllom, or procee/let,
E-u'a a: the Name itſelfpmſae: or leads.
The leading State of the Perſonal Nar'ne is ſet before, or
after the Affirmation, according to the foregoing Rules of
Names; as, I read, heareﬅ thou? &e.
That Affirmation, which it: Aft extends'
To ſhmethi-'ag elſe, ﬅill after it command:
A Name, to which that Action does relax-e,
AJ, Rage' ſpurns me with his uſual Hate.
As the Name, when it ſignifies the Subject: of which ſome
thing: is affirm'd by the Affirmation, *goes*- before the Affirma
tion, (except before excepted) ſo a Name is always plac'd
after the Affirmation, which ſignifies the Thing to which
theBook;
'a Action
the ofthe Affirmation
Fire 'harm Robert. immediately
A' relates; A ſ as, I read
Thus the followin State of the Perſonal Names generally

are flat after the 'A rmation, and the Particles to, for, of, &c.
tho' whom generally goes before the Affirmationz as, Martin
3; the Man whom Ham laﬅ. r >
Thy? Name: diſliagaiſh'd are by what and who?
Aadwhqm 'and what? a; the Example: ſhew.
Theſe t'ijoz Names-are. eaſily known, 0r_ diﬅinguiſh'd by
asking the zWeﬅion who: orwhat? and whom? and what?
The firﬅ Name, anſwers to the Aeﬅion who? or what 3 ay;
who reads? Anſw. I ,- what harm? the Fire,- onlthe contra
ry, what do I read? Anſw. the Book,- whom doe: 'the Fire
nþmn 3 Anſw. Robert.
But when the Action doa't at all relate
T'another, hat in the Subject terminate: -
A?
ſhe Engliſh Grammar, with Notes. uz
No Name the Wrmation then-requires" .
21' follow it, but-in itſelf expirer,
All the Buﬅie ſome? G'R A M M'A R I A N s 'have made
about_Verh: Neuter, diſpatch'd in theſe four Lines, ths-t is
in thls one Rule; that when the Action Of the Affirmation
does not extend or relate to any other Perſon or Thing, bUt
terminates_in the Subject, there is no Name requir'd after
it, as, I grieve, I rejoyee, I fit, I run, I ﬅand, &Te.
Of the Conﬅruction of A r r 1 r, m A T 1 O-N s-'

' This very neariyſireiating to the former, ſeems todemand
our next Conſideration; both indeed being' interwoven with
each other. '*' - '- -- ' - >
The Affirmation alway: muﬅ agreev
In Number and Pe'ſſm with the Name you'll ſee.
The Affirmation muﬅ a ce with the Name of whichit aſ
firms ſomething in Nor-m er and Pe'ſſm': That is, if that be
of
the the
firﬅ,Singular,
ſecond, or
or Plural, this muﬅ
third' Perſon, thisbemuﬅ
ſo too; if that
be ctof be of
the Lime,
whether the Number or Perſon be expreſs'd by the Ending or
Termination, or by the nine Affirmations diſcours'd of under
the Head of Affirmations; as, I vwrite, or do write, thou writeﬅ
or doﬅ write, he write: or doe: write; me, ye, and they write or
do write: Not I writeﬅ, he write, &to.
When of two Names, (tho' each he Singular), 2 ,
ÞVe ought affirm, the Affirmations are
Moﬅ juﬅly in the Plural ſeen fappeotr.
But when the Affirmation relates to, or affirms of twa fore
going Names, tho' they are both of the Singular Number,
muﬅ be of the Pluralz as, the King and Quae are hepy, not
&she.
Itpizya. lame Ailowanſice 'of a late Author of Grammer, that
it may be alſo of the Singular in Engliſh, ſince he is forc'd to
filve the Soleciſm, *by 'underﬅanding other Words to make
up the Defect; as in this, His Juﬅice and Goodnef: was great;
that is, fayshe, 'His Juﬅice me: greet, and hi: Goodnefi am:
great;
An Affirmation 'my he (at our Eaﬅ)
Or Singular, or Plural, a: you pleaſe,
When to ſhe
Iho'fle'll a NName
A Myou
E of Numberdoitfinall
singular is 'oin'tL
'*' ' Name

114. The Engliſh Grammar, ivith Notes:
A Name of Number, or whoſe Meaning'implies more than
one, or many, tho' it be it ſelf of the Smgular Number, the
Affirmation may yet be in the Plural; as, the MOB is unruly,
or, the MOB are unruly; the Convocation are debating, or is
debating. The Affirmation agreeing ſometimes with the
Number of the Name, and ſometimes With the Signification.
When two Affirmations are together ſeen,
Then maﬅ the Partiele (to) be fir between,v
Exeept let, bid, dare, help, and all the Nine.
When two Affirmations follow one another, the Particle
to ought to be ſet between 'em, except do, Will, ſhall, my', Mfl,
with their paſſing or paﬅ Times, did, ſhov'd, woa' , coa'd
might and mafl. Add to theſe, let, hid, dare, and help, and
perhaps ſome few others.
Have, am, or be, with pafflva fleeth] join'ol,"
Or with a fluidity that Being does intend,
All Suffering and Being doe: expreſs
That the Britanniek Language will conflfl.
Have, am, or he, join'd to a Wality, expreſs all' manner
of Being, or Sufferin in our Tongue, whiCh has no other
way of doing it. T ey are ſet before Qialitics of all ſorts,
and even Names. '
There is no Change of the Perſonal, or Numeral Termi
.nati0ns, when the Affi'rmation ſignifies Command, or is pre
ceded by that, tho', altho', whether, and ſometimes by
other Particles.
(V the Can/traction" of QU A I. I 'r I 1: s:..

TheQxalities in Engliſh moﬅly claim
Th'e Place immediately before their Name.
Tho' in Nature we think of the Name before the Alaſity,
yet in Engliſh, (Dalities are enerally plac'd before the Name:
to which they belong, or o which they expreflc, the Manner,
Exeept an Affirmati-on comes between-5,
A'v in the following Example? ſeem
Unleſsv when an Affirmation comes between the Quality
and the Name; as, art Thou, O God! and righteoax' are
thy. judgment: 5 or, GOD i: juﬅ, and his judgment: are righ
teem. Otherwiſe when. it comes alone, without its Atten
dnnts, which it gonerns, it always goes. immediately before
its Names as, A ggodlſiigq; it rarely, m Fe'flaaeh. a good Wo
man
I'he Engliſh Grammar, with Notes. 115
man mach more rarely. Good Men are 'valuable fewels in a
Commonwealth 5 good Women make good Wives. Good
Things are only ſh in opinion.
Poetie Diction with peculiar Graee
Alla-m the Name, (not Proſe) the fbremoſl Plate.
The ngiity rarely in Proſe is fizt after the Name, but in
Verſe 'tis utiful and harmonious ,- as, Hail, Bard divine!
But when there are more Qalitie: than one
That come together, or together join ,-.
Or elſe one aalit] with it; goiern'd Train 5
Then do ths/'Fillow the preceding Name.
But when there are more (Lialities than one come toge
ther, tho' collaterally join'd, or one Þality with its depend
ing Words, it generally Comes after t e Name; as, A Man
hath wiſe and valiant, a Man exceeding wiſe and valiant, a
Man skilful in many Thinge. But then we likewiſe ſhy, a
wzfl and valiant Man, an exceeding wiſe Man, a 5kilfal Man in
man] Things.
A Name and all its Qalities unite,
Andform one Word, a: all the Learned write,
But when the/kſe-ueral Mrd: in one eonſþire,
The] then ſome other Qaah't] require.
A Name with its Qualities, (or any governing Word, with
its Attendants) is as one compounded Word ,- on which theſe
join'd Names and Walities aſſume another Wality, as if they
were one Word, (and theſe being join'd, another; and ſo on
ward) as, a Man, an old Man; a wiſe old Man, a 'very wiſe
old Man, three wiſe old Men. Here to the NAME Man is
prefix'd a, which is of the (Dality-kind; and then to the
Wality old is added; and to that an; then wiſe, very wife;
and to all theſe aggregated or incorporated Words the (Lia
lity a, or three, is prefixed.
Two Sort: of Qalitie:from Name: doflow,
And both before their Name: directly go.
> *'
There are two ſorts of AlaIities (as we have obſerv'd un?
der that Head) which are deriv'd immediately from Names,
and go immediately before them, ſupplying the Place of als,
moﬅ all the Manners of Words or Particles; the firﬅ we call
Paffcff-ues: And this is form'd from almoﬅ all Names, Singu
Iar or Plural. By adding (s) or (if the Pronunciation re
quires it) ('s) it implies the ſame as the Particle quuaf,
- n;
Man': Nature, the Name ty' Man,- Men': Nature, or the Nature
of Men ,- Virgil's Poems, &c.
The fame is done when an aggregated Name occurs, (that
is, a rimary Name with its Attendants; (for a formative
(sj o the Pqffeffi-ve is put after the whole aggregate; as, the
King's-Court, or the Court of the King; the King of Spain':
Court,- or, the Court of the King of Spain: For the (:) is put
after the whole aggregate (the King of Spain) as after one
fingle Name.
A, or an, immediately we plate
Before the NAME, a Man, an Hour, a Face.
But another QUALITY tame in,
'Tir moﬅl] plac'd the a and Name between;
The Wality a, or an, is generally plac'd immediately lie-

fore the Name; as, a Man, an Arm, a Mountain: But if any
other Wality comes with it, it muﬅ be plac'd generally
between the a and the Name; as, a good Man, a Hath Horſe.
But a is ſometimes ſet between the other (Arality and the
Name, as man a Man, ne-uer a Man. (A) is always before
the lSingular hlumber, but (the) before both Sing'ular and
Plura .
The Can/traction ofP A a T r c L E 33 or,the

Manners of Wo a D s.
We have ſhewn under the Head of Particles, or Manner: of
Wbrdr, that beſides Names, aalities, and Affirmationt, there
is another Part of Speech, w lCh denotes the Reſerence and
Relation of Name: to Namer, Name: to Affirmatiom, and
the Connections of Sentente to Sentente: For this Reaſon we
have divided them into three ſorts; the Firſt ſhews the Cir
cumﬅances or Manners of Words, which are joinid to every
Part of Speech.
Theſe after Affirmations m admit,
Bat before Aialities we 'no/il] ſet.
This firﬅ ſort are generally put after the Affirmation

whoſe Manner it does expreſs; as, Cynthia danc'd admira
bly; Peter jþohe learnedly; Dorothy acted finely; Harry
flaght lately. But it is ſet before leitiesz as, Robert war
very luckyz john i: extrezmly rich, very rich.
[*] Sc
The Engliſh Grammar, with Notes. n7
[*] Secondly, All Names, Qalities, and Afflrmatiom have
various States, Relations, and References to each other,
which arc moﬅly expreſs'd by theſe Particles, of; to, for,
from, 0.' me,
tſir uent by, with,
the through,
reﬅ we &e.
ſhall Theſi: areinat aleaﬅ
treat of of the by
Diſcourſe moﬅit
ﬅick? as we have before obſerv'd under Particles: An Exam
ple will render the Uſi: more plain; as, O! God! the Me
morial of thy Lo-ve to Son: of Men, fi'om the Beginnirzg of
the V'orld to thir Day, is recorded with Than/rfidneﬅ in the
Heart: of the Religiom. All theſe Particles in this Sentence
ſhew the Relation or Reference of Name to Name, and their
Connection, in that Manner with each other.
Between the Win-11: wheffe Ref'rencc they expreſſ',
Theye Particles demand the certain Plate.
Theſe Partielex, which denote the Dependance of one
thing on another, or the Reference or Relation of one Word
to another, muﬅ naturally be plac'd betwixt them whoſe
Relation
I'] Theſe ſeveral States or Re ſerent Endings of the ſameWords;

lation of Name to Name, are ex but as there are ſome ſort ot'Virtual
preſs'd in Latin, by varying the Caſes, or Statesin all Languages,
Terminations or Ending oſ the (eſpecially in the Pronouns or Per
Name, five ſeveral Ways, which ſonal Names, as we have obſerv'd)
were call'd Caſer, a mdendo. So and becauſe without that the Con
that there were threeſcore various nection of Diſcourſe,which is call'd
Endings in the Latin, and double Conﬅruction, would not be well
the Number in Greek, allexpreſs'd underﬅood, 'tis in a great meaſure
by theſe few Engliſh Pnrtiele: -, neceſſary for the right underﬅand
the firﬅ State of, or the Name it ing of any Language whatſoever to
ſelf is call'd the Nomina'ive Cufe. know what: is meant by the Cafer,
It things were always conſider'd or States of the Name/5 which we
ſeparately from one another, Name: ſhall here endeavour to explain
would have only the two Changes with all the Perſpicuity we ale
of' Number and Gender to the able, keeping to the old Name: of
UALlTlES. them,and applying them to the new,
ut ſince they are oﬅen conſider'd
with regard to the Relation they Of 'he firſt State, or Nemina
have to one another, the giving of tive Cafe,
divers Terminations or Endings to
Namer, which are call'd Caſt-r, are 'The ſimple Pofition ofthe Name,
made uſe oſin ſome Languages, to is call'd the Nominari-ue, which
expreſs theſe Relations. ' indeed is not properly aCaſe, (tho'
I: muﬅ be conſeſs'd, that the it be a State) but the Matter from
Greek and the Latin are (we think) which the Caſes are form'd, by the
almoﬅ the only Languages in which various Changes of the firﬅ Termi
the Names have what are properly nation, or Ending oſthe Name. It'
call'd Caſes, that is, in which theſe chief Uſe is to be kt before the
Relations are expreſs'd by the dif Verlt or Affirma'ion, to be the Sph
z ye.
ject ofthePropoſition in Diſcourſe ; cient Tongues, and the Analogy of
Dominu: regit me,the Lord governs Ours to them.
me z Deu: exaudit me, God hears
me, or my Prayer. Of the Geniri-ve Caſe.
The Caſe is ſo call'd from Gemu,
Of 'be Voearioe. Kindred or Family, becauſe 'tis
us'd to expreſs Alliances of Blood
When we name the Perſon to between Perſons; beſides, it im
whom we ſpeak, or any other ports great Variety of other Rela
Thing to which we apply our tions between Things, as well as
ſclves, as iſit were a Perſon, the Perſons. For the Relation oſ one
Name does by that acquire a new Thing to another, in any manner
Relation, which is ſometimes whatever,has occaſion'd in the Lan
.mark'd by aTermination different guages that have Caſer, a new
from that of the Naminati'ue, and Termination in the Name' or
which is called Voca'ive, from 'vo Noum, which is call'd the Genitive
rate, to call; and thus from Domi (as we have ſaid) to expreſs that
mu in the Nominati-ue, they make general Relation which is after
Domine in the Vocarive; of Anta diverfify'd into ſeveral Specier, ſuch
with', Animll. But as that was not as the Relations are ofthe 'whole to
very uccefiary, ſince the Nomina its Parn, as CaPut Homini'z or'
tive mightbe us'd in the place of Parſ: to the 'who/e, as Homo erafli
the Voeari've, it has happen'd, r/i, capirif; of the Subject to the Ac
That this different Termination of cident or Aitribute, as Colo Roſx,
the Nominari-ve, is not us'd in the Miſericordia Dei z of the Accident
Plural Number. zd/ , That even to the Subject, as Pus-r opzime In
in the ſingular Num er, it is only doli; ; of the liffieient Cauſe to the
us'd in the ſecond Declenfion of the Effect, as Opur Dei,0ra'io Cicero
Latin Tongue. gdly, That in the ni: z of the Effect to the Cauſe, as
Greek (where it is more common) Creator Mundi z of the final Cauſe
the Nomtna'i-ue is often us'd for to the Effect, as Totio Soporir; of
the Voearioe, as may be ſeen in the the Matter to the Compound, as
Grek Verſion of the Pſalm: : From Var auri; ofthe Object to the Acts
whence St. Paul in his Epiﬅle to of the Soul, as Cagimtio Bel/i, Con
the Hebrewr, cites theſe Words to temptu: momil', of the Poſſeſſor
prove the Divinity of C I-I R l S T, to the Things poſſeſſed, as Peru:
Opdvo; o'fi', 6 Osbgz where _'tis Meliboei, Divine Cra i; of the
plain, that 6 God; is a Nomma Traper Name to the ommon, or
tive for a Vocative, ſince the Senſe the Indi-uidual to the Speeier, as
is not, God i: thy Throne, but Thy O/þidum Londini.
Throne, O God, &e. 4thly, In And as amongﬅ all theſe Rela
fine, Nominatives are ſometimes tions there is ſome Oppofite, which
join'd to Vocatives, as Domine, ſometimes occaſions Equivocal
Deu: meur! Nare mea wiſer, mea Tcrms, (for in theſe Words, Vulnm
magna Porenria folur ! ' Achilleſ, the Geniri-ve Acbiz'le:
ll theſe Difficulties in this and may ſignify either the Relation of
other Caſcs, in the Latin and Greek the Subject, and then 'tis taken
are avoided by the Signs expreſs'd paſſively for the Wound that ll
with Eai'e, without ﬅudying the Lhille: has received; or the Rela
various Terminations of ſo many tion ofthe Cauſe,and then 'tis taken
Thouſands of Names; which are actively for the Wound which lI-_
infiﬅcd upon,0nly for the Intorma chi/le: gavez) ſo in that Paſſage or
tiunþof the Studcnt in the general St. Paul, Cer'ui ſum qui a 'regne
motion oſthe Grammar of the An Men, regne Vita, &e. poren) if;
e.
ſet'arare a Charitate Dei in Chriſte 'tis hardly poſſible to mention the
Jeſu, Domino Noſtre, &e. The Paiticulars : Commodare Socrati, to
Genitive Dei, has been underﬅood lend to Socrates; Utili: Reipuhli
two different Ways by Interpre me, afeful to 'he Common-wealth;
ters, thoſe who have aſcrih'd to it Pernieiofu: Eccleſie, perniciouſ to
the Relation of the Objezt, believ the Church', *Promittere Amieo, to
ing, that in this Pafl'agewasmeant Promiſe a Friend, or to a FrienoI,
the Love Which the Elect bear to Vifum eſt Platoni, it ſeemed good
God, in jeſiu Chriſt, whilit O to Plato; Affini: Regi, related to
thers (who have aſcrib'd to it the ſhe' King, &e.
Relation of the Subject) do under In Engliſh we expreſsthis Caſo,
ﬅand by the Paſſage aforcſaid, the or that which is equivalent to it,
Love of God to the Elect in Yejiu by the Sign to, or for, which uſual
Chriﬅ. ly do or may come before it, tho'
Tho' the Hebrew Names are not the ſame Signs are likewiſe us'd to
declin'd by Caſer, the Relation'ex what is-the Aceuſative and the
preſs'd by the Genitioe, does not. Ablatixe in the Latin.
withﬅanding cauſe a Change in the
Name', tho' quite different from Of the Actuſative.
that of the Greek and Latin, for in
theſe Languages the Change is in -The-Verbs or Affirmations that
the Word govern'd, but ill the He expreſs Action, which paſs from
brew, in the Word governing. the Agent, as to hear, to break, to
In theVulgarTonguesthey make heat, to low, to hate, have Subjects
uſe of a Sign to expreſs the Rela that receive theſe Things or Objects
tions of this Caſe, as of in Engliſh, which they regard: For if I heat,
de in French, &e. as Dear, , God, of [muﬅ beat ſomething; and ſo of
God; Dieu, de Dieu. the reft. .So that it is plain, that:
What we have ſaid (that the theſe Verbs or Affirmations require
Geniti've made uſe of) to denote after 'em a Name, to be the Subject
the Relation between the Proper orObjest ok'the Action they expreſs,
Name and the Common, or, vwhich, And heneeit is, that in the Langua
is the ſame Thing, between the ges which have the Caſcs, the Names
Indi-oidual and the SPeciet, is have a Termination they call At'
much more common in the Vulgar cufatioe, as amo Deum, 1 love
Tongues. For in Latin, the Com God; Caeſar-vide Pompeium, Cae
mon and the Troper Name, are fre ſar 'vanquiſh'd Pompey'
quently put in the ſame Caſe, by There is norhing in Engliſh-to
Appoſition, as 'tis call'd, as Urbr diſtinguiſh this Caſe from the No
Rama, Fllwiut Tlmme/ir, Man! minative, or rather to diﬅinguiſh
Tarnafliir, l'ut: we ordinarily ſay, this State of the Name from the
the City of Rome, the Hill of Par firﬅ, but as we almoﬅ ever place
nnjfiu; but we ſay the River the Words in their natural Order,
Thamer, as well as of'Thamet. they are eaſily diſcover'd, becauſe
the Nominative (or firﬅ State) is
Of the Dati-oe Caſe. generally before, and the Accuſa
tive after the Verb or Affirmation
There is yet another Relation, as The King love: the green, an
which is that of the Thing to the The Qleen Io-vet the 'Klng. The
Benefit or Dumage of which other King is the Nominative in the firfl:
Things have a Relation. This in Place, and the Accuſative in the
the Languages which have Caſes ſecond -, and the Queen the Accuſa
is call'd the Dati-ve Caſe, which-is tive in the firﬅ, and the Nomina
alſo us'd ſomaoy other Ways, that tive in the ſecond.
, * 'M Of
rz-o The Engliſh Grammar, with Notes.
Relation and Dependance it is to expreſs 5 as we may obſerve
in the following Liﬅ. r
O F he: this peculiar Eminence,
AIWAJU to hound of Word: the general Son/e.
As ſignifies the Relation between the Name that follows
it, and that which goes before it, and joins the following
Name to the foregoing; as the Saw of Adam, ſo in all the
following Inﬅances, and all others that may be thought of,
it is obſervable, that of has the Propert of limiting and de
termining the general Signification 0 the Word on which
it depends.
r. Of The Part to the whole. The whole to the Part.
The Tail of the Lion. of
or A Man of a thick Skull.
2.. Of the Subject to the Ac The Accident to the Subject.
cident. - A Boy of a good Under
The Splcndor of the Sun. ﬅanding.
3. Ot
there are ſome join'd with the Ae

cu ative, as Amor erga Deum, Love
Of the Ablative Caﬅ. toward! God 5 they yet have in
vented another Caſe, called the Ab
Beſides the Five Caſes already Iariw, to be joined with ſeveral
mentioned, the Latin: have a Sixth, other (Prepq/itionr, from which it
which was not invented to expreſs is inſeparable in Senſe; whereas an
alone any particular Relation but Accuſatiw is often ſeparated from
t ) he joined with ſome of the ar its &P"epq/ilionr, as when it is after
ticles, called Trepafiziom: For a Verb AHi-ue,or an Infinitiw.
the firﬅ Five Caſes, notleing ſuf That Caſein Propricty ofSpeech
ficient to expreſs all the Relations is wanting in the Plnral Number,
I 'at Things have to one another, ſince it never has there a different
t'iey have in all Langnagcs had Termination from that of the Da
Reeourſe to another Invention, tive: But becauſe iſ: would too
wh'lch is that of contriving little much confound the Analogy, toſay
Wordr to he put before Name-r, that the Prepofition governed an
which for that Reaſon are call'd Ablati-ue in the Singular, and a.
Prepojitionr. And ſo as the Rela Dari've in the cP/ural, it has been
tion of a Thing, in which another judg'd fitter to ſup ſc an Ablati-ve
is contained, is expreſs'd in Latin in the Plural Num er, tho'always
and Engliſh by (i)r), it is in French the ſame with the Darive.
by (dam), fiVi'mm in Dolio, le And for the ſame Reaſon it "is,
Yin dans le uid, 'be IVine in the that they have given an AbIari-ve
'eſſe-I. But in the Langnages to the Greek Name-e, which are al
which have Caſcs, theſe Prepofi ways like the Dari-ue, for preſer
tions are not join'd with the firſt ving the greater Analogy between
Form of the Name, which is the theſe Two Langnages, which are
Naminatiw, but with ſome of the commonly learned by one another.
other Caſes: And tho' in Latin,
The Engliſh GrAmma'r', with Notes. rzt
3, Of the Effitiontto the Iz'ſfet't.N rThe Eff-ct to the Effla'ent.
The TempleotſiSolomon. The Creator of the
4.Ofthe End to the Means. ' World.
The Preparations of the The Means to- the End.
Feaﬅ. The Death of the Crofi,
5', A
OFMatet-ial: toMateriate.
Cup otſſSilver. Mart-riate to Material.
The Stones of the Temple."
6. Of the Ohject to the Act. The Act to the object.
The Love of God. 25.. The Delight of the Eye.
7. Office: Politiml. 2 Relation: Oeeonomz'ml.
The King o England. O The Maﬅer of the Houſe.
8.0f the Po effior to Poffieffion. Poffeffion to the Poffiflor.
9. The Flockto of
Of Time theMelihem.
Event. ſi The Shepherd of the
. Flock.
The Time of War, the Event to Time.
Hour of Supper. The Luxury of the Age;"
lo. Of the Contents to the The Silence of the Night.
Continent. Continent to the Contents.
The Fiſh of the Sea. a g A Handful of Flowers,
Two Names without a I/Vortl hetwem,

Of betwixt both moﬅ frequently is flen.
When Two Names come to ether, of generally goes beſorþ
the latter; as may be ſeen in al the foregoing Examples': But
when this ofſignifies PoſiEffion, then it may be leſt out, and t,
or e: put at the End of the firﬅ Name, by which it becomes
a Aulityz as we have ſufficiently prov'd already. The Houſe of
Roger, or Roger's Houſh.
Extept they to the ame Thing do relate,
For then the midd e of is out of Done.
For Names that relatc to the ſame Things have no Pay.
ticle between them; as, the River Thames, Chriﬅopher Colum
hux, London City; tho' we likewiſe ſay, the River of Ihmtm',
the City of London, &c.
Between Superlatives andfbllonting Names,
0 F, by Grommick Right, a srarion claim.
All Superlatives may have the Particle of before the fol
lowing Name; as the greateﬅ of Villnins, the maﬅ wiﬅ: of Pbif
loſophem, the heﬅ of Printes.
Qaalities that do Partition ſignifj',
Affection, Vice, or Virtue do imply; -
An Deſire or Paffion of the Mind,
ſo lov'd by of we generally find.
' M 2. Such
122 The Engliſh Gramrnar, with Notes.
Such as want Knowledge, Ignorance declare,
Forgetfulneſs, or Mem'ry in this Rnle are.
ualitiesOnethat
ths-runs, ſi i Partition,
of thagnFii*>::nc11.Prifimersz:g enerally
none of have of Athird
theſe, the after
\Of Family, &e. and thoſe which ſignify Affection, Paffion,

or Deſire of the Mind; any Knowledge, Ignorance, Me
mory, Forgetfulneſs, Vice, Virtue, or any ſuch Diſpoſition
of the Soul, have of between them and the Ward to which
they relate, Co-uetoas of Gold, fearful of Thunder, anxions of
Glory, 'void of Graee, empty of Senſe, tonfliom of Guilt, ig
norant of all Things, fbrgetfnl of his Friends, mſſindfld of his
Children, guilty of Brihes, weary of his journey, free of the
Corporation, needy of Money, &a. We ſay alſo, flr/aken of all
Men, wort of Happine s, horn of Royal Raee, naked of Friendx,
deprio'd o Eflate, rob 'd of Money. Thus after ſome AF-_
FIRMATIONS, as, to repent of Sin, to treat, talk, write, ot
Happine/E, &e. ,
Where Beneſit or Hart comesſrom the Name,
TO, to direct you whither 'tis aim'd, do's claim.
TO or FOR import the Thing or Perſon 'to or for whom
any Convenience or Inconvenience is meant by the NAME,
QUALITY, or AFFIRMATION; as, a Friend to the
Maſhs, good for his Stomach, yielding to his Betters. Hence
all WFrds that ſignify the Uſe, Relation, Likeneſi, doing, or gi-u
ing 0 one Thin to another, muﬅ have to or for after it. Tho'
to is ſometimes eft out, as gi-ue me, like me, tell me, near me,
_where to is underﬅood much better than expreſs'd.
In In-vaeation we prefix an 0!
O! God, our Frailty thou doﬅ ſurely know.
N
When we call on God, the King, or any one elſe, in a ſo
lemn Manner, we put O! before the Name of him we addreſs
to, as, O! King, remember that than arta Man!
When yon the Inflrament or Manner how,
By which, wherewith expreſſ, allow
Theſe Particles to he always ſeen
By, with, and through, and from, and alflr in.
When we expreſs the Inﬅrument, the Medium by which,
wherewith, or the Manner how a Thing is done, you make
uſe of by, with, from, through, in, and the like; as, ZUn- Beam:
of the Sun, with intredihle Speed, Paſs from Heaven, through
the Air, to the Earth, enda'd with Light and Heat by; (with
A through)
through) which it comfbrts m, and quicken: the Plant: which
God has pra-vided for m, and given to m- for our UſE, and his
Glory. He was ſlain with his Sword. He abide: with me.
By is us'd for the efficient Cauſe, (at well Principal as In
ﬅrumental and Moral) and alſo ſignifies near to, &e. as, he
may ſlain h] hi: Enemy, by (beſide or near) a Spring of Whter,
but woundedflrſl by his own Fear, then by his Enemy'x Sword
In ſignifies, as it were, Preſence in a Place, and is us'd
when we would either expreſs Reſl, as, Mary lie-e: in the
Cellar, in the City, in the Winter, in a ﬅrange Po/Zure, in on ill
State afHeoIth, in Bottle Army, in no? to ﬅrike, in his Clad/e,
in Fervour, in Mr, rich in Laml or Money, in Fear, in Doubt,
in good Part,- he is in Eﬅeem, he did it in Re-uenge, in Hope,
in m Thought. _
3' eſe are the ſeveral Senſes in which the Particle IN is
us' .
On the third Sort of Particles which connect Sentencc to
Sentence, we have only this to temark:
That they between thiſ? Sena-me: take Sir',
PVhith by their joining Term: the] unite.
They are plac'd between the Two Propoſitions, or Sen-T
tences which they unite; as for their Names, ſee Particles
the third Sort. iTis true, we might hete give, or might
there have given you ſeveral Denominations of them, as
Capulati-ue, Disjunctive, Comparati-ue, and the like, as ſome
others have done, and ſo given a ſaveral Head or Term to
every other Particle of this Kind; but we ſeeing no Advan
tage accrue from ſucha multiplying of Terms, but the Burthen
very much increaſed to the Leather, have thought fit to leavq
out all that unneceſihry Jargon. -
What more may be ſaid of Particles, and their various
Meanings and Uſe, ſhall be ſound in our forccitcd Treatiſe of
Particles. .
We ſhall not conclude this ſhort Diſcourſe of Conﬅruction,
without adding a few Words of a Period, and of Figurative
Conſlruction, tho' we are of Opinion, that the firﬅ is more pro
per to fall under the Confideration of Rhetorick, and that the
Uſe of the latter is in Engliſh the Effect of Cuﬅom, not Art:
Yet ſince we find others have thought fit to deliver Rules re
lating to both, we ſhall not omit them entirely. A
To compoſe therefore a Period, or to_ expreſs a Sen
tence, that is compos'd of Two or more Sentences, with
Art, we muﬅ firﬅ take Care that the Expreffions be not too
* ' M 3 long.
124. 'The 'Engliſh Grammar, tenth Notes.
long, and that' the whole Period. be proportion'd to the
Breath of the Speaker. The Expreſiions of particular Sen
tences, that are vMembers of the Body of a Sentence, ought
to be equal, that the Voice may repoſe at the End of theſe
Members by equal Intervals. The more exact this Equality
is, the more Pleaſure it will produce, and the more excellent
the Period.
A Period ought to conſiﬅ at leaﬅ of Two Members, and at
'moﬅ but of Four. A Period is at leaﬅ to have Two Mem
bers, becauſe its Beauty proceeds from the Equality of the
Members, and Equality ſuppoſes at leaﬅ Two Terms. To
. have a Period perfect, there ſhould not be Four Members
crouded into one Period, becauſe being too lon , the Pro
nunciation muﬅ be vforc'd, which muﬅ by Conequence be
'diſpleaſing to the Ear, becauſe a Diſcourſe that is incom
modious to the Speaker, can never be agreeable to the
Hearer. _ '
The Members of a Period ought to be join'd cloſe, that
the Ear may perceive the Equality of the Intervals of Re
ſpiration: For this Cauſe 'the Members of a Period ought
to be united by the Union of a ſingle Sentence, of that
Body of which they are Members. This Union is very diſ
cernable, for the Voice repoibs at the End of ever Member,
only the better to continue its Courſe, it ﬅops not lly, but at
the End of the whole Sentence.
Variet may be Two Ways in a Period, i. e. in the Senſe,
and' in the Words. The Senſe of each Member of the Pe
riod ought to differ with each other. We cannot expreſs
the different Thoughts of our Minds, but by different Words
of different signification: Equal Periods are not to follow one
another too near.
An Example of a Period of Two Members: As, (i). Be
fbre Iſhall ſay tho e Thingr, (O conſcript Fathers) about the Pub
lic/a Afflzirs, whit are to he jþaken at thi: Time,- (z.) I ſhall
la] hgfbrejou, infew V/ords, the Mati-ue: of the fear-ney, and the
Return. The next conſiſts of Three Members, as (1.) Since
by Reaſbn of my Age I darfl not pretend to aſſume the Authoril]
qf thir Pqfl, And had fixt it a: a Maxim, that nothing
ought here to he Produckl hat what war perfected h Induﬅry and
labour'd h the Um/e'flanding; I thought t at my whole
Time a Pain: ſhould he tranqrer'd to thofi: of my Friendr.
The laﬅ conſiﬅs of Four Members, of which this is an Exam
ple: (1.)(ct7--)
calm: If Impmlence
a: Inſhlenceſhould have in
has found a: the
greatCountry
Pre-ualence in the
and Dg/ert
Placer,
The Engliſh Grammar, with Notes. 125'
Places, (z.) Aulus Cxcinna- 'nam'd not lefe in this Tryal give
wot] to the Impmleme of ijutius, (4.) than he has already in
Violence given Place w lyir Inſhlence.
This is ſufficient to give a fiill Idea of the Nature and
Beauties of a Period, which we have inſerted meerly in
Compliance with Cu'ﬅom, being ſenfible that the Leamer
will be ſo far from being able to make his Advanta e from
it, till he has arrived much beyond the Province o Gram
mar, that there will be few Maﬅer: ſhund, who have the
Education of Children, that 'know any Thing of this Mat
mfi . . .. 4. on -.-.>- .- -.
Cuﬅom, produc'd by the general Inclination of Men to

ſhort Speaking, has introduc'd ſeveral Figures or Forms of
Conﬅruction, by which Words are tranſpos'd, left out, one
put for another, and the like. The Figures therefore of Con
ſhuction are theſe: '
I. Tronjþoſition, which is the placing of Words in a Sen
tence out of their Natural Order of Conﬅruction, to pleaſe
the Ear in rendring the Contexture more agreeable, elegant,
and harmonious: For when the Concurrence of rough Cou
ſonants, and gaping Vowels, renders the Sound and Pro
nunciation inelegant, this Figure may be us'd, but never
but uponis ſuch
zgſzſſtſion an Occaſion,
generally exceptandin Verſe,
more elegant Wherethan
harmonious Tranſ
in
ro e.
II. Suppreffion, which is an- Omiſſion of Words in a Sen
tence, which yet are neceſſary to a full and perfect Con
ﬅruction; as, I come fi-om my Father's,- that is, flam my Fa
ther': Houſe,- but Houſe is omitted. Words He ſuppreſsfl
for Brevity or Elegance, but their Nuzmber in Engliſh is too
great to be enumerated; but for our Direction, we may
mind theſe Rules: lfl, That whatever Word comes to be re
peated in a Sentence oftner than once, to avoid the inelegant
Repetition of the ſame Word, it muﬅ be left out; as, This i;
my Maﬅer'r Horſe; or, This Horſe i: my Maﬅer'r; for This Horſe
is m Maﬅer': Horſe. adlj, Words that are neceſſarily implfd
nee not be expreſs'd; as, I li-ve at York: Life is neceſſarily
imply'd, and therefore need not bc expreſs'd. zrll , All Words
that Uſe and Cuﬅom ſuppreſs in 'any Language, are not to be
expreſs'd, without ſome particular Reaſon; as, A good Man
lead: a good Life,- where the Mualitg Good is neceſſary to
the Name Life. ' *
111. Sno
'l'
on,
III. Suhflitution, is the uſing one Word for another, or the
Mode, State, Manner, Perſon, or Number of a Word for ano
ther: And the Conﬅruction indeed often lies in the Senſe, and
not in the Words; as The whole Nation were in an Uproar;
where the whole Nation is put for all the People of the Nation.
Part of the Men are Kill'dz Part and Nation ſignifying Num
ber, (tho' the Name be of the Number ſignifying one) it puts
the Affirmation in the Plural, or the Number ſignifying many,
but it may be in either.
CHAP XI.
Of Stops or Pan/'es in Sentences ; the Uſh of Mark:
in H/riting, and Ahhreviations of Mrds. r
ROM what has been ſaid of Sentences, 'tis plain, that in
a full Sentencc there may be Four Members, viz. Com
ma, (,) Semicolon (,) Colon (:) and Period, or Full-ﬅop (,)
and theſe bear a kind of muſical Proportion of Time one to
another: For a Comma ﬅops the Reader's Voice, while he
may privately tell one, the Semieolon, Two, the Colon, Three,
and the Period, Four.
The Uſe of theſe Points, Pauſes, or Stops, is not only to
give a proper Time for Breathing, but to avoid Obſcurity
and Confuſion oſ the Scnſe in the joining Words together
in a Sentence. After a Comma always follows ſomething
elſe which depends upon that which is ſeparated from it by
a Comma,- as,
If Falſe of Ve'fi a Nation) Temper ſhows,

In keen Iambics Engliſh Metre flows.
Where the Senſe is not compleat in the firﬅ Verſia, and
the ſecond has a plain Dependance on the firﬅ.
A Semi, orhalf Colon, is made uſe of when half the Sen
tence remains yet behind; as,
Tho' God hids Peace with Promifls of Life,

Men only Reaſhn arm for deadly Strife ,
By bloody War: Earth making deſhlate,
Andſacriſieing Thoajkndo to their Hare, am:
The Engliſh Grammar, with. Notes. 127
A Colon, or two Points, is made when the Scnſe is perfect,
but the Sentence not ended, as, '
O Lord! in thee do I Put my Truﬅ.- Su-ue mefrom all
thy? that pe'ſetute me, and deliver me, &c.
The Full-Point is when the Sentence is compleat and end
ed; as,
O shame! O Cmſſ'! O more ſhun hell'ſh Spight?
Dumu'd De'uz'ls with each other never fight.
Beſides theſe Points, there is a Mark that ſignifies 'a
* Areﬅion is asked, and is put when the Senſe of that Qu'ﬅl
on is compleat, this is the Figure of it (i) as,
Whyſh froliek ? wh ſh merry ?
I: your Noddle ful of Sherry?
When we expreſs our Wonder, or Admiration of any
thing after the Sentence, we put this Point (!), which is cal
led a Point of Admiration; as, 0 Times! 0 Mannersl
In Scntences there is ſometimes occaſion to interpoſe ano
ther diﬅinct Sentence, which being left out, the Senſe of the
Sentence is entire, and it is thus mank'd, (), and is call'd a.
Porentheſixz as, For to their Power (I beur Record) they were
willing.
When Words cannot be writ entirely in the Line, the
Syllabies are parted, one ending the Line, and another of the
lime Word beginning the next; and this is mark'd at the
End of the firﬅ Line thus
The
viizke of(e)theis Sound,
often leftand
out,that
as well as other
is call'd Vowels, for
an Apoflrophe, andtheis
thus expreſs'd (') as, I um umuz'd, for amazed ,- Henry
lov'd me, for Henry lo-ved me, .8cc.
Accent (\ ) being placed over any Vowel in a Word, notes
that the Tone, or Streſs of the Vowel in pronouneing, is up
on that Syilable.
Bre-ve (V ) is a Cum-e, or crooked Mark over a Vowel, and
denotes that the Syllable is ſounded uick or ſhort. *
Dyulyſi: (**) being two Points pac'd over two Vowels of
a Word, that wou'd otherwiſe make a Diphthong, parts 'em
into two ſeveral 'Syllables. .
Iizdex (W) the Fore-finger painting, ſignifies that Paſſage
to be very remarkable againﬅ which it is placed. '
Aﬅcriſm (*> guides to ſome Remark in the Margin, or
at the Foot of the Page. Several of 'em ſet together .hgnllfy
t at
that there is ſomethin wanting, defective, or immodeﬅ in
that Paſſage(f)
Obelisle of atheDanger
Aut or,is thus,
us'd ***
as well as the Aflerzſiſm, to
refer the Reader to the Margin.
Section (5) or Diviſion is us'd in ſub-dividing of a Chap
ter into leſſer Parts.
Caret (*) when any Letter, Syllable, Or Word happens,
by Inadvertence, to be leſt out in Writing or Printing,
this ._Mark ('*) is put under the Intcrlineation in the exact
Alice
Place where it is to come; as when Awas gone, &a.
Circumflex (*) is the ſame in shape as the Caret, but is

always plac'd over ſome Vowel of a Word, to denote a long
Syllable; as, Eu-phra-ter.
Hyp'hm (-) Connexian, is us'd t-o join or compound two
Words into one, as Male-tantents, Male-admimﬅration; or
when Names or Words are purpoſely left out, a Stroke or
ſmall Line is thus put-r-to ſignify the Name or Word un
derﬅood, with the initial and final Lettcrs at the beginning
or end, or both. Bcin plac'd over a Vowel, it is not then
called HyPhen, but a Da for M or N. p _
Crotchet: ſ] or Bracketr, include Words or Sentences
of the lame value and signification with thoſe they are
join'd to, and may beus'd inﬅead ofParmthefiu.
Qotation ('*) or a double Camma turn'd, is put at the
beginning of ſuch Lines as are recited out of other Authors;
as the Motto upon the Sun-Dial, V LOOK UPON ME,
THAT I MAY BE SEEN.
It is grown cuﬅomary in Printing, to begin every Sub
ﬅantive with a Capital, but 'tis unneceſſin-y, and hinders
that exprcſiive Beauty and remarkable Diﬅinction intended
by the Capitals.
Let all proper Names of Men and Women, Chriﬅian or
Sur-Name," begin with a Capiral or Great Letter , and in
deed all Names ought to be written with the initial Letter,
a Capital. The flame muﬅ be done by any other Part of
Spcech, when there's a Force or Emphaſis laid on it; other
wiſe O_ualities, Affirmations, Particles. are always written
with ſmall Letters. The firﬅ Word of every Epiﬅle, Book,
Chapter, Verſc, (5-2'. begins with a Capital; as alſo, the
proper Names of Countries, Cities, Towns, and all manner
or Places, Arts, Sciences, Dignities, Titles of Honour, Offi
ccs, Bills, Notes, Days, Months, Winds, Rivers, &a. In
Writing,_
The Engliſh Grannnar, 'with Notes. 129
Writing, you arc to begin every Sentcnce after a full Stop,
or Period, with a Great Letter, and every Verſe or Line in
Poetry. If any notable Saying or Paſiage of an Author be
quoted in his own Words, it begins With a Capital, th0'1't
be not immediately after a full Stop. Where Capitals are
us'd in whole Words and Scntences, ſomething is expreſs'd
extraordinary Great.
Let not a Capital be written in the Middle of a Word,
amongﬅ ſmall Letters, except in Anagrams.
IHS. Jeſus, The Three Let Fol. Folio, a Book ofthe lar
ter: of his Name in Greek. geſſ Size, or a whole sheet,
V.l).M. Verbi Dei Miniﬅer, 4to. Qui-to, a Quarta of a
Miniﬅer ofthe PVord ofGod. sheet.
Philom. Philomathes, a Io'uer 8vo. Octavo, having Eight
of Learning. Leave: to a Shoet.
P. S. Poﬅſcript, after written. ramo. Duodecimo, Twelvet,
N. B_ Nota Bene, marle well. or a sheet divided into 12.
Sc. et, and. Partr, a: this Grammar.
Vid. Vide, ſee. A Column is half a Side of a
Viz. Videlicet, or Videre licet, Leaf, a: in the Notes ofthi:
ouma ee.
i. idemjljt-heſkme. Book.
al. Aulus, Aftemoon.
i. e. id eﬅ, that is. M. Menſis, a Month.
q. quaſi dicat, a: he ſhould Dies Dominicus, vel Solis, vel
a . Sabbati, Sunday.
Sc. Scilicet, or Scire licet, Dies Lunar, Monday.
you may know. Dies Martis, Tmfilay.
ctc. et cactcra, the rofl. Dies Mercurii, martyr/ay.
&e. et coetcra, and ſh fltrth, or Dies jovis, Thurſilay.
ſhun. Dies Veneris, Friday.
N. L. Non Liquet, z't appear: Dies Saturni, Saturday.
not. A. D. Annoq; Domini, in the
Dit. Ditto, theſame. Year of our Lord.
Cent. Centum, an Ham/rod; Georgius Rex, King
Per Cent. by the Hundred. George.
e. Exempli Gratia, Exam
G. R. Anno Regni, in the
e. ' Year of the Reign.
v. g. Verbi Gratia, upon my N. S. New Stile.
V/onl. . Fra. Francis, Frances.
Pag. Pagina, side, or Page. Cl. Clericus, a clergy-man, or
L. Linea, Line. Clerk.
lib, Liber, Book. Pr. Prieﬅ.
Deae. Deacon.
By;
>r 30 The Engliſh Grammar, with Notes.
Bp.BiſhoP. M. Manipulus, a Handful.
A. Bp. Arch-Biſhop. S. S. Semiſſis, half a Pound.
'Sacro - Sancta: q. quantum ſufficit, a ſaffl
Theolo'gix Do cient Quantity.
s' s' T' D- ctoris, Doctor of q. quantum Liber, as much
' Divinity. a: you pleaſe.
- Doctor, lb. ſ. d. ob. libra, ſolidi, de
-L.L.D. ' Legum aboctor narii, 0 li, quadrantes,
J. D. Jurum quZWL
Poundr, Shillings, Pente,Ha{f
M. D. Medicines Doctor, Do ___._Penoe, and Far-thinge.
ctor of Phyfick. *
I._ One Thouland.
A. B, Artium "Baccalaureus,
Barrhelor-qf Am. ' ) .V. 'Five Thoufimd.
A. M. Artium Magiﬅer," Ma I." Ten Thou-find.
ﬅer of Artr. a ' I." Fifty Thouſand.
F. R. S. Fellow of the'Royal So iſOne hundred Thouſand.
net .
'Aﬅ. G. Aﬅronorry Przflflbr D. Five hundred Thoufimd.
at Greſham-College. CC. Two Hundred.
'P. M:G. Profeſſor of Maſicle at ' D. 'or 13._ Five Hundred.
' 'Greſham-College. * DC. Six Hundred.
C. C. C. Corpus Chriﬅi Col M. or cle. A Thoufimd.
lege at Oxford. 133. Five-Thouſand-.
C. S. Cuﬅos Sigilli, the Keeper CCIQD. Ten Thouſand.
of the Soal. _ 1333. Fifty Thouſimd.
C. P. S. Cuﬅos 'Privati 'Sigilli, MDCCXXVIII. One Thouſand
KeePer of the Priwy-Seal. Seven Hundred and Twenty
R. Recipe, take thou. ' *s. Eight.
v. Sictﬅe Viator, ﬅand ﬅill
ana. of each alike.
p. a pugil, or halfa Handful. ' Traveller.
The Roman Account.
The firﬅ m of the Month they Kalendstall,

May, Marc , Octobcr, july, Six Nones fall ;
In the other Eight Months, Tour 5 Eight Ides in all. i
The End of ithe Gramniar.
Em] *
779£Art of POETR Y.
Y
C H A P. I.
Of Accem: and Qaantities.
HE Art of Pronunciation is reckon'd a-partgof Gum;
mar, and is the true Uttcranceot' Words, according
to their fluentit and Accmt. unwit] is the Length or
shortneſs of Syllables, and the Proportion, generally ſpeak
ing, betwixt a long and ſhort Syllablc is two to one; as in
Muſic, two upper: to one Crotchet.
In Engliſh, as well as in Latin and Greek, there are not
only theſe long and ſhort Syllahles, but thole which are
either long or ſhort, as the Meaſure requiresz as, RErErd:
and RELErds.
[a] Accmr is the riſin and falling of the Voice, above
or under its uſual Tone, Eut an Art of which we have lit<
tle Uſe, and know leſs, in the Engliſh Tongue; nor are we
like to improve our Knowledge in this Particular, unleſs the
Art of Deliw'y or Ummme, were alittle more ﬅudy'd.
Of
[a] There an: threeſorts of Ae could not be deliver'd in Writing.
cents, an Acute, a Grave, and an Some of our Modern: (eſpecially
Influx, which ii alſo call'd a Cir Mr. Bi/be, in his Art of Poetry)
cumflex. The Acute, or Mary, na and, lately Mr. Man-rife, in 'what
turally raiſes the Voice; and the he calls The Engliſh Grammzr, er
Grave, or Baſe, as naturally Falls roneoufiy uſe Accent for Vicinity,
it. The Circumflex is akind of one ſignifyin the Length or Short
_Undulation, bt Waving of the neſs of a yllable, the other
Voice; as in pronouncing aware, the raiſing or falling of the Voice
to love, you ſhould pronounce it as in D'ſcourje; which indeed moﬅ
if ſpelt aauaregiſing at the firﬅ a, People have naturally, except,
and falling at the ſecond. But ſuch who have the Misfortune of,
tho' theLan'm (in imitation of the a Monotony, or oſ Speaking al
Greeks) have ſome Signs to ex ways in the ſame Tone of Voice ;
preſs theſe Marks, yet the Uſe which is a great Vice in Utte
of them is not known, except in rance, and what few are guilty oſ,
the diſtinction of Adverbs: Nay, but ſuch as have a ſmall and
ſhould ſome old Roman ariſe acute Voice; for thoſe of a
from the Dead, if we believe roffcr Conﬅitution ſeldom are
&Win-w, the Rules of them xt to one Tone.
N 4
ſſſſſſ'l
134. TheArtofPOETRY. l
Of this long and ſhort Syllable are all Poetic Feet in Eng
liſh (as well as all other Languages) form'd 5 and tho'
Horace himſelf makes uſe of no leſs than twenty-eightſeve
ral ſorts of Feet, yet do they all, and many more, ariſe
from the various Compofitions of long and ſhort Syllables.
Before we come to the different Feet that are in uſe in
o'ur' Mother Tongue, it will be proper to lay down ſome
Rules of Quantity, by which we may in ſome meaſure ar
rive at ſome Certainty in this particular.
In Wbrd: whoſe Letter: ﬅill appear thefisme,
Bj diff'ring Smſe ſet gaining diſſ'rent Name,
The Senſe 'tis, ﬅil diﬅinguiſhes the Sound;
In Names that? ſhort, in Words which long i: finml;
3 In Words that differ in the Smſb, but not in the spelling,
the firﬅ Syllable of the Name is long, but the laﬅ Syllable
of the Affirmfltion is ſhort; as the following Examplcs will
ſhew; for no Words of different ſenſe are exactly ſpelt
alike, unleſs the Name, and the Affirmation.
Names. Words of Affirmation.
rAbſimt rAbſbnt
Accent ' Accent
The firﬅ Cement The laﬅ Cement
Syllable is Callect Syllable is< Collect
pronounc'd Cum/act 1pronounc'd l 2072qu
long. Conſhrr ong . on or
i Cum/eft
Can-pert
LContcſſ. LCanteﬅ.
', A very Learned and Ingenious e he no place for Aeeents: This
Author gives us this familiar and z plain Inﬅrumcnt does indeed in
eaſ Diſiinction betwixt Kguntity one ſingle Tone tſhew what a
an Accent : ' I: may be obſtrv'd, * Power there i' in Mufical Num
* that theVariations of the Voice, * hers, and of the various Move
' hy high and low, [ons and flmrt, 5 ment of Paetia Feet, and bow
* laid or ſoft, (however they hap ' the Eri- is affefied with the
' pen to be confounded by ſome) * ſudden intermixrur'e of loud and
* are all of as different Nature and ' faſt Notes,- but ler the Trun
* Effcfls, as the Bears of a Drum 4 pet tell how far ſhort all theſe
' are from' the Sound: of a Trum ' are of wall-turn'd and ri htly
''ſi per,
variedor Tone
the Reading
is frominSinging.
one un * plaod Accents: In the e con
* ſifls the Life ofLanguage, theſe
" All.the poſſible Diverſities of ' being the Enehnntmenrs, which
* Poetie Feet together with the ' being juﬅly apply'd to well
'Changes of loud and ſoft, the ' choſen Word', lend all the Paſſi
' Drum ex refl'es to a wonder: a. ons captive, and ſurprize the
' But wbi e yet there is pove * Soul itſelf in its inmoﬅ Re
' vnyte, in the Sound, there can ' eefl'es.
- The
The-Art of POETRY. m
Names. Affirmations.
' (Ferment ſFerrm-nt
Frequent l Frequent
Intenſe Incenfe
The firﬅ Ohject The laﬅ Ohject
Cyllable is< Preſent Syllable is Preſhnt
pronounc'd Project pronounc'd Project
long. l Record long. l Record
Suhject Suhjeu?
Torment Torment
LUnite. LUnito.
and ſome others. But the following Rules Of 'QumliTY
Will be of ſome Uſc', as,
* When Endings to One-Syllab'-Words are join'd,
Long the firfl Sjlluhle you alway: find.
(1-) When an Ending is join'd to a Word of one Syllable'
the firﬅ Syliable is lon z as, Peace-able, ſin-flol, ſelf-iﬅx'
good-neﬅ, toil-ſinne, fair Jeſx, heart-1, god-ly, &e.
When (er), (T), (ure) two SyllabſiWords do and,
qt the Syllab* they the Sound extend.
1 . ,
(2..) In Words of two S llables which end in er, or, oT
rather our
Honour, and ure,
venture, &e. the
but firﬅ is long,
we muﬅ exce ast defer,
enter, refer,
Honor,Preſi"
01'
fer, which indeed belong to the Rule o Particlex.

When (le), or (cn) ohﬅure do end u Vſord,
To the firﬅ syllable the] Length afford.
As for Example, Trouble, double, Fiddle, Garden, &e.
When Particles with other V'ord: compound,
The laﬅ ﬅill lengthen their own proper Sound.
(z.) When Particlex are compounded with Words of one
Syllable, the Ward it ſelf is long; as nllure, oollegue, palliate,
except object, udjunt'l, Advent, Aſþect, Compoſs, Centaur-ſe,
Conduit, perfect, Perfume, Prelate, Proſit, Progreſs, 1530
logue, Reliques, Rzſpit, Succour, Suhſlunoe, more, Sur
plire'. Note, that perfect and Perfume, when they are
Affirmations, relate to the 'foregoing Rule, not the Ex
ception. _ -
If to two Syllab'-V/'ords an Ending's hound,
That which before was long maintain: it: Sound.
N 2. If
336 'IheArtofPOETRT
If an Ending be added to a Word of two Syllables, that
Syllable which was originally longeontinues ſo; as, Profik,
profitable, except protefl, Proteﬅant.
When man] Syllable: compoſe a Whrd,
That Vowel': long, that fiom the laﬅ is third ;
Except Poſition gi-ue the laﬅ hat one _
(By trouding Conſidnants) a longer Tone;"
(40 In Words of many Syllables (as we call all that can
fiﬅ of more than two) the third Vowel from the laﬅ is long,
as, Sal-vation, Damnation, &e. execpt when the laﬅ Syllable
but one is long by Poſition, that is, by the coming together
of many Conſonants, and bearing the Vowel hard upon 'emg
as, abundance, accompliſh, illa/hate, to which wc may add,
Affiance, Affida'vit, antetezlent, Armado, Baltonej, Bra'vado,
Carhonado, Cathedral, Dandalion, Horizon, obdurate, Opponent,
pellaoid, Precedent, (tho' erroneouily too often ſpelt Prefident)
Reeuſimt, Vagaoy. In theſe that iollow the laﬅ Syllable is
long ,- as, manie/te, comprehend, condeſcend. .
Some Word: of many syllable: are finneſ
Ev'n of two Vowels to extend the Sound;
The fourth, or fifih, and of the lafl but one 5
But ﬅill the laﬅ i: of a weaker Tone. _
(y) Some Words of many Syllables have two lon Syllalyſi
bles, the fourth or fifth Vowel from the laﬅ, and the aﬅ but:
one; tho' the O_uantity of the laﬅ be not ſo loudly ſounded
in the Delivery; as Arridemj, which yet is often pronounc'd
Academ , neceſſary, Acrimony, admirable. Tho' it may be
doubte whether admirable, as uſually pronounc'd, be not
more properly one lon and three ſhort. Advetzfltry, Anti
mony, Alimon , amhu army, amitahle, anniverſary, anti
quated, Apap exy, arbitrary, Auditory, habitahle, Hierarchy,
Jgnominy, neceſſiny, Necromancy, rcfrac'iony, ſedentary.
Four or more syllables, that end in neſs,
The firﬅ and laﬅ long Syllable: tonfeﬅ.
But Tiempetament, and all 'Words of Four or more Sylla
bles ending in neſt, have the firﬅ andlaﬅ Syllables long;
as, Righteoaſneſs, Tediouſnefl, &a. except Forgetfulnefl, 'De
ſpightfitlnefi. *'
Some are of doahtfal nantiiy Ue,
Andſhortenlnow, and ZOQW the ſage Pſhfllflſe.
Some
._. ._.
TheArtcfPOETRY. 137
Some are of a doubtful Quintity, according to the Will
or Occaſion of the Writer or Speaker : as, acceptable, con
tribute, corruptihle, Confefliir, Succeffiar, &c. and indeed ſome
of the former.
Back' to the Vowel: non' convey your Eye,
And there the Rule: of Quflm'it you'll Yþ ,
In Wbrdr that many Syllable: my.
For Commanj moﬅ they ſhort, and long are ſound,
But thoſe that to ſuch Conſhnantr are homul }
A: cloſe the Lipr, tom ne'er extend their Sound.
Emphntic ſ/ler we juﬅly ﬅill produce; s
But every Sign is ſhorÞ by ﬅirred Uſe.
The Rules of the Vowels will be found at the be inning
of the Grammar; and We here may add to theſe O ſerva
tions, that moﬅ Words of one Syllable are common, except
they end with ſilent (e), whoſe nature it is to lengthen the
'foregoing Vowel. All the Signs are ſhort, without an Em
phaſis, which they ſeldom have, as, a, the, an, for, by, ivith,
to, from, &e. but whatever Word of one Syllable ends witha
Letter that eloſes the Mouth, can never be lon 3 as all ſuch
as end in (or), or the ſound of (m), and in me Mutes. _
Two Syllahler our Engliſh Feet compoſe, X
But Wantities diﬅinguiſh them from Preſſ, ,
By long and ſhort in 'variom ﬅatiom plac'd,
v Our Engliſh Verſeharmonioxſly i: ng'd. -" . i
. V/ith ſhort and long Hernia Feet we raiſe, *- -'-'
But thzſe to 'vary i: the _Poet'.< Praiſe. 4 *'
For theﬅtme Sound: Perpetually diſguﬅ:
-, - DRYDEN to this Variety um:
Having given theſe Rules for ſanmiti-v in the Engliſh
Tongue, we muﬅ obſerve, that tWO Syllables makea Poetic
Foot, which hitherto will not admit a greater number, tho'
in the Lſiarin and Greek a Foot might contain fix, and thoſe
might be reſolv'd into_the ſimple Feet of two or three Sylla-.
bles. Heroio Verſer conſiﬅ of five ſhort, and five long SYlla
bles intermixt, but not ſo very ﬅrictly as'never to alte'r't'hat
Order. Mr. Dryden has vary'd them with admirable Beauty:
he inning his Heroic Verie ſometimes yvith a long _Syllablc,
follow'd by. two ſhorn, and other Changes, which aMaﬅer.
only muﬅ venture on. ' e/ ' _ _
From hence 'tis lain, that the Learn can never "113ng
that any number ofPSyllablcs is ſufficient to make any kind
ofVerſe, for by that means there could be no Proſe; ſo
that to conﬅitute adverb, Variety of Numbers is neceſiaiyj'j
. , .' . ' N 3 3'
433 'The Art of P_O.E T RY.
In Engliſh, the Metre, or ſorts of Verſe are extremely vari
ous and arbitrary, every Poet being at liberty to introduce any
new Form he pleaſes. The moﬅ us'd are, firﬅ the Heroic, con
ſiﬅing of five long and five ſhortSyllables generally ſpeaking;
Verſes of four Feet, and of three Feet, and three Feet and a
Ceſurepr one Syllable. Stimzn's have been endeavour'd to be in
troduc'd, but never yet have been able to eﬅabliſh themſelves.
[12] To help the Learned to ſome Means or Examples of
forming new Feet in the Engliſh Tongue, we ſhall here ſet
down the Variations made by the Ancients, ofia long and
.a ſhort Syllable.
A Spondee, Two long Syllablcs. A.
Pirch, Two, ſhort Syllables.
Trorhee, A long and ſhort Syllable.
Inmbz'c, A ſhort and a long Syllable.
Theſe are of two Syllabler.
A Molofi, Three long Syllables.
Tribrnch, Three ſhort Syllables.
Daihl, One long and two ſhort Syllables.
Armpq/Z, Two ſhort and one long Syllable.
[b] But as many Ways as 'ſprightly nature, and reigns moﬅ
-\li_z:mtities may be varied by in our Engliſh Verſe. The Troches
Cumpofition and Tranſpofition, is quite contar to the Iambic, Et
ſo many different Feet have the to expreſs weai and langnid MO
Greek Ports contriv'rl, and that tion'; as all thoſe Meaſures are
'under diﬅinct Names, from two which move From long to ſhort
to ſix Syllables to the number of ;
Syllables. The Pirric and Tri
114. But it is the Opinion o l bracb are very rapid, as the Moleſ;
ſome Learned dien in this Way, is flow and heavy.
that Poctie Number; may be ſuf The' Rhime has been (by the
ficiently explain'd, by thoſe of Ignorance of our Fore-fathers)
two or three Syllablcs, into which thou ht the onlyEfi'ential of Eng
the reﬅ are to be reſolv'd. liſh' litle, yet it it in Reality the
Of thoſe ei ht here ſet down, moﬅ ineonſiderable Part oſ it, and
theSFonde'e an the Dactyl are the may be left out without any Detri
the moﬅ conſiderable, as being ment 5 as is plain from the Great
the Meaſure: us'd in the Heroic Milton. But if you refolve to
Verſe by Hom'J'irgil, &e. Theſe write in Rhime, you muﬅ take a
two Feet are of equal Time, but peculiar Care of obſerving them
of different Motion .' The Han examy, for a Botch in this is un
le'e has an even, ﬅrong, and fied pardonable. M Lord Roſcammon,
dy Pace, like a Trot, as I may tho' he was an nemy to Rhirne,
ſay; but the Duct I reſembles the yet was moſt exafi in it, when he
nimbler fitokes o a Gallop. An vouchſafed to make uſe of it.
inverted Dactyl is an Anffi/i, a This Nieeneſs muﬅ be obſerv'd in
very ſpritely Trot, anda otion double or treble Rhimes, which
roper to excite and enrage. yet are never properly us'd, but.
he hmbic is alſo of a light and in Mh rk ut CHAP.
The Art of P O E'T R Y. 139
l
. H Ainjz II.
MArt 'QfPOETR Y in General; andflrﬅ, of
Epigr'arn, Paﬅoral, Elegy, end Lyric.
l *.
Aving' in the foregoing Chapter laid down the Rules

H of the Mechanic part ofPoetry, which is as far asthe
Grummur generally goes, tho' with 1great Abſurdity, we ſhall
now proceed to the Art itſelf, whic (by we knownot what
Infatuation) has never been yet taught in our Schools. For
if Poetry is to be baniſh'd our studies entirely, to what pur
pofi: does every petty School teach the Rules of Qflnfltyf
But if we are allow'd to read the Pocts; nay, if we are ſo
fond of them, as to teach them to Children before they are
Maﬅers of the Tongue they ſtudy, why muﬅ not the Beau
ty and Excellence of their Works be ſhown? By the firﬅ
we teach Boys to be meet Verſiflen, Poetuflersz by the
ficond we form their Judgment, and let them ſee the Diffi
culty of being a ood Poetz which wou'd deter them at
tempting an Act or which they find no true Genius, and at
the ſame time give them ajuſt value for the Books they read.
The common Pnjbdiu': make Scriblers, which is a Scandals
the preſent Rules inﬅitute a Poet, which is an Honour.
For the Marner muﬅ not fancy, that to write a Verſe,"
or conclude a Rhirne, gives the'Title of Poet; no, he muﬅ
underﬅand the Nature of his Subject thbroughlyz and let his
Copy of Verſes or Poem be never ſo ſhort, he muﬅ form a
Delign, or Plan, by which every Verſi: ſhall be directed tQ
a certain End, and each have a juﬅ Dependance on the
other: for only this can produce the Beauty of Order and
Harrnony, and ſatisfy a rational Mind. For to jumble a
company of Verſes together without any Dcſign, let them
be never ſo ſmooth and flowing, is an Undcrtaking of no
Value, and incapable of any thing Greet and Noble. A Block
head with a goodEar, and a tolerable Knowledge of the
Language, ma do theſe; but nothing but aPoet the other.
But i a De rgn be neceſſary in the ſhorteﬅ and leaﬅ of
our Poems, it is vaﬅly more neceſſary in thoſe of greater
length; which
" without
ſi this will
' infallibly
' prove intelerably
tedious,
'140 The Art of P O E T RY.
tedious, and a rude indigcﬅed Heap. Fix this, therefore,
in the Learner': Mind, that a VE R S I F Y ER and P O Ell'
are two different Things; the firﬅ is Contemptible, and
has been ſo theſe zooo years, but the latter Honourable in
the Opinion
and Nations,ofſince
the,Men of. Senſe
the Birth and.Heav'nly
of this Learning,
Art.in allſi Ages
Before we come to the Rules of the ſeveral Parts of Poe
try, We muﬅ premiſe a Word or two to the Teachers.
The Maﬅer, or Miſlre/fr, who inﬅructs the Young in this
Art, ſhou'd thoroughly know its Nature and Parts, notonly
in this, .wh_ich is but an Abridgment of a lar er Diſcourſe,
that'wiil be publiſh'd ſoon after it, but the ull Diſplay of
'this Art in a much 'greater Volume.
31 ' 'They 'ſhou'd likewiſe read themſelves with Application,
all the beﬅ Tranſlations of the old Latin and Greek Poets;
and direct their Scholars to read and ﬅudy the &me. For
' tho' theſe Tranflations are far. ſhort of the Originals, yet
ſiare they capable, as they are, of fixing a juﬅ and true Taﬅe
and Reliſh
'which of the
has not beenNature "ofmuch
kept' ſo PomyininView
the Engliſh
inct moﬅ'Student;
of our
Modern Compoſitions, . but as they'depart ſrom Nature,
ſſwant her Regularity oſOrde'r and Beauty. Ovid's Meta
ctmorphazſl: ſhou'd be firﬅ read throughly, becauſe it fur
niſhes all the Hiﬅories of the Heathen Gods, and their No
tions about them. To theſe you may add my LordBaton,
Danet, and other Books on that Subject. Virgil, Ovid, Ho
race, Homer, we have in part in pretty good Verſions: And
in ſome that
beſides of theſe the he
Which Scholar
takesſhou'd every
in the Dayoſtake
Rules the aArt
Leſſon,
,- byſſ
which he may come to join the Theory and Practice, which
only can make a Poet, or'Judge oſ Poetry.
We now come to the Rules of PO ETRY, in which I
ſhall begin with the moﬅ inferiour Kind, and ſo aſcend by
degrees up to the higheﬅ Performance in the Art.
_ Epigram is the loweﬅ Step of the Temple of the MUSES,
or rather the Ground neareﬅ to the firﬅ Step of its Aſoent.
OfEPIGRAM.
The E igram in shortneſs take: delight, *
And t a' all Subjects are it: proper Right,
Yet each of one alone can only write.
'An Epigram is a ſhort Copy of Verſes treating of one on
ly Thing, with Beauty and Poinmt_ All Things are- allow'd be
to
- - . a. -
TheArtzffPOETRY. 14!
be treartd of in the Epigmm, provided that Ere-vity, Bean
ty and Point are preſerved.
Two Parts this little Whole ill c- ac
Recital of the Subject, make ciizizzz
To make thir Paem perfect, he your Care
TharBeauty, Points, and Brevity appear.
The Epigram Conſiﬅs of two Parts, the Recital aſ the
Subject, and the Could/ſon. Beauty runs through the whole,
but the Point is for the Concluſion only.
That you this needfid Brevity may tlaim,
_Let one Thing any he your careful Aimz
And in few Word: that only Thing expreſſ,
But I/Vard: that] Force and Energy confeﬅ.
To attain this Ere-vity, you muſt not aim at many Things
through the whole Epigram, and then take care to'expreſs
that Little as conciiEly as poſſibly you Can; that is, in ſuch
Words, as that to extend them into more, wou'd enervate
and loſe the ForCe and Strength of the Thought, and the
Point or Acamm. _ z,
Whic 'to
Beaut 'the Whole an
's harmoniau: Excelllence
Symmetr imports, ,
of Parts,
Adorn'd with fiveet Simplicity and Truth,

The Diction ﬅill polite, and ne'er uncouth.
This BEAUTY Sweetneſs alway; mnfl eamþrize,"
PVhic'h from the Subject, well exprefiu will rifie.
The next Quality is Beauty, that is, an exact and hat;
monious Formation of the Whole, and the apt Agreement
of all the Parts of the Poem, from the beginning to the end,
with a ſweet Simplieity and Truth. The Language muﬅ be
Palite, not Ruflic: The Beauty mufl: always be accom
pany'd with Sweetneſs, which varies according to the Sub
ject; if that be delicate, ſoft, tender, amorous, &a. thoſe
Walities will ariſe from the well expreffing of the Subject,
that will give Beauty and Sweemefl. But this muﬅ not be
too viſibly ſought after; avoid rather what is harſh, and
an Enemy to Sweemeﬅ in the language, than ﬅudy too
much to encreaſe it. 7
The POINT in the Concluiion take; it: Place,
And i: the Epigram's peculiar Grave;
Some unexpected, and flame biting Thought
With poignant Wit, and ſharp Expreffian frangh'tfh
e
,. '142 TheArtquOETRY.
The third neceſſary inity of the Epigmm is the
POINT; and it is much inſiﬅed on by the Epigmmmatical
Critics, and is chiefly in the Conclnﬅon; where itmuﬅ end
with ſhmething biting and unexpected. There tare others
who ever exclude the Point from Epigram, becauſe Ca
mllm has it not ſo frequently as Martial; but here, as in
other Things, We muﬅ be guided by the Majority, and if
we here exclude the Points, we may have it ſpread ﬅill
through greater Works, where it is abominable.
From two to twenty Verfir it extendr,
But heﬅ when two, or flmr, it not troth/bends.
The number of Verſes in an Epigmm is from two to
twenty, or even to fifty; but the lhorter the better, be
cauſe it comes neareﬅ to the Perfection of Brew'ty. We
have not many formal Epigmm: in Engliſh, but then we'run
into a worſe Error, by ſcattering the Epigrammaric Point:
through all our Verſies, to the ſcandal of the Engliſh Pom,
ſince that wholly belongs to Epz'gmm. One Example ſhall
ſuffice, and that is from Mr. Brown -on a Gentleman who
- took the Oaths, and made three Gods of the Trinity.
The ſhme 'Alleginme to two King: he djs, '
Swear: the ſome Faith' ro-both, hmſ orh betrays:
No wonder, to Swedr he'r alway: flee,
Who has two God: to Swear by, more than we.
Here i's the Brwitymoim and Beauty of an Epigmm, ex
preſs'd by a Domeﬅic Example: You may find ſeveral Epi
'gmms of Martial tranſlated by the ſinne Author, and by
Mr. Cowley, and ſome vbut Of szdlur, which are too long
to inſert ih this Abri'dgment._ '
' . l ' .\. '
OfP-4ST0RAL.
The Paﬅoml that ſing: of happy Swoim,
And harmleſr Nym h: that haunt the Wood: andPlar'nr,
I show'd through t e whole diſho'ver every where
i Their old Simplz'city and pious Air.
e : Am! in the character: of Maids and Youth,
Unprhctir'd Plainneſs, Innocencc, and Truth.
As every ſort of Pomj' is an Imitation of ſomething, ſo is
'the Pafloral an Imitation of a shepherd's Life, conſider'd un
der that Character, or rather an lmitation of rural Actions.
_F_or this Reaſon there ought to be an Air of Piety, on all oc
. ' caſions,
TheArt ofPOETRY.ſſ 14?
ceſions, maintain'd through the whole Poemz the Perſons
introduc'd being Innocent and Simple, without Corruption;
ſuch as shepherds, Goatherds, Cowherds, Prtmert, and the
like. The Characters therefore ſhou'd repreſent that anci
ent innocence, and unpractis'd Plainneſs which was then
in the World, and which is viſible in Theaeritu: and Virgil,
as may be ſeen in the Tranſhtions of thoſe Poets.
Each Paﬅornl a little Plot muﬅ own,
Which a: it muﬅ he ſimple, muﬅ he one ;
.-.. With ſmall Digrefflom it willyet diſpen e,
Nor need; itaiwajx Allegoric Senſe.
Every Paﬅarai Poem ſhou'd have a little Plot or Fahle;
which may deſerve the Titlc of a Puſ-'nal Scme; it muﬅ be
ſimple, and one, yet not ſo as to refuſeall manner ofDigreſ
lions, provided they belittle. Nor is the Poet oblig'd al
ways to make it Allegorit, that is, to have ſome real Per
ſims mtant by thoſe fictitious Shepherds which are intro
duc'd. ' This Rule of the Plot is every where obſerv'd by
Vir il, particularly in his firﬅ, which .is the Standard of
Pahomlx. The Plans, or Ar uments of this and two or is
three more, will make this pffainz Of the firﬅ 5
Meliboeus, an unfortunate Shepherd, i: introdue'd with Ti
tyrus, one more fortunate; the former addreſſ: his Complaint
of his'Suff'ring: and Baniſhment to the latter, whoenjg': his
Fiat/es mzdFold: in this Puhiit Calumity, and therefltre expreſſes
his Gratitude to the Benefltctor fiom whom this Fa-vour flow'rſ:
But Meliboeus ateuſhx Fortune, civil Vitr, &ce. bidding Adim
to his Nati-ve Home. This is therefore a Dixilogue-thc next
Is aPaﬅoral Complaint without any Dialogue; for C O'
RYDON in u Courtﬅzip wholly Paﬅoral, complain: of the"
Qj/neſr of Alexis, recommend: himſelffor his Beaut , andskill
w playing on the rural Pipe; invite: him into t e Country,
Promffing him the Pleafitres of the Plate, with a Preſent of
Nuts and Apples. But finding all in vain, he reſhl-ue: to
quit his Amour, and hetake himſelf again to his Buſinefi.
Here is a viſible Plom or Deſt'gn, which makes every thing
depend upon the other.
In the third Men-alms, Damattu, and Palamon are intro
duc'd in this manner.-Damaetas and Menalcas, after ſhme
Country Railerj, agree to try which has the heſt skill at Song,
Md that their Neighbour Palaemon ſhall he judge of their Per-_
fi'rfflflnte; who, after hearing'hoth, detiare: himſelf unfi', For
decide the Contro'verſy, amijo leaves it undetermin'd.
FWng,
i
'
'144' TheArt ofPOETRY.
We need give no more Examples here of the little Plet
or Fahle of a Paſloral 5 you may confirlt Mr.Dr)-den*s Virgil,
and the ſeveral Tranflations of Th'acritm, by which you
will confirm the Rule abundantly.
Connections, and 'Il'ranſitionaſi pra] rake tare
They are not made too ﬅrict and regular.

The Connectiom ſhou'd be negligent, and the Tranſſtionk
eaſy,- as may be obſerv'd in thoſe of Virgil: for atoo ﬅrict
chularity in theſe, will make the Poern ﬅiff and formal.
The Paﬅoral admits of Vow: and Praiſe,
of- Promiſer, Complaint,
Congratulatiom, Singing, of Mirth jeſt',
Riddleſſr, and joy,
Of Parables, Summer, and the reﬅ.

- Philoſhphit Ice/lions, Riddlex, Parahler, ought to be emi
nent in this Poem, which gives a peculiar Reliſh of the
ancient Manner of Writing, and the Writer ſhou'd ſhow
ſome competent Skill in the Subject-Matter, which make:
the Character of the Perſons int'roduc'd ;. as Virgil every
where does, but the Moderns ſeldom, or never. '
_The Style muſt flill he natural and clear,
And Eleganee in every Part appear;
It: humble Method nothing ha: offierce,' e
But hate: the Ratlz'ng of a lofty Verſe.
The Style ought to be natural, clear and elegant, but no
thing ſublime or lofty, or ſet off with ſuch Ornaments as
are not at all agreeable to the Humility of the Subject.
The Sentcnce ſhou'd be ſhort and ſmart, and the Verſifica
tion ſmooth, eaſy and harmonious, without Affectation of
Grandeur and Majeﬅy, but when a-kin to the Subject, as
in one oſ Virgil's to Pollio. ' -
oppord to this, another law in Style
Make: Shepherds ſþeak- a Language haſeand vile.
This Randal has done in his Paﬅoralr, and ſeveral others;
changing Damon and Phillis into Tom and Befl. Nor muﬅ
7 Battles and War be treated of in a Paſloral: We muﬅ either
feign Names according to-the Subject, or borrow thoſe
which we find already in goodAuthors. This Poem ought
never to exceed one hundred Verſesz the beﬅ of Virgil's
is but fifty, thatis (in Engliſh) about ſeventy. '
a Of
TheAr'rſPOETRY. 14;
Of E L E G T.
'The Elegy demands a ſhlemn Stylc,
I: mourns with flowing Hair at Fun'ral Pile,
It points the Lover's Torment and Delights,
A Miﬅrefl flatters, threatens, and in-Lites.
Ilegy was firﬅ made on Melancholy Subjects, as on the]
Death of Friends, (75. as O-uid on Tibullus, which is tran
ſlated. In Proeells of Time, Joy, Wiſhes, and almoﬅ every
Subject, was made free of the Elegy, as Complaints, Ex
poﬅulations, Prayers, Love, Vows, Praiſcs, Congratulfi
tions, Admonitions, Reproaches.
The Madel of this Poem ſhow'd he made,
And every Step of all its Progreﬅ laid,
And all directed to ſinne certain End,
And Verſe on Verſe perpetually depend.
This and all other Poems ought to have a Plan madel'of
the whole Defign before a Line is written: Forſſ elſe the
Author will not know where to begin, and where to end,
but ramble in the Dark, and give us Vetſcs which 'have no
Relation to each other, or at leaﬅ have not any Depen
dance on each other. This is the Fault of thoſe who are
ignorant of Art, and are only Verſifyers. -
No glitt'ring Points, nor any nice Conceit
Muﬅ load the Elegy with Foreign Weight;
Paffion and Nature here avow their Right, -
And with Diſdain throw hat/e that mean Delight. r
,The Epigrammatio Point muſt never be here admitted ;'
'tis abominable; none of the fine things that ſome are ſo
fond of in all Places, no ConCeits, nor the like: Theſe give
place to the Paffions, which muﬅ here ſpeak with Nature.
Remember that the Diflion carry where
Be gentle, clean, perſpimoas, and clear,
Correct, the Manners all-long expreſs,
. 1
In ev'ry place the Paffion ﬅill confeſs.
The Diction to the Elegy ſhould be ﬅandard, correct,
clean, gentle, perſpicuous, clear, expreffive of the Man
nersi' tender, full of Paſſions, or pathetic; but never op
Prcfs'd or debauch'd with fine Sayinkgs and exquiſite Sentences.
It is wonderfully adorn'd with requent Commikrations,
Complaints, Exclamations, Addreſſes to Things or Perlons,
- e o Words
146 TheArtofPOETRY.
Words oſ feign'd Perſons, or Things inanimate made to
ſpeak, ſhort Digreffions, yet pertinent to the Subject; nor
_does it receive
Examplcs a little
not only from Beauty
the like,vſrom Allufions
but unlike, andtoContraries.
Sayings:
Sometimes Compariſons are made, ſmart and ſhort Sen

tences are thrown in, to confirm what is propos'd.
No cutting of' the Vowels muﬅ he fimnd,
That wou'd deﬅroy that ſmooth, that flowing Sound}
Which in the Elegj muﬅ flill abound.
There ſhould be no Apofirophe's, by which when one
Vowel ends a Word, and the next begins with another.
the for'mer is cut off; for that begets a ſort of Roughffitſs,
which is not agreeable to this kind of P'oeſie.
Some to two Verſe: will the Senſe confine,
Conﬅcmmate in the cloſe of ev'ry other Line.
'The Reaſon of this Opinion ſeems to be the ibrt of Verſe
this Poem makes ufl: of in the Latin, which ſeems to require
a Full-point or Period at the end of every Di/lich compos'd
of a Verfi: of ſix Feet, and another of five, and ſo begins
ct ain like a ſhort Six-'7224. But this Rule will not always
hold in Engliſh, nor is it always obſerv'd in Latin.
The LTRIC.
Sweetneſs is mq/Z peculiar to the Ode,
Ev'n when it riſe: to the Praiſe qf G 0 D.
The Characteriﬅic of this ſort of Poeſie from all others,
is Smetmfi: For as Gravity rules, and mofl: prevails in
Hernia Verie, Simplicity in Paﬅaral, Tendemeſs and Soft
neſs in Elegy, Sharpneſs and Poignancy in Satire,Hum0ur and
Mirth in Cometh', the Pathetic in Tragedy, and the Point in
the Epigmmz lb in this ſort of Poeſie the Poet applieshim
ſelf entirely to (both the Minds of Men by Swee'neſi and
Variety of the Verſes, and the exquiſite Elcgance of the
Word: of the whole Song or Ode, in the Beauty and Agree
ableneſi of Numbers, and the Defeription of Things moﬅ
delightful in their own nature.
Ih'Exprefflon ſhm'd he Ellſ, Famy high,
That mar' ſeem to cree , nor this to :
Nq Word: tranſpw'd, m' in ſuch Order all,
A: tho' hard wrought, may ſeem by chance to full.
But ohſcene Wbm'r do alway: gi-ue OffZ-m-e,
And in all heir] debaﬅ the Senfi.
* ' _.£0fl£5
The Ai't of P O E T R Y. 147
Song: are a Part of Lyric Poetry, for Ode indeed ſigni
fies a Song,- tho' our common Madrigal: degenerate much
from their Original the Ozle; yet, that we may have better
for the future, we here take Notice of them, and they ſhou'd
be moﬅ exact in the Propriety of Words and T-houghts;
but here, as well as in all manner of true Poeſie, Obſcurity
ſhou'd with the utmoﬅ Care be avoided.
Variety of Number: ﬅill helorzg
To the firſt Melozj/ of Ode or Song.
The Verſe of the Lyrie Poctry in the beginning, was on
ly of one kind, but For the ſake Of Pleaſure, and theMuiic
to which they were ſung, they ſo vary'd theNumbers and
Feet, that their ſorts are now almoﬅ innumerable.
Pindarie Odes are of a higher Flight,
And happier Force, and fierce i: the Delight:
The Poet here muﬅ he indeed inſpir'd
Mth Fury too, a: well a? Famy fir'rl;
For Art and Nature in thi: Ode muﬅ join,
'To make the wondrous Harmon] Divine.
But tho' all ſeem to he in Fury done,
The Language ﬅill muﬅ ſhfl and eaffl run;
The bright Tranſitions and Digreffions riﬅ,
And with their natural Return: ſurprize.
As theLanguage, or Expreffions ſhould be elegamly ſoft,
ſo an ill or low Expreffion legs and debaſes the Beauty
and Brightneſs of the Thought. This Poem is diﬅinguiſh'd
from all other Ode: by the happy Tranſitions and Digreſſrons
which it beautifully admits, and the ſurprizing and natural
ly eaſy Returns to the Subjects; whichis not tobeobtain'd
without great Judgment and Genius. The ſuppos'd Irrc
gularity of Pindar's Numbcrs, has made our ignorantlmita
tors pretend to be l'fnn'nric Poets, by their wild irregular
Verſcs alone, tho' very falſely. Here the Poet that wou'd
excel, ſhould draw the Plan of his Poem, and mark out the
Places where theſe elegant Wandrings may properly be, and
how the Returns may juﬅly be made 'to the Subject; for.
without that it muﬅ be Chaos and Confufion in bold ſonor
rous Verſes. Conſult and ﬅudy Pindar's Odex, tranſlated by
Mr. Cowley; and a Poem entitled, The Female Reignz in
which the Tranfitions and Returns are excellent. [a]
C H A P.
[a] The Ode Originally hadſt-va: at laﬅ divided into three
butlone Mopbe' or Sun-m, but gain; the Strqpbo, Azztfflz-apbz,
r. and
'r 48 The-Art of POETRI.
and Epode. For the Pricſh went flraphe conſiﬅcd oſ the ſame 'Sum
mund the Altar ſinging the Praiſe: bcr and kind of Verſes, nay, al
of the Godr, or Goddefl'es in Verſe: moﬅ of Syllables; b't the Blaod:
So they call'd their firﬅ Eutrance of Verſes oſ a different kind,
m the Left, Strophe, or turning to 5 which were ſometimes more in
'he ſecond returning to the Right, number, ſometimes leſs; and if
they call'd Antiflnphe, or the Re the Ode contain'd ſeveral Straphes
turning; and the Song: they call'd and Anti/irojbhes, and EPodes, the
Ode, or Antode; as they call'd ſame Rule was ſollow'd in all
their Entrance and Return Straphe, the reﬅ.
and Antiflrofilhe. At laﬅ ﬅanding The Odes of Horace are com
ſtill. beforet e Altar, they ſung pos'd of two, three or four ſorts
the reﬅ, and that they call'd the of Verſe, after which the Stan
Epc'le. The Strophe and Anti zar, or Stuphes begin again, &re.
o
c H A P. In.
Of SATIR'E and COMEDY.
SAtire and Cometh' being both directed to laſh and ridi
cule Folly and Vice, may (we_ think) properly come
into one Chapter.
Folly and Vice of e-u' Soft' and Kind
That wound oar Rough, or dehaſe our Mind;
All that deſerve: our Laughter or our Hare,
To biting S A T I R E's Province do relate 5
The flothful Paraflte, affected Fool,
Th' Ingrat ul, and the pert loqaaciom' Tool,'
The Luſl , Drunle'ard, th' avaricioa: Sla-ve,
The noi Bra-vo, and the trio/zing Knave:
Satire, Z wholeſhme Leffimr, mou'd reclaim,
And heal their Vicer, to ſicare their Fame.
satire, like the old Comedy, takes Cognizance oſ, and hat
for its subject I'nrpitade, or ſuch things as are worthy our
Langhtcr, or our Hatred. Whatever therefore is not ridi
culous or odious, is not the Subject of Satirez as any thin
that is full oFGrieſ, Terror, th, or other Tragical Pa -
ſions. Satire derides and falls on the Slochful, the Paraſite,
Affectation, the Loquacious or Talkative, the Ingrateful,
LibidinOUs, Drunkards, the Avaritious Uſurers, Bravo's,
public Robbers, Adulterers, Go. He was in the Right,
that ſubjected the Diﬅempers of the Mind to Satire, ſince it
is as much employ'd in this, as the Phyſician in curintoctjhe
. y..
TheArtofPOETRY. r49
Body. Both propoſe to themſhlves the Health of the Ps
tiertt, Satire by Diſcourſe, the Phyſician by his Potions and '
Pills. The Medicines of both are in themſelves uniavoury
and diſhgreeable to the-Palate of the Diﬅemper'd on whom
they make Inciſions; whom they camerize and ſpare not. '
The Phyſician gilds his Pill, that it may go down glibly; and
Satiric InvectiVes muﬅ be ſweeten'd with the mixture of
Pleaſiintry and Wit, and agreeable Raillery, 'till both the Me
dicines are ſwallow'd, and in the Bowels perform their
Operation. The Raiiery and Bitin of Satire correct the
Perverſe, and deter others from fal ing into Folly and Vice.
But
The Modern Reader:Decen
Latin V/riter: chaglrnge more Rtſhect ,
neglect,
And at immozlqſl V/'ritings take Offence,
If clean Expreffiom cover not the Senſe.
Satire ſhou'd he from all Ohſreneneſi free,
Not impatient, andyet preach Made/ly.
The Satiric Pact ſhou'd not expoſi: Vice and Lewdneſs
as Horace and Juvenal have done, in Words and Expreffions
that maycorrupt the Innoccnt, whilﬅ they ﬅrive to correct
the Guilty. He muﬅ, therefore, carefully avoid all obſcene
Words and Images.
Tho' Vice and Folly he keen Satire's Aim,
It maﬅ not on their Nature here declaim.
Tho' the Buſincſs of Satire be to call Men from Vice and
Folly, and invite them to Wiſdom and Virtue, yet it is by
no means to waﬅe it ſelf on Diſquifitions on the Nature of
*ert:uc and Vice , which is the proper Buſineſs of' Moral
Philaſhphj. In ſhort, this Pocrn requires for its Author, a
Man of Wit and Addrcſs, Sagacity and Eloquence ,* and a
Sharpneſs that is .not oppoſite to Mirth and Pleaſantry.
No Parts diﬅinct doe: biting 'Satire knowt
And without certain Rule: m Comye nail go.
_ Inſinuation it Zzgms, s_
* And qfl abruptlyſfa s upon our zm;
But this 'Abruptne s muﬅ regard the Whole,
Which maﬅ it: I/les, and Manner too, confront.
Satire has no certain nor diﬅinct Parts; ſometimes It
gins by inſmuatin itſelf by Degrees; blldlt Lnew-re comfnoniiy
Am uptly, and Wit* Ardou r. 0Butto'tc
z afrmmno'vea>
Þ WPG
I' &HÞ'MISAKW IU V E N A L.
150 TbeArtOfPOETRY.
rupt, yet it ou hr to have a Reference and Regard to thi
Compoſition o the whole, Body of the Poem. Example-s
you may ſee in javenal, tranſlated by Mr. Dryden.
Ofwell-choſe I/Vord: ſinne take not Care- enough,
And think they ſhould he (like the Subject) rough.
But this great V/orle i: more exact] made,
Andſharpeﬅ Thought: in fmootho V/ord: oon-vey'd.
Here, as well as. in all Poems, there ought to be Care ta
ken 0f the ſmooth flowing of theVerſc, which Mr. Dryden
in his Mac Fl'eckno has perfectly obſerv'd, and ought to be,
the Modcl of our Vcrfi: in all' Engliſh Satire: [51
OfCOMEDT.
We come now to the Dramatic Poetry, which is much
the moﬅ uſeful and difficult, as well as deli htful of any :>
We ran ſcaree except a juﬅ Epi: Poem, whic has not been
ſeen theſi: 1700 years; for tho' that be more difficult becauſe
of its Length and Variety, yet it is, beyond Controverſy,
leſs uſcful, and leſs capable of giving that ﬅrong and lively'
Pleaſiire which is to be found in a juſt Tragedy: But we
begin with Cat/medy;
In Comic Seenes the common Life we draw,
According to it: Humours, Actionr, Law,
And Vice and Folly laughing, keep in awe.
But what i: et a nohler, jufler End,
},
To all the C arm: of Virtue doe: commend.
Conmly imitates common Life in it Actions and Humours;
laughmg at, and rendring Vice and Folly ridiculous, and
recommending Virtue. It is indeed an-Irnitation of Life.
the Mirrour of Cuﬅom, and the Image of Truth; and
whatever Cornedy follows not thisTrack, is unworhy of
the Name.
To
[12] S'atire is alluw'd to be an ſtarts of Things or Subjects, with
urbane, jocoſe, and biting Poem, which it is as it were fill'd to Sa
&3me to xepreh'end corrupt Man tiety; ſo from Fulneſs or Sa
ners,., and. expoſe, Impmbity of tiety they draw Satire. Others
Life s But yet there is no certainty derive it from the Dances of the
'fil thn- Etymol'ogy of: its Name. Satyrs leaping from fide tofide,
Some.- draw' in from: aſort of; Plate ski ping
andl) that. and
Or jumping this way
perhaps from the
on Cli-I'Lgers, in, which the various
ſort ofi Firllhfraitr were offer'd ' to Satyrs themſelves, thoſe God'
Ceres ',<, dint, ſay; they, in Sati'c having of old been often intro
are handlsdl uriwa- and did-'sung due'd into thisſortoi Peel-'ry ,.x
fleſhtqf'POETRY, 13:
To fbur eſſential Things w'affign a Part
In e-ve Comedy that? writ with Art,
The FZle, Manners, Sentiments are theſe,
And proper Diction that muﬅ all expreſi.
. The Fable it the Plot that is deſign?
To imitate the Actions of Mankind.
But without Manners theſe cannot he drawn, . I
In them the Temper', and the Humour's ſhown,- }.
A: by the Sentiments theſe are made known. ,
The Diction is the- Language that does ſhaw
In words, the Sentiments that from them flow.
C O M E D Y has Parts of Qulity, and Parts of Qunthy.
Of the firﬅ kind there are four eſſential, the Fahle, the Man
ners, tthem'iments, and theDiction; to which two are ad-,
ded, which only relate to the Reþreſentation, viz. theMufic and
Decoration; without the firﬅ four Parts no Comedycan ba
written. For the Poet muﬅ neceſſarily invent the Matter,
'r Subjectl on. which he writes, and that is What we call the
FaHe orPlot: But ſince the Fahle imitates, there is aneceſ
ſity that it ſhould have the Manners, that is, nicely andjuﬅ
ly expreſs the Tempers, Humours, or Mannerr of the ſeveral
Dramatie Per/ons that are repreſented in Comedy. The Sen
timents are added, becauſe we muﬅ diſcover by them the
Senſe and Opinion ofthem in Words; and becauſe the Sen
timents are, and muﬅ be expreſs'd more plainly by Words,
the Diction obtains its place in theſe four Parts of Comedy.
The difference of the Perſhn much alters the Manners, and
differences them from one another. For theſe Manners
which are praiſiz-worthy in one, are far from being ſo in ano
ther, being not at all convenient to his Character, and there
fore to be diſprais'd. This we-ſind in Arts themſelves ,- for
one of the Vulgar gains Reputation by being a good Fidler
or Piper; but this in a King is ridiculous and diſagreeable
to his Dignity. A Mman has a juﬅ Praiſe for ſewing well,
and working finely with her Needle; but this being no Man<
ly- Aality, is deſpicable in a Man. The Manner: muﬅ there
fore be agreeable to every Man's Station, Vality, or Years,
and the like. And Life is the beﬅ Book to ﬅudy theſe in,
when we are once Maﬅers of the Rules of Art. In the mean
while, learn theſe followingVerſesout of Horace, of what is
proper to the ſieveral Ages and Stations of Man, that you
may not err againﬅ them: They are found thus in blank.
Verﬅ, in my Lord Raſeommon's Trauﬅationz
On'
TheArtaf'POETRI'
132. One that has newly learn'd to fiveak vand go,
Love: Childiſh Pity-s; i: ſhun. Prowk'a' and pleas'd,
And change: ev'r Haar his wavering Mind.
A Youth, that fl caﬅ: ofhis Tutor': Take,
Love: Horſer, Hoandr, and spurn, and Exerez'ſe 3
Prone to all Vice, impatient of Reproaf;
Proad, eareleſs, find, ineonflant, and profit/e,
Gain, and Ambieion rule our riper Tears,
And makeareſiuonly
Old Men m slave: to Intereﬅ
walking and Power.
Hojþitalr,
Where all Defects, and all Diſe'aſe: tread,
With reflleﬅ Pain, and,more tormenting Fear;
Lazy, more/e, fall of Delayþs, and Hopes,
Oppreſx'd with Riches, which the] dare not lefe ,
Ill-natur'd Cen or: aſ the Pre en' Age,
Andfimd o al the Follier of/the afl.
Thu; all t e Treaſare of ourflowzng Tears
Our Ehb of Life for e-uer take: away.
Boy: maﬅ not have th' ambitious Care: of Men,
Nor Men the weak Anxietie: Age.
obfiwe the character: of t aſe that jþeak,
Whether an honeﬅ Servant, or a cheat,
Or one who/'e Blood 'boils in hie Toathful Veins,
Or a grave Matron, or a bay Nmſe,
Extorting Tradeſ'nen, earefa Hmbandmen.
Theſe are the general Rules for thoſe Characters that fall
under them; but Humour being eſſential Go Engliſh Comedj,
we muﬅ ſee what that is.
>
Sabardinate Paffion We Humour name,
By which our Bard: have gain'd peculiar Fame.
Each Paffion doe: a double Face con efi,
The ﬅrong i: Tragic, Comic is r leſs.
Here Affiectation fame to Humour add,
By that are ſinne ridiculouſy mad.
Whatever Humours you at flrfl beſtow,
Theſe to the end your Perſhm ﬅill muﬅ ſhow,
Thoſe maﬅ he uppermoﬅ in all they do.
Humour is ſaid by the Critics to be a ſubordinate, or _a
Weaker Paffion, and that in Perſons of a lower degree than
duoſe who are fit for Tragedy; and it is more viſible in the
lower ſort of People, whoſe Characters are therefore fitter
(or Comeeiy. Every Paffion has tWO different Faces; one
that
vTheArtofPOETRY. is;"
that is ſerious, great, terrible, ſolemn, that is- for Tragedy-s
and another that is low, comical, ridiculous. r
Affectation is thought alſo to be a Character ſit for Co
medj, as being highly ridiculous, and capable of being cor
rected by it. Your Characters muﬅ always retain the (ame
Humour through the Play, which you give them at firﬅ,
or elſe 'tis abſurd and prepoﬅerous.
.'E'xpon no ſingle Foþ, hat la the Lead
More eZaallj, andſpread t e Folly broad,
Ihe ot er Why i: vulgar: Oft weſee
A Fool derided by a: great a: he:
Ill Poet: ſh will one poor Fop ale-vour;
But to collect, like Kees, from every Flow'r'
Ingredients to compoſe this precious felice,
Which ſerve: the Vhrld or Pleaſure, and for [Ya
Inſþight of Factian n'il our Few-vour find,
And meet with the Applauſe of all Mankind;
The Poet ſhould not pick out any one particular Fop he
may meet with in his Converihtion, but form the general
Follics from a Character that may be of Uſe to many, and
a Diverſion to all. _
All Fools in this ſpeak Sex, a: z' poffieff;
And each h] Iniþiration .ealrs is jeﬅ,
If once the juﬅneſs of' each Part he loﬅ,
Vſe well m laugh, hut at- the Poet': effl
That ſill t ing Men call Sheer-Wit avoid,
With which our Ageſh naufeoaſþ is tly'th': '
Humour i: all, Wit ſhou'd he only brought
To turn agreeahly ſinne proper Thought.
'Tis ſia Breach of Character to make the Coxeombs ſpeak
Wit, and fine Raillery, and therefore goodfor nothing.
Humour is the true Wit of Comedy, ſithe fine Things, the
sheer-Wit is only for Epigram. '
The Entranlcte
Part: o The; theyCharacterJ/eleore:
Oaantit are likewie our;
And to the Action ſhmething doe: proceed,

The Working up, Action and Warmth doth hreeJ,
The Counter-turn doe: Expectation tra/3,
But the Diſcov'ry ſhttlet all i'th' clo/b. ,
The Parts of Aantity of a Cometh 'are four: the Entranee,
which gives Light only to the Characters, and proceeds very
little into any part of the Action. adl , The Working up Et' _
. ' t e
'154 NeArtquOETRY.
the Flat, where the Play grows warmer, and the Defign or
Action of it is drawing on, and you ſee ſomething promiſin .
gaily, The full Growth of the Plot, which we may proper y
call the (hunter-tum, deﬅroys the Expectation, and embroils
the Action in new Difficulties, leaving you far diﬅant from
the'l-Iopes, in which it found you. 4tlvl , The Diſha-oe'y or
Unmwllz'ng of the Plot, where you all things ſettli
again on their firﬅ Foundation. The Obﬅacles, whic
hinder'd the Deſign or Action of the Play, once remov'd, it
ends with the Reſemblance of Truth, and Nature, and the
' Audience are fitisfy'd with the Conduct of it. -
But our Plays being divided into Acts, I ſhall add a Word
about them. There muﬅ be no more, nor lefi, than flye
Acts; this is a Rule of 17oo Years ﬅanding at the leaﬅ.
The firﬅ contains the Matter or Argument of the Fable,
with the ſhewing the principal Characters. The ſecond
brings the Affairs or Bufineſs into Act. The third furniſhes
Obﬅacles and Difficulties. The fourth either ſhews how
thoſe Difficuldmmaybe remov'd, orfinds new in the At
tempt. The fiﬅh uts an end. to them all, in a fortunate
Diſcovery, and ſect all qszit ſhould he.
k
Of 'T RfAG E D Y.
NAnd
L' an
ofbjhﬅAction,
lengththan entire-mail
the 'Tragic grave,had'
Muſe muﬅ
The Ob'ect' of it: Mtful Imifatiqn,
. And t at without the help af_ the Narmn'on,
Billthe onA? Phffion perfectly
Paw'r of Terrourrefiner,
and Compaffion,
And w/mt in m ſo Paffion 'elſe inclines.

gedy; for other
As all PartsCritiCS
the beﬅv of Poehy
define are Imimtz'om," ſo
it thus: is Trais
Tragedy
" the Imitarian of one grave, and entire Action, of a juﬅ
" Length and which, without the Affiﬅance of Narmtiam
'5 by the Means of Terrour and Compaffion, perfectly re
" fines in us all ſorts of Paſſions, and whatever is like
'4 them. " -
Thus Tragedy is the Imitation of ibme one Action, and
nor of all the Actions of a Man's Life; and 'tis ually
plain, that there is no room for any thing in this oem
(the
- -_...-'_- r', a ' 'In
TheArtquOETRY. Iss,
(the moﬅ uﬅſul and noble of all Poeſie) but what is grave
and &rious. This Action muﬅ be entire; it muﬅ have a
Begiming, Middle, and End. The Beginningr is that before
which we have no need to ſuppoſe any neceſſary Cauſe of
it; the Middle is all that this Begiming produces,- and the
End is that after which nothing is neceſſarily ſuppos'd to
compleat the Action. It muﬅ be of a juﬅ Length, that is, it
muﬅ not be ſo long as that dſ an Heroic Poem, nor ſo ſhort
as a ſingle Fable. The excluding Nun-tition, and the con
fining it to Terror and Compaffion, diﬅinguiſhes it from an
Heroic Poem,- which may be perfect without them, and
employs Admimtian. By the refining the Paſſions, we mean
not Exrirpation, but the reducing them to juﬅ Bounds and
Moderation, which make: them as uſeful as neceſſary. For
by ſhowing the Miſeries that attend the Subjection to them,
it teaches us to watch them more narrowly; and by ſeeing
the great Misfortuncs of others, it leſſens our own, either
prefimt or to come.
There i: no Action that doe: not proceed
From Manners, and the Sentiments indeed.
And therefbre theſe, in this ſithlimer Art
Of Tragedy, muﬅ claim eſſential Part.
As Tragedy is the Imitation of an Action, not of lnclina
tions or Habits, ſo there is no Action that does not proceed
from the Manners and the Sentiments, and therefore the
Manner; and the Sentimentr are eſſential Parts of Tragedy;
for nothing but theſe can diﬅinguiſh an Action. TheMan
ner: form, and the Sentiments explain it, diſcovering its Cauſes
and MotiVes. '
All Tragedies flmr Part: do claim,
Fable the firﬅ, and Principal we name;
The Manners and the Sentiments ſucceed,
The laﬅ Plate to Diction is decreed.
There is no Subject of a Tragedy where theſe following
Parts are not to be found,- the Fahle, the Manners, the Sed
timentr, and the Diction. Some add the Docamtian, becauſe
that denotes the Place; and every Action requiring ſome
Place, the Decomtion is, in ſome meaſure, the object of the
Poet's Care, that the Place may be proper for the lzepn
ſenmtion. The chief and much moﬅ conſiderable, lS the
Fahle, or the Compoſition of the Intidentr, which form the
Subject of the Tragedy. For Action being the Object oflſtnhie
z -
3-56 The Art afPOETRY.
Imitation of this ſort of Poetry, muﬅ be the moﬅ conſidev
rable; but the Action conſiﬅs of the Incidents and their Con
duct, which is the Fahle: The Fahle muﬅ be the moﬅ
conſiderable 5 and all the Beauties of Manners, DiEIion, and
Sentiments, can't make amends for the Defects oſ this. The
general End that Mankind propoſe, is, to live Happily, but
to live Happily is an Action; for Man is either Happy or
Miſierable by his Actions, not Manners. Tragedy only adds
them for the Production of Actions. The Fahle being there
fore the End oſ Tragerh, as being the Imitation of the Ae
tion, it muﬅ be of the greateﬅ lmportance 5 for ſo is the
End in all Things.
The Manncrs next, hy the Dramatic Law,
As they of Action are the Soarce and Cauſe,
Demand on' Stad , and ear utmoﬅ Care;
ly thoe the Pe'fflu their Deſigns declare, }
Andfhtm each other heﬅ diſtinguiſh'd are.
The Manners are the moﬅ conſiderable next to the Fahle.
For as Tragedy is the Imitation of an Action, ſo there are no
Action: without the Mannersz as no Effect without a Cauſh
The Manners diﬅinguiſh Character from Character, and diſ
cover the Inclinations of the Speaker, and what Part, Side,
or Courſe he will take on any important and difficult Emet
gence, know how he will behave himſelf before we fire the
Actions. If Pride, Choler, Piety, or the like, be the Man
ners of the Hero, we may know that he will follow the
Dictates of the prevailing Paſſion of his Character.
The Sentiments obtain the next Degree,
Tho' leaﬅ in Excellence of all the Three ,
The Sentiments 'he Manners do expreſs,
Bat maﬅ with Truth and Likelihood confeſs.
The Sentiments' are next in degree oſ Excellence to the
Fahle and the Manners: For theſe are for the Manners, what
the Manner: are for the Fahle. TheAction cannot bejuﬅly
imitated without the Manners, nor the Manners without the
Sentiments. In theſe we muﬅ regard Truth and Verffimilitade.
As when the Poet makes a Madman ſpeak juﬅ as a Madman
does; or as it is probable he wou'd do. For this ſee King
Lear in shake/pear.
The Diction maﬅ the Sentiments unfbld,

Which in their proper Languago muﬅ he told.
The
__-1
TheArtofPOETRY.
The Diction or Lan ctuage of Tragedy, can demand but
157
the fourth Place in t e eſſential Parts, and is of the leaſt
importance of any of them; yet muﬅ peculiar Care be
likewiſe taken of this, that every Paffion ſpeak in ſuch
Words and Expreffions as is natural to it.
Having thus ſeen the ſeveral Parts of Tragedy, and their
Excellence in regard of eachother, we ſhall now proceed to
give Directions neceſſary to the making each of them per
ect, and to the knowing when they are ſo in what we read.
Firﬅ an a Plot employ thy careful Thoughtr,
And guard thy ſelf againﬅ its uﬅcal Faultr,
Turn it with Time a thoufizndje-u'ral wayx; -
That (ar it ought) gi-ue: ſure Succeﬅ to Plays.
As the Plot, or Fahle, is the chief Thing in a Tragedy, ſo
our firﬅ and principal care ought to be employ'd in contri
ving this Part with that care, that each may produce and
depend upon the former. This Part being performed with
Skill, has given Succeſs to thoſe Plays which have been dc-z
fective in all the other Parts. -
Beſide: the 'm'ain Dejign compos'd with Art,
Each moving Scene' maﬅ have a Plot apart.
Contri-ue each little Turn, mark ev'ry Place;
A: Painters firﬅ chalk out the future Face.
Yet he n'ot fondly your own Slave for this,
But change hereafter what appear; ami/i.
As the main Plot, or'FahIe, conſiﬅs of many Incident: or
Stones, the Poet muﬅ v make a Draught of. theſe before he
begins to write; whichyvill appear more plainly when we
come to diſcourſe of the incident: In this Schemewemuſi:
mark all the fine Touches of the Paſſions, and all the admi
rable Turns that produce them. But _when we come to
write, we may diibover Faults in the firﬅ Draught, which
we i muﬅ correct.
Each _ :
TragiclAction muﬅ he hath entire, .
.And of that length which Tragcdies require. _
Beginning it muﬅ have, and Middle, and End,
. Each to produce the other ﬅill muﬅ tend._
The Canfle of Undertaking and Deſt'gn
Of Action, to Beginning me confine;
All the Effl'ſls and Ohﬅacles we find /
In th' Execution, to Middle are affign'd.
Th' 'wrap-'ling and diſſhl-ving of thefames _
With juﬅice we the End do alway: name,
P EvEFY
ſſ
158 The Art of'POETRY.
Every Action, that is fit for a Tragie Imitation, ought not
only>to be entire, but of a 'aﬅ length; that is, muﬅ have a
Beginning, Middle," and End. This diﬅinguiſhes it from
momentaneom Actions, or thoſe Which happen in an inﬅant,
Þwithout Preparatibn or Sequel, which, wanting Extenfion,
may come into the Incidents, not build a Fahle on. The
Cauſe or Deſign oſ underﬅanding an Action is the Beginning;
and the Effects of thoſe Cauſes, and the Difficulties we find
in the Execution, are the Middle.- The unravelling and
diſſolving theſe Difficulties, is the End.
An Explanation of this will beﬅ a pear by an Example,
which we will take From the Plot o the Antigone of So
phocles. On the Death of the two Brotherr, Eteocles and
Polynices; Creon, who ſin-ceeds them in the Kingdom of
Thebes, prohibits the hurying the Body of the latter, becauſe
he invaded his Natiw Country with Foreign Traops. This
Decree make: Antigone, who was hetrothed to Hzemon theSon
of Creon, hmy him, is diſcovered, and condemned to he
_ barſdalive: Creon could nor he brought to relent h Haemon,
or Tii'efias; and ſo Hazmon kills him/Þlf with er: This
makes Eurydice, his Mother, deſiro] herſelf',- and Creon,
in theſe Mifiries ſkeing the fatal Confiquence of his Decree,
repents 'too late, and becomes miſer-able.
The Beginning of this Action has no neceffiiry Conſequence
of the Death of Palynites, ſince that Decree might have been
let alone by Creon, tho' it could not have been without that
Death; ſo that the Action naturally begins with that De
' cree. The Middle is the Effects produced by that Decree,
®the Death of Antigone, Hemon, and Eurydire, which pro
'duce the End by breaking the Obﬅinacy of Creon, and
v making him repent, and miﬅrable. Thus the Poet cannot
'begin or end his Action where he pleaſes (which is the fault
'of moﬅ of our old Plays) if he would manage his Subject
vwith true Oeconomy and Beauty. For there muﬅ be the
Cauſe or Beginning; the Eflkct of that Cauſe, which is
naturally the Middle,- and the unravelling or finiſhing- of
it, which is the End produced by the Middle, as that by
the Beginning; the Middle ſuppoſes ſomething before it, \
as its Cauſe, and following, as its Effect; ' the Beginning
ſuppoﬅs nothing before, and the End nothing to follow,
to make the Action compleat. \
The Unities of Action, Time, and Place,
If well ohſbr'v'd, give Plays a perfect Grave.
X . , The
_ .
The-Art , _ .
ofſſPctOETRY. , .
159
The Subject of a Tragedy ſhould be of a juﬅ extent,
neither too large, nor too narrow, but that it may be ſeen,
viewed, and conſider'd at onc'e, without confounding the
, Mind, which if too little or narrow, it will do ,- 'normake
it'wander to diﬅract it, as it will do if it be too large and
* exrenſiſſve. That is, the Piece ought to take' up 'juﬅ ſo much 'l'
Time as is neceſſary or probable for the introducing the
Incidents with their juﬅ Reparation. For to make a good
Trngeobl, that is, ajuſi Imz'zntt'o'n, the Action imitated ought
' nor, in Reality, to be longer than the Repreſentationz for
this makes the Likenej? greater, and by conſequence more
perfect. we
ſ Hours, Butmuﬅ
ſince there
bring areofAction:
ſome of ten into'th'e
the incidents or twelyc
ſiIn
tervals of the-Acts, the bettet to deceive the Audience. _
Nexr, the Unity'of Action'is ſuch, that it can never b: _
broke without deﬅroying the Poem. This Unity is 'not
preſerved by repreſenting of ſeveral Action; of One M/M;
as of Julius Coſnr, ol- Anthony, or Brutus; for then the
Poet has no Reaſon to begin at any certain place; and
' Shakeſpenr might have brought his Play down to the laﬅ
Emperor of Rome, as well as to the Death of Brutux.
But this Unity of Action does not exclude the various *
Under-Actiom, which are perfectly dependent on, and con
tribute to, the chief; and which withOut it are nothing.
Nor-does this Exception make for our ſilly Under-Plane,
which have nothing to do with the main Deſign, but is v
another Plot; as Admflm and Emydiee in Dryden's Oedipm,
which are abominable. In the Orphan the Affian is One,
and every. Part or Under-Action carries on and contributes
to themuin Action, or Suhj9i3.\ Thus the different Actions
of different Men are not more diﬅinctly different Actions,
than thoſe of One Man at dike-rent Times. Whatever can
be tranſpoſed, or left out, without a ſenſible Maim to the ſi
Action, has nathing to do there. '
The Tragic Perſon is no certain Mom,

The Bard PARTICU L ARS wou'd draw in vain;
For to no Purpoſe is that uſeleſs Draught,
By which
Great no moral
Homer, Leffims
in th' mn hewhom
Achilles, taught.
hcctdrew,
Set: not that one ſole Perfim in our 'view ,
But in that Peijſbn to explain did clauſe
What Violence and Anger wou'a' Produee, .
P 2 The
ſſ160 'The An' of For T R Y.
The Poet is not obliged to relate Things,juﬅ as they hap
pened, 'but as they might, or ought to have happened:
That is, the Action ought to be general, not particular; for
particular Action: can have no general Influence. Thus Ho
mer, in Achilles, intends not the Deſcription oſ that one
individual Man, but to ſhew what Violence and Anger would
make all Men of that Character ſay or do: And therefore,
Achilles is a general and allegoric Parſon, and ſo ought all
Tragic Heroe: to be, where they ſhould ſpeak and act ne
ceſſarily, or probably, as all Men ſo qualify'd, and in thoſe
Circumﬅances Would do: differing from Hiﬅory in this,
that Tragedy conſults not the Truth of what any particular
Perſon did ſay, or do, but only the general Nature of ſuch
Qualities, to produce ſuch Words, and ſuch Actiom. 'Tis
true, isthat
that toctTragedy ſometimes to
give a Credibility makes uſe of true
the Action, the Names,
Potions but
ﬅill
remaining general. The'Poet may take _Incidents from
Hiﬅory and Matter of Fact, but then they muﬅ have that
Probability and Likelihood which Art requires; for there
are many Actions which have really been done, which are
not probable; and then Hiﬅory will not juﬅiſy the Poet in
making uſe of them. p '
The Tragie Action, z'o be juﬅ and right,
Terror and Compaſiion maﬅ excite.
'The Action that muﬅ be imitated in Tragedy, beſides the
former Properties, muﬅ excite Terror and Compafflon, and
not Admirationz which is a Paffion too weak to have the
Effect of Tragedy. Terror and Pity are raiſed by Surprize,
when Events are produced out oſ Cauſes, contrary to our
Expectation; that is, -- when the Incidents produce each
other, and not meerly follow after each other. For if it do
not neceſſarily follow, it is no Incident for Tragedy.
Two Kinds of Fables Tragedy allow,
The ſimple this', the implex that avoms.
The ſimple doe: no Change of Fortune know,
\
Or in the End does no Diſcovffy ſhow.
The implex either one or hath eantaim,
_ So greater Beauty and Perfec'lion gaim. _
'As the Action: whichIraged] imitates, there allits Fahles,
flmple or implex. The ſimple is that, in which there is nei
ther a Change oſ the Condition or Stateof the principal Per
ſon or Perſons, or a Diſhovery; and the anra-uelling of the v
PIot is only a ſingle Paſſage of Agitation, of Trouble, or RF
' po e
TheArtofPOETRY. 161
poſe and Tranquillity. The Implex FaHe in whichthe prirr
cipal Perſon or Perſons have aChange ofiFottune, or a Diſ'
arm-ty, or both; which is the moﬅ beautiful and leaﬅ com "
mon. In theA'ztigone of Sophooler, the Argument oſwhich.
we have before givun you, there is the Change of the For- '
tune of Creon, and that produc'd by the Effect of his OWn
Decree and Obﬅinacy; but in his Ordipm and Ilectra there
is both aChange and Diſeooety; the firﬅ to Mifiry, the latter
to Re-uenge and Happimfi. Oedipm, with his ChangeofFor
tune, diſcovers, that he is the Son of jocaﬅa and Laim,v and
ſo is guilty of lncefl: and Parricide. But Elcctra diſcoverS'
Orefle: to be her Brother, and by that changes her Miſh-icsin-*
to Happineſs, in the Revenge of her Father's Death. In the
Iphigem'a in Tauri: of Euripide: (written by Mr. Demzi: in
Engliſh) Iphigem'a making a Diſcovery that Oreſle: is her
Brothcr, changes both their Fortunes from Deſpair to a
happy Eſcape from the barbarous Altars of Taurica. But
the Change can neither be neceſſary nor probable (without
which Qualities it is of no Value) if it be not the natural
Reſult, or at leaﬅ the Effect of the foregoing Actions, or of
the Subject it fitlf. As in Oedipm: For ngeon, who comes
to bring him agreeable News, and which ought to have tie-
livered him-from thoſe Apprehenfions into which the Fear
of committing lneeﬅ with his Mother had thrown him,
does quite the contrary, in diſcoverin to him who and
what he is. The Fact is thus-_-A Mefflgenger from Corinth
bring: Oedipus word of the Death of Polybus, and invite:
him to take Pofflffion that Kingdom; hſiut he a 'raid of tom
mitting the Incefl the Orarle had told him of; &lie-ving Po
lybus to he his Father, deelar'd he would 'te-ver go to the Place
where his Mother was. The Corinthian told him, tharhe
did not know himſelf, and flz diflarh'd himſelf about nothing;
andſo thinking to do Oedipus a fignal Piece qf Service, by
delivering him from his Fearx, inform: him, that Polybus
and Merope were not hisFather or Mother z:vsihich _began the
l_)iſeovery, that caﬅ him into the moﬅ'uzrrible ot 'his-Miti.
tongues. ' - 4 . . -: w.- wr *'_4 1' 'it -* .-;:\j
'What in the Drum me Dis-'cowT R-Y sill,
May in the Nation 'of Renwnibrancefallj.*'I *
For, by 'remembringſithe rhifffifſhm 'mw ſi: f'wf
" -- From Ignoranre to'Krzow'ledge; Which -or=L0w **;--
* "J Or Hatred in them alway: muſi produce, U ax:
- And all their Happingſ: or Mi/ery 'mix-te _:
. Pz i Dill
r62ct The Art Of P- O E T R Y.
niſi-awry being here uſed for aTcrm of Art, and therefore
ſignifying more than in its vulgar Acoeptarion, you muﬅ
know, that here it'means aDiſcovery, vvhich is made by the
principal Characters;_ by remembring or calling to Mind
either one-another, or iomething of Importance to their
Change of Fortune, and is thus dcſin'd.-- The DI SC O
V ERY is I' C HA N GE, which bringing m from Igno
rance to Knowledge, produces either LOVE or HATREDin
thy? whom the Poet has a Defign to make either Happy or Mi e
ra le. That is, it ought not to be in vain, by leaving thoſi:
who remember one-another in the ſame Sentiments they.
were in before; it muﬅ produce either Low or Him-ed in
the principal, not inferiour Characters. But thoſe Diſco
veries which areimmediately follow'd by the Change of For
tune, are the moﬅ Beautiful; Las that of Oediþm, for the Diſ
covery of his being the Son of You/la and Laiur, immediately
makes him of the moﬅ Happy, the moﬅ Miſerable. And
this Cnoflrophe or Ending, which has a Change of Fortune
immediately after the Diſcovery, will always produce Terror
and Pity in the End and Aim of Trage-fl'. We ſhall ſhy ſome
thing ofthe ſeveral ſorts of Diſcoverles, after the Manners,
on which they have ſome kind of Dependance.
Reject that 'vulgar Error, which appear:
So fl'ir, of making perfect Characters.
There's no ſuch Thing in Nature, andyou'll draw
A faultleſs Monﬅer, which the World ne'er-fine :
Some Faith muﬅ he, which his Mirſbrtune: drew,
But ſuch a: met] dejZer've Compaffion too.
The next Thing which we are to conſider, are the Cha
racters. Thoſe which are to compoſe a perfect Tragedy, muﬅ
be neither perfectly virtuous and innocent, nor ſitt'th-louſy
wit/red. To make a perfectly virtuous and innocent Cha
racter unfortunate, excites Horror, not Terror, nor Comþafflon.
To puniſh the 'Wicked, gives indeed a ſort or Satisfaction,
but neither Terror nor Piq; which are the Buſmeſs of Tro
gedy. For what we never think our ſelves capable of com
mittin , we can never pity. But theChamcten of a perfect'
Troge y ſhould be the Medium between both, but rather
good than had. Thus the Dramom'c Pe'ſſm ſhould not draw
his Misfortunes on himſelf by ſuperlative Wicktdncſrpr Crimes
zotorioufly ſtandalom, but by involuntary Fault', that is,
Frailties proceeding from the Exceſs of Paſiion. We call
Them ZWPIMMU FMIN: which are committed either bylg
' * " _n0rance,
_ _ -
TheArt-ofſſPOETRY. '* 16;

norance, or Imprudencc againﬅ the natural Temper of the
Man, when he is tranſportcd by a 'violent Paffion, which he
could not ſuppreſs; or by ſome greater or external Force.
in the Execution of ſuch Orders, which he neither could
nor ought to diſobey. The fault of Ordipur is of the firﬅ
ſort, tho' he bealſi' guilty of the &cond. That of Thyeſiu, in
the murdering his Nephews, of the ſecond, viz. a violent Paſ
fion of An er and Revenge. hat of Orefler, in the killing
of his Mot er for the Death o his Father, of the third; be
ing ordered to do it by the Oracle of the Gods. 'Tis true,
our Oedipu: is madeſovereignly Virtuousz but all thatSoPho
cle: gives him, are Courage, Good Fortune, and udgmenr;
Quoth-in equally common to the good and the ad, and to
thoſe who are made up of Virtues and Vices. Sophocler has
indeed ſhewn him a Character that has a mixture of Virtue
and Vice. His Vices plainly are, Pride, Violence, Anger,
Raſhneſs and Imprudence; ſo that it is'nor for his Parricide
and Inceﬅ that he is puniſhed, for they were the Effect of
his Curioſity, Raſhneſs, Pride, Anger, and Violence, and
the Puniſhment of them. And thoſe are the Vices Sophocl':
would correct in us by his Example.
Two ſe-u'ral End: the Fable may obtain,

Either the Perſom happy may remain,
Or ſink beneath the crnel Hand of Face;
Or elſe it may obtain a douhle State.
Good for the Good, and Bad for thoſe who err,
The ſingle and unhappyflill prefer.
The Fahle may have either a ſingle End or Cataflrophe, or

one that is double; one that is happy, or one that is un
happy; or one that is happy for the Good, and unhappy
for the Guilty: but that which is beﬅ, is the ſingle and un
happy, for that will moﬅ likely produce Terror and Pity.
A: Incidents the Fable do compoſe,
So ﬅill we muﬅ conſider mqfl in Thoſe Z
Which Pity will, and Terror moﬅ diſcloſe.
All ficch Event: 'twixt Friends are only flmnd,
From Other; nothing Tragic can redound.
When the Friend': Hand againﬅ a Friend is arm'd,
V'eflnd our Heart: on either ſide alarm'd.
Thu: when weſt: the Son's unhallow'd
With impiom Rage affimlt a Parent': Life,
When
ſ154 TheArthPOF-TRY.
When Ignorance or Rage the Parents move, _
To point the Steel againﬅ the Child they lo-ue, }
Fear and ComPaſſion ev'ry Breaſi will pro-ye.
Terror and Compaffion being the chief End of Tragedy, and
that being only produced by the liable, let us conſider what
Incidents (for ſuch compoſe every Fahle) are the moﬅ Pro.
ductive of thoſe two Paſſions.
All incidents are Events that happen between ſome-body
or other, and all Intident: that are terrible, or pitiful, hap
pen between Friends, Relations, or the like; for what hap
pens betwixr Enemies, can have no Tragical Effect. Thus
when aBrother is going to kill (or kills) a Brother 5 a Father
his Son, or a Son his Father; the Mother the Son, or the Son
the Mother; it is very terrible," and forces our Compaffion.
Now all theſe Actions or Events may be thus divided,-in
to thoſe which the Actor performs with an entire Know
ledge of what he does, or is going to do z as Medea, when
ſhe kill'd her Children; or Orefler, when he killed his Mo
ther, and the like: Or thoſe, where the Actor does not
know the Guilt of the Crime he commits, or is going to
commit, 'till after the Deed is done, when the Relation of
the Perſons they have deﬅroy'd is diſcovered to them. Thus
Telegonm did not know 'twas his Father Uhffie: whom he
mortally wounded, *till he had done it. The third ſort of
Incidmtt, and which is the moﬅ beautiful, is when a Man or
Womanis going to kill a Relation, who is not knowntohim
or her, and is prevented by a Diſcovery of their Friendſhi
and Relation. The firﬅ is the worﬅ, and the laﬅ beﬅ; the
ſecond next in Excellence to the third, becauſe here is no
thing flagitious, and inhuman, but the Sin of Ignorance,
for then the Diſcovery is wonderſully pathetic and moving;
as that oſ Oedipm killing his Father Laim.
, In Manners fimr Laalitie: Weſeez
They maﬅ good, like, convenient, equal he.
The Manners fully mark'd, 'me here call good,
. When by their I/Vordr their Bent i: ancle'jlood,
: What Reſhlutionr they will arely rake,
e, What they will ſeek, and 'm at they willfbrfitke,
_LI KEN ESS to well-known Characters relates,
For Hiﬅo'y or Qality abates.
Convenient Manner: 'me thoſe e-uer call,
Which to eath Rank, Age, Sex, and Climate fall.
Thoſe Manners Poetr alway: equal name,
Which _thro' the Drama ahvay: are the flame.
We.
TheArtofPOETRY. '165
We come now to the Manners, which are in the next de
ree of Excellence to the Fahle. The Manner: diﬅinguiſh
the Characterr; and if the Manner: be ill expreſſed, we can
never be ac uainted with them, and conſequently never be
terrified by <icreſeeing the Dangers they will produce to the
Dramatic Perſhm, nor melt into Pity by ſeeing their Suffer
ings. All Dramatic Perſons therefore ought to have the
Marmenz that is, their Diſcourſe ought to diſcover their ln
clinations, and what Reſolutions they will certainly purſue.
The Manner: therefore ſhould have four Wahties, and they
muﬅ be, (1.) good; (z.) like; (3.) con-venient; (+,) eqaa .
Good is when they are marked, that is, when the Diſcourſe
of the Perſons makes us clearly and diﬅinctly ſee their In
clinations, and what good or evil Reſolutions they are cer
tain to take. Like only relates to knOWn and public Perſons,
whoſe Characters are in Hiﬅory, with which our poetic
Characters muﬅ agree, that is, the' Poet muﬅ not give a
Perſon any Aality contrary to any of thoſe which Hiﬅory
has given him. We muﬅ remember, that the evil Qzalities
given to Princes, and Great Men, ought to be omitted by the
Poet, if they are contrary to the Character of a Prince, &a.
but the Virtues oppoſite to thoſe known Vices ought not to
be impoſed, by making him generous, or liberal in the POem,
who was avaritious in the Hiﬅory. The Manner: muﬅ like
wiſe be convenient; that is, they muﬅ be a reeable to the
Age, Sex, Rank, Climate, and Condition of t e Perſon that
has them : for this you may look back to what is quoted
out of my Lord Rqſrommm's Tranſlation of Horace, in what
we have ſaid of Comedy. You muﬅ indeed ﬅudy Mankind,
and from them draw the Proprieties of Characters or Man
ners: It would be well if you ﬅudied Moral Philcſſ'phy, to
lead you into the Study of Mankind.
They muﬅ be equal ,- that is, they muﬅ be conﬅant, or
conſiﬅent, through the whole Character; or the Variety or
Inequality of the Manner: (as in Nature, ſo in this Draught)
muﬅ be equal. The Fearfal muﬅ not be hra-ue, nor the
Bra-ve fearful: The Avaritious muﬅ never be liberal, and the
like. Shakeſhear is excellent in this Diﬅinction of Characters,
and he ſhould be throughly ﬅudied' on this Head.
One aali eſſential doe: remain,

13] which t e greateﬅ Beauty- thq obtain.
The
'166 The Art ofPOETRY.
The Manners maﬅ ſh regularly flow,
That to Neceffity their Birth they owe.
No 'vicious anlit muﬅ he their Lot,
But what i: need l to promote the Plot.
Beſides the four (Dalities we have mentioned, there is a

fifth eſſential to their Beauty, that is, that they be neceſ
ſary: That is, that no vicious Quality or Inclination ought
to be given to any Poetic Perſim, unleſs it appear to be
abſolutely neceſſary, or requiſite to the carrying on of the
Action; as all thoſe mentioned in Oedipm were, to the
promOting that Fable.
- Three ſort: of Diſcoverics are found
In the Dramatic Poets to abound,
The firﬅ by certain Marks the Bax'neﬅ do,
Whether from Chance or Nature they accrue';
A: Scars, or Moles, that in the Body lie,
Or certain Tokens which tho/e Mark: ſuppþ'.
Having run through the Manners, I now return to the

Diſcoveries, becauſe (well manag'd) they add a wonderful
Beauty to the Piece, tho' it is indeed a Beaut almoﬅ en
tirely unknown on our Stage. The firﬅ ſort o Diſto-uzry is
by certain Marks in the Body, either natural, or accidental.
Thus Ulyſſes having formerly, before the Trojan War, re
ceived a Wound in his Thigh, by a Boar, in the Mountain
of Parrzaſſm, when he returned incagnito home, the Nurſe
who waſhed his Legs diſcovered him by the Scar of that
Wound. Tho' theſe be the leaﬅ beautiful Diſcoveries, yet
they may be uſed with more or leſs Art: As that we have
Juﬅ mentioned of Ulyffiex, . was artſiil and ſine; but when he
ls fain to ſhew it himſelf to the Shepherds, to confirm them
that he is Ulyffir, it is leſs artful.
The ſecond Way is by Tokens; as, the Casket of Things
which the'Prieﬅ had found with Ion, when he was expoſed,
diſcovers Creuſa, whom he was going to kill, to be his Mo
ther. And Orefles, when he had found out [Phigem'a by her
Letter, which ſhe was going to ſend to him by P lades, is
fain to tell particular Tokens in her Father's alace, to
make himſelf be believed to be Orefles. For theſe Tokens
are no great matter of Invention, ſince the PM might
have made them twenty other ways.
_Third
TheArtquOETRY. 167
Third ram Remembrance takes its pleaſingRiſg
And orces the Diſco'v'r] from the Eyes.
The fourth ſbrt 'me do in Reaſhning find,
Which brings the Unknonm object to the Mind.
Thus when Oreﬅes ſaw the fatal Knife
V'ith im iou: Blow directed at his Li e,
Thus to t e Goddeſs in Deſhair did ca l,
Ah! muﬅ I then like lphigenia fall.
The third ſort of Diſcovery is what is made by Remem-'
brance; that is, when the fight, or hearin , of any thing
makes us remember our Misfortunes, &a. T us when UI] e:
heard Domadocmv ſing his Actions at Troy, the Memory of
them ﬅruck him, and drew Tears from his Eyes, which
diſcovered him to Alcinous. The fourth ſort of Diſcoveries
are made by Reaſoning; as Iphigenia in Eſc lus, Hither is
a Man come like me,- no had) is like me but reﬅes, it muſt!
thereflire he Oreﬅes. And in the Iphigenia of Poljides, a
Greek Poet, Oreﬅes kneeling at the Altar, and juﬅ open
ing his Boſorn to receive the ſacred Knife, cries out, 'Tis
not ſufficient that m] Siﬅer has been fitcrzficed to Diana, but I
muﬅ heſb too.
The fineﬅ ſort is that which ariſe$ from the Subject, or
incidents of the Fable; as that of Oedipus from his exceſl
five Curioſity, and the Letter thatIphigenia ſent by Pylades;
for it was very natural for her on that Occaſion to ſend
that Letter. We have been forc'd to make mention of
Greek Plays, becauſe we have not yet had any thing of this
kind, but in thoſe taken from thoſe Poets; but our Oedipus
and Iphigenia will ſhew this in ſome meaſure.
The Sentiments here next aſſume their Place,
To which to gi-ve their and proper Grace,
The Poet ﬅill muﬅ look within to find
The ſecret Turns a Nature in the Mind.
He muﬅ bel/ad, e proud, and in a Storm,
And to each character his Mind conform,
The Proteus muﬅ all shapes all Paffions wear,
If he wou'd have juﬅ Sentiments appear:
Think not at all where ſhining Thought; to place,
But what a Man wau'il ſay in ſuch a Caſe.
Having done with the Fable, Incideats and Manners, we
come now to the Sentiments.
The Peet here muﬅ not be content to look into his Mind,1
to fire what he himſelf would thinkon ſuch an Occafitong
u
r68 TheArt ofPOETRY.
but he muﬅ put himſelf into the Paffion, Vality, and Tem
per of the Character he is to draw; thatis, he muﬅ aſſume
thoſe Manner: he gives each Dramatic Perlbn, and thenſee
what Sentiments or Thought: ſuch an Occaſion, Paffion, or
the like, will produce. And the Part muﬅ change the Ha
bit of his Mind, and aſſume a new Potion, as a different
Character or Perſon ſpeaks, or he will make all ſpeak alike,
without any diﬅinction of Character. But this can't be
ſi done,
We but
ſhallby
jaya no
ﬅrong
moreImagination, and great
of the Sentiments here, Genius.
becauſe they
are to be learnt from the Art of Rhetoric; for the Sentimm'
being all that make up the Diſcourſe, they conſiﬅ in pro
ving, refuting, exciting, and expreſſmg the Paſſions, as
Pity, Anger, Fear, and all the Others, to raiſe or debaſe the
Value of a Thing. The Reaſons of Poet: and Oratorr are
the ſame, when they would make Things appear worthy or
Pity, or terrible, or great, or probable; tho* ſhme Things
are rendered ſo by Art, and ſome by their own Nature.
I-Viſe Nature by Variety doe: pleaſe,
With difl''ring Paffionr in a diff'ring Drefr :
Bold Anger in rough haughty V/ords appears,
Sorrow is humble, and diſfiil-ve: in Tears.
Make not your Hecuba with Fu? rage,
And ſhew a oanting spirit on t e Stag: :
There ſwoln Expreffions, and affected Noiſe,
Shem: likeſhme Pedant that declaimr to Boys.
In Sorrow you muﬅ ſhfter Method: keep,
And, to excite our Tearr, your muﬅ weep.
Thoſe noiſy Word: which in ill Play: are found,
Come not from Heart: that are in Sadneſlc drown'd.
To pleaſe, you muﬅ a hundred Change: try 3
Sometime; be humble, then muﬅ oar on high,
In nat'ral Thought: muﬅ every w ere abound,
Be eaffi, pleaſant, ſolid, and prtſſzund.
To theſe you muﬅ ſurprizing Touehe: rjoin,
And ſhew us a New V/onder in each Line.
The Diction, or Language, is that which next comes un
der our conſideration; and tho' it is confeſſkd, that it is of
the leaﬅ importance of all thoſe Parts, yet when the Elocu
tion is proper and elegant, and varies as it ought, it gives a
great, and advantageous Beauty to a Play; and therefore
we wrll not paſs it 'over in filence. Some have been betrav'd
by their Ignorance of Art and Nature, to imagine thar M'z'lz
2. ton's
1
1
Laiq _ffl A
TheArt ofPOE'TRYſſ. 169
un's Stile, becauſe noble in the Epic, was beﬅ for Tragedy.
never reflecting that he himſelf varied his Stile in his Samp
fim Agenifler. If you would therefore merit Praiſe, you muﬅ
diverſify your-Stile inceffimtly; too ual, and too uniform
a Manner 'then is 'to no purpoſe, an inclines us to ſleep.
Rarely are thoſe Authors read, who are born to plague us,
and who appear always whining in the flame ungrateful
Tone. Ha py the Man, who can ſo command his Voice, as
to paſs wit out Conﬅraint from that which is gm-ue, to that
which is moving, and from that which is pleaﬅmt, to that
which is ſevere and ſolemn. Every Paffion has its proper
Way of ſpeaking, which a Man of Genim will eaſily derive
from the very Nature of the Paffion he writes. Anger is
proud, and utters haughty Words, but ſpeaks in Words leſs
fierce and fiery when it abates. Grief is more humble, and
varz-u.- ſpeaks a Language like itſelf, dejected, plain, and ſorrowfld.
Soliloquies had need he very fen',
Extreamly ſhort, andſpoke in Paffion too.
Om- Lo-uersztalking to themſelvesſſr wem:
Of others, make-the Pit their Can dam.
Nor is the Matter memledyer, if thus
They truﬅ a Friend only to tell it m.
Th'Ocmſian ſhov'd m naturally full,
A: when Bellario conflffi: all.
There is nothing more common in our Plays, tho' nothing
ſo inartificial and unnatural, as the Perſons making long
Speeehes to themſelves, _9nly_to convey their 'Intentions an
Actions to the Knowledge of _the .Audience : But the Poet
ſhould takecare to make the Dramatic Perſons have ſuch
Confidants, as may neceſhrily ſhare their inmoﬅ Thoughts,
and then they would be more juﬅly, and with more Nature,
convey'd to the Audience. A lively Picture oſ the abſurd
Characters and _Conduct of our Plays, take from the Duke
of Buckingham's Effizy on Raetry; "which bein 'in _Verſe,
may be gotzby Heart, and remembered, andſo ways about:
your-for a &Leﬅ-of any-new Hero. _
Firﬅ a' soliloquy i: calmly made, > -_ l -
Where ev'ry Ren on is exactly weigh'd; ' '*
Which ame pe'jer'd, mq/l opportunely comes
A Here, frighted at the Noiſe of Drmm, _
For her ſweet ſake, whom at firflfzght he lover,
And all in Mmphor his Pafflm proves: -
A DE
170 'The-Art ofPOETRY.
But ſhme ſhe! Accident, tho' ye' unknown, -
Pin-ting this Pair, to lea-ue the Snzain aloneþ
He ﬅrait grow: jealous, lyet me know not zvh),
And, to oblige his Ri-Ua , need: will die:
But firﬅ he make: a speech, wherein-he fell:
The abſent ijph how much his Flame excel: ;'
And et bequeath: her generouﬅ now
To t at dear Ri-val, whom he lie: not know ;
Who ﬅrait aPPeart, (hut, who can Fare withﬅandi)
Too late, alas! to hold his haﬅy Hand,
That has given him/biſ a cruel Stroke:
At which this 'very Stranger's Heart it broke.
He more to his new Friend than Mi/Zreſc kind,
Maſk ſhdly mourn: at being left behind,
Ofſueh aDeath prefers the pleaſing Charms
To Lo've, and living in his Lady's Arms;
Ofthe EPIC, or HEROIC FOEM.

An Epic Poem, i: a Diſcourfe invented with Art, to form
'he Manners by Inflructions, diſguiſed under the Allegory ofafl
Action which-is important, and which' is related, inVcrſe I"
a delightfid, probable, and wonderful manner.
That is, it is a Fahle which conſiﬅs of two Parts; firﬅ Of
Truth, its Faundation and Fiction which diſguiﬅs that Truth,
and gives it the Form of a Fahle. The Truth is tthml,
land theFiflion of the Action that is built upon it. its I_m*
* Formnce diﬅinguiſhes it from the' Camed , and its Relation
from the Tragic Affiam. * The Ac'lio'n here; as in Trflg'li"
__'_muﬅ be one, and all its EpijizdetzlorUnder-Actiom are to be
dependant on the main Action. 'Ita-nuﬅ beentire, that is, hffl'e
la Begiming; Middle, And LmI. It 'n'auﬅ have the Manner!
'th'at is, the Chdracters muﬅ be diﬅinguiſhed, and MMmm
unufi beſſncceſſary, and have thoſiſi: Ogalities inſerted alread)v
in Tragedy. The Incident: ought t'o be delightfid, and to that
'end varioux, vand rightly d-iiþofedz'- and ſurprizin . Tl'le E'
jiſhdec ſhould be'pathetic.' The iSen'timent: wii pſall' undfr
"The ſixmeRules as-'thofieof Tragidy,'buf the Dictibis-ZS'ÞUOW
to be more lofty, and mote fighrative,='as Beiiz'gia-'Narramm
andWe
having
need Admiratjon,
ſay no morenot Terror
of this and fit,
Poem, the for its End.
ct Rules at lafgc
would be too extenfive fotthis Treatiſeia'nd bur of little
Uibs the Poem being not to be undertaken but by a Mfflﬅſh
- and by a' Geniu; that does no: appear oncein gthoufin
Years.
'n'is
v 1 v I' . . U .ſ\;.
'N , _
"i 1 .
. .
7 ,
(171 )'
R O R I C-s,
The ART 0]'ſi_-P,ERSUASION£
5. 1. H E TORIC i: the Faculzy cffdiſcwering what

a every Subject aflbrds of Uſe to PERSUA
SION. And as every Author muſt invent,
or find out Arguments to make his Subject prevail, diſpoſe
thoie Arguments, thus found out, into their proper Plates,
range them in their juﬅ Order, and vto the lame end give
them thoſe Embelliſhments and Beauties of Language which
are proper to each Subject; and, if his Diſcourſe be to be de
liver'd in public, to utter them with that Decency, and Force,
which may ﬅrike the Hearer: ſo this Art of Perſuaſion is
net-ally divided into four: Parts, Inizemivn,biſ1><ſitian, Elacution
Or Language, ſand Deliver or Pronunciation. .
* 7.. Invention is the nding out (iich Motives, Reaſons.
'0r. Arguments as'are adapted to perſuade, or gain the Affiat
'or Beliefof the Hearer or Reader.
Theſe Arguments may be divided into artificial, and in
artiflcial. The fbrmer are the proper Object of the Inven
tion of him who writes; the latter the Author or Writer
does not invent, but borrowing them from abroad, applies
and accommodates them to his Subject. \ ,_
The artificial Arguments are of three ſorts, Reaſon: or
Argumentations, the Manners, and the Paſſions. The firﬅ
are to inform the Hearer'sjudgment; the ſecond, to ingra_
riate with him, or win his Inclination or Fervour; the third,
to move. ' -.
The Student, or Writer, is abundantly aſſiﬅed in finding
out theſe Arguments,Reaſanings, or Argumentations, by con
ſulting ſuch Heads, as contain, by general Conſent, or the
Rules of Art, ſuch Proafs or Evidences under them.
Some of theſe HE ADS are general, others particular :
The general contain thoſe Propoſitions which are common
to all Subjects or Cauſa; and theſe the Maﬅers of this Art
Q2 have
&77. Rhetorrc ; or, the Art of Perſuaſion.
have agreed to be two in number, under theſe two Titles;
the firﬅ, poſh'ble, or impoſſible; for whether we perſuade or
diffuade, praiſe or diffirazﬅ, accuſe or defend, we muﬅ prove
that the Fact or Subject has been, or is pofflbl: or impoffible
to he done. - 5 =
The other Title is great or ſmall, and to this all Compa
ri/bnr relatez as when we ſhew; that this is more or leſs be
ncficial or pernicious, more uſeſul or unuſeſul, more honou
rable or diſhonourable, more juﬅ or equitable, unjuﬅ land il
legal, than that.
Every Subject has, beſides theſe general Head: common
to all, others particular to themſelves, from whence all At
gument's are drawn, which are peculiar to each Subject or
Cl'yauſez and for that reaſon vary according no, the Variety of
t at. * - rr ,
All Cauſes, or Subject: of any Weight, are recommended
to the Reader or Hearer in one of theſe three Ways, mix.
either by Perſuafion or Diſſuaſion 3 Praiſe or Diſpraz'ſe; Ae
cu/i'tion or Defenoe. And indeed, a Man can ſearce write on
any Subject that require: or fall: under Periuafion, but in a
more or leﬅ important, or eXtenſive Degree, fall: under one
of theſe Heads.
But theſe differ from each other, as in the Partr, and Of
fice or Duty, as we have juﬅ- ſiren; and in the End doubly,
(1.) In regard of the Thing it elf z (z.) and the Hearer.
( 1.) In regard of the Thing, or the End propoſed by the
perſuaſi-ue or diffiiafi-ue Diſeour/e, is Pro/it, Advantage or
Beneſit; by the Praiſe or Diſpraz'ſe, Honour; and Right and
Laxity by the Aceuﬅnion or Dffenoe. (z.) In regard of the
Hearer, becauſe the Object of him who writes in Pe'fiuſm
or Diffiuaſion, is- HoPe and Fear; in Praiſe and Dilþrarfi, Plea
ſure and Delight z in Acouſatian and Defenoe, Clemency or
Severity.
. The firﬅ has to do with the future, or time to come; the
ſecond moﬅ commonly with the Preſhnt; and the third with
the paﬅ; The Hearerr, in the important Subjects of each
kind, may be conſider'd thus: a Man,'or Men of Power in a
_.State hear the fl'fl; Men of' Pleaſure, or ſuch as are chiefly
'led by the Ear, the ſecond ,- and 'a judge, or Sena'e, the laﬅ.
a 5. 3. When the Defign of our Diſcourſes is to perſuale or
diffuade, .we muﬅ conſider the Matter Or Subject of out Diſ;
conrſe, or the thing We would render eligrble or odious;
and thoſe Heads from whence Motives, Reaſon, or Argu
m'ents are to be drawn, to bring about what We propoſe.
- T
____,_____. . _
Rhetoric; or, the Art ofPerſuaſion. 173

The Subject, or Matter, is whatever can be done, either
in a public or private Capacity. Thoſe Subjects which have
regard to a public Capacity, have been divided into five
Heads. (1 .) Funds, Revenues, and Pecum'ary Marte's. (z.) Peace
or V/ar. '(z.) Garrijims or Forees, which are the Defence of
Countries. (4.) Traale in Commodities, exported or impor
ted 1 And, (j'.) the Propoſal of Law: to be eﬅabliſhed or ab
rogated.
Private Subjects, are whatever may be of Advantage or
Detriment to Particulars.
__ The Head: from which Motives, Reaſons, or Argument;
are to be drawn, under this Divifion of the Art of PERSUA:
SION, are fix. The chief and moﬅ peculiar to this, is the
profitable, or beneficial. It farther borrows from the next
kind, the honourable z and from Acraſation and Defence, the
rightful or legal; and from the common or general Heads,
the þoffihlez and frames from all theſe a judgment, or Con
jecture of the Event. .
&4.. We come now to Praifle or Diſpraſſ: And this ſhrt
,of Diſcourſe is threefold; the firﬅ of-Perflm: real or imagina
_l'yz-the ſecond of Lia/53; or Deedsz and the third of Thingsa
In the Praiſe _or,1)iflbraiſe of real Perfims, 'the Order is
either-_nhtaral or 'artificial._ i v , . *
. The artificial is, when, without re ard to time, we refer
what we ſay to certain Heads; as t e Good: ot Mind, of
Body, or Fortune.
But the natural Method is, 'when we ﬅrictly confine our
lelveszto_thez,0bſervation of the Qrdetof Hiﬅory. And this
_is divided into three times. l(l_.) That which preceeded the
Birth- qf the gPerſon, who: is the. Subject of our Praiſe or Diſ
,Praz'fien . (a.). The Time of his,Life; and,_(z.) What follows,
hisDeathl- . . ' .
In the firﬅ Time, we muﬅ conſider the Prognaſlicsflmens,
Propheriqnland thelike, if any ſuch there were, and his Faz
mily and Country; from which ariſes a twofold Praiſe: For
.if thefi: were-really illuﬅrious, we ſay, that ſuch a Perſonhas
tame, aſhtp _the- vamzient Hpnpur ot his Countr 1. and Family 5
in' has done Deeds'wbrthy ſu_c_lra Country and. uch a Family.
Op-*the*-_cqnt_rary,_if his Connt'yor Famz , or both were
-obſcure, we muﬅ ſhew, that lie-has ennob ed and raiſedthe
Obſcurity.of both, by his own proper Virtae: and V'orth.
._ _In_the next Time, which is that of his Life, we haVc four
Things to c'onfrdeſir 5' firff, The Nature of his Body, as Health,
Rohaﬅneﬅ, Acti-vity, Beauty; and othrs Mzm, as Wzt, Ca
, X 1 - Qz pang -
174 Rhetoric; ar, the Art QfPerſuaſion.
purity, judgment, Memory, &e. The ſecond is his Fortune
or Richet. The third his Eduratian, Inﬅitution, and Conduct
of Life. The fourth his Actionr, and their Circumﬅantes and
Rewardr.
In the laﬅ place, comes the manner and kind of his Death,
the Funeral Pomp, and the like; chieflK the Loſs, and the
Grief that attended that L0ſ55 to whic may be ſubjoin'ed a
Conſhlation for it. This is the Praiſe of the Petſon, let it beof
an Alexander, a Marlhorough, a Peter-harow, or the like. From
hence we may eaſily gather the Praiſe Of what we call an
imaginary Pe'ſſm; as of Baeephalar, or the like; but this is of
little uſe, except a Sport of Fancy.
When we undertake to praiſe Deeds or ActiOns, we are to
make uſi: of thoſe Head: of Arguments which are rccurr'd
to in the former Divifions 3 ſmce we praiſe that here, which
we would recommend or per-ſhade in the other.
There are here eight Heads, from which we draw Mate
rials of amplifying and ſetting off the Subject; for to the
praiſi: of Deeds or Actionr, it very much imports, that the
'Subject of our Praiſe, did it either firﬅ, fmgl] or alone, or with
fen', or chieflj, or principal] , or at a neceſſary Exigenee of
Time, Place, or Juncture 0 Afli'irs, or often: Or that the
Action has a great regard to the-Benefit, Reputation, and
Glory of his Country; or that he, firﬅ of all Men. ined his
Country new or freſh Honours, Dignity, Power,
When things are the Subject of our Praiiie, the Method is
not the ſame in all: For in the Praiſe of Countrier, Cities, and
the like, we purſue very near the ſame Method, as in that
of Perſonsz for that which in Men is Country and Family, 'is
in Plates, the Founderr, and the Prince: who haVe there go
vemed; that which in the former is Beauty of Body, is in
theſe the Situation: What in thoſe is the Virtue of the Mind,
is the Fertilitj, Wholeſhm'neſi', wiﬅ Law, &e.
But in the Praiſe of other Ihz'ngr, as of Art: and Seienees,
we have recourſe to the iizme Heads of Argument as in the
Praifi: of Actionr. The Henourablene/i is ſhewn in the effi
cient, or 'productive Cauſes and Antiquity; and the Utiliry
or Benefit from the Efect and Aim. '
s. ſ. The laﬅ kind or ſort of Subject of RH ETORlC,
is that which ame/i: or defindr, and the Head: of Arguments
or Proofs in this, vary according to the Variety of the State
loſ the Cauſe, which is the SubjcQ of our Arcuſhtion or De
encn' * '
/
Then'
find, b_e An," ,
Rhetoric ;. or, the Art d'Per'ſuaGonZ x7£

There are four States; the firﬅ cnquires whether it be p,
a' not, the ﬅcond, what it is; the third, its Nature; the
fourth, its Magnitude, or how great anyCri'M if.
Every Speech, or Oration of this kind, has one, ormore
of theſesuter. If there be morethanO'xe, vthe muﬅ either
be of the ſame Kind, as if they all enquire other it he or
not; or they muﬅ be of ſeveral am, as, one of the firﬅ,
and another of the ſecond.
5. 6. There are three Head: ofArgument, which we con
ſult for Proofs in the firﬅ State, which we may call thesene
of Gaefi, or Preſumption, vizuThe .Will, the Power, and
Signs, or Tokem'. ' ' 'H ' .
The Will contains the Motiiues and Reaſbning. The Mo
tirues contain the affections or Paffiom, Which are urged as
the efficient Cauſe. The Reaſbning is drawn from the final
Cauſes; as from the Hope of Advantage, and the like: And
to the Power or Facult), the Strength of Body, the Inclina
tions of the Mind, Riches, Capacity, Time, Place, the
Proſpect or Hopes oſ concealing the Fact, when committed,
relate. Some of the' Signs or Taken: precede; ſome attend,
and ſome follow-the Fact. ..
5. 7.- In the'smte, which enquircs by what Namethe Fact:
is to be called; We inuﬅ endeavaur to confirm and makcout
our ombcfim'timof it, and confine that of the Adverﬅry.
As when the Accuſed ſhall acknowledge that he had taken
ſuch Good: from ſuch a Place, but not flole them; that he
ſtruck ſuch a Peribn indeed, but made no Affimlt and Bat
tery. Or ſhould he conteﬅ the-Rohbery, but deny the Sa
crilegc, and the likez- in all ſuch, Caſes the Nature of the
Fact muﬅ be defined, and the Adverſary confuted on that
Head by a Confirmation of your own Definition.
s. 8. Tthnm which enquircs into the Nature of she Felt,
Crime or Cauſe, is twofoldz the firﬅ treats ofwhat i: to came,
and is therefore proper to Perfieaſt'on or D'fflaſion. The lat
ter, of what is already done, and is therefore agreeable to
Courts of judic'ture, or Accuſation and Defence. That
which is properly juridical, has its Place either in judg
ment, or before it; we divide the firﬅ into Rational and
Legal: The Rational relates to the Fact, the Legal to the
Senſe of the LaWs, Statutes, 'or Written Authorities.
The Rational is divided into the Ahfizlute and Aſſ-emptied
The Ahfl'lute plainly and finaply deſcnds the Fact; as when
we allow it done, and aſſert it laudihb' done. The Affump
m- it When theQefsecs in i! Mf is Wak- but is ſupported
'176 Rhetorics-- or, theArt of Perſuaſion;
or aſſiﬅed-by ſomething Foreign, or outof the Cauſe aſ:
famed. And this is done four Ways, by Compariſon, 1131..
tion, Remma'ng and Cona'ffionu Compariſhn isjwhen.wezſhew,
'that-'there was: neceſſity of doing One of two. Things-yard
'thilk
thaſſnwhat-was-done
the-other wouldWas jufler, andRelatianiswhenwe
havebeen. more juﬅifiably eligible
throw
the) Fault on the very Perſonzwho has' received the Injmy.
The Remo-uing is, when we throw the Fault on ſome other
vli'erſon'than' 'he who has received the Injury, or on aThing
that cannot come before theCourt, as not falling under its
'juriſdictiomas onthe Latin >c\\_._q w '
'Conoeffion is uſually divided into Purgation and Leprou
tion. Pu'rgario'nis when we defend n'ot the Fair', but the Will
or Intention-5 as when the Guilt or Fault is thrown on Ne
"oeffity, Fortune,*Ignoranoe, or Inadwrtenoe.> .
_ Depreeation is when we acknowledge the Fault, or plead
Guihry, and fly to Pity'and-Merty. n t _ -
'. 5.-9. There are fourStater which enquire into the Nature
of the Crime, or what it is, The firﬅ is ofthe written Let
.ior,,ancb the Opinion or Intention; as, when the Writing is one
Thing, and the Intention of the :Writer another; and one
inſiﬅs' on the Letter, and theother on the Intention of the
.Wrio'er.: Here Equity-and the Rigourof the Law contend.
The next isReaflning, when from" 'what is written, we
gather another Thing that is not written, becauſe founded
runsthe ſame' Reaſon. . , , ' _,
' The thirdisthe Coneradiction oft/yellow; that is, when
>the Law either is contraryltoit ſelf, or to ſomeother Laws.
Pl'. The fourth. is 'the Ambiguity of the which ariſes
either from' the Change ohthe Tone or. Accent, or from the
Diviſion Ofathc-Diction;,0rztht variousflignifimtious of the
words: Tothiewe may add a Species-of it, the examin
ing theiForcezof the Word, which differs from the former
State, which enquires into the Nature of the Fact and Crime,
to-ſee what Name is its due. 'Wemay- here farther conſider
Ekecptions to the- Courtitſdfz Firﬅ, thech'ſonz. as when
-he ſiactsrwhoiought not to act,.0r,yvit_h him with whom he
oughenot; Secondiy,.- the .Plaoes.,/as1when the Action is
'brought in a wrong Cotlrt, Thirdly, to the Time; as when
we ſay, we could formerly have accus'd one whom we cannot
at this Time. And; Fourthly, to the Thing, as when Wc
deny that the Indictment, can be grounded on this Law, or
requires ſuch a- Puniflunent for ſuch a Crime.
.* ' aſi.J'.-al,'..
1. i- -
' '540.th
Rhetorizc; onthe Artof Perſuaſion. ſ77
5.-10. The State, which enquires into the Magnitude 01'
Greatnej? of the Crime, examines and informs us what are
the greateﬅ and moﬅ heinom Injuries, and which are the
T.
"he"
Ifl leaﬅ. _They are ﬅrewn to he great; either becauſe done on
very flight 'Gronndr or _Pre-uocation; or becauſe they have
drawn on in their ConſequenCes very great Damagesz 'or
becaulh he who received the. Injury, was a Man of great
ifi'
41
Et
Merit, or' becauſe the accuſed was thefirﬅ who did commit
it, or the only,- or with a few; or oflen, or on Purpqſez- or
on many other Cauſes.
5. i r. Having thus curſoril run over the'Artifleial Ar
gnmentr,
which arewe come
ſuch now
as are nottoderived
tho e which are called
from this Art ofInartzfioial
Perſacta len,;
but being preſſed in from abroad', are, however, artificzally
treated of: And theſe in the Accufittion and Defence. are
five. ( 1.) The Law. _ (29 _Mmeffix. (z.) Contracts or
Agreementr. "Queſliann (5.) Cat/ar. Fromall which,
re: according to t e, Nature of the Cauſe, there are different
Ways of arguinghh . , X , , , -
5. r a. We comev now to the other'Part of Rhetorical In
FÞT'2
u mention, and. that. treats of the 4Paffions. The Paſſions are
Commotions if the,.Mind, -meanr of which thgſe who are
'no-ved, 'udga dz'fl'erenrly from thoſe who are not, and this is
z wu ,a nu wn"\
RP attende either wirh Flee/are or Pain. .. >
We muﬅ neceſſarily know three Things, to be able to
move the Pafflons.-Wh0, and xo, whom, andfir '_vhat Cauſe:
or Reaſon' Men are uſed, to, be' moved by this, or that Paffion.
5. r z. Anger i: a certain 'Deſire of. Renenge, est-'compaſſe-l
with Pain, which me ſeem _to ourſelves. ahle to execute, caus'd
by a d'gfagreeahle Contempt our ſalves, or of ours.
But this Contempt- is of three ſorts: Deſpiſing, Ineom
mading, and Contameliom. The 'firﬅ is a meer ſimple cle-
ſþffing ,- the Other: requirerthat One oppoſe an Other, not to
advantage himſelf, but meerly to oppoſe the: Other. And
incommoding is in Defign, or by depriving him of, or hin
dering his Advantage,- but the End of Gontamelies, is shame
and Ignominy.
s. '4. The Oppoſite of Anger isLenity, which is the
Ceafing, or Remiffion- qungor. ,,- _ , , ,_ '
,'s\'\ 3. If. Lot/e is a Paſſion by which we wiſh heartily well
to ibme One, and would do all the Good We could to that
One, not for our own ſake,' but for his, others.
5. 16. Harreal and Enmity areoppos'd to Lo-ue and Friend
ſhip: But theſe differ from Anger inmany Particulars. We
are
3 78 Rhetoric'; ar, the Art of Perſuaſion.
are angry on accountof Things which relate to our ſelVes;
but we 'hate without any Regard to 'our own Affitirs, Intereﬅ
or Advantage: Anger is directed to Particular-r; but Hatml
ſages againﬅ what; Kinds; Anger is at ſhort-liv'd Fury, but
Hatredand
to give PainvEnmity are laﬅing;
to the Perſon With He that is
'wihom heangry, endeavours
is angry; for he
would have hind feelEvil, on' whom he wrecks his Remnge.
He that lum, ﬅudies-'to bring deage or Ruin; but is not
in Pain whether his Enemy feel it, or'not. '
_S..17. Fear is a certain Pain arD Trouble of Mind ariſing
fr'om the Imagination of ſome impending Evil, which may
either be attended With Deﬅruction, or Inconvenience, or
Trouble- 'r..1ſl..' r- '. r _ J ritſ-Al e . ". i
s. i8ſi 'Boldneſſi Or Cozgfizknte, is bpþoſiſitefflro Firm' it is a
Hope join'd with a'n Imagination' dſ Advantages, as if they
were near," 'and all Things and Perſons, 'that 'hight ﬅrike us
i with 19.
Fearf'being
shame isfir re1n0v*d,
a' ſort or*n0t
of'Griqf; at allorinTrbnb
Pain, Bein e. arifing
fijom an Opiniori'of Infnmy, when the E-uilr are either preſent

or paﬅ, or imminm'. 'And lmzmdence' is that' by which we
deſpiſe
ſo)ſuch Things;z
Fa-ſſvmf and Bywſheh
is' thar, re'ceive'np Tiehblqfi-om them.
one is ſaid to do a'
Ink-vour or G'fme'ioahybne, who'wants it; not for any Pro-'
ſpectwhatever, or that he may' get' any Thing by lit', but that
he whom he relieves, may'rec'cii'e- a*Benefi'tl 'Pa-vom- isam
.plify'd or enlarged on*three ways; From the Perſon who be;
flows theFa-uaur, from the Perſon' to whom it is done, and
from the Thing or Gift it-&lfi- And the hmeis leſſened
three Ways; firﬅ, from the Efect'J; ſecondly, from the Gþ?
it ſelf, and its Aniitier; ancl'*I thirdly, from the Tokens
and Signs of a Mmd not truly benevolent. *
"5 5; zr. That Pity, which wehere only define, is the Pain of
(Good- Men, from theOpinion of an Evil that may bring De
flruction or'Trouble to- one that does not deſerve it; and
ſuch as any One ma think triay befal himſelf or his, and that
ſeems to be impcn ing over him, or coming upon him.
_ S. 22, Indigmtian is a Pain or Trouble for mother's Since/i
orrI-Iappineji, who does not ſeem to deſerve it.
In this it differs from Pity;,,*tbnt roceedi
Sight of the ill Fortune of the "Good-5 t is from t ct'from the
good For
tune'of the Bad; ' '-* -=_ ' >- I' 4 ' '
5.:3. Envy 'is a Pain or Grief on account of real Ho
noyrs or Beneſits another enjoys, or' which we can't obtain.
exiﬅmg betweenxthoſe who are alike in Temper or Na
' ture j
Rhctoric; or, the Art if Perſuaſion. 179
ture 3- not that Another has them, bnt that 'we have them
non. . 'to Contelmþz,
It is contriry w . -\ which
with _: . any one is effected
againﬅ thoſe' _1n whom he fires not thoſe Goodstor! 'Advan
tagee, whieh either he ling himſelf obtained, or endcaVOurs
to attam. 1 iſ', 33, . - \. r' - "A
5. 24.. Having thus gone t rou h a, ſuccinct Account of
the Paſſions, we cqrrie to'the Thir tart' qflmzentian, which
_confid£rs
in which the Manners. are
vthe,"7,1Meſi7nm-r.c That 'D'z'ſeomſe
well niark'ſhtherefore, or Speech,
'We call Morfflvlg' for
itmlion.
diſcover-5 the Habit.-
ſ Iſin this fire ſeen'ofCon-iziniehie
the Mind, andAnd the Will or
Piobitj. ' Incli _
theThe Manner:
Alodierſſlce re ard either
to _w%10m the Perſim
he ſpeaks, himſelf'
or' ithe wholewho
City ſpeaks."
or Na
tion in which he delivers his Diſcourie. ' v ,
The Manners, which ought t0> be'conſþicuous in,the
Speake', are threefold; Prudence, Prolitj, and Benwoleme.
,T_he,Ma_mzers
the 'Government'zvof _the_ thim
Liberlyſſ is in are known by the
a Demacrflcjz. the Difiiplioe
Form of
ofthoLdm in an Ariﬅacmcj; þompom Wenlth in an Oligar

thy; Gmſſzrdsſi and Arm: in a Monart/ay. ' ſi ct
[81. The Manners in regard
Weiykjaccording to theiroffourfold
the Audience vary four
Diﬅiſinction. ſeve
' 1ﬅ, When
they differ in the Paſſions, 'as in Anger, Lenitj, Fear, Pitj,
ſi &c.
Vim.zdl3dlj,_
,' When they differ
In Year: in the
or Age, Hdbitk,
which As in virtues',
is threefold, or
ſouth,
_Man's-'Eflqte, Old-age. had), vIn Fortune, by which they
are either Noble or Ignoble, PoWCrſul or without Powa-r
_R1,ch_ or Poor, Fortunate or Unhappy. -
i , 9. 25., Bctefides theſe Seat: or Head: of Argumcnts, which
_are* peculiar to eac'h Kind of Cauſe, we muﬅ have Recourſe
'to thoſe which are common to All; and thoſe, as we have
before obſaved, are two, Poffible and Impoffible, Great and
Small, or of Importance, and of little Conſequem'e.
We muﬅ conſider the Head of Poffiþle and Impoſlz'ble three
ſeveral ways,--f0r we muﬅ, ſhewe Thing done or not done,
thar ton be done, or'_o_diz hot be done; or that will be'done,
Oi" n'ill not'he done. 'X X . " '_
iDone or not done is the subject of our Proof moﬅ in that
kindſiwhere we Monfle or defend; but in Perſzmſion or Diſſud
firm our Buſineſs is chiefly to prove, whether it am or um
m', or will no' be done.
The Important or Great, and Small and of little Conſe
quence, belong chiefly to Praiſe and Diffirmſe,
' t' 25'. Having
180 Rhetoric; or, the Art qf Perſuaſion.
5. ay. Having given the foregoing Rules for the Irn-m
:ion of Argumeatr, we naturally now proceed to deliver the
Method of diſpoſing marſhalling the whole in their pro
'perPlaces' and Order; for Diſþoſi'ion, the ſecond Diviſion of
this 'Artgis a proper'placing, Or ranging of'the ſeveral Parts
of the speech or Diſoou'ﬅ. Theſi: Parts are four in num
ber, the Begin'lipg or'Opening of the Diſcourſe, the Propdi
tion,v the Proff, and the Concluflon. Others make ſix Parts,
as, the Beginning, Narrarion, Propofltion, Co'zfirmation, Con
futa'rion, and Concluſion: Of which, the firﬅ is to ingrariate
with' the
inform Heat-m, the laﬅ to move ſthem,
them. ', and thev
" middle to
The Order of theſe is either Natural or Artificial. We
call that Natural, when the Parts are diſpoſed'in the Order
We have laid down.
Tl'e'Artiſioial is, when the Nature of the Cauſe requires
us to depart from this Natural Order.
5. 26. In the Begirming or Opening of the Diſcourſe we
ſet forth the Aim and Scope of what we'have to ſay,- and
the Mind's of the Hearers are prepared for the reﬅ that is
to come. r
The Method of all Begirmingr is not the Lame, but vary
according to the Quality of the Caufl.
For that is either honourable or diſhonourahle, douhtfid or
mean, plain or clear, or ohſeure.
In an honourable Cauſe the Good-will, Armrtion, and
eility of the Hem-er: are'prepared plainly, and without Diſ
guile or Inſinuation. -
In a Cauſe that is diſhonourahle, we muﬅ take careto
infinuate into the Hearer: Minds, and ſubtilly pre are them
to give us a Hearin : And this Beginning they cal laſ/'nua
n'on. But this kin of Beginning is ſometimes made uſe?
in an honourable Cauſe, and that when the Hearm are Cl
ther tired with hearing, or prepoflefld by the Diſcourſc of
him who ſpoke firﬅ. * _
In the duhiau: or douhtful we make uſe of a Beginmng
darwn from the Nature of the'Cauſe it (Elfz that is: from
that Face of it which is honourahle. ſ .
i In a low or mean Caufi: We muﬅ endeavour to raiſe-onw
tion; and in an ohſcare Cauﬅ, a Willingmſ; or 'Deſire to be
informed.
a -' The
Rhetoric; or, the Art of Perſuaſion. 18:
The Method of Beginm'ng: is not the ſame in the three
ſorts of Subjects, on which we may ſpeak.- For in Praiſe
and D'z'jþm'iſe it muﬅ be taken from the five Head: or Ar
guments proper to that; from the Praiſe orvbiffimiſc 3 from
.Perfimſion or Diſfinſſon; . and from thoſe Things which re
late-to theHezren. v
In Accuſatian and Defence there are four Headx, from
which the Beginning is taken: For the Mind of the Homer
is prepar'd, as it *wer_e, by certain Medicines, taken either
from, the Speake' himſelf, or from the Anuſedz or from the
Hem-er 5 or from the Accuſhrj or' from the Things.
, They are taken from the Accuſcd, 0r_ the Adrerſhny, by
objecting or diſproving a Crime; ſijom the Heare', by
rendring him our Friend, or angry, attentive, or not atten
tive, Or willing'to be inform'd: Laﬅly, 'from the Things,
by .declarin its Nature.
- .S. 2.'7. T e_Narratian is a Recitai of the Things done, or
that ſeem to be done, adapted to Perjhaflbn.
This We make uſe of in Accuſationand Deflence, when we.
do not agree with the_Ad*v"£/hry about the Manner of the
Fact: But when,,we perſuade- or dzffimdgthere is ſeldom
any Occa'ſion forthis Part; nor- is there any in Praiſe on
Djflemzfi, but What 'has its place in the Confirmdtian. ..
The Narmtion ought to be perſhicmm, that it may he un
derſtood; likely or probable, that it may be believ'd; diﬅin
guiſh'd by the Manna-s, that it may be heard with the
greater Willingmzſn. But to be ſo, it ought to expreſs thoſi:
Things which reiate to the Proof ofzour own Virtue, and.
the Improbity of the Adve'ſh'y. 1' . - V ;-. ,- þ .
.=Care--rn,uﬅ likewiſe, be taken, that what is ſai Amaybe
'A-a'1u--7'-
'3.
pleaſing to the judges; and it ought,_ beſides al, thisytor
move the Pafflam. . t _ ,
This Part does not always follow. the Beginning, but is
ſometimes deferrfd to another place, and muﬅ always be
ſho'rter for the Defendant than Plaintiff. We ſometimes
ſupport the Narratian, by giving it on the Credit of others,
which PromOtes Securit . Sommimes. we make uſe. of
Affi-Uernjam, which *l procure Relief much. ﬅronger,
and ſometimes'we make uſe of botht _
z s, 28.- The Narmtim being' over,. we propoſe-the State
of thejspeecb or Diſcomfl; and divide the Cauſe into cer
tain Parts,v if it conſiﬅ of man] Staten
This Diviſion is made either 1 by Separation or Eriume-Z
ration.
, i ſſ , . 1 R
, ' ' ' t In.
==
182 Rhetoric ; or, the Art of Perſuaſion.
In the Separation we lay open in what 'me agree with our
Adverſary, and what is yet remaining in Contro-uor/j'.
In the Dmmeration we ſum up the ſeveral Heads, and
Kinds of Things, of which we are about to ſpeak.
The Beauty of the Partition or Diwfion is, that it be fidl,
and perfictz plain and perſþicaom; ſhort, and certain s con
taining not more than three, or at moﬅ more than four Parts.
549. The Canfirmation, and Confutatian, are ſometimes
plac'd under the Head or Title of the Cantentian. The
firﬅ confirms our own Cauſe by Arguments; the laﬅ
deﬅroys or conſutes thoſe of the Adverſary. We muﬅ
in the Canfirmatian have Regard to the Diſpoſition, as
well of the Arguments, as Reaſiming or Argumenta
tion.
The-ﬅrongeﬅ Arguments are to be plac'd in the Front,
or Beginning; when the Hearerr, being fir'd by the Nar
ratiim, are deſirous to know what we have to offer for the
Proof or Deſence of our Cauſe. And we muﬅ take care
v to place a Part of the moﬅ ſorcible Arguments at the end,
becauſe what we hear laﬅ makes the ﬅrongeﬅ Impreflion:
But thoſe Argnments which carry the leaﬅ Weight, are to
be rang*d in the middle, that thoſe which by their Weight
may be inconſiderable, may by their number ſeem of
importance, -
Farther, If the Strength of our Cauſe depend on an
'Argument that is alien to it, we muﬅ introduce it in ſuch
a manner, as may make it appear to be proper to the
Cauſe; '*but*we muﬅflew, thar What is offer'd by our Ad
lverfiuies is indeed foreign to it. >
'But we muﬅ take hee'd that we do n'ot throng our Ar
guments, 'for when the 'Paſſions are mov'd, Sunne's are'
more taken notice of than Argummts.
If the End and Aim of the Argumeata'ion, or Ruſhniag,
be more to mm than Worm, it is call'd Amplzfauim, or
Enlargiag. And-ſince this is implore! partly in lengthning
or drawin out the Spncb, 'and partly in exaggeratin'g the
Matter,- t' e latter is 'the Chief or Principal inifhis Place.
And this is done by Agnmfltdtion, Comparifim, Ruſmbzg
on the Magnitude or Qiantit-Y of! the Thing: or'Gailr, &c.
The Confutation is not always-made in'the-firne manner,
_ſonretimes We ſhew, that ral/head: are taken for Truth;
tometimes allowing the'PremiflEs, We deny-'the Conſequence
drawn from them', ſometimes againﬅ a firm and ﬅron Ar
gumcntauon we oppoſe another, it leaﬅ of equal, or; we
th,
Rhetoric ; or, the Art Qf Perſuaſion. 18;"
can, of a ſuperiour Force and Energy; ſometimes we de
baſi: a Thing, and laugh at the Arguments of the Ad-uerſmy.
But in General, we firﬅ attack the moﬅ firm and valid
the reſtAdverfiir
of the may fallvof courſe.
's Arguments; that having deﬅroy'd them,
5. 30. The Concluſim has two Parts 3 the Emmun'tion, or

Reeapitulo'tion, and the Paffiom.
The Ennmem'ion repeats the principal Argumenrs. But
this is ibldom made uſe of in Praiſe or Di/þmzfi 5 more oſ
ten in ſuch Speeches, or Diſcourſes which are directed to
Puſ/mile or Diffmde, but moﬅ commonly in Acruſhtion and
Deflncez and there the Blai'mf makes more uſe of it than
the Defendam. We make the chief uſe of this when we
are a prehenfive, that the Hem-er: may (by reaſon of the
lengt of the Speech) not ſo well, remember them, or their
Force; and when the heaping together of Arguments may
add Weight to the Diſcourſe.
The Paffiou: ought to be here more ﬅrong and vehement.
There are two Virtue: of e Goael'ſſo'x, Brevity and. Vehememe.
5. 31. Before we proceed to Elocutim, or the Lngnage,
we ſhall here. add ſome Other common Heads. or Plane,"
whence the Artiﬅs uſe to draw Arguments. .
The firﬅ of thefi: is the General, or Kind; that is to ſhy,
we muﬅ conſider in every Subject, what it has in common
with all other Subjects of the lime Kind or Nature. If we
ſpeak of the War with France, we may conſider War in ge
neral, and draw our Arguments from that Genernli'y.
The ſecond Head, orPl-ue, is call'd Dlfi'erenre; by which
we conſider whatever in it is peculiar to the oVan/lion, or
Cow e. third is Definition; that is to fly, we muﬅ conſider
Tſhe
the whole Nature of the Subject. The Diſcourſe, which
expreſihs the Nature of a Thing, is the Definition of that
Thin .
Thg fourth is the Emamemtz'on go the Part: contain'd in
the Subject of which we ſpeak.
The fifth is the Dm'wtim of the Name of the Subject.
The fixthſhflmt are deriv'dfrom theſim'e Head, or Ser-vz'u,
which are the Names that have Connection with the Name
of our Subject ,* as the Word Lom- has Connection with theſe
otherWords-to low, laving,Friend_/hip, lowly, Friend,6tc.
We may likewiſiz conſider the Like'zſeſs, or Unlikeneſi in
the Thin s of which we treat; and the e make the ſeventh
and eigh Place, or common' Heads.
' R 2. We
184 Rhetoric; or, the Art of'Perſuaſioſh
We may likewiſe make Comparzfin, and in our Compari
ſon introduce every thing to which our Subject is oppos'd;
and this Compariſon and Oppo/ition, are the ninth and tenth
Plates, or Heads of Argu-ments. *
The eleventh is Repagnance, i. e. In diſcourſing upon a
Subject, we muﬅ have an Eye upon thoſe Things that are
repuonant to it, to diſcover the Proofs, with which that
Proſpect may furniſh us.
'Tis of importance to conſider all theCirm'nflaneer of the
Matter propos'd; but theſe Circumﬅances have either pre
ceded, or anomþany'zl, orv follow'd the Things in Yeﬅion.
So theſe circumﬅance: make the twelfth, thirteent , and
fourteenth Plaoer. All the Circumﬅances that can accom
pany an Action, are comprehended in theſe Words; who 3
what i where? with what Help or Afflﬅance, or Means ? Why I
how? and-when? That is to ſay, we muﬅexaminewho i: the
Author of the Action? what the Action is? where it was
done? vvhat Means? for whatEnd? how? and when?
The fifteenth Place is ther Iſis-ſi; and the ſixteenth is the
Cauſe: i. e. we muﬅ have regard to the Effect, of which
the Thing in Diſpute may be the 01qu and to the Thing:
of which it may be the Effect. '
5. 32.. We come now to what we call Elomtion, or the
Language, or Diction in which proper Word: are adapted
to the juﬅ Expreffion of the Things which we have in
vented. It conſiﬅs of Elegance, Compoſftion and Dignity:
The. firﬅ is the Foundation 'of this Structure; the ſecond
joins, or ranges the Words in ſuch a manner, that the
Speaker may riſe with Equality; the laﬅ adds the Ornaments
of Tropes and Figures, to give Importance and Solemnity
to what is ſaid. *' - ' ' -
Elegance comprehends the Purity of the Language, and the
Pe'flzieuity: In the choice of .Words we muﬅ have peculiar
Regard to their Purity; that is, we muﬅ take care that
they be genuine, that is, fre'e of * our" Tongue, not Foreign;
that they be not Obſolete, or quite out of Uſe,- for both theſe
will no: only affect the Perſpicuity of what you deliver, but
diſcover either Ruﬅicity, or great-Affectation, and often
give anuncouth and roughCadence to your Sent'ences, which
a good Style refuſes ,- and- Care muﬅ 'be taken to avoid
vngar and low Words, (the Lan'guage of the Mob.) This
robs What you fly of that Dignity you ſhould aim at. Sir
Anger L'Eflrange, and ſome of our Divines too, havebecn
guilty in Subjects of Importance and Majeﬅy. But as you
muﬅ
Rhetoric; or, the Art tfPerſuaſion. 18 5
muﬅ not affect too great Brevity on one ſide, ſo on the
Other, you muﬅ not aſpire to too great a Loftineſs; both
being Enem'ies to that Perſpicuity, which muﬅ always be
your particular Care.
Elegma is gain'd by reading the beﬅ, or moﬅ polite
Authors, by keeping the beﬅ Company, and by Practice;
Uſe in all things
Cbmpqſ'ſition being
is the apt the
andbeﬅ Inﬅructor.
proper Order of the Parts ad
hering to each other; and this teaches partly Things that
are common to Speakers in public, Hi/lariam, and Pom, and
partly thoſe Things which are peculiar to a public Speake',
The firﬅ Comyn/him regards as well the artificial joinin
Of the Letters, by which the Style is render'djbft and ſwoot ,
gentle, and flowing; or fill! and ſimorous, or the contrary of
all theſe; as the Order, which requires, that we place the
Grave after the Humble or Low; and that we fist that
which is of greater Dignity, and firﬅ in Nature, before that
which is leſs, and of more inferiour Conſideration.
ComPaſitiM relates to the Period, but having treated at
the End of GRAMMAR on that Head, and forgot to put
it in its right Place in this Second Edition, we ſhall refer
you to that.
Digm'ty produces a figurative manner of Speaking, both
in the Wards, and 'in Sentmces; thoſe which affect Word:
alone, have been ſo long call'd Troþemhat the Word is known
almoﬅ to the very Fiſh-vines. Thoſe which affect Sentcnces
have been as long, and generally known to be call'd Figures.
s. 33. We ſhall begin the Trape: with Danſmumtion, or
the exchange of one Name for another,- as if we ſay, Peter
borow conquer'd Spain; eve'y one reads Milton; London i:
in an Uproar. 'Tis plain we mean, that Peterborow': Arm)
conquer'd Spain, or he with the help of his Army; every on'
reads Milton's Work: 5 the Peoþle of London are m 'm Upraar.
The Relation is ſo ﬅrong betwixt a General and his Army,
'an Author and his Works, a Town and its Inhabitants,
that' the Thought of one excites the Idea of the other, and
'ſo changing of Names produces no Confuſion.
The nexr is Comprehmſion. This is ſomething related to
the former; for by this we put the Name of a Whole for a
Wart; as if we ſhould ſay England for London, or London for
England; as, the Plagm i: in England, when only in London.
Thusby this Trope we have the Liberty ofquitting the Name
of a Part for the Mole, and that of the Whole for aPart;
and' to this we
ſiſict may
ſi' likewiſe
ſiſi' ſict refer
R 3theUſe7 of acertain Num
Per:
186 Rhetoric; or, the Art querſuaſion.
ber, for an uncertain Number; as an Hundred Awm'ix u
the Houſe convey, when there' may be more or leſs-un'
Hundred run old, when he may want ſome *Months, or
perhaps Years. * 1'- > *- _
- Exrhrmge of Names is another Troph, and akin 'likewiſe to
the firﬅ call'd Tmnſmumrion; for by this we apply aNam'e
proper to one, to leveral, and common Names to particular
Perſons 3 asw'hen we call a Luxurious Prince aSardnnapalm,
or a cruel one a New. On the contrary, when for Cicero,
we ſhy the Dram'r; 'or for Ariﬅotle, the Philoſopher; for
Virgil, the Poet; and the like. -7 -_ j 'r _ *
Memphar is ſo well known a Word in our Tongue now,
that we ſcarce have need to explain it by Tranflation. - It is
a Trope, by which we puta ﬅrange and remOte Word fora
proper Word, reaſon of its reſemblance with the Thing
of whiZh we ſpeak. , Thus we call. the King the Headof his
Kingdom; becauſe as the Head commands the Members of
the Natural, ſo the King commands the Members of the
Political Body. Thus we ſay, the Vallies ſmile, or laugh
upon us; becauſe there is a' fimilitude between the agreea
ble Appearance of one and the other.
Allegb'ry is the joining of ſeveral Memphor: together, and
ſo eXtends to ſeveral Words; 'tis likewiſe call'd Inverſion.
But great Care muﬅ then be taken in an Allegory, that it
ends as it begins; that the Memphars be continued, and the
ſame things madeUſe'of to thelaﬅ, from whence we borrow
our firﬅ Expreffions. The famous Speech of our celebrated
'S/mkcſpmr, is exueamly faulty in this particular. *
To 62, 07 not to be, that i: the neﬅion;
Whether 'tis nobley' in the Mind to ufl'er
The Slings and Arrows of Out'mgeom Fortune," *
Or to take Arm: again a Sea of Parables,
And h] apþgſſng, and t em?
Here the Poet begins the Allego'y with Sling: and Ar'am,"
and ends it in a Sea. beſides the taking Arms againﬅ a Sea.
When theſe Allegoriex are obſcure, and the natural Senſe
of the Words not obvious, they are call'd Enigma'5, or Riddln.
Diminution, orLeffiming, is the next Troye, and by this we
ſpeak leſs than we think; aswhen we ſay, man not indeed to
be commended, it implies a (Ecret Reproac , or Reprehenfion.
II perhole, Or Exceſr, repreſents things greater or leſs than
real y they are,- as, Thi: Ha'ſe i: ſwifl'er 'him 'he Wind; he
goe: flower 'him a Tormſe.
. By
_ Rhetoric ;. or, the Art yf Perſuafion; .18-7
By Iron), -we ſpeak contrary to our Thoughts, but 'tis diſ
vcover'd b the Tone of our Voice; as when we ſay, Robert
ira very weﬅ Man, whenwe mean a Ragm. .
By the Dopb, called Aþuſt, wemay borrow the Name of
a thing, tho' quite contrary to what we would ſignify, be
vcauſe wejcanft elfi: expreſs it; as when we ſay, an Irm Can
dleflitle, or a Sit-ver Ink-barn; _ _ 3
Theſe are the moﬅ conſiderable Trapu, and to one or q
ther of theſe, all others may be reduced. But before we diſ
miſs this Point, we muﬅ giVe a feWques, to be obſerv'd in
the uſe of them. Firﬅ, therefore, we muﬅ ule Troye: only
where we cannot expreſs ourſhlves perfectly Without them;
and, &condly, when we are obliged to ulizthern, they mufl:
have two Qulitiesz (1ﬅ,) They muﬅ be clear, and contribute
to the Underﬅanding of what we intend; (adl ,) That they
hold a Proportion to the Idea we wou'd paint to our
Real/err, or Hem-ers. . ._
A Troþe loſes its Perſpicuity_three Ways: (1.) When 'tis
too remote, not helping the Hearer to the Intention of the
Speaker 5 as to call a lewdfiouſz theSjrnr of Tour/a; the Rode
of ram/1, is nearer and more obvious, the former requiring
our Knowledge and Remembrance, that the Syr'p were
dan erous Banks of Sand on the Coaﬅ of Africa. A Me
tap or is, therefore, beﬅ taken from ſuch icnſible Objects
as are moﬅ familiar to the Eye, which images are appre
hended without En uiry or Trouble. The ill Connection
of theſe is the ſeco Thing that brings Obſcurity on the
v Memplqor, by uſing Wordszwhich are not commonly known,
but relate to Places, perhaps at the fartheﬅ Parts of the Globe,
from Terms of Art, Antiquities, or the like, which ought
to be avoided. This Connection is either Natural or Artifi
cial. That we call Natural, when thin s ſignify'd by their
Proper and Metaphorical Names, have atural Reſemblance
to, or Dependance on each other; as when we ſay, aMan
ba: Arm: of Braſi, to ſignify their Strength, this Reſem*
blance between the Trope and proper Name, we may call
Natural. The Artificial comes from Cuﬅamz a wild un
tractable Temper has by Cnflom been given to the Amb,
which makes the Name And awake the Idea of an un-_
tractable Man. r
The third Thing which renders Troye: obkure, is a too
frequent Uſe of them. Laﬅly, Trojan muﬅ always be pro;
Poxtion'd tQ ic. him She' weal? sivs: * .
5- 34'1333
188 Rhetoric; or, the ArtofPerſuaſion.
- 5. 34.. Having ſaid all'that wev thought neceſſary about
the Troper,._their Nature, Virtues, -Viccs and Uſe, we now
come to the Language of the Pafflonrz which is of peculiar
rUiE both in Orato'j and'Poet'y, t both which make uſe ot
'them in a particular manner:
' -We ſhall begin with the Exclamation, becauſe b thatour
Paſſions firﬅ fly out, and diſcover themſelves in iſcourſe.
Exolamation, therefore, is aviolent Extenſion of the Voice;
as 0 Here-vent! O Earth! good God! alas! and the like.
Douhting is the next, or Irreſhlution, is the Effect of Paſl
lion, as what ſhall I do! ſhall I appear to thtyi I once neg
lected 3- or, ſhall I implore thoſe 'who now for-ſike me? &a.
' hasCorrection is aFigure
ſinot expreſſed himbelfwhich one in Paffion,
full enough, fearing
endeavours byhea
ﬅronger Phraſe to correct that Error; as, Nor was th] Mo
ther a Goddeſſ', nor perfidious Man was Dardanus the Author
of tly Raoe, hat rugged Roch) Caucaſus brought forth, and
the Hyrcanian 1)ng nur/l thee up.
Omifflon, in a violent Paffion, permits us not to ſay all
that we would. When our Paſſions are interrupted, or
directed anorhe'r Way, the Tongue following them, pro
duces Words that have no Reference to what we were ſay
ing before; as, of all Men-meaning, the worﬅ of all Men.
Supprefflon, is a ſudden Suppreffion of the Paffion, or ra
ther the Threats of a Paffion; as- which I-- hue now we
muﬅ think aſ the preſent Matter.
Contefflon ſeems to omit what we ſhy; as. I will not ſpeak
of the Injury you have done me; I am willing to forget the
Mong you have done me 5 I will not' ſee the Contri'uanrer
'hat you make againﬅ me, See.
Repetition is made two Ways: ( 1.) When we repeat the
ſame Words, or (z.) the ſinne Thing in different Words,
The former, as-Tou deſign Nothing, Nothing that it not
wiſihle to me, what I do not fie, &e. The ſecond, tis
of our ſelve: we ran do nothing JVell, whate-ver Good we do,
i: [gy theDi-vine Graee. -*'
Redundance makes us uſe more Words than are abſolutely
neceſia , and is emphaticalz I heard thee with the/'e Ean,
I ſaw t ee with theſe Eyes.
Like Meaningr, are Words of the time Senſe, and put
together to expreſs one-Thing; as, he departed, he went out,
he': gone.
Differiption figures the Thing in' ſuch lively Colours, as
to make its Image appear before us.
Di
Rhetoric; or, the-Artof Perſuaſion. 189
Dfflribntian is a kind of Deſcriptian, in which we enume
rate the Parts of the Object of our Paſſrom as--their
Thth i: an open Srpulcher, they flatte' with their Tongue',
the Paiﬅm of Aſps i: under their Lipt; their Mouth i: fi'll of
Can-'ing and Ljn, and their Feet areſm'ft ta ſhed Blood.
oppoſite: place Contrarics againﬅ one another; as, Flat
te'y beget: Friends, Truth Enemies. '
Simile: brin'r a Likeneſs to the Thin we are ſpeaking
of-as, he ſhalfhe like a Tree placed by t e VVater-fide, &e.
Comparifim. The difference is not great between this-and
the former Figure, only this latter is more ſpri htly and
emphatic-as, thefimſſ Gold to them look: man a pale, Bow
But two Things are to' be conſider'd in Companfim; firﬅ,
that we are not to expect an exact proportion betwixt
the Partsas of
ſpeak; the_Compariſon,-
when and the
Virgil comparctes the' Subject of whichtowda
young Ligurian
Pigeon in the Claws of an Hawk; adding what relates
more to the Deſcription of a Pigeon tom to pieces by a
Hawk, .than to the Subject compar'dw The ſecond Thing
to be obſerv'd, is, That it is 'not neceſſary that the Thing
compar'd to; be more elevated than the Thing compar'dg
Haw'ea,'- as Suſhenſion
the quotedkeeps
Inﬅance fi-om' Virgil
thectHearerin ſhewe. 'mit-attentive.
ſuſp'ence, r' ' byn
Expectation of what the Speaker will cdnclude in; asl
0 God! Dark-heſ: i: no' more oppoſite taſ-fight, Frafl'm Fire,
Rage and Hntred to La-ize, Tempeflr ta Calms, Tainto Pletk
ſure, or Death to Life, than Sin to thee. -
__.
Reprgſmmtian gives a Tongue to Things inanimate, and
makes them ſpeak in Paſſron; as, Hem', thou ﬅupid Crenturez
hear the 'veryV/Z'lls of this ſhcredPile complaining of th] Wit:
kedneﬅ: Ha-ue we, thy they, ſo man] hundred Year: been can
ſecra'ted totheſarred Rite: of the Immorml God:,and 'me a: laﬅ
to hepalluted with thy Impietie: .P Have the moﬅ Valiant, and
the maﬅ V/i ſie, enter'd here with Awe and Veneration, andſhall
one ſh Wart left dare tJ tontemn the Sanffit] of this Flere? &e.
Sentmcu are but Reflections made upon a Thing that
ſurprizes, and deIErves to be conſider'd; as, Low cannot
long he conceal'd when it is, no' diffemhled where it is not.
Appiuſ; is a sentence or Exclamation, containing ſome
Sentence plac'd at the end of a Diſcourſez as," Can Mind:
Divine ſuch Anger entertain! , i
Interrogfltim _is fiequently produc'd by our Paſſions to
them we would perſuade, and is uſeful to fix the Attention
of the Hearers; as, Let me mlcyau, the Men of Athens, is
't
190 Rhetoric; or, the Art of Perſuaſion.
it worthy the Glory of our Ciy, or i: it fit that Athens, once
'he Head of' Greece, ſhouldſuh'nit to Barbarians, take Mea
ſure: from aflmign Lord' &c.
Addrefr is when in an extraordinary Commotion a Man
turns himſelf to all ſides, and addrcſlizs Heaven, Earth, the
Rocks, Fields, Thin s ſenſible and inſenſible; as, Te Moun
tain: if Gilboa, let t er' he no Dow, &e.
Prevention is a Figure, by which we prevent what might
be objected by the Adverſiiry; as, Bntjbrne will ſay, How
are th' Dead rais'd up? And with what Bad do they come 3
ſThou Fool, that which thou ſhwefl i: not gaickned, unleſs it
it, &c
Communimtion is when we deſire the judgment of our
Hearets; as, What would on, Gentlemen, do in- the Caſt?
MflUjm take other Mufl'n: than, arc.
Cow-m is the ownin of our Fault, ariſing from a Cow
fidence of Forgiveneſs o the Perſon to whom it isacknow
led d; as, I confeſs 'ry/'elf to have on'd, but! ma Man,
a who' i' human, is who: 'o an all ſxhjafl to; let him
doat i: nflom human Error caﬅ thefirfl Stone.
_n Con makes another
'd, to' obtain us grant'rhlng-
a Thingthat&ecly
we delireſiiMight
as, Ibeallow
dC<_
e Greeks
Am, Learning; IfI grant
the Brightmﬅ them
in', the th' Defori
&pin-ſinſ: inn of 'nary1
afP'IZZ/iourſe;
will not deny them my thing alſh they un 'oﬅly *m.- But
that Nation were new' eminent for the Religion of an Oath in
their Teﬅimonier, or fin- Trath and Faith, &e. And here it
has always a Sting in the Tail; but on the contrary it has
ſometimes a healing Gloſe, as, Let him 6' Sacrilegiom, In
him he a Rohher, let him he the if all thedmſ: and
Vice, ye: ﬅill he i: a good General.
By this Figure we ſometimes invite our Enemy to do all
the Miſchief he can, in order to give him aSenſe and Hor
rour of his Cruelty. 'Tis alſo common in Complaints be
tween Friends ,' as, when Anfiaur, in Virgil, complains to
his Mother :
fraud, inhuman Parcnt, in t? Scorn; }\

Root up my T'en, with Blite: eﬅr m Corn,
My Vin ard: ruin, and m sheepfbilr um,
Let loo e th] Rage, let al t Spight he ſhown,
Since thus thy Hare purſue: t e Praiſe: of 'ly Son.
Dryd. Virg.
Cirj
Rhetoric; or, the Art qf Perſuaſion. 19:
Circumlamrim is uſed, to avoid ſome Words whoſe Idea:
are unpleaſant, or to avoid (flying ſome thing which may
have an ill Effectz as, when Cicero is forc'd to confeſs that
Clodim was flain by Mila, he did it with this Addreſs:
" The Servants of Milo (ſays he) being hinder'd from afliﬅing
" their Maﬅer, whom Cladiu: was reported to have kill'd,
" and believing it true, they did in his abſence, without
ff his Knowledge or Conſent, what every body would have
'3 expected from his Servants on the like Occaſion. " In
which he avoids mentioning the Words kill, or put to Dear/1,
as Words ingrateful or odious to the Ear.
Thus much we have thought fit to ſhy of the Figurative
Expreffions of the Pafflamz but they are indeed almoﬅ infi
nite, each being to be expreſſed a hundred ways. we ſhall
conclude this Diſcourſe of the Art ofPerfimſion with afew
ReflectiOns on Style, and fewer Remarks on Other Compo
ſitions, in which the Leamcr ought to be eXerciſed.
5. 35. What we mean by Style, is the Manner oſ expreſ
fing our ſalves, or of cloathing Our Thoughts 'in Wards:
The Rules already given, as to Elotutim, or the Langmgc,
regard (as we may lily) only the Members of Diſcourſe, but
Style relates to the entire Body of the Compoſition.
The Marm- ought to direct us in the Choice of thesryle.
Noble Expreſiions render the 8'er lofty, and reprefint
Things great, and noble; but if the Subject be low and
mean, timorous Words and pompous Expreflion is Bombaﬅ,
and diſcavers Want of judgment in the 'Written Figure:
and Trape: paint the Motions of the Heart, but to make
them juﬅ, and truly ornamental, =the Paſſion ought to be
reaſonable. There'smothing molre ridiculous than to be
tranſported withoutCauie, to put one's ſelf in a-'Þieat for
what ought 'to be'argued coolly: Whence 'tis plain, that
the Marm- reguhtes the Style. When the Subject, - or
mue', is great, the Style ought to be ſprightly, full of
Motion, and enrieh'd with Figunr, and Paper; if our Sub
ject contain nothing extraordinary, and we can conſider it
without Emotion, the Styla muﬅ'bc pln'n.
The Subject: of Diſcourſe being extremely variousrin 'their
Nature, it follows, that there-muſtrbe- as great a Variety in
the Stylr: But the Ma'flers or this Art have reduc'd-thern
all to 'time Kinds, which they call the Sublimp, the Hem,
or 'the Imfiſmnr.
5-36: w
19: Rhetoric; or, tbeAr't of Perfuaſion.
. 36. Let the Subject of which wc deſign alofty Idea be
never ſo noble, its Nobleneſis will never be ſeen, unleſs we
have Skill enough topneſimt the beﬅ of its Faces.tothe
View. The beﬅ of Things have their Imperiections, the
Leaﬅ 'of which diſcover'd, may leffizn tour Eﬅeem, if not exs
tinguiſh it quitcz- We muﬅ therefore take care not to ſay
any thing in one place. Which may contradict what wc
haveſaid in another. *We oughmo pick out all that is moﬅ
teat and noble -_in our Subject, and putthat in its beﬅ
ht,, and then; our Exprefiioh muﬅ. be noble and ſublime,
capable of raiſingloſty Jdeasz. And Ftisnu'? Dutjr to obſerve
a certainUnifotmity inour Sg/Ia; tho'all we ſhy havenot
an equfil Magnifiqfficqw ſo afar at: leaRLas to;make all the
Parts. of a piece, bear -a. Correſpoudencez with the
whole. r - '. r -,_- _ . :
- The Danger..here is" leﬅ you fall into a puffy sly/le.
which ſome call Inflation, or ſwell'd; for if you ﬅretch
Thitfs beyond their. Nature, and hunt only after great and
ſoun ing 'Wot-ds, you ſeldom mind their.A eeablencſs to
the Nature of theSubject. And this has n the Fault
of many: of our modern Tragic Writers, who yet with the
_Vulgar have gain'd, Applauſetiand vſettled a Reputatiou.
s.- 37. <We come next to xhe plain Stylez and this ſimple
and plainCharacter of Writing is not without its Difficul
xies, not in the Choice of Subjects, thoſe being 'always or;
dinary and common, but becauſe there is wantin in this
-Sty-le that-,Pomp-and,M
-Faults ificenee
of the Writer, at 'eaﬅ which
vfrom the oftenReader
general 'de the
of
Hearert v But on common and ordinary Subjects thcrc_ 16
little room for Eight-'s andJÞ-oper, ſi) we' muſt make showe
of Wonds Fha't are proper-and; obvious;r.r - tvv
When we call this Stjlt- ſimple. andylain, we intend not
Meamſs if Exp'efflon; 'that is. never. good, and ſhould
wa s beavoided: For tho' the Matter 0158an Ohhls
Stye have nothing of Elevation, ryct. ought mathem
guage to bez vile and coutemptihleþv .Mpb.,Expreffi0n% Mi
Vulgariſms, are to lad-avoided; and yet-all muﬅ be Clean
ffld-'Mtumi- it) a' ' -?'ct A. zt 5 AN?" _ _ \
5.;8. Theme'nor- middleffltyienonflﬅs ofi-aparmw'
tion of the Sublimron one ſilie, and of the simplieiry- of the
Plain, on the other. Vir'gil fumiſhes' us with Exaffiiflcs 9
all the three; of the Sublime in the Eneids, thelfwm
his Pnflorah, andlthe Meim (or Middle) in his Georgltf- ,
4
2. * 5. 39. Tho.
-_ i, [i ,
Rhetoric; or, the Art of Perſuaſion. 19;

5. 39. Tho' the Style of an Orator, or one that ſpeaks iu
Public, of an Hiﬅorian and Poet, are different, yetlthere
are ſome Differences in Styie of the ſame Character; for'
Him-re are ſhft and eaſy, others more ﬅrong; ſome gay,
others more ſevere, fLet us reflect on. rheDifferences. and
how they 'are diﬅinguiſh'd.
The firﬅ (Dality is WM, and that is when Things are
deliver'd with that Clear-neﬅ and Perſpieuity, that the Mind
without any Trouble conceives them. To give this Eaji'mſi
.to a St le, we muﬅ leave nothing to the Hearer's or Rea
der's &eiſionzz- we muﬅ deliver thi s in their neceſſary
extent, with chaineſ', that they may. e eaſily comprehen
ded; and hent Care, muﬅ be taken of the Fluency, and to
avoid all Roughneſs of Cadenee.
The ſecond Qrah'ty is Strength, and it is directly oppoſi
ſate to. the firﬅ; it ﬅrike: the Mind boldly, and ibrces At
tention. To render a Style ﬅrong, we muſt uſe ſhort. and
nervouz Exyreffionsz of great and comprehenſive Meaning,
and ſuch .as+ excite many Ideas. i,
The third Quality renders a Style pleaſant and florid,
and depends in part on the firﬅ; for the third is not pleas'd
with too ﬅrong an Intention. Troye: and Figure: are the
Flowers of Stylez
moﬅ abﬅruſe the firﬅ give
Thoughts; a ſeniible
Figure'v awaken ConCeption to the
our Attention.
and warm and animate the Hearer or Reader, by 'givin
them Pleaſure. Motion is the Principle of Life and Plea
ſure, but Coldneſs mortifies every thing.
The laﬅ Why is Seven: It retrenches every thing that
is not abſolutely neceſſary; it allows nothing to Pleaſure,
admitting no Ornaments or Decorations. In ſhort, we are
to endeavour that our Style have ſuch Qialities, as are pro
per to the Subject of which we diſcourſe. 1
s. 40.- Having ſaid thus much of styles, we ſhall only add
a Word or two about other Exerciſes. in which the Learner
ſhould be train'd up: The firﬅ and moﬅ general is the
writing of Letter-s. Here an eaſy and genteel way of con
veying our Mind in the ſhorteﬅ and moﬅ expreſſive Terms,
is the greateﬅ Excellence. Buſinq/i requires no Ornaments,
and a plain and ſuccinct Information is all that is requir'd.
Letters of Complement muﬅ have Gaiety, but no Affecta
tion. Enſingſir muﬅ ſhine thro' all, and a clean Expreflionz
here is no room for the Luxuriance of Fancy, or the
Embelliſhments of longer Diſcourſes. The ſame may
be ſaid of Cmdcla'm, and even _of Perſimfi'on. The molt
S poignant
194. Rhetoric; 0r,tbe Art Perſuaſion.
poignant and coercive Reaſons muﬅ be us'd, and thoſe that
by want of Native Force-xrequire the Help of Art to re
commend them, laid aſide. 5
E S S AY S have, in theſe latter Ages, mightily prevail'd;
and here, as in Letterx, all muﬅ be eaſy, free, and natural,
and written juﬅ as you think, ſometimes leaving the Sub
ject, and then returning a ain, as the Thoughrs ariſe in the
Mind. At leaﬅ this has itherto been the Practice; and
Montaigne, who has got no ſmall Reputation by this Way
of Writing, ſeldom keeps many Lines to the Subject he
propoſes: Tho' it is our Opinion, that m Lord Bacon is a
much better Patternz for indeed they eem to us to be
ſudden Reflections on ſome one particular Subject, not
very unlike the common Themes given to Scholars in the
Schools, with this difference, that the Author of theſe is
ſuppos'd to have gain'd much from Obſervation and Re
flection on thoſe Heads, and that therefore his Diﬅoveries
may be of Value'z whereas the propoſing ſuch particular
Moral Subjects to Boys, is r uiring Impertinencics from
them, who have no Fund of O &rvation to furniſh out the
Entertainmenr. '
- As for the Subjects of Poetical Exerciſee, we have given
'ſufficient Rules for them, in our Art of Pomy.
The End of the Art of Perſuaſion.

(195) 'i .
L O G I C;
The ART JREAs-ONING.
'PAlt'r I.
c H A P. I. T
Of Particular I D E A S.
O'GIC is the Art of Reaibning. The Art is diviL
ded into four Parts; the firﬅ treats of Idus; th'
ſecond of judgment-r; the third of Method; and
the faurth of Reaſoning, or Argumematian. _
An Idea; in General, we define _172e immediate OZ'ct-'f
of 'be Mind; or that Though: or Image of my Thing w zch
it immediateþ ſet &gin-e the Mind. * _
All Idea: becomezthe Objects ofour Mind, or are pra
ſented. ſivlfe
which to 'chil-'Senſatianz
the Judgmentorbybythe
thePerception
Meditationof
ofthe
theSenſcsh
Mind ;*
Which we 'are
1', Ideaſi: call Reflection. -
either Simple or Compound. ' We call rthoſe'
simple, in which
itſiſelf cannot the any
diſcover moﬅ'Parts,
ſubtle orPenetration
Plurality ,- ofandtheweMind,
call"
thoſe Compounded which are made up, or compos'd ofhvo
or more of thoſe which are Simple. Examplcs of both we
ſhall ſee hereafter; '
2.. There are Idea: ofSubﬅance-e, we know not what oh.
flute Subject, in which there are the Properties of Things
which we know; and him: of Made: or Manners, which are
the anlitie: or 'At-tribute: of Subflantes, which we cannot
conceive capable
. There of ſuhfiﬅing
are vcertain alone between
Relation: without theirSnbſlamer.
subﬅance: and _
SuZﬅnntes; Made: and Moder; and Made: and Subﬅamey; the
Confideration of one including the Cſſonſideration of the o
ther; from whence theſe Relation: derive that Name; _
4.. There are Idea: which are to he conſider'd as the le.
mages of ſomethingExiſtent, sand which convey themſelves
2- to,
'196 Logic; er, ill! Art of Reaſomng..
10, and fix themſelves in the Mind, without an Operation
or' its own. But there are other; which by the Miadara
join'd to new Idea: at Pleaſure, and ſeparated from them
by Abﬅraction. '
ſ. Farther, there are Idea: of a larger, or leſi extent, or
join'd to more or fewer Idear, whence we call them Sin-
gular, Particular, or Unl-unſal.
6. There are ſome Idea: that are 'len and plain, and o'
thers that are obſhun. All clear Idea; are ſimple, as are thoſe
of the compounded, all whoſe Parts are diﬅinctly plac'd be
fore, or repreſented to, the Mind. _
7. There are ſome Idea: that are pea/act, or adequatez and
Others that are inadequate, or imperfect. Thoſe we call per
fect, or adequate, which contain all the Parts of the Things'
whoſe Images they are, and offer them ſo to the Mind; thoſe
are inadequate, or imperflct, which only contain and offer
'ſome Parts of the Thin s of which they are the Images.
We callIdea: Images of t e Things, becauſe there are ſome
"Things without us, which are like, and anſwer to them.
To theſe particular Head: of Idea: all others may be teff
fer'd. ) Theſe therefore we ſhall particularly examine.
A; "-
2- C'HA
Offlmple P. II.
Wound IvEAſis.1
1. ERY manyof theſimple-Idea: we have ficm, or b our'
Suffer, and very many from the Attention 0 the
Mind turn'd
2..,,To inwards
the firﬅ on it refer
We muﬅ ſelf, without re d to Senſhtim
all our Stagnation-r; 'the chieE
of whiCh may be reduc'd to five Clafl'ee, arms, or Heads.
according to the fi-ue Parts of the Body, 'which are affected
by them. For they come to us bythe Means of our Eyeſ,
our Earr, our Noﬅ, our Tongue or Palate, and by the Tour/7,
or Fat-ling of all the other Parts of the Bod . Colours arc
ſimple Idea: (we mean Colours themſelves, and diﬅinct from
colour'd Bodies which have Parts) as Blue for Example, Of
which the Mind can diſcover no Manner oſv Parts.
3. The Idea: of Sounds are likewiſe ſimple, as well as
thoſe of Smell, Taﬅe, Touch. We ſþeak here of'an fwþle
particuIar Senſation conſider'd diﬅinctlzy Horn 'the Varicty
of Sounds, Smellr, Taﬅes, and dem. Thus-if anYOl!e
ſmell to a Roſe without mixing any other Scent he will
have a Senſatian in which be can diﬅinguiſh no Parts," an
this holds of the other Sergſativm.
' 4.. Pain
i
Loglc; or, the Art of Reaſomng. 197
4. Pain and Pleaſhre are the chief, and moﬅ eminent-fen
atian: we have, whoſe Kinds and Sorts vary according to
the Part or Member affected; but there are no Parts to be
diﬅinguiſh'd in Pain and Pleaſare, which we can conceive
to be ſeparated from each other. We ſpeak not oſ the Dus'.
ration of Pain or Pleaſure, which evidently has Parts, but
oſ the ſimþle Senſation qf a prick with a Needle, for Exam
le none can conceive any Parts of it, the concourſe of
which ſhould produce Pain.
ſ. In the Idea of Motion, which comes to us by out:
Senſes, when conſider'd in general, we can conceive no Parts,
tho' we may of its Dararion, of the Line it deſcribes, and
its Quickneſs or Slowneſs.
6. Thus in many ſimple Meat, which ariſe From Rcfleffion,
we ſhould in vain ſeek for Parts, as in Valitian, or W'z'llizzg,
&c. The ſame may be (hid of Exi/Zence conſider'd in gene
ral ,- tho' there are viſible Parts in the Dararion.
7. Compound Ideax, we have ſaid, contain or comprehend
ſeveral ſimple Idus, which may be diﬅinguiſh'd and Repa
rately conſider'd. Thus the Idea: of all Bodies are compound;
becauſe in them we can conſider ſome Parts without the 0
rhers, or diﬅinctly from the others. If we conſider aBody,
we clearly and plainly diﬅin uiſh the big/yer- and lower, the
fbre and hind, the lefl and rig t Paft of it; and can diﬅinct
ly think of one without the others. If we conſider the Idea
of Pity, we find that it conſiﬅs of the Idea: of Miſe'y, oſ a
miſerable Perſon, and of one who grieves for him. Such
are the Idea: of all Virtue: and Vieex, tho' they come to us
by Reflection of the Mind.
8. Tho' we ſhall not, in this Part of Logic, or theArt of
Reaſhning, treat of thoſe Judgment: we paſs upon Ideas, yet
it is of importance to remember never to pretend to deſine
what cannot be defin'd without making it more obſcurez For
a Definition ought always to be made uſe of to make the
Subject of our Diſcourſe more plain_ and clear, than-the
bare Nameof the Things wouldamake it; but in ſimple Ideax,
we cannot better explain them, than by their very Name,
or ſome Synonymous Words, the Knowledge o_t which de
pends on the Tongue we uſe, and the Senſe of h1m_ we ſpeak
to. The contrary Method has made the Arifletelzam fill us
with unintelligible jargon; as defining ofMotxon. they fly,
'tis an Act of a Being in Pomr,- a: in Power,- nor have the
Modern: much mended the Matter, by defimng, it the Change
Qf simmz'm, The firﬅ labougs with inexplicable Obſcurityi.
4 3
198 Logic; or, 'be Art lffReaſoning.
* and the Terms of the latter are not more clear or known,
than the Word Motion it ſelf.
9. Definition, indeed, has only to do with compound Idea:
for it's an Enumeration, or reckoning up of the ſeveral firm'
ple blew, of which that conſiﬅs. þ
C H A P. III.
Of I D e A s of Subﬅances and Medes.
t. ANorher ſort of Idea: are thoſe of Such/Lente: and Made-r,
for we conſider all Things ſcparately, and by them
ſizlves, or elſe as exiﬅing in other Things ſo much, that we*
can't allow them Exiﬅence without 'em. The firﬅ we call
Subﬅa'zcer and Subjects, the latter Made: and Accident-5; as
when we reflect on I/Vax and ſome Figure, as- Roundneſs, we
'Conſider theV/ax as aThing which may ſubſiﬅ without that
Roundncſs, or any other particular Figure, we therefore
call th ASubﬅame. On the contrary, we conſider Round
rieſ: ſo inherent to the When or ſome other Subﬅanee, that
it can't ſubſiﬅ without it, for we are not capable of con
ceiviug Roundnefl diﬅinctly and ſeparately from a round
Body. This therefore we call a Made, or Acridmt.
2.. We always conſider Bodies cloath'd. as I may ſay, in
ſome certain Medes', except when we reflect on the Abﬅract,
or General. The Subﬅancer the Grammariam expreſs by
the Name; the Made: may be render'd by the Qulin'm,
as Vſax and Roundngfl is expreſs'd by round Mx.
3. We have beſides, certain compound Idem, which con
, ſiﬅ only of Made-s; and Others which are compounded, or
made up only with a ſort of Species, or kind of Moles.
As a Furlang, as far as it expreſſes a Menſuration of the
Roadz for it comprehends uniform Medes, as Face: or Feet:
Others conſiﬅ of ſeveral ſorts of Medes; as the Idea of Pity,
which has been already defin'd, and of the other Paſſions,
and Virtues and Vices.
4.._ We have, farther, Idea: com ounded of a Collection
of SubﬅanCes of alike Nature, ſu is the Idea of anArmy,
of a City, of a Flee/25 confiﬅing of many Soldierr, citizens,
or. Sheep, &te. or they are compos'd of a Collection of Idea:
ot' unlike Subﬅances, ſuch is the Idea.- of the Matter of
which a Horſe, a Ship, or a Deſhrt is compounded. And
in theſe Idea: we conſider not only Subﬅances, as they are
Iluch, but alſo as attended with-certain Medes, which pra
iucc Idea- xhn an: YFFY WEIZ' sempouujfl- * w
r- I?
Logie; or, the Art qf Reaſoning. 199
5. We define Subﬅance in general, fling: ſubflfling 5]
themſelves, but then they are conſider'd abﬅractly, or with
out regard to any particular Subﬅance actually exiﬅin 5
and in that Senſe it is ſufficiently plain what is meant iy
the WordSubﬅz-meez but ſince there is no Subﬅance conſi
der'd in general which has any Exiﬅcnce, but in our Iduu,
where we conſider exiſting Sad/fanne, the Matter is alter'd.
The Idea: of ſingle or particular Subﬅances, are very ob
' ſcure; nor do we [underﬅand any thing by their ſeveral
Names, but certain we know not what unknown Subjects,
in which there are certain Properties which conﬅantly co
exiﬅ'. Thus if any one ſhou'd ask what that Subﬅance is
which we call Body, we can only ſhy, that it is an unknown
Subject,
ty, in which we always diſcover Extenſim, Diviſibfli ct
and Impenetmbilitj.
6. 'Tis plain, that nothing more obſcure 'canct be meant;
than what is expreſs'd by theſe Terms, extended Subflanees.
For all that is here meant, is, that there is an unknown Sub
'ect, one of whoſe, Properties is to conſiﬅ of other unknown
Subjects, or Subﬅances plac'd cloſe to each other, and of that
Nature,
of whichthat
We we
ſay ahave
Bodnoconſiﬅs.
Idea of any
Foroneweofcannot
thoſe Subﬅances
affirmſi of
any Idea, that it is the, den of any one Subﬅance, of whiche
Body is compos'd, ſince we have no Idea of corporeal Sub
ﬅances, which does not comprehend or contain innumerable
Subﬅances. If therefore we expreſs what we underﬅand by
the Name of corporeal &ib/fame, we muﬅ ſay, that it is a Com
pqſition afun/mown Beingr, flame of whq/e Propertie: 'me know.
7 . The ſame we may ſay of other Subﬅances, as of the spi
ritual (we examine not here whether or not there be an
more) as whoever will conſider with Attention, and no: ﬅif
fer himſelf to be amus'd and deceiv'd by empty Words,
will experience. We find in our Mind various Thoughts,
whence we form the Idea of Spirits; but we are ignorant
of what that Subject is, in which theſe Thoughts are;
8. It will be of great Uſe to as perfect a Knowledge of
Things as we are capable of obtaining, to diﬅinguiſh inv
thoſe Subjects which we call Subﬅances, thoſe Things, with
out which we can conceive thoſe Subjects or Modes from
thoſe without which we cannot conceive them. For when
we think with Attention on thoſe Subjects, we ſhall find
that there are ſome Thin s ſo eſſential to them, that we
can't deprive them of, wit out changing their Nature; and
otherflew'
as Thingsitswhich
Haut:may be" raisen
' ' away
M from
' the awe-'t
Subject,
zoo Logie; or, the Art d'Reaſonin'g.
9. Made: are commonly divided into internal, which we
conceive, as it were, inherent in the Subﬅance; as, Round
'a 5, &e. Or external, as when we ſay any Thing is deſir'd,
lov'd, beheld, and the like; which we call Relations.
10. There are likewiſe Modex, which are alſo Subflancex;
as, Apparel, Hair, &ce. without which the Squect can ſub
fiﬅ, and they can likewiſe be without the Su ject. As for
theſe Ideaz, which are compos'd of Made: and subﬅance,
varioufiy join'd together, ſome are call'd real, as being the
Idea: ofThings that either really do, or are at leaﬅ believed'
to exiﬅs others rational, that is, when the Mind compound:
various Idea: together; as when we conſider a Stick reach
ing up to the Stars themfilves.
ll. In compound Idea: we ought carefully to obſerve
how manifold, and of how many Idea: they conſiﬅ 5 as
we ſhall more plainly ſee upon the Head of the Obſcurity
and Perjþimitj of IdEM'.
CHAP. IV'.
OfREI-ATlONS.
o
1, Here are, beſides Snbﬅames, and Made: which are
inherent in Subflances, certain external Denomina
tions, which tho' they add hething to the Subﬅance, yet
depend on ſome Mode or Manner of it; and theſe we call
Relations, by which the Conſideration- of one Thing in
cludes the Conſideration of another. Thus when we call
an one a Father, on this Expreſſion depends this, that he
w om we call- ſo has begot Children, and ſo comprehends
and includes the Conſideration of Children.
a. Every Idea,-confider'd in a certain manner, may be
the Foundation of aRelatizm, that is, may lead us by ſome
Property of its own to the Confideration of ſome other Idea.
So that all Exiﬅence may be divided into the Creator and
the Creamre; for the Name of the Creator includes the
Thought of the Creaturez and ſo on the contrary.
3. Relation: are innumerablez for they may be between
Subﬅances and Subﬅances, Modes and Modes, Medes and
Subﬅances, Relations and Subﬅances, Relations and Medes,
Relations and Relations; for there is nothing that cannot
excite our Thoughts on ſomething elſe, ſince we can com
pound or join our Id'u together as we think fit. But avoid
ing too nice a Sgrugny, we only Wake our Obſerva
'\ '\ < - tions.
Logic ;- or, the Art qf Reaſonmg.
ſi 'ſons on thoſe oſ the greateﬅ moment, which regard Re
apt,
lations conſider'd in general. - ' 4
4.. We very often conſider Idea: as ab alnre, or including'
no Relations, which yet have neceffiri y a Reference to o-.
thers. Thus we cannot call any thing Great or Large, but
that the Idea which anſwersthat Word,muﬅ be relative. For
we call thoſe Things great, in a certain Kind, which are the
greate/i among thoſe Things of the ſame Nature, which we
have known. We call that Hill or Mountain great, which is
as great as any Hill that We have ever ſeen. That Kingdom
is large, which exceeds the Bounds of our own Country, or
of thoſe Countries we have known, &a. That Tower we
call high, which is higher than moﬅ of the ſame kind that
we have known. In Number we call that great, than
which there is not many greater in the ſame Kind: Thus
ſixty Thouſand Men in Arms in Greece We call a great Ar
my, becauſe Greece ſcarce eVCr had a greater; but it had
been little in Parſ', where much larger were aſſinnbled.
Thus likewiſe as to Time', we call it lon or ſhort with Re-
ference to anotherp We cal] a hundre Years Life, al
Life; fame calls his E r o) ſhort, becauſe his Anoeﬅors
liv'd ſo man lo er; ichneſs, Pain, and Expgctation, make
that Time eem ng, Which to one in Action, Health, or
Pleaſure,
weak ſeems "an"
Woman, ſham- That- Burthen
cleſ Manjtlie isheavy
Sickly, to a Child,
whichſiislight a;
to a,
Man in Health and Vigour. Thus in the Ornaments of
the Mind, we call. that Wit' great, that Learning profound,
that Memory tenacious, that Ptudenee conſummate, which
we find excel, aﬅer the Manners of our Countr , all than.
we know among'us; tho' by 'Foreigners they may thought'
but ofi a moderate fine. Thus' Great Learning has awry
differeht
and of an Sigm'fieation-in
ignorant Perſon z-the
it isMouth'of. a Man
of a much largerofextentctin
Letters
the former, than in the latter. ſ
5'. In ſhort, all the Modes both of Mind and Body that
admit of Encreaſe or Diminution, are the Prototypes of
Relative Hem. But this is to be obſerved with the utmoﬅ
Attention, becauſe their Number is very large, which if
conſounded with ab alau Ideas, will 've riſe to great Er
rors, and render us incapable of und'erfliding the Diſcourſe.
of others. '
6. Here we muﬅ," in ſhort, remark, that the Jud ments
that we make are only the Perceptions of the Relation: be
tWeen various Idea: 5 in which Relation: our Mind does ac-j
guieſce,
zoz Logic; or, the Art of Reaibning.
uieſce. Thus when we judge that two times two make
tour, or that two times two do not make five 5 our Minds
obſerve the Relation of Equality which is between two
. times' two and Four, and the Inequality which is between
two times two and five; which Perception, as evident, the
Mind does ac uieſce or is beﬅ fitisfy'd in, or gives it ſelf no
farther Tr0ub e to ,conſider of' its Truth. But of this more
at large in the ſecond Part.
7. Reflſming alſo is a like Perception of' the Relation:
join'd with that
act Perception of Acquieſcence
the Relations of the Mind.
which But it various
are among is not
Things, but of thoſe Relations which the Relations them

filves have among themſelves; Thus when we gather from
this, that 4, is a ſmaller Number than 6, and that twice 2.
equals 4., that twice 2.' is' aleſs Numberthan 6 5 we perceive
theRelation of Inequality, 'which is between the Relation
of the Number twice 2. and 4., and the Relation of 4. and 6 z
aequieſeingin which Perception, we Conclude it aleſs Num-.
b'er than 6. But this belongs to the' third and fourth Parts.
Yet we thought it proper to make this ſhort Remark here,
that the Diﬅinction we brought in the beginning of vari
ous Relations ſhould not be look'd on as empty and vain ;
for unleſs we retain-this, we 'know not what our Mind does
'n ud ' 'and Reaſohing. All our Marþmay be referr'd'
tb nb times, Made:,=andRelatia>ir.
I
C H A Pct. ſſVct.
Of I r) e A s which are oflſier'd to the Mind without'
- any Operation of- z'n- own; and of thoſe,- in the
. forming which, ſlime Operation of the Mad does
'-t'mer*vene.- -' --" '1
rf. Here are certain Idea: which are onl'y conſider'd b
the Mind, without any manner of addition; ſuch'
are all Simple Idus, 'which have not any Dependance on the
Will and 'Pieaſure 'of the Mind, and' in ſpight of that, are
alwa s the ſamezſ, Thus the'Mind'has no Command over
Plea ure, or Pain. Now the other ſimple Idebs, which we
have enumerated before, we find to be.ol' that nature, as
that if' the Mind endeavour to detract any thing from them,
they utterly periſh, and eeaſe to be; nor can it add any
thlngz without thedcﬅruction of their Simpiicity. '
a. To
Logic; or, the Art of Reaſoning. no;
'2. To this ſame Head we may refer thoſe Compound Idea:
which offer themſelves to the Mind, without our thinkin
of the Matter, ſuch as the Ideas of Things that exiﬅ; which
Thingsin affect
ſelves our Senſes, and excite
our Mind. v , certain Ideas
' ofſ them-v
. '
3. Theſe Idea: are term'd Real, becauſe they proceed from
Things exiﬅing without us. On the contrary, there are
other Compound Ideas, which are not brought to the Mind
from abroad, but are compounded by that, according to
its Pleaſure. Thus, by joining the Ideas of half a Man,
and half a Horſe, the Idea of aCentnnr is form'd; which is
done in no other manner, than by the Mind's Will to have
'the image of aCenmnr the Objcct of its View; or con
ſidering at once the Body of a Man from the Waiﬅ to the
Head, and the Body of a Horſe with the Head and Neck
cut off.- For ſuch is the Force of the Human Mind, that
it can join whatever is not contradictory, by its Contem
plation, and reſcind whatever it pleaſes. Theſe Idus, thus
W-a'u<-1TIF"R' compounded by the Mind, we call Phanmflic. _
4.. As the Mind can conſider thoſe Things together,
- 'which in Reality, and without it ſelf are not join'd togef
ther in one Exiﬅence; ſo can it conſider thoſe Things ſepa
rately, which do not in Reality exiﬅ ﬅparately. And this
ſort of Contemplation, which is call'd Abflmction, is of
eat Uſe to the accurate Conſideration of Compound Idus,
For we cannot, if they conſiﬅ of a larger number of Parts.
diﬅinctly ſee them in our Mind all together; 'tis therefore
an Advanta to us,_ that we can examine ſome of them ſe
parately, a ittle delaying the Conſideration of the reﬅ. ,
ſ. Abﬅraction is made principally three ways; Firﬅ, Our
Mind can conſider any one Part of a Thing really diﬅinct
from it, as a Man's Arm, without the Contemplation of the
reﬅ of his Body. But this is not properly Abflraction, ſince
the Arm is, without the Interpofition of the Mind, ﬅpa- '
rated diﬅinct from the Bony, tho' it cannot live, that is, be
nouriſh'd, encreaſe, or, move in that Separation.
6. Serondly, We think by Abflraction of thelzlode of a Sub
ſhmce, omitting the Subﬅanceit ﬅlfi or when we ſeparately
conſider ſeveral Modes, which ſubſiﬅ together in one Subject.
This Abflrnction the Geomerrieiam make uſe of, when the
conſider the Length of a Body ſeparately, which they c l
a Line, omitting evidently the Conſideration of its Breadth
and Depth. And then its Length and Breadth together,
which they call the Surface: By the ſame Abflractim we
. can
La
&04 Logic; or,'-tbc Art Qf Reaſomng.
can diﬅinguiſh the 'determination of a Motion, towards
what Place directed, from the Motion 'it &iſ.
" 7. fiirdlj, We, by Abflraction, omit'the Made: and Rela
tion: ofany particular Things, iſ from it we form a Univer
jkl Idea. Thus, when we would underﬅand a Thinking Be
ing in general, we ather from our Self-Conſciouſneſs what
it is to Think, an , omitting the Conſider-anon of thoſi:
Thin s which havea peculiar Referrince to the Human Mind,
We ' of a thinking Being in general. By this means par
ticular. Idea:webeCome
8. That general.
may not *
err in'judgingſi_ of' the Idea: mention'd
'
in this Chapter, we muﬅ make theſe Obſervations. Firﬅ,

That thoſe Idea: which'offer themſelves to the Mind with
out any Operation of its ovim, muﬅ of neceſſity be excited
by ſome external Cauſe, and ſo are plac'd before the Mind
as they are. But we muﬅ take heed that we do not think
that there is always in thoſe Things themſelves which excite
thoſe Idear, any thing like them, becauſe it may happen
that they arelnot the trtie and real Cauſcs, but only the Oc
'cafions by which thoſe Id'as are produc'd. And this 'SUſPie
cion ought to heighten by what we exPetience in out Dreams,
when by tho occaſion of the Motion of the Brain there are
the Images of Things ſet before "us, which are not preſent
themſelves, and often have no Exiﬅence in Nature. Whence
'we may gather from ſuch like Ilus, that the Cauſe or o:
um' of their Production has an external Subfiﬅence, and
' ſnot
i '9.inthe
Such Mind.
, As to thoſeIJei's which are compounded b
the Mind, weeaſily imagine, firﬅ, that the Original: of ſuch
Idea: may poſſibly ſomewhere exiﬅ ,- and then, .that they
really "do, unleſs we are maniſoﬅly convinc'd by Experience,
that they never did really exiﬅ conjunctly, and ſb join to
- ether. And on the contrary, that thoſe Things which the
ind conſiders ſeparately by Abﬅradim, do really exiﬅ in
that ſeparate State: As the Mathcmatical Rain: without
any Parts z ,and Line; conſiﬅin only of thoſe Point: join'd
together, with0ut Breadth or Be , nnd Smflcc: without
Depth; whereas Demonﬅra'tion Ws the contrary, and
thoſe Terms are only made uſe Of by the Mathematicians
for the ſake of the inﬅruction of the Learners of that Art.
10. We muﬅ here farther warn you againſt another Er
ror too frequent among theScbool-Mm, that is, not to make
thoſe really diﬅinct Things, or different Beings, which we
have diﬅinguiſh'd by Abflractiom " ' ' '
Logic; or, 'be Art QfReaſoning. 50;
CHAP. Vl.
Of Indi-vidualr, Particular and Univerſlzl
I 0' E A s.
r. . HAT we have ſaid of Abflractiom leads us to the
Conſideration of Idus, as they are individual,
particular, and univerſal, for they are made particular.
and univerſal from individual, by Abﬅractionz in which
matter We proceed in this manner.v When we conſider
ourſelves, in onrv Mind, or any one Man before us, then
- We have th'e Idea of an Indi-uidual, or an Indi-uidual Idea.
But if we omit thoſe Things which are peculiar to us, or
that one Man, and conſider what is common to us and
many others, ſuch as to be born in the iame Country, to
be or the ſame Party, and the like, then is the Idea of ſome
Particular Nation, or Family, &I. plac'd before us: But,
laſtly, if omitting theſe particular Diﬅinctions common to
us and a certain Number of Men, we conſider what is com-_
mon to us and all Mankind, we have then an Uni-uerſal Idea.
2.. The Names that ſignify individual Ideas, are call'd
proper,- as, Alexander, Ceſar. But thoſe which ſignify
particular and univerſal Idear, are call'd Appellatiee, or_
Common,- as, a Briton,
3 . Farther-We a Chriﬅian,in athoſe
may diﬅinguiſh Man.Idea: certain Pro-ſi
perties which are conﬅantly united in them, and external Sub

ject: agreeable to thoſe Idear, or ſuch as the Idea: agree with.
Thus in the Idea of Man wediſcover or ſeeathinking Mind and
aBody conſiﬅing of certain Organs; but [his Idea agrees with
the Inhabitants of Europe, Aſia, Africa and America.
C H A P. VII.
Of the Perſþiruityand Oiſiurity Qfſſ I o E A s;
LB EFORE we can paſs any certain (Judgment of

Idea, it is firﬅ neceſſary that it ſhou' be clear or per
ſpicuom, otherwiſe if we ſhou'd happen to paſs a right
Judgment on aThing that is not known, or at leaﬅ not ſuffi
cienthi clear, it muﬅ be attributed to Chance, and not to
Knowied . The Obſcurity and Ciearneſs of Idea: are there
£ore wort Y our Confideration
' T in the
ſi ' Art qf Reajimirzg.a V
206 Logic ; ar, 'be Art of Reaſoning.
a. We call that a clear Idea, when all it comprehends is
ſo diﬅinctly plac'd before our Mind, that we can eaſily di
ﬅinguiſh it from all Others.
3. All ſimple Idea; are clear, ſuch asScn/htiom; ſuch there
fore is the Idea of Light.- For when we have that Idea before
us. we vſhe all that is in it, nor can we confoundit with any
other. We may ſay the ſame of Sounds. Scents, Taﬅes, Plea
ſure, Pain, &a. which can never be confounded or mingled
with each other. And theſe Smſatiam encreaſe in their Clear
neſs, in proportion to the Livelinefi: of their ﬅrikin on the
Organ proper to them; for b how much more ve ement
ly the Mind is ﬅrook, wit ſo much the more Atten
tion it applies to the Subject, and ſo this lively Idea is more
clearly diﬅinſtgmple
4. Theſe uiſh'd[dear
fromareallalſoothers.
perſpicuam or clear, which the
Mind receives without the Interpoſition ofthe Body: Exam
ples of which we have given under the Head oſflmfle tom
pounded Idear. But as we can conſider the Parts of a com
pound Idea ſeparately, ſo we view them ſingly, or one by one
as ſimple Idear, of which they are compounded: Thus alſo all
dbflract Idea: are clear, tho' the Subject in which they exiﬅ
be unknown. We can in all Subﬅances, of which we know
any Properties, ſelect ſome Property, which bein by Ab
flraction ſeparated from all the reﬅ, becomes ſimp e, and by
conſequence cl'ar, altho' it exiﬅ in a Subject which we do
not know. Thus Humanity, dgenerally conſider'd, is made
a ſimple Idea, and therefore in iviſible.
ſ. But theſe ſame Idea: are often made obſcure when they
are conſider'd without Abﬅractim, together with other Idea:
that are obſcure, and co-exiﬅ in the Subject : Thus when
the Weﬅion is not, what Humanity or Rea on is in gene
ral, but what Reaſon is in Step/pen, or in Thomas, and what
is its numerical Difference.
6. Theſe compounded Idea: are clear, all whoſe Parts, or
fimpla Idea: of which they are compounded, are perfectly
known to us. But thoſe we call obſcure, of which we only
know ſome Parts. Thus when we know allthe Unit: of
which any Number conſiﬅs, wc certainly know the Num
ber; but if we have gone through but ſome of the Unitx,
we cannor know how much the whole is; and have there
fore a confus'd Idea of it.
7. Whenever, therefore, we are to judge of any Thiffg, we
muﬅ firﬅ diﬅinguiſh all its Parts, if it conſiﬅ of Parts, and
then give Judgment: Elſe we ſhould do as if we ſhou'd give
'he
Logtc; or, the Art of Reaſoning. 207
the Sum Toral of an Accompt', and not know the particu
lar Numbers or Figures which make it up. But more of
this in the Third Part.
8. But if in the Things which fall under our Conſid eration
we cannot ſufficienrly- diﬅinguiſh their Parts, and give a
certain Enumeration of them, we muﬅ then fairly confeſs,
that either they are not in the Number of thoſe Things to
which the Knowledge of Man can extend, or that it requires
more Time to examine into the Matter.
9. It much conduces to the Clear-neſt of an Idea compounded
by our ſelves or others, if the Parts which compoſe it are
always of the flame Number, and in the ſame Order; other
wiſe, if the Number of the flmple Idea: of which it's com
pos'd, can be increas'd or leſſen'd, or their Order inverted,
the Memory, and ſo the Mind, is confounded. Thus ifanv
one has with Care caﬅ up an Sums, and plac'd them ih
any certain Order, as often as e has\a mind to remember
them, he eaſily does it, if there has Been no Abﬅraction
or diſplacing in the Accompt. But on\the contrary, the
former Computation and Diſpoſition is deﬅroy'd, it' the
Numbers are diﬅurb'd, and thrown out of their Places.
10. In ſhort, the Nature of Perſpimity or Clen'nefi, is ſuch
when it is at its height; that is, compels our Aſſent. We
cannot have theleaﬅ doubt but that Pleaſure isdifferent from
Pain, or that twice Twa make Four. On the contrary, we
find aPower in our Minds of fuſpending our Judgment when
there is any Obſcurity in the Ideas. But 'tis certain, that
we often raſhly yield our Aſſent to obſcure Idem. But ﬅill
we have Liberty to deny it; which we cannot do to an
Idea which has a compleat Perſpimiry or Clmmeﬅ.
C H A P. VIII.
Of Adeguate and Inadequate, or Perfefl and Im
perfect I D r; A s.
1. E have obſerv'd in the firﬅ Chapter, that Idea:
are the Images of Things which 'are without us,
by the Force or Occafion of which they are excited in us,
but they may be the Images of the whole Thing that ex
citcsthem, or only of a Part. When they repreſent the whole,
they are call'dAdeune, or perfect; when but a Part, they are
call'd Inadequate, or imperfect. Thusif we ſhe onlythc ſquare
Surface of a Cube, then the Idea of a ſquare Figure, not
T a - of
208 Logic ; or, the Art Of Reaſoning."
or' aCube, is inour Mind; which, therefore, is callid an imit
qume or imperfect Idea. On the contrary, if we behold a Tri
angle drawn on a Piece of Paper, and think of a Triangle in
Plane, we have an ndequme or perfect Idea in our Mind.
2.. All ſimple Idcas are adequate or perfect, becauſe the Fa
culty (heit what it will) that excites them, repreſents them
entire. Thus the Pain that we feel ſignifies, that there is ſome
Faculty of ſome Being without us, which excites that ldea in
us againﬅ our Will. But we muﬅ proceed no farther, For a
jImpIe Idea repreſents 'ſimple object, but it does not inform
us where it is, or whether that Faculty be united to any
others. We may therefore, without Fear of Error, gather
from any Senſation, that there is ſomething out of our Mind
which is by Nature adapted to excite it in us.
3. The Idea; of Made; are alſo ndequa-te or perfect, except of
thoſe Made: which are likewiſe Subﬅances. For when we un
derﬅand noMode: ſeparately exiﬅing, they are only conſider'd
by us ſeparatcly from the Subﬅances by way of Abflmctiw 5
but all abﬅract Idea: are ndequan or perfectdſimce they repreſent
all that Part ofthe Subject which we then conſider. Thus the
Men of Rounds-ſir is Perfect or adequate, becauſe it offers to our
Mind allthat is in Roundmſr in general. The Idea of aTriangle
inv general is Me nate or perfect, becauſe when it's before my
Mind, I ſee all rim is common roTriangles that can be.
4. Of the ſame kind are allIdezu, of which we know no
original or externalObject really exiﬅing out of' them, by the
Occaſion or which thoſe Idea: are exeited in us, and ofwhich
we think them the Images. Thus, when a Dog is before
us, it is the external Object without us, which raiſes the
Idea in our Mind; but the Idea of an Animal in general,
has no external Object to excite it, 'tis created by the Mind
it ſelf, which adds to, and detractsjrom it whatever it
pleaſizs; whence it muﬅ of neceſſity be adequate or perfect.
> 5', But here again, we muﬅ take heed of what we have
before caution'd, that is, that _we do not ſuppoſe that there
are any ſuch Objects really exiﬅing without us, becauſe the
Mind has been pleas'd to entertain it ſelf with the Idea: : For
that wou'd be as if a Painter that had drawnzaCe'mm', or
Hundred-handled Eunlades, ſhou'd contend, that there were
ſuch Being: really exiﬅent in Nature.
_ 6. The
which are Idus oſ-allrSubflances
not formid are imdrquate
at the pleaſure or imperfect,
of the Mind, but ga-ct
ther'd from certain Properties which Experience diſcover-s in
them. This is ſufficiently evident from what we have ſaid
. of
Mad m
Logic; or, 'be Art of Reaſonmg. 209

ofSubflance: in the third Chapter. For there we have ſhown
that we only know ſome of the Properties of Subﬅanees, not
all ,' and therefore their Idea: muﬅ be imperfect or inadequate.
Thus we know that Silver is white, that it can be melted, and
be diminiſh'd by theFire as it melts; that it can bedrawnup
toWire, and diſſolv'd by Aquafbrtir, &e. but we are wholly
ignorantof the inward Diſpofition or Conﬅitution of the Par
ticles of which Silver conſiﬅs, and from whence thoſe Pro
perties proceed. Thus the Idea of Silver not repreſenting to
the Mind all theProperties of Silver, is inadequte or impe'rj
fact.7. Here the reateﬅ Danger is, leﬅ we confound inaa'e-.
quart or imper ect Idea: with the adeqnate or perfect. For
we are too apt to fancy, that when we know a great many
Properties of any Thing, and cannot diſcover any more by
all our Induﬅry, we have the whole Subject. Thus ſome
ingenious Men of our Times, imagin'd they had diſcover'd
all. the Properties of the Mind, becauſe they cou'd find no
thing in it but Thoughts, and therefore ſiid, the Mind was
only a Thinking Sabflanre; and ſo they contend that there
is nothing elſe in Body but Extcaſion, Impenetralility, and
Di-uiſrbiliry, becauſe they cou'd diſcover nothing elſe,- but
they cou'd never yet ſhew us what thoſe Subflanm were.
whoſe Properties were to think, to have Parts, (fir-r. There
is no Exiflencc of Subﬅance in general; and tho' we un
derﬅand this Word in general, it does b no means follow,
that we underﬅand it when 'tis ſpoke 0 any particular Sub=
ject, which we muﬅ be ſure to have aparticula' Regard to.
'The Endof the Firﬅ Partof the AR r eſ

REASONING.
'-* vſaw)
Second Part of LOGICz

' v OR, ſi
The ART of REASONING.

__ _ - Wu, ,. 1: U-þ- . .{'
WJUDGMENTQ'
c H A P. I.
Of Judgment in the Mind, and expreſr'd in
- ords.
A V I N G conſider'd Idea: andtheir Properties par
ticularly, we come now-to-trert ofjudgments, in
which various Idea: are Compar'd with each o
ther. We, muﬅ firﬅ acc'urately diﬅinguiſhv the
'judgment as it is in the Mind, from theWords in which it
is expreſs'd, if we wou'd know what it is.
. 2.. judgment, as it is in the Mind and unwritten, is a Percep
tion oi the Relation that is betWeen two or more Idus. Thus
When We judge that the Sun is greater than the Moon 3 having
compar'd the two Idea: oſ the Sun and Moon, we find that
the Idea of the Sun is greater than thatof the Moon, and our
Mind perfectly acquieſces in-this Perception, nor makes any
farther Enquiry into the Matter. When we judge two Mem
bers to be unequal, by having obſerv'd the Ine uality of their
Ideas, our Mind gives it ſelf no further Troub e in their Ex
'mination in that reſpect, but only confines to its Memory,
that thoſe two Members were found to be unequal.
3. We muﬅ here obſerve, That our Mind can ive its Aſ
ſent to obﬅare Idear, as Well as to thoſe which are c ear; or ac
quieſce in a Thingasperfectly diſcover'd, which yet it has no
perfect Knowledge of, and can commit this to the Memor
as a Thing perfectly known. Thus we may judge the fix'd
Starsleſs than the Moon, by comparing the obſtareldea: ofthoſi:
Stars and the Moon, and then take it for aPoint not to be
arzu'd.
Logic; or, the Art Of Reaſoning. 21 1
ar u'd a ainﬅ, as clear and evident. The Mind has alib a Fa
cu ty o ſuſpending its Affimt, till by an accurate Examen of
the Irlem, the Subject becomes clear and evident; or if it be of
ſuch aNature that we cannot arrive'at ai perſpicuousPercep
tion, we continue in Doubt or Suſpencc, and commend it to
the Memory as a dubious Matter. UI'his Faculty which we
obſhrve in our Mind, of giving our Aſſent to obſmre Ideas,
or denying it, is call'd Liberty. ' _ \ '' i -
4.. But we cannot make uſe of this Faml when the Subject
of our Thoughts hAs the laﬅ and greateﬅ erſpicuity that can
be. For Example, we can by no means in the World per
ſuade ourſelves, that twice two-do notmake four, or are
equal to four; or that the Part is Hotlefs than the Whole, and
the like Maxims of the moﬅ evident Truths; for as ibon as
ever we hear them, the Mind cannot deny its Aſiimt, butneceſ
ſinily acquieſites, without finding in itſelf the leaﬅ Deſire or
Iuclination of making any farther Enquiry into the matter.
5'. This is ajudgmant as it is in the Mind, which when ex.
preſs'd in Words. we call a Propojition, in which ſomething
always is affirm'd or deny'd. That part of the Propoſition of
which ſomething. is affirm'd ordeny'd; is call'd the Subject;
the other Part, which is'ſaid b the Negati'onor Affirmation,
is call'd the Amibute. Thusw nwe ſay that Poverty i.- to be
reliw'd, or Povert is 'w Vice,- the Word Pmrty is the Subd
ject 5 to be relic-w' , and Vice, are the Ann'butes. But beſides
- theſe two Parts, we muﬅ conſider the Cap-la, or cannecti-ve
Word, by which, when 'tis alone, 'tis affirm'd that there is ſome
Relation between the Subject and the Amibm, but by addin
a negative Particle, that ſame Relation isdcny'd: In the preſent
Inﬅances we affirm in the firﬅ, that there is a Relation be.
tween the Idea of Poverty, and the Idea oi Relief, ſo that the
Idea of Poverty in our Mindincludes the Idea of Relief; and in
the latter Inﬅance we deny that the Idea of Poverty excites
in us the Cenſideration of any thing baſe or wicked.
6. Propoſitiom are ſometimes expreſs'd in many Words, and
ſometimes in few. Henry ragcs, is an entire Propofition, for
*tis the ſame as if we ſhou'd ſay Henry i: raging.
7. Prapoſitims are either ſimple or compound, theſimple are
exprefi'd in one Word, as, God is good: The Cempomzd in
many, as God who i: good, cannot Might in tb'MIſcr] afan
QEAE.
'2 r 2 Logic; or, the Art of Reaſoning.
C H A,P. Il.
Of Uniwrſal, Particular, and Singular
Propoſit'ions.
it. E have in the former Part divided Ideas into Uni

unſal, Particular, and singular, and ſaid that
the Words by which they were expreſs'd, might
be rang'd under the ſame Heads. Hence the Proplffitiom have
the ſame threefold Diviſion.
2.. When the Subject is unioe'yhl, or taken inits wholcEx
tent, without excepting any ſubordinate Species or Sort, or
any other Individual which is contain'd under it, then is the
Prapofltion call'd univerſal. This Unioe'falirj is expreſs'd by
the Word all, when the Propofltion isaffirmativez and by that
of mme or no, when it is negativez all Men arefm, is an
univerſal affirmative Propofition, and no Man i: free, is an
univerſal Negative.
3. But the Subject has ſome Mark or Note by which w:
ſhew, that not all the Sores or Species, or Individuals, which
are compriz'd under that Word, are meant; then is the Pro
pofition particular; as, flame Man i: free. By the Wordſome
we intimate that we do not here underﬅand all that is ſig
nifykl by the general Word Man, but that we only deſign a
Part by the Word ſhme.
4. singular or individual Prapofiriom are thoſe in which we
affirm only of ſome one individual Perſon or Thing; as, Alex
ander was choleric. Theſe Propoſitions have a reatAffinityto
the Unioerſhl: in this, that the Subject of botE is taken in its
full and whole Extent. Hence the individual Propofitions m
the common Rules of Argumentation are taken for Univerſals.
7. To paſs over the trifiing of the Schools, which make
Logic the Art of Diſputing, not Rcaſming, and have more re
gard to make the Student talk of any thing pro or am, thin
to find out the Truth, we muﬅ obſerve, that anObſervatlon
flowing from what we 'have before ſaid of Subﬅances, is of
more Importance for the Diſcovery of the Truth, the Pnll
juﬅ End of Rcajbm'ng. That is, that univerſal Propoſitions,
when of the Kinds or Species, or of the Generals and Partl
culars of Subﬅances, cannot be with an Certainty madeagrec
able to the Thin s themſelves; becau e ſince we do not knoyv
xhc Eſſcnces of t ent, we cannot
,_ affirmA. thataD
_v Subﬅanczsicl:
7 w v
Logic ; or, the Art qf Reaſomng. 'arg
which we diſcover ſome certain Attributes equally to co-exiﬅ,
are in thoſe of which we know nothing alike, or the ſinne.
As for Example, We diſcover and obſerve that there are cer
tain ſingular Attributes conﬅantly co-exiﬅing in all Men, yet
who can aſſure us whether all their Minds are alike, ſo far
as that, what difference betwixt Particulars is viſible, ariſes
from external Cauſes in reſpect of the Mind, as from the
Body, from Education, and the like; or that there is really
ſome real difference between them in the Subﬅance of the
Mind itſElf. The difference of the Wit and Genius of Men
ſeem to perſuade the latter Opinion, which is obſervablc in
two Brothers who have hadthe ſame Education; but ſince
we know not whether the Brain in both is diſpos'd in the.
ſame manner, the Diverfity of the Wit and Ingenuiry may
proceed from that Cauſe. '
5. Thus ſuch as with'Aſſurance affirm, that the inmoﬅ
Eſſence of all Bodies is the ſame; if they are in the right,
they owe that'more to Chance than to any clear Knowledge
of the Matter.- For there might be a plain difference bo
twixt the inmoﬅ Eſſence of various Bodies, althd they agree
in having ſeveral of the lame Attributes, which we do
know. We ſhon'd therefore take a particular Care, as to
theſe general Pro oſitions of subﬅances, not to give up
our Aſſent to ſuc who pretend to have a perfect and clear
Knowledge of their inmoﬅ Elſence;
' 6. The Medes, whoſe entire Eſſence is known to us, fall
under a different Conſiderationz for we may form general
Aſſertions of them, ofindubitable Truth. Hence it is that
Geometry, which is wholly converſant with the Medes, is
built on the moﬅ certain Foundation, and delivers Univer
ſal Rules of
deﬅroy'd or all Figures and Magnitudes,
oppos'd. ct which cannotct be
c H A P. ſſm.
Of 'what- ir 'Truth and Falſhood, and whether
there be any certain Differeme between them.
1. BY Reaſoning to find out the Truth, being the juﬅAim
of this our Art, we ſhall paſs over the ſeveral Claſſes
of Propoſitions ſirt down by the common Logieians, and
which are of little Conſequence in any thing, but of no'
man
a 14 Logic; ar, the Art of Reaſoning,
manner ofUſitto this more important End. We ſhall there
fore here treat of the Truth and Falſhood in general of all
Propoſitions, that we may learn to diﬅinguiſh the one from
the other.
a. That Propoſition is true which is agreeable, or anſwers
to the Nature of the Thing, of which any thing is affirm'd
or deny'd. Thus when we ſay that 4. is the one fourth Part
of twice 8,- that Propofition is true, becauſe agreeable to
the Nature of theſe Numbers. If we ſay twice 4. is equal
to twice 3, the Propoſition is falſe, becauſe it is not an
ſwerable to the Nature of thoſe Numbers.
z. Whoever will ſpeak ſeriouſly what he thinks, will
confeſs, that he neceſſarily believes that there is no Medium
between Truth and Falſhaod. _It is certain, that all Propoſi
tions, conſidefd in themſelves, appear to us either true or
falſe; for 'tis a Contradiction to be agreeable or canflntangom,
and not conſentamom and agreeable to 'In Things. There
are indeed ſome probable Propoſitions, or ſuſpected of Falſi
firy, but this has nothing to do with the Nature of Pro
' poſitions, which is in it ſelf determinately true or falſe; but
to our Knowledge, which is not (in reſpect of theſe Pro
pofitions) ſufficient to enable us to determine with Cer
tainty. Of which hereafter.
4.. There have been ibme who have aſſerted, that this
only Was certain, thar nothing war certain, and that Truth
had no Criterion or certain Mark. to be known from Taſſ
Izood in any thing elſe but that one Maxim. But ſince they
cou'd not deny but that they held this Maxim for a certain
Truth, there muﬅ be, even according to them, ſome Mark
of Truth, Joy'which they excepted that Maxim from the
Uncertainty of all other Propoſitions. And they were of
OpiniOn, that they had found the Marks of Uncertainty in
all theſi: Thin s, which the other Philoibphical Sects held
for undoubt Truthr. They therefore determin'd poſitively
of all Things at the ſame time that they pretended to doubt
of all Things, while they aſſerted, that all that was find' by
others, was uncertain. We cannot thereforezcondemn the
Pjrr/ronianr and Acaden'icr, as denying that Truth was not
at all known to us, while they thought they' did truly judge
of the Uncertainty of all Thin s, in which they were as
dogmatic and poſitive as any o the other Philoſophers.
y. But that We may ſatisfy our ſelves, we muﬅ make it
the Object of our Enquiry to know, that what we affirm of
_Tlungs is conſentaneous or agreeable to their Nature. If we
will
Logic ; or, the Art of Reaſoning. 215
will give our ſelves the Trouble to look into our own Minds,
we ſhall find, that there are ſome Things which compel
our Affint; but other Things of which we can ſuſpend our
judgment. When We clear yand diﬅinctly diſcover the cer
tain Relation between two Ideas, we cannot but ac uieſce
in that Perception, or think our (clves oblig'd to ma e far
ther Enquiries about it. Thus the Relation of Equality be
tween twice 4. and 8, is R) manifeﬅ and evident, that we
cannot entertain the leaﬅ Doubt of the Matter.
6. But ſhou'd an Man affirm, that there were Inhabitan':
in the Moon, after a hang Conſideration of this Propoſition we
ſhall find that we are by no means compel'd to give out Aſ:
ſent to it,- thc Reaſon of which is, that we do not diﬅinct
1 and plainly diſcover any neceſſary Relation between the
gloon, and any manner of Inhabitants, but that we can
doubt of that Relation, 'till it be made evident to our Un
derﬅanding.
7. Hence we ma gather, that Evideme alone can remove
all our Doubts. 'W at remains is, that we en uirc, whe
ther it follows, that that Propofition is true, o lwhich we
have no reaſhn to doubt?
8. We muﬅ firﬅ, in this (Deﬅion obſerve, that it is en
tirely ſuperfluous among Men, becauſe whatever Judgment
we make of it, we cannot change our Nature. We ne
ceſſarily give our Aſſent to thoſe Things which are evident,
and we ſhall always preſerve our Faculty or Power of doubt-_
ing in thoſe Things which are obſcure.
9. Secondly, If Evidence ſhould be found in Propoſitions
that are falſe, we muﬅ neceſſarily be compell'd- into Error,
ſince we neceſſarily give our Affimt to Evidence. Hence
wou'd follow this impious Poſition, That God, who made
us, is the Author of our Errors, ſince he has thus put us
under aNeceſſity of falling into 'em. But it is only conſiﬅent
with a wicked Nature to oblige us to be deceiv'd, of which
in the leaﬅ to ſuſpect God, wou'd be the Height of Impiety.
io. Third! , We neceſſarily love Truth, and hate Error;
for there is no body who is not deſirous of knowing the
Truth, and no body is willin ly deceiv*d. But who can
prevail with himſelf ſo mue as to ſuſpect, that we are
made in ſuch a manner by a Beneficent Deity, that we
ſhou'd love that with the greateﬅ Vehemence, which w'e
either cou'd not obtain, or not know whether we obtain'd
it or not; which is much the ſame.
1 x . Form/fly;
216 Logic; or, the Art of Reaſonmg.
as iWell
1..Fourtbly, Iſwewhich
as in thoſe ſhou'dareerrnot
in ſiſo,
Things that are
we ſhould evident,
ſometimes
in the evident Propoſuions find Contradictions, which are
commonly found ,in A thoie which treat of Things that are
obſcure. On the'contraty, evident T ' s are always a
greeable to each other, when frequenty evident Things
diſagree with thoſe that are vobſcurez- Whence we may
conclude, that Evidence cannot deceive, but Error is con
fin'd to Obſcurity. .
. u. Evidenu is', therefore, the Criterion or Mark of Truth;
and, thoſe Things we ought to think true, to which we
neceſſarily ive our Aſſent. For this is likewiſe the Markor
Characteri ic of Truth, that it neceſſarily oompels our Aſ
ſent. Whatever, therefore, we ſee evidently agreeable tothe
Things of which we ſpeak, that we muﬅ think true. On
the other hand, when we find any Propoſition evidently
contrary to the Nature oſ the Thin under our Conſide
tation, we may juﬅly declare that to e falſi.
_.. 13. But to decideperemptorily in a Matter' that is obſeure,
is very raſh and inconſiderate, as we have obſerv'd in the
Firﬅ Part, of the clearneſs or Obſturitj of Idus, which we
ſhall not repeat. But ſince thole Things which are really
obſcure, are often aſſerted to be evident, whoever wou'd
avoid that Error, ought as much as he can to ſuſpend his
udgmentz and nieely to examine whether he be not in
fluenc'd by ſome Inclination, or Paffion, or Party, when
the finding out the Truth ought to be his whole Aim;
and then he will neVer give his Aſſent to Things that are
falſe and obſcure.
CHAP. VI.
Of the fiweral Step: or Degrees of Perjþicuity in
Propqfltions, and ofVeriflmilitude, or Prabalility.
r. Ecauſe all that welbelieve is not built on n '
KBI (IICnovyledgeſ gie Philoſophets have obſe:v'z
nowe togetheſe
reduc'd evera egrees, and
two, Science all Opinion.
which howcver may be
Science is a Knowledge deriv'd from the Introſ ect'
looking into the Thing it ſelf of which we diſcoiirſhlonagd
which
Lo'gic ; o'r, the Art qfv Reaſoning. 217
Which exclude all manner' oſ Doubt. But it may ariſefrom '
a ſimple'lnt'uition or' View of the Ideas; as, , when we conſi
der this Propoſition _'lee Vſlzale irgrefflter than-a Part,
and the like; 'whoſe Truth is known by Evidence-alonc,
without any'Reaſoning on the Point. Or by dedueing cer
tain COnſequencoes, and' thoſe r'nore remote from evident
Principles, ſtich as are innumerable Gcomctrical Demon-_
ﬅrar'ions, neceſſarily deduced by a long Chain of Argumentsv _
from-their firﬅ Principles. _l_ ' - X ' I
'3. Opinionlis the Aſſcvnt of' the Mindſi to Propoſitions not __
evidently true a't the fii-ﬅ'iight, nor dCdLlC,'\i. by neccilhry r
Conſequence'from thoſe which are evidfflnLTy true, but Iiich _
as ſeem to_ _cai-ryche Faice 'of Truth. Thus "tis pxobaole
that the Writers-'of the Life of Alexander magnify'd _too
much his Exploits. 'Tis not probable, or likely, that he
ever receiv'd the 'Been oi the Amazom, or paſs'd the
Mount'ain Cuuraffls. _ ' I _
4.. Some here 'add Faith or Relief which _is' an Aſſent z
given to anyone that fells any Thing which we have not _
teen our ſevaS,
cination.v 'nor Faith
But that foundOroutBelieſ
by any Argument,
depends either or
onRatio-
ſome ,
neceſſary Concluſion'dcdue'd from evident Arguments, or_
only'on a. probable' Oþ'mion, and ſo may be referr'd to one _\
of the two Heads already mention'd. A
f. To theſe _we might add Daubting, or a doubtfld Aſiffimt,
tho' this be likewiſe a Species or Sort/of Opinion, and uſes to U
heICOni-aiffid under' the general Name of Opinion. ct .For the .
Affintisdoub'tful when _'the Probahility is Weak, which when .,
ﬅrong, produces firm opinion. But to (make theſe clearer .
to the Underﬅanding, we will make agradual Riſing from ,
Pr'obability to Evic'ience.v i . ,,
6. Since, as we haVe [ben in the former Chapter, thoſe
are call'd true Propoſitions, which' agree- with theNature v
of'the Things of'which they are ſpoken,- and thoſe proba-. _
ble, Which only ſeem t-'o 'agree to the Nature of the Thin
under Gonſideration'ſthat Probability may be greater or leſsg,
and ſo produces either a ﬅronger or weaker Opinion. _But
it is built, ſummarily conſider'd, on our Knowledge and
Experience, 'whether True or Falſe. '
7. But to riſe from the loweﬅ to the higheﬅ Probabiliry,
we muﬅ firﬅ obſerve, that the loweﬅ Degree of Probability
is built on the Relation of another where 'that is the onl
Morive or Beliefz in which yet many things are to be con
ſider'd. ' ſſ ſſ '
U_ s. If
218 Logic; or, the Art of Re-aſoning.
8. If the Perſon who gives the Relation be wholly un
knOWn to us, altho' what he tellsris not incredible, yet we
cannot give an entire Credit to him, when there are no other
Circumﬅances to add a Weight to his Narration, becauſe we
have had no other Experience of his Credibility; or whether
he be worthy of Belief or not. But if we have ſome flight
Knowledge of him, we are the more ready to believe him,
eſpecially it' he be a noted Man of great Authority with map
my, tho' we know not whether he has gain'd that Fame and
Authority b his Merits or not. Nay, we rather believe a
rich Man o indifferent Ogalifications, than a poor Man, be
cauſe we ſuppoſe the former more converſant with Perſons
ekilljd in Affairs,
and Diſcourſe full than the latter.
of Probity, eaſily An
winhoneﬅ Countenance.
our Aſſent. ſ
9. If any one with whom we are better acquainted, tells
us any thin , the more known that is, the more Inﬅances
we- have o his 'Veracity, the more ready he finds us to have
_AſſuranCe in the Truth of what he tells us, tho' he may de
ceive us even in that very Narration. 'Tis with difficult,
we can perſuade our ſaves, that we are deceiv'd by a Perſon
whom we have known generally to be a Man ot Veracity,
ſince-Men who have got a Habit of ſpeaking Truth, orany
other Habit, ſeldom act contrary to the conﬅant Diſpoſition
pf their Mind.
to._'There are beſides, various Circumﬅances which add
Force to the Teﬅimony of others; as if it were a. Thing of
that kind in which he cou'd ſcarce _bedeceiv'd, as if Men
ofVSobriety and Temper ſhou'd tell us, that they had ken,
-touch'd, and accurately examin'd ſome particular Thin , and
not with a tranſient curſory View, The Probab' ity is
heighten'd, if the Belief of their Hearers be of no advantage
to them; or iſ they incur a conſiderable Danger by telling
it, which they might avoid by ſaying nothing oſ the Mat
ter; if to theſe the Number of Witneſſes be encreas'd, the
Probabilit] will be ſo ﬅrong, that unleſs the Narration be
oppoſite to the Nature of the Thing, we can ſcarce be able
to deny our Aſſent. _ A ' '
11. Snow/ly, What here affects our Minds, is drawn from
the very Nature of the Thing, and our own Experience.
Whoever will tellus Stories that are impoſſible, can never
gain our Belieſ, as long as the Narration labours under that
Character; for that is the Mark of Falſhood. '
12.. 'Tis
Logic 3 or, the Art of Reaſoning. 219
12.. 'Tis firﬅ of all things neceſſary, that what is ſpoken
ſhou'd be thought poſſible: If we have never ſeen it, nor
heard that any other has experienc'd the like, tho' the Mar
rer it ſelf be not actually impoſſible, yet it will find but lit
tle Credit with us: For Example,-Iſ any one ſhou'd tell
us, That he had ſeen in the Indie: a Brilliant Diamond as
big as a Man's Head,- tho' in this our Mind can diſcover
nothin plainly impoſſible, or contradictory, yet ſhou'd we
ſcarce iclieve it, becauſe we never our ſelves ſaw one ſo
large, or ever heard of any one elſe who had.
13. When we our ſelves have ſeen any thing like it, or
have known others who have ſeen the like, we then conſi
der how ſeldom,' or how often it has happen'd,- for the more
frequent a Thing has been to our Eyes, or thoſi: oſ' others
-to our Knowledge, the eaſier Credit it finds with us; and
on theifcontrary,
ſiThus the us,
any one tell ſeldomer,
that he the
has more difficultly
ſeen aStone believ'd.
Bridge over
a River one or 'two hundred Paces long, he will find no
difficulty in gaining our Belief: But we give Credit more
hardly to himctfour
iblid Marble whoMile
ſhallintell us, thatover
Length, he has ſeen aofBridge
an Arm of
the Sea,
and 'another Bridge of four hundred Foot in Length, of
only one Arch, as they ſky there are in China.
i4.. By the Tcﬅ ofthe ſame Experience we examine the Cir
cumﬅances of the Manner-of doing any thing, the Circum
vﬅanees of the Perſons, Place and Time 5. and if theſe agree
with what we know, they add a Force to the Relation. We
farther are apt to conſider and weigh theCauſcs or Motives
which mov'd him to whom the Action is attributed to doit.
For if the Thing be ſingular, uncommon, and out of the way,
we can ſcarce believe that it ſhou'd be done without ſolid and
weighty Reaſons, ofwhich, while we are ignorant, the Mat
ter of Fact muﬅ at leaﬅ remain dubious in our Minds. Butif
theſeſolid and cogent Reaſons are known, we ceaſe to doubt,
or at leaﬅ, we eaſily believe the Matter of Fact, iſ withal it
appear, that the Agent knew theſe Reaſons and Motives. Thus
we eaſily believe the many Prodigies or Miracles of the Old
Teﬅament, done by God, becauſe they were of the moﬅ m0<
mentous Importance to preſerve, at leaﬅ, one Nation uncor
rupted by Idolatry, which cou'd not have been done without
thoſe Miracles. But we can ſcarCe perſuade our Minds to
believe, that God, after the Chriﬅian Religion was eﬅabliſh'd,
ſhou'd work Miracles on every trifling Occaſion, as the Le
gends of the old Monks and modern Papiﬅs pretend.
. U a lj'. We
220 Logic; or, 'be Art ry" Reaſonirrg.
ſly. We muﬅ ſeek the third Motii/e of our Belief in our
ſelvcs: For there are ſome Events, the Truth of which canu
not appear to any, but ſuch whoſe Minds are firﬅ qualify'd
by ſome certain Knowledge : As for Example, theſe are ſome
Events of Ancient Hiﬅory. There was a King ff Macedon,
'whoſe Nan'ze was Achander, who filbi-Iu'd Aſia, having 'van
quiſh'd King Darius. 'Theſe are ii) well known to thoſe Who
arc conrvcrſant with the Greek and Roman Hiﬅory, that they
can have no doubt of the Truth: but it is not ſo evident
to a Man who is wholly unacquainted with Hiﬅory; for the
former has read many Writers of various Nations and Times.
all concurring in the ſame Account,- he knows the Series of
the whole Hiﬅory with which theſe are connected, and came
to that Knowledge by degrees, by much reading. To ſatisfy
another in this Point, he muﬅ. lead him up the ſame Steps
by which he mounted, elſe he will find it difficult to make
one obﬅinate believe him.
_r6. In- this Probability of Relations, the fewer or more
of theſe Circumﬅances occurring, makes it the weaker or
ﬅronger. Nay, When they all, or the greateﬅ Part meet,
ſo great is the Force of the joining of thoſe Circumﬅances,
-that they affect our Mind like the higheﬅ Evidenn. For
Example; he Who reads the Roman Hiﬅory, can no more
doubt, but that there was ſuch a Man as fall'n: Caſhr, and
that he vanquiſh'd Pompey, than that two Lines draw'n from
the Cenrre to the Circumference are e nal.
' 17. AsE-uidenceisthe Criterion, orC aracteriﬅic of Truth
in Things of Speculation, which depend on Reaſoning, ſo
in Matter; qf Fat? the Concourſe of ſo many Circumﬅances
' - is an undoubted Ptoof and Mark of Truth. 'Tis certain,
that we can no more deny our Affiznt to theſe 'concur
ring Circumﬅances, than to the higheﬅ Evidence; they there
'fore either perſuade and recommend the Truth,. or (which
is abſurd) God has ſo form'd us, that we muﬅ neceſſarily
be 18.
deceiv'd. '
There is likewiſe a Probabz'liiyw which depends only
on our own Reaflming, or Experience, without the Interven
tion of any elſe, and omitting thoſe Circumﬅances, which we
have enumerated. And here we may diﬅinguiſh ſuch va
rious Steps and Degrees of Probabilitj, that whenwe come
to the higheﬅ, it is no longer a mecr Pradability, but ma
nifeﬅ Truth, and compcls our Aſient without any Reſervc
or Doubt. ' ' z.
r9. I. When
. Loglc; or, the Art ty' Reaſoning. 22:
19. I. When we conſiderThings, of whichwe haveſome
manner ofKnowledge, but not a c ear and perfect one,we may
make a probable Judgment of them, better than if we were
wholly ignorant ot the Subject; but this Probability is ſi) weak,
that we may be perſuaded we have been in an Error. But
when the Subject is perfectly known to us, by Experiment,
we may make more certainſludgment of ſome Property of
that Subject, which is not 0 thoroughly underﬅood by us.
Thus aGoldſmith, or Refiner, who has often melted Gold,
and work'd in it in diverſe Ways, can make better judgment
of ſome things which belong to that Metal, than aMan who
has never been employ'd about it.
zo. II. He who has ſome time doubted of a Thing, and
judges not of it, but after a ſerious and long Scrutiny, will
make juﬅer Judgment of it than he who (without Experi
ence) gives a raſh and precipitate judgment. 'Tis certain,
we believe our ſelves more, after we have made a thorough
Enquiry into it, than when we are obliged to make a haﬅy
and unpremeditated Judgment. We call not that adiligent
Enquiry or Scrutiny, which leaves us in no manner of Doubt;
for the Nature of the Thing of which we judge, does not
always allow ſo nice an Introſpection, as to free us from all
manner of Doubt, but ſuch an Enquiry wc call dili ent,
which is all that the Nature of the Thing will a mit.
Thus we can examine few, or rather no Subﬅances, ſo far,
as to aſſure our ſelves that we have a certain Knowledge
of moﬅ of its Properties. This makes all Natural Philolo
' phy (which is not built on Experiments) a meer conjectural
Amuſement.
21 . III. If we have been uſed to ſuch Experiments before
we give our Zludgment, and have frequently given the like
Judgments o other Things which _have been approved by
Experiments, taking thence a certain Aſſurance of a parti
cular Faculty of finding out the Truth, we hope that with
little Pains we have hit the Point,- yet this aſſurance is often
very fallacious, and leads us into Errors.
22.. IV. Our Judgments of Things are either mone cer
tain or uncertain, as the Experiments were made a ſhorter
or lon er time, ſi'om that in which we call them to mind.
For w en our Memory of any Experiment is freſh, as well
as the whole Courſe and Rcaſons of the Operation, our
Judgments then ſeem more probable to us. But when we
retain but a faint Memory of the Enquiry, then we arc apt
to entertain Doubts of our Diligence in the Courſe of the
U z Ope
zzz Logic; or, the Art ofReaſoning.
Operation, and we dare not maintain our judgments with'
'any manner of Confidence. ' > -'
23. V. When Experience has diſcover'd certain Proper
ties in the Thing which we examine, which are commonly
unknown, and only can be found out by Rariocination; our
Gueſsxſeems to us the more probable, or likely, the more it
agrees with thoſe known Properties. If our Enquiry be
thich of the three Hypotheſes of the Diſpoſition of the Solar
Vortex in which our Earth is, be moﬅ probable, that of
Ptolem , '_ijha, or Coþemicm, that of the laﬅ is preferr'd to
the or 1er two, becauſe it accounts for all the Appearances
in ,the Planets and fix'd Scars about us; whereas the other
two leave many unaccounted for. In ſuch Enquii ies as theſe,
theSimplicity oſ the Hypotheſis is of very great-Weight,
for the fewer Thingswe are obli 'd to ſuppoſe,- for giving
an Account of the Appearances, o much the more plauſible
isthe Hyporheſis, provided that by it we are able to ac
countſor all things relating to it. '
24.. VI.. When the Subject-oſ our Enquiry is the object
of our Senſes, whenwe have apply'd our Senſizsrightly diſ
sfd, then it is no longer a ſimple Probability, but an iri
dubitable Truth. There are ſcveial Cautionsto be us'd
in-xhis-Affair,. which are to-be learn'd in Natural Philoib
pþy. We, muﬅ further obſerve, that our Senſes were given
_us, not- to arrive at a perfect Knowledge oſ the Nature of
Objects, but only of What is neceſſary to the Preſervation
- of, our Lives.
25'. But We give more Credit to ſomeoſ our Senﬅs, than
.to others; thus we confide more in our Sight. than our
Hearing, becauſe the Objects of our Eyes ﬅrike ﬅronger on
them, than thoſe of 'the Hearing on the Ears. But when
ſeveral Senihs concur in the Diſcoveryof any Thing, as when
we not only ſee, but: hear and touch, then there can be no
other Doubt remain of the Truth. Thus if we ſee, hear,
and embrace our Friend, We cannot have the leaﬅ Doubt of
the Truth or Reality of what we do. Therefore, this Con
viction of the Senſhs is no more to be reſiﬅed, than the Evi
dence ariſing From Reaſom'ng. _
26. From all that we haveſaid it is plain, that thereis this
difference between a flight or weak Probability, and its
ﬅrongeﬅ or higheﬅ Degree; that we cannot deny our Affirnt
to this, but we may _in that ſuſpend our judgment, or give
It.
27. But
Logie; or, the Art of Reaſoning; ar;
27. But the Uſe of theſe probable Propoſitions is different
in common Life, and in Philoſophical, and meerly Specula
tive Enquirics. For in common Liſc we very rarely depend
' on evident Arguments, but eﬅeem it a ſufficient Warrant of
ſiour doing any thing, iſ back'd'by no contemptible Proba
bility, For ſhou'd we not undertake any-Action 'till we had
the utmoﬅ Evidencc of what we ought to do, we might
ſoon periſh; and. yet common Prudence will not allow us
' always to act on the lightcﬅ Probabilities. We ought, as
much as poſſibly wc can, diligently to examine all Things,
and to contract ſuch a Habit of judging rightly, that we
may judge with all the Diſpatch'and Addreſsimaginable'. We
ought to chooſe, of two Things that are notcertain, that
which may do us the leaﬅ'Damage, iſ we ſhou'd be deceiv'd.
28. But, in Philoſophical Things, we proportion our Aſ
' ſent to the Degree of Probability 5 ſo that to a Weak Proba
*bility we give a weak Aſſent, a ﬅronger to one that is of
greater Force, andaſull and perfect one to that which comes
up to Evidencc. For to ac uicſce entirely, as in Truth,
in a Propoiition which is ob cure, by reaſon of flame A'p
' pearance of Truth, is to throw
ger of Error. " our ſclvcs into maniſeﬅ r Dan
29. But we muﬅ not in all Things require aM/ztinmariml

Evil/eme, ſince that can only have place in abﬅractcd or ge
neral, and adequate or perfect Ideas, all whoſe Relations and
Parts we know: But we ought in Matter: quMZ t'o ac
quieſce in a Maml Evil-lame, or the higheﬅ Step or Degree
of. Probability, as we have deſcribed it in this Chapter;
C H A P. V.
Of-doulztful, ſuſpefled of Falſity, and falſe . 4
Propqſitiom.
1.- I-Ioſe Things are dubious in general, in which there
are no evident Marks of Truth or Falſhood. We
ſometimes diſcover ſome few Circumﬅances in Things
which uſe to produce Probability, without being join'd to
any others which may excite any Suſpicion in us. Such are
many ancient Hiﬅories, which we' cannot reject, becauſe we
find in them ſome things which have the Appearance of
Falſhoodz nor yet admit as undoubted, 'becauſe they hav 'not
, Evidenc: enough ofſ Truth.
V Thus the' chide/e Hiﬅory oft...*ir
moﬅ
224' Loglc; or, the Art queaſoning.
moﬅ ancient Kings, eſpecially of Foin', who liv'd ſoon' after
Noah, we cannot be certain of its Truth, nor accuſe them of
Falſhood. In like manner, we cou'd neither condemn as falſe.
or aſſert as true, that there are in the Univerſe many Inha
bitants more than Mankind, and that ſome Planets are the
Refidence of happier, and others of more unhappy Natives.
2.. There are ſometimes certain Circumﬅances which ufi:
to attend aFalſhood mixt with others, that are not impro
bable; but in ſuch a manner, that the latter are either more
numerous, or of greater weight. There occur in the Fa
bles of the Greeks, the moﬅ ancient Account or Reports of
that Nation; there are many maniſeﬅ Lyes or Falſhoods,
yet if we narrowl enquire into them, we ſhall obſerve many
Circumﬅances w ich ſhew, that it is highly probable that
moﬅ of thoſe thin s happened to the old Inhabitants of an
cient Greece, whic gave occaſion to the Riſe of thoſe Fa
bles; ſo that thoſe Things which are told by the Poets are
not all Falſe, but that it is very difficult to diﬅinguiſh the
Truth from the Falſhood.
3. There are other Things in which the Reaſons for our
believing the Truth or Falſhood are equal. Many Authors
paſs this Judgment of the Gia'm and Gigantic Bones, which
are ſaid to be found in many Places. Of the ſame Kind
are moﬅ of th0ſe Stories of the Apparitions of Evil Spirits,
c.
4.. Secondly, Thoſe Propoſitions are ſuſpected of Falſ
hood, in which there are more and more weighty Marks
or Signs of Falſhood than of Truth, tho' even thoſe Signs
be not forcible enough, to compel our Aﬅient. Theſe Signs
are op oſite to thoſe of Probabiiity, from whence they may
be eaſ y gather'd.
5. We muﬅ obſerve here the ſame Cautions, which we
have deliver'd about the probable Propofitions: That is, that
we doubt of the Doubtful, and maintain our Suſpicion of
theſe 'which are ſuſpected of Falſhood. It wou'd be equally
raſh andareinCOn-ſiderate
which to confound
evidently ſalﬅ, themtrue.
or evidently either Norſſ
withought
thoſe ſ
they to'be confounded with each other, as if where-ever

there were any light Occaſion of Doubt, there were a Ne
ceffity of ſuſpecting Falſhood.
6. We may juﬅly call in doubt-thoſe Propoſitions, which
are oppoſite to any Matbematiml, or Maml E-vidmce. It is
therefore falſe, that a Humane Body, ſome Feet in Length,
cal'
Logic ; or, the Art of Reaſoning. azs'
can be contain'd in a thin Bit of Bread; and of the ſame
Nature wou'd that Propoſition be, which ſhou'd deny that
there were ever ſuch a Cityxas Rome.
7. But tho' this be the Nature of falſe Prapoſitiom, yet is
it not fliWJys equally known; and for that Reaſon, miſ-led
by the Liberty of giving our Aſſent to obſcure Ideas, we
often aſſert that as a Truth, which is falſe: Yet we can
never own that for a Truth, the Fallity of which is fully
known to us; for Truth and Falſhoad are oppoſite.
i ' 8. The Univerſal Origin of the Error (and in which all
others are contain'd) or believing that which is falſe to be
true, is deriv'd from that Liberty _we have mention'd, by
means of which we give our Aſſent to Things that are ob
ſeure, as if they were perſpicuous or plain: But there are
7 other particular Cauſes of this Error, which are ſomething
_ leſs general, and which are worthour Notice, that we may
be aware of them.
9. Firﬅ, Sometimes thoſe who are to deliver their Judg
" ment think not of fiich Reaſons, or Arguments, which yet
are in the Nature of the Thing. If Judgment be given them,
p it is four to one but he errs. Thus, ſhould any one attempt
tojudge of the Elevation of the Pole, without proper In
ſiruments, unleſs he had Information oſ it ſome other way,
he may well be deceiv'd; or if he hit on the Truth, it will.
r be mOre by Chance than any Certainty deriv'd from his Art.
The ſamemay be ſaid of determining of Nations without?
knowing the Hiﬅory of them, and' the like.
10. Secondly, The Ignorance of thoſi: who argue, is ano
ther Occaſion of Error, who often have not improv'd their
Wit and Judgment by Study and Application. Theſe will
not ive their Aſſent, tho' the moﬅ weighty and forcible
Reaſgns are produc'd, which wou'd prevail with Men of
Judgment and Skill, becauſe they have never learnt to rea
ſon'well, nor ever apply'd their Minds to underﬅand the
Rules of Art. Thuswe every day find, that moﬅ Mechag,
nic Tradeſinen, who employ their Time in Manual Opera
tions for the Support of Life, reaſon very fooliſhly on thoſe
things which are out of their own Employments, admittigſg
very ſilly and trifling Arguments, as (blidz rejecting th c
which are really If), as vain and of no force. This is moﬅ
obſervable in Religion and Party-Matters, in which the
Mob liﬅens to any thing that is prodigious with thirﬅy Ears.
Nay, Men or' higher Stations, Men of Quality, who, waﬅe
their Lives in Luxury and Pleaſure,_ neglecttheir Judgmerſ:
rct226 Logic; ar, the Art qf Reaſoniſing.
ſo far, that they ſcarce know or remember any thing beſides
what they learn from that Inﬅructreſs of Fools, Experience;
and are eaſily drawn into the moﬅ abſurd Opinions, by the
Addreſs of cunning Men, who have Art and Knowledge; of
which we have too frequent Examples, both Ancient and
' Modern.
The Third Cauſe of Error is, that Men often will not
Vmake uſe of thoſe Arguments of Duth and Falflzoad, that
are, or may be known; which ariſes from Paſſions. Im
Patience ofLabour (for Example) will not let them give them
ſelves the Fatigue of obſerving the lon Connection of va
rious Reaſims and Argumenrs, which afi make their Depen
dance on each other, or wait for the neceſſary Number of
>- Experiments, which a thorou h Knowledge requires; and
ſo they paſs their judgment fore they are thoroughly ac
quainted with the Subject. Another Reaſon of this Preci
pitate judgment, is our Luſt qf Fame and Reputation, which
we are over-haﬅy to enjoy, while we wou'd ſeem to be
Learned, before we really are ſo. The Hare of ſome par
ticular Man or Sect, makes us condemn them, without'
Enquiry, or Hearing their Arguments on any account what
ever. Of this (not to go ſo far back as the Heathens) we
have fiequent Examples, both among. the Ancient and Mo
dern Chriﬅians.
\ 12.. The Fourth source of Error is the fallacious Rules of
Probability, which may be principally refer'd to four Heads
or Glands, which we tranſmtly noted in our Diſcourſe of
Probability, *
13. The Firﬅ is daubtfnl Opinions, which when admitted
as certain, produce various other Errors, when they prove
to he falſe themſelves. Thus, allowing that thoſe were real
*Miracles which are told us by the Monks of former Ages, as
being done at the Tombs or Images of (bme Saint, it fol
lows, that they'are in the right who make Pilgrimages to
ſuch shrines, and worſhip ſuch Images. And from theſe
- many more Errors wou'd enſue, for many Conſequcnces
are deduc'd from one Principle.
14.. The Second is of receiv'dopiniom, which are ſuppos'd
to be evidently certain, from our having found them from
our Childhood admitted' by all thoſe with whom we have
liv'd or convers'd, and whom we have lov'd. For 'tis no eaſy
Matter to eradicate, or even render doubtful, an Opinion
that has taken root in us in our moﬅ tender Years, before
we cou'd form a judgment of them. But Experience has
ſhown
Logic ; or, the Art cf Reaſoning. 227
ſhown us, that very many Opinions, which have been ge
nerally, even univerſally receiv'd, by the greateﬅ and moﬅ
extenfive Nations and People, are guilty of the greateﬅ Falſ
hoodz and whence, by conſequence, is born a numerous
Race of Fictions. Thus when moſt of the Ram-m: believ'd '
that Romulus and Remm were nurs'd by a Wolf; that Folly
being admitted, it prepafd their Minds for the Reception of
many other ſuch Trifles. Thus Trogu: Pompeius wou'd en
force the Belief, that one of the moﬅ ancient King: of spak
was fuckled by a Hart, from what the Romans eld about
Romulm and Remur.
iſ. The Third may be referr'd to the Pflfflom, which pre
pare us for the Belief of certain Opinions, or arm us a
ainﬅ giving Credit to others. That often ſeems to us pro- -
ble, to have which true may be of conſequence to our
intereﬅ; for we eaſily believe what we deſire, and as eaſil
hope that others think as we do. This is eaſily diſcovcfd in
our Warsz we ſcarce eVer believe the Blunders of our own
Generals, or the Defeats of our own Armies; on the con
trary, we magnify our Victories, and the Sloth or ill Con
duct of our Enemies. And in theſe things we are ſo poſ
ſeCs'd with Paffion, that we grow angry at thoſe who wou'd
gently endeavour to ſhew us, on how weak a Bottom we
ve built thoſe Opinions. Thus in anic Fears, or any
general Terror, every little Report is uffieieut to throw a
People into Conﬅernation and Deſpair.
16. In spend-'tive opinion', we believe thoſe true from
the Truth of which we derive Advantage, or imagine we
do. There are, and have been, many among the Heatbem,
firm, Mahomemm, and not a few Chriﬅians, who pretend
to believe, or really do, ſeveral things, the Belief of which
conduces to their Benefit. If any Doubts or Scruples ariſe
In their Minds about thefi: Opinions, which we cannot diſ
believe without Trouble or Danger, we ﬅifle them in their
VCTy Birth, by turning out Mind to, and employing it on, _
ſome other Object. We eaſily are perſuaded to believe thoſe
things which will bring us Honour and Reputation, but
With greater difficulty the contrary: Nay, Men are apt
to betray this Paſſion of the Mind ſo far in Diſcourſe, that
the' they profeſs that they ſee and know the Truth, yet they
diſcover aWillingneſs to believe the contrary, provided they
Cou'd be defended by any Authority.
17- When any ſuch Opinion is admitted by the Choice of
my Paſſion, that ſame Paſſion will eaſily perſuadc us, flat
W t'
22'8 Logic ; or, the Art of' Reaſoning.
whatever is agreeable to that Opinion, and of Uſe to its Con
firmation,
and receiv'dis the
moﬅ true. Thus the 'Romans
ſuperﬅitiousOpinion havingthey
otſi-Prodigies, allow'd
be
liev'd any thing of the iiirne Kind, eſpecially in Times of
Diﬅreſs or Difficulty: And' the Papifl: having declar'd for
Image-Worſhip, or the Pope's Supremacy, with eagerneſs
catch hold of any Opinion which may conduce to the
Proofof them. But there are infinite Numbers of this ſort
of Error, which has its Source from ou-'r Paſſions.
118. The Fourth ill Reaſon-of Probactilitjzis drawn from
Authority, in our too great Credulity in that. We frequent
lyfind Men, who indeed 'ought to know perfectly well the
Humane Underﬅanding,, and the Humane 'F'aculties, giving
Credit to'another who aſſumes an Inſallibility, tho' he has
but very vain and empty Reaſons for his raſh Preſumption.
Certainly Men ought never to yield their Aſſent to ſimple
Authority,unfi1pported by Reaſon,when the Point is of Things
which we can only know by their Relation, even'when that
Relation has the Marks of Wuth.
1 9. We muﬅ Iaﬅly obſerve in alltheſe Particulars, 'that there
is-a certain Heap or Complexion of Cauſes, which throw
us into Errorz and that we rarely ſall into it by the Force
of one alone. Want of Argument; Ignomnce in our Enquin'e:
into thoſe which we have; a Neglect of them, by whichwe
are unwilling to conſider them; fallaciom Reaſbm of Proba
bility; taking dubious Opinions on Truﬅ for evident Truths;
Vulga'r receiv'd Opinions; the Pafflom of the Mind; weak
Authorities; all theſe ſometimes break in upon our Mind at
once, and ſometimes in divided Bodies, and ſo with Eaie bear *
us down into Error. .
20. Againﬅ all this there is one general Caution, which
we have already laid down, and that is, That we never give
our full Aſſent to any Propolition whilﬅ it is dubious or ob
ſcure, but we ſhou'd, as long as we can, deny our Aſſent,
and proportion our Belief or Probability to the Degree, or
Approach to Certainty or Truth. '
21. But there are ſome other particular Antidotes to be
drawn from our Conſideration of the Cauſe: which lead us
into Error; that is, we ought, with our utmoﬅ Care and
Application, to examine, on out Enquiry into the Truth or
Falſhood ofany Prepoſition, whether our Inclination do
admit or reject it, on account of ſome of thoſe Cauſes which
we have laid down. If we find then never ſo little Rea
ſon to ſuſpect any ſuchthing, we ought to ſuſpend our Judg
ment
'Logic ; or, the Art of Reaſoning; 229
ment as long as poliibly we can, and examine farther into the
matter, and to conſult ſome Other, who has not allow'd of
this Opinion, from which alone great Help has beenderiv'd.
-C H A P. VI.
'of Faith, or Relief
t. E have ſaid that _Fnit/a or Bel-itſ may be reſerr'd to
Science or Opinion, ſo that what we have ſaid of
thele two. may likewrſe be apply'd to Faith.
2.. Faith or Belief in general, is ſaid to be that Aſſent we
give to a Propeſition advanc'd by another, the Truth of
which we gather, not from our own immediate Realbning
or-Experience, but believe it diſcover'd by another. It ma
be diﬅinguiſh'd into blind and ſeeing. That we call blind
Faith, by which we give our Aſſent to a Propoſition advanc'd
by another, oſ whoſe Veracity we have no certain and evident
Reaſon or Proofz and this Belieſ or Faith, is altogether un
worthy of a wile Man. The ſeeing Faith is that by which
we give our Aſſent to a Propoſition, advanc'd by one who
can neither deceive nor be deceiv'd; but the more evident the
Proof of this is, ſo much the more ﬅrong and vigorous is
the Faith ochlieſ.
3. 'Faith has likewiſe been diﬅinguiſh'd into Divine and
Human. By the firﬅ we believe what is affirm'd by God;
by the latter, what is told us by Man. When we are equally
convinc'd they are the Wordsof God, as of Men, the Di
vine Faith is ﬅronger than the Human; becauſe we have
vaﬅly ﬅronger Reaſons to believe. that God can neither de
ceive, or be deceiv'd, than thoſe which wou'd perſuade us
the ſame oſ any Man. But when there is any Doubt, whe
ther or no any Propoſition is declar'd by God; or that God
has commanded, that we ſhou'd believe ſuch a Thing, the
Faith can be noiﬅronger than the Reaſons on which it is
founded. Yet ſometimes the Reaſons, or Motives oſ believ
ing Men, are of ſuch Weight and Force, that being perfectly
underﬅood, they equal a Mathcmatical Evidence, and then
the Human Fair/2 is as ſolid and unſhaken as the Divine,
becauſe, on both ſides, we find an equal neceſſity of giving
our Aſſent.
4.. But ſince that whichis properly call'd Divine Faith is
immediately directed to God hjitcnſelf affirming ſomething,
no
w "41 _,
230 Logic; or, the Art of Reaſoning.

no Man can pretend to ſucha Faith, but a Prophet, to whom
God hasimmediately ſpoken. But allour preſent Faith de
pends on the Teﬅimony-of Men, of whoſe Veracity, howe
ver, we have the moﬅ certain Proofs, tho' much of their
Force depend on our Knowledge of Hiﬅory. ſ
ſ. From hence we find, that all Faith or Beliefhas its Foun
dation on Rcaſoning, which cannot deceive us when it neceſ
ſarily compels our Aflbnt. Thoſe to whom God immediately
reveal'd his ſacred Will, believ'd him for certain Reaſons, and
not with ahlindAffiznt; that is, becauſe they knew he cou'd
not deceive. We at this Day believe them, or rather their
Writings, for certain Reaſons, which oblige us to believe all
undoubted Hiﬅories.
6. We might here go to farther Particulars about Faith in
Revelations, which are neither unprofitable nor unpleaſant ;
but ſince they more properly belong to Divinity, we ſhall
paſs them by.
C H A P. VII.
Of Diwiſion.
1. ch we diſcourſi: of any compounded Thing, or
Idea, we ought to conſider its Parts ſeparately, elſe
while we confound the diﬅinct Parts and Properties, we pro
duce Ohſl'urity: But this is avoided by Diviſfon, which enume
rates the diﬅinct Parts of the Thing that is the Subject of
our Conſid eration.
2.. Diviſion is defin'd, The Diflrihution of the Whole intaall
it contains; but the Whole has a double Signiſication, whence
alſo' Di-uiſi'on isdouble.
3. That is a Whole, which conſiﬅs of integral Parts; as
thoſe Subﬅances which are compos'd of various Parts, ſuch as
the Human Body, which may be divided into its ſeveral Mem
bers ,- and this Di-vzſion is call'd Partition.
4.. But there is another Who/e, which is properly a cer
tain abﬅract Idea, which is common to more Things than
one, as the Univerſalr: or a compounded Idea, which com
prehends the Subﬅance and its Accidents, or at leaﬅ moſt of
its Accidents. The Parts of this Whole are call'd Subjectiw,
or Inferiour.
_ 5. This Mole has a triple Di'viſian. The firﬅ is,when the
K'ſ'd or General is decided by its Species, or Particular, or *
D'fl'mwi as when Suhflam'e is divided into Body, and *
spirit
_ _ ._l
Logic; or, the Art of Reaſoning. 2 31
Spirit into Extended and Thin/cing. The ſecond, when any
thing is divided into ſeveral Claſſes or Forms, by oppoſite Ac
cidents, as when the Stars are divided into thoſe which give
their own proper and unborrow'd Light 5 and thoſe of o ake
Bodies, which reflect the Light of the Sun. The third is
when the Accidents themſelves are divided according to the
Subjects in which they inhere; as when Goods are divided
into the Goods of the Mind, Body and Fortune.
6 . There are three Rules of a good Di-vzfion: The firﬅ is,
That the Member: of the Divifion entirely exhauﬅ the whole
Thing that i: divided. Thus, when all Numbers are divided
into equal and unequal, the Diviſion is good.
7. The ſecond Rule is, That the Member: ofthe Diviſion
ought to be oppoſite 5 as the Numbers equal and unequal are.
But this Oppoſition may be made by a ſimple Negation; as.
corporeal, not corporeal 5 or by oſitive Members 5 as, extended,
thinking. And this laﬅ DZ-vi ran is eﬅeem'd the better of the
two, becauſe by it, the Nature of the Thing is better made
known.
8 . The third Rule is, That one Member aff the Diviſion ought
not to bcſh contained in another, that the other can be affirm'd
of it; tho' Otherwiſe it may be in ſome manner included in
it, without any Vice or Fault in the Di-uiſion. ThusExten
ſian (Geometrically conſidefd) may be divided into a Line,
Surface, and Solid z tho' the Line be included in the Surfare,
and the Surface in the Solid ,- becauſe the Surface can't be call'd
the Solid, nor the Line the Surface. But Numbers would
be very faultily divided into equal, unequal, and the ſixth,
becauſe ſix is an equal Number.
9. For the ſake of Order and Perſpicuity, when we have
found the Di-uz'ſz'on, we muﬅ take care to conceive it ſo, that
it do not produce Confuſion and Obſcurity. When we exa
mine into the Nature of any thing,-The Diviſion muﬅ not
be made into too man), or too general Member-r, for by this
means diﬅinct Things would be confounded together. Thus
ſhou'd any one, who was about to enquire into the Nature of
all the Bodies which are known to us, divide them into thoſe
which are in this our Earth, thoſe without it, and then, with
out any other Subdiviſion, proceed to his Enquiry intotheir
Nature, he muﬅ without doubt find himſelf confounded.
lo. TheMemher: ought by no-m'am, unlefr the Subject ne
ceſſarily require it, ta he too unequal. Such a Diviſion lS theirs
who divide the Univerſe into Heaven and Earth, for the Earth,
in compariſon ofthat vaﬅ Expapiſe 'n which thePIanets and fixt
- 2.. Stzrs
232 Logic; or, the Art of Reaſonin'g.
Stars are contain'd, which is call'd Heav'n, is leſs thanaPoint:
For 'tis plain, that ſuch a Diviſion wou'd diﬅurb the Mind,
whether we were ſearching after Truth, or teaching Truth
diſcover'd to another.
1 r. But we muﬅ take heed on the orher hand, IeſZ, while
'me endeavour to make the Part; e nal, me do not, a: wemny
ſo), offerI/iolenze-ta-t/ye-szture oft ings, byjoining thoſe which
are really ſeparate, andfiepamting thrflw zch are reallyjoin'd
together. We muﬅ, therefore, have a nice Regaird to the
Connection of Things, leﬅ we violently break aſunder thoſe
Thin s which are cloſely united 5 and join thoſe to ether
which have no manner of Connection with one anot er.
12.. We muﬅ farther take care not to make our Diviſion
too minute, leﬅ the Number of the Parts burthen the Me
mory, and deﬅroy the Attention; which is a Vice utterly to
be avoided by thoſe who wou'd reaſon well.
1-3. Another Fault of Di-uiſion is, when inﬅead of dividing
real Parts of a Thing, we only enumerate the different Sig
nification of Words. .
. c H_ A P. VIII.
Of Definition-s and firﬅ, of the DefinitiOn aſ
the N A M E.
1. Efinitim is double; one of the Thing, and one oſ the
Name. The firﬅ we eﬅeem the Nature of the
Thing 5 the ſecond explains what Signification we giva to
any Word or Name; of the laﬅ here, referring the firﬅ tothc
nexr Chapter.
2.. Since we do not always think to our ſelves only-,_but
are oblig'd frequently to convey the Sentiments of ourMmqs
to others, either in Words ſpoken or written, or be informd
in the ſame manner of thoſe of other People, which other
wiſi: we know not ,- we may lead others, or be led ourſelves,
by others, into Errors, by the ambiguity of the Terms 9?
Words that are made uſe of by either, unleſs we explain
what we mean by ſuch ambiguous Words, by others [hit
are not ambiguous. \ '
3 . We mean not here by Definition of the Name, the dffia'
ring the Uſe, or Signiſication of Words according to Cuﬅomi
We ſeek not in what Senſe others uſe any Word, but m wint
Senſe we ſhall make uſe of it in our future DiſcourſC
r 4-
Ingic'; if," the Art of Reaſonmg. 233
4;'. We ſhall obﬅrve, thatthe Signification whichwe deſign
th give any Word, depends entirely on our Will and Pleaſure s
For we may affix what Idea we pleaſe to any Sound, which
in it ſelf ſignifies nothing at all. But the Definition of the
Thing ſignify'd by any Sound', has not this dependance on
our Will and Pleaſure; for ſince its Nature is certain and de
termin'd in it ſelf, our Words cannot make any manner of
Alteration in it.
5. Secondiy, ſince the Definition of the Name is entirely at
our Will and Pleaſure, it cannot be call'd in queﬅion by any
one elſe. But then we are to give always the ſame Senſe to
the ſame Word, to avoid Miﬅakes, for which End we define
our Terms. '
6. Thirdly, Since the Definition of the Name is not to be
call'd in queﬅion, *tis plain, it may be made uſe oſ, like an
undoubted or ſelf-evident Maxim, as the Geometritianr do,
who, morethan all Men beſide, make uſe oſſuchDefinitions;
but we muﬅ rake care, leﬅ we think, therefore, that there is
anything in the Idea affix'd to that defin'd Term which may
not be
one hascontroverted, It is aninundoubted
defin'd ſome Wordv Principle,
ſuch a manner; butthat
whatſome
he
thinks of the thing, is no undoubted Principle. Thus, if any
one ſhou*d define Hearra be that which ir in thoſe Bodies which
beat m, and that it i: like that Heat which we feel; no Man
could find fault with the Definition, as far as it expreſſes what
he means by the Word Heat ; but this does not hinder us
from denying, that there is any thing in the Bodies that warm
us like what we feel in our ſelves.
7. From what has been ſaid, 'tis plain, that the Definition
of the Name, is of great Uſe in Philoſophy; yet we cannot
conclude from thence, that all Word: ought, or indeed £can
poffibly be defin'd; for there are ſome ſo clear (to ſuch who
underﬅand the Language we uſe) and of ſuch a Nature, that
they cannot be defin'd; as the Names ofall ſimple Ideas, as we
have ſhewn under that Head. v
8. Moreover, where the receiv'd Definitions are ſufficiently
clear, they ought not to be chang'd, becauſe thoſe who are
accuﬅom'd to the receiv'd Uſe, will underﬅand us better,
and we our ſelves run not ſo great a Riſque of Inconﬅancy
in nor preſerving our Definition. It is manifeﬅ, that thoſe
Words are better underﬅood, to which wc have been long
us'd to affix certain Ideas, than thoſe to which new ones are
to be join'd, andwe better remember the Senſe of One, than
of Two.
X 3 9. From
. From hence likewiſeit follows, that weſhould, as little
as poſſible, depart from thereceiv'd Scnfie, when we are necefi
ſarily obliged to forſake it in ſome meaſure; for we ſooner,
and with more calle, accuﬅom ourſelves to Significations of
Words which are near, or related to thoſi: which are already
admitted, than thoſe which are plainly remote, or us'd in
a quite contrary Senſe.
10. But this, as we have hinted, muﬅ be obſerv'd above
all Things, that we always keep to the Definition which we
haveonse madirzclſi: we confound our Hearers or Readers,
and fall into ſeeming Contradiction, which renders our Diſ
courſe unintelligible. -
C.H TA_-P.J DC
Ofthe Definition ofthe T H IN' Gſi
1. HE Definition of the Name depends entirely on out
Will and Pleaſure, but the Definition of the Thing
we haveno Power over; for we can by no means affirm
that to be in a'I-'hing or Idea which we conſider, which is
not in it. Definition is uſually-divided into accurate, and
leﬅ accurate, the firﬅ is properly Definition, the ſecond De
ſcription.
2.. A Definition, properly ſo call'd, explains the Nature
ofthe Thing defin'd by an Enumeration of itsprincipal
Attributes; of which thoſe that are common to others,
with the Thing defin'd, is call'd the Kind. or General 3 but
thoſe. which are peculiar to the Thing defin'd, the Different.
Thus aCircle may be defin'd, a Figure whoſe Circumference
is every where 'qui-diﬅant from the Centre 3 the Word Big-me
is the Kind or, General, as being a Name common to allother
different Figures, as well as to a Circle; the reﬅ are the Dff
fereme, ſince they diﬅinguiſh a Circle from all other Fi
res.But Deſcriptiim is an Enumeration of many Attributes,
guz.
and even thoſe which are accidental. Thus,, if any one is
deſcrib'd by! hisDecds. or Actions, or. his Sayings or Wri
tings ,- as if we ſhou'd, inﬅead of naming Ari/lotle, ſay, The
Philflbpher, who obtained, Mortar-thy among the School-men
without a Farther.
4._Individuals cannot be deſin'd, becauſe tho' We know
not theireii'ential Properties by whichthey differ from mild?
o
Logic; or, the Art of Reaſonmg. 23;
of the ſame Species, we muſt remember likewiſe, that the
in'moﬅNatureof Subﬅances is unknown, and therefore the
cannot be deſin'd. Hence'tis plain, that only the Modes who e
Whole Nature is known to us, can only beexplain'd by acer
tain and properly-call'd Definition.
ſ. There are three common Rules of a Definition ,- the
firﬅis,tharthe Definition ſhould he adequate to the 'Thing da
fizzed z that is, agreeto all thoſe Things which are contain'd
in the Species which is defin'd. The ſecond, That the De
finition ſhould he proper to the Thing deſin'd; for when the
Definition makes us know the Thing defin'd from all other
Things, it muﬅbe proper and agreeable-to the Thing de
fin'd. The third, ſince we make uſe of a Definition to make
known a Thing toanother, which he knew not before, The
Definition ought to he clear, and more eaſy and obvious than
the Thing deſin'd.
6. Here we muﬅ ſiagain admoniſh the Reader, not to con
found the receiv'd Definition-of the Name with the Defini
'tion of the Thing. For this Reaſon the Definition of the
Thing cannot be expreſſedin Words plainly ſynonymousz as if
any one ſhould ask what is the Supream Deity P And we
ſhou'd anſwer, the Supream God : ſince the latter exPlain-s no
more the Natureor At'tributes of that God,than*thc former.
7. From theſe Obſervations we find, that Definition can
only have place in compound Ideas, and is only the Enume
ration of the chiefſimpleldeas ofwhich they are compound
ed; but ſimple Ideas cannot be defin'd, becauſe there can be
no Enurnerazion. He who knowsnot what that is which we
call Heat, will only learn it by Experience, or ſome ſynony
mous Words, or ſome Word ofanother Language, orby Cir
cumlocution, bywhich the Thing is ſhown, not defin'dzasif
we ſhould fiy, That it was a Senſinian, which me find when
me fit by the Fire, or walkin the Sunſh'ine .- By this we ſhou'd
ſhew what Thing it was to which we gave that Name, but
never explain its Nature; For, ſhou'd any one want that Senſi:
by which we haVe that Senfiition, he wou'd no more under
ﬅand what we meant, than a Man born- blind what was a
Green Colour, by telling him it was that Senſation we have
when we beholdthe Graſsin the Fields.
(236)
THE
Third Part of LOGIC;
OR,
The ART of REASONlNG's
CHAP. I'ſi.
Of M E T H O D, hath ochſolution and

Compoſition.
Aving conſider'd our ſimple Perceptions, and the
ſeveral ſorts of our Judgments, and ſhewn how
in them we ſhould conduct our ſelVes to avoid Er
rors; 1t remains, that we ſhew in what manner our Judg
ments ſhould be diſpos'd, that we may the ſooner, and with
the greater ſafety, arrive at the Knowledge of Truth. This
Part of Lagic is called Method,which, contrary to the Cuﬅom
of the Schools, I ſhall treat with Diligence, as more conduciva
tothe Knowledge of Truth than the following Part of Ar
jgumentation, on which, however, they were more prolix.
p 2.. Since moﬅ Trurhs which fall under our Examinationdc
'pcnd on the Knowledge ofothers, from whence they arcdedu
ced by a certain Chain of Conſequences, it is not ſufficient to
have deliverid the Rules by which we know to what ProPo'
jitions (ſeparately conſider'd) we may give our Affimnw': muﬅ
alſo ſhew, hawtheyrare to bediſpos'd among themﬅlves, m
regard of each other, that by them we may deſcend as it were
by ſo many Steps to Truth, plac'd according to the old Pro'
verb, in the bottom ofa Well.
z . Method is twoſoldz one is of Reſhlution, by which Trlffſh
is generally ſought after; the other of Compojition, bYWthh
tflc Truth now found out is taught or imparted to No'
t er! " * ' ' ' ' ſi
4. In
fJ-l
____l
[Logic ; or, the Art tfReaſonmgr 2'37
'4. In rhe Method of Reſhlution we proceed from ſome
Particular known Truth, to others which belong to ſome
particular or ſingular Thing. In the Method of Compqfl'tion
we propoſe ſome certain general Truths, from' which we
deduce particular Truths.
7. If in the Method of Re/blutian we propoſe any'Maxims;
it is not immediately in the beginning, and all together, and
* but once, but only as they are neceſiary for the finding out
the Truth z on the contrary, in the Method of Campofition'
they are propos'd all together inw the beginning, before there
i's any need of them.- _
6. Theſe two Methods differ from each other, as the Me
thods of ſearching our Genealogy, -deſcending from' the An
' ceﬅors to their Poﬅerity'; or on the contrary, by aſcending
fi-om the Po'ﬅeriry to the Anceﬅors. Both 'of them have
this 'in- common', that their Progreffion is' from- a- Thing
known, to that which is unknowa : 'Thoſe Thingswhich are
known, by both are ſet in the Front, or firﬅ Place, that by
them we may (by certain Conſequences deduc'd from them)
'be able to arriVe at thoſe which are not known; and then
all this Chain of Conſequences in both, Confiﬅ of Propoſi
tions connected with each other.
7'.' And theſe following Things are ſummarily requir'd in
B'oth, that Error may be avoided. Firﬅ, That no Propofi
tion be admitted as true, to which you can deny your Aſ
fiznt, or which is not evident. Next, the Connection of the
following Propofition to the foregoing, in every Step of the
Progreffion be likewiſe evident or neceffizr ,- otherwiſe, if
in a long Chain of Propofitions we admit but one Propoſi
tion or Conſequcnce that is doubtful or falſe, whatever was
directly deduc'd from thence, muﬅ- of neceſſity be either
dubious or falſe. '
8. To make this plainer, we ſhall firﬅ propoſe an Exam
ple of the Method ofRefllutian, and then one of that of Com
I poſition. Let us ſuppoſe this to be the Queﬅion, Whether on the
. Suppoſhian of Marſ: Exiﬅeme, we mn prove, that God doe:
. exiﬅ? To reſolve this, our Method muﬅ be thus: (1.) Hu
z man Kind, which now inhabit the Earth, did not always
r exiﬅ, all Hiſtory whatever ﬅill fixing a Beginning to Man-z X
kind 1' This they do not only aſſert in expreſs Words,vbut by
the-Whole Series and Courſe of what they treat, make it-ma
nifeﬅ, ſince there is nov-Hiﬅory which pretendsto iveus-an
Aecount of 'more than a'bout 6ooo Years. (1.) I Human
Kind did not always exiﬅ, but hada Begirming, therekiſse
e
'238 Loglc ; or, t/ae Art of Reaſonmg.
Neceffity that there ſhou'd be ſome other Cauſe of its Exi
ﬅencez for from nothing, nothing can ariſe. (z.) What
ever that Cauſe is, it muﬅ have at leaﬅ all thoſe Properties,
which we find in our ſelves; for none can give what he has
not himſelf. (4.) Farther, there is' a Neccffity that there
ſhou'd be in this Cauſe Properties which are not in us, ſince
he cou'd do that which we cannot do; that is, make Man
exiﬅ, who before had no Being, or that the Mind and Body
of Man ſhou'd begin to exiﬅ, which Power we by no means
. find in out ſclves. (5.) We find that we have the Poweror
Faculty of Under/binding and Willz'ng, and a Body which can
be mov'd various ways. (6.) Therefore, there muﬅbethoſe
Properties, and many far more excellent in the Cauſe of
Human Kind, ſuch as the Power of drawing out of nothing
or making ſomething to exiﬅ, which had before no Exi
ﬅence at all. (7.) But this Cauſe either exiﬅs ﬅill, or has
ecas'd to be. (8.) If he does not ﬅill exiﬅ, he did not exiﬅ
fi'om Eternityz for whatever exiﬅed from Eternity, can
neither by it ſelf, or by any other Cauſe, be reduc'd to No
thing. (9.) If it did not exiﬅ, it muﬅ have been produc'd
by ſome oſharz for whatever has a Beginning, muﬅ be gene
rated by ſome other. Then wou'd the ſame Qieﬅion re
gurn of the Producer, which may be thus generally reſolv'd:
All things, that are, had; a Beginning, or they had none.
Thoſe which had a Beginning, were produc'd by Cauſcs
which had none 3 therefore, if there be any Thin that does
will, there are eternal Cauﬅs. (lo.) lt muﬅ t refore by
confirſſd, that there is ſome eternal Being, which has in it
ſelf all thoſe Propertics which we find in our ſelves, and infi
nitcly more, Whether- he immediately created us by himſelf,
or by any other Nature; which is not here the Queſhon.
( 1 1.) If this Cauſe of Human Kind do ﬅill exiﬅ, the ſame
Reaibning wou'd return which we us'd in the 9th and loth'
Steps of our Progreſſion. (rz.) Therefore, it neceffilflly
follows from the Exiﬅence of Human Kind, that God do?s
exiﬅ, or ſome eternal Cauſe, which mediately or immedi
ately created Mankind. '
9. Thus by the Method of Reſblution we prove, or rather
find out the Exiﬅence of a God. And we may teach or
convey this Truth thus found out to others, by the Method
of Compqfltim, in this manner. (1.) All Beings have a Be'
ginning of Exiﬅence, or they have none. (2..) Nothing call
come out of nothing, or begin to exiﬅ by its own PoWUv
when it had no Exiﬅcnce. (3.) All thoſe Things, rifierc
are,
Logic; or, the Art qf Reaſoning. 239
fore, which had a Beginning, muﬅ bcproduc'd by ſome Being
that had no Beginning. (4.) Human Kind had a Beginning.
(;.) It was therefore produc'd mediately, or immediately by
ſome eternal Cauſe. (6.) That Cauſe we call God ,* and, there
fore Human Kind were created h] God.
to. All theſe Propoſitions, as we have obſerv'd, ought in
bath Methods to benicely examin'd, that none bcadmitted as
certain and known, which is not ſo; and that no Conſequence
be ſlid in, which is not neceſſary. Having ſo done, we may
know that we have found the Truth, or are taught the ſame
by others.
1 1 . There are ſome Helps to be had for the more eaſy per
formance of this Task, and which are to be taught more di
ﬅinctly, or with greater Care and Conſideration, becauſe on
them depend the whole eatineſs and certainty of ſuch Rea
ſons or Arguments as are alledg'd. Firﬅ, what ought to be
the Diſpoſitionof the Mind for the more happy diſcovery of
Truth: Secondly, we ſhall deliver the Rules of the Method of
Rcſalution 5 and Thirdly, thoſe which belong to the Method
of CampaJ/t'tiaa.
C H A P. II.
Of the Neceffity of Attention, and the Means qf
obtaining it.
x. E have more than once affiartcd, thatEvidence is the
Main, or Criterion of Truth. But this Knowledge
is not enough to direct our Enquiry after Truth, becauilr chat
Evidence is not always to be had, nor does the Mind diſcover
it ſometimes, without a long Labour and Fatigue. We maſt,
therefore, enquire by what Means we may obtain this Evi
dence in our Thoughts.
2. It is not enough that We can form Ideas of all Things,
which we can conceive in our Minds to come at the Know
ledge ot Truth, but the Mind muﬅ conſider them with the
greateﬅ and moﬅ lively Attention, if we wou'd obtain a tho
rough Knowledge of them .
z. We have ſhewn, that our Judgments are the Perceptions
of certain Relations, in which the Mind does acquieſce, and
that our Errors of Judgment ariſe from it, when it does
acquieſce in obſcure Perceptions, as if they were clear, be
fore it haswith ſufficient Care examin'd into their Nature.I
4. n
'240 Logic; or, the Art of Rea ſoning.
- 4. In Judgments of the Mind we ſhou'd uſe the lame Me
thod as in judgmentsof the Eyes, which a proach the ob
ſcurer Objects nearer, and employ 'the help o artificial Lights,
narrowly looking into them," ſoſhou'd the Mind in judg
ments reﬅrain its Aſient, till it has with thetutmoﬅ Atten
tion conſider'd according to the Nature ,0f the Thing into
which it enquires. Hence it appears of how great and ne
ceſſaryuſev Attention is, which is only a long and uninter
ruptedConſideration of. any one Idea, Without the Interpofi
tiOn of any others.
ſ. We-find that we are much more attent, and with grea
ter eaſe apply our Thoughts to the Conſideration oſ thoſe
Things which affect us by the Intervention of our Senſes,
certain Images of which are before the Mind, and ſuch as
excite ſome Affectionor Paffion, than to thoſe which came
into the Mind without any of theſe Things. Thus we are
attent in the Confideration of any enlighten'd Body, in
ſome Image of a corporeal Thing offer'd to the Enquiry of
the Mind,- and in the Conſideration of a _Thing that may
bring us Advantage or Damage, which ﬅrikes us with Fear,
or Deſire.
6. Every one who has try'd it before Uſe has bred a ſa
cility, knows, that 'tis much more difficult to fix the Mind on
ahﬅract Ideas for any Time. The Reaſon of the difference is
plain, becauſe the Mind in other Things finds Affiﬅance from
the Intervention of the Body, as 'tis affected with more ſpright
l and lively Senſatious and Images, which will thruﬅ them
elves on it whether it will or not: On the contrar , in ab
ﬅract Contemplations, and which derive nothing rom the
Body, corporeal Motions obﬅruct the Attention while they
perpetually recall the Mind to Bodies, at the ſame time that
the Object of the Mind has nothing in it ſelf that can much
affect it, or entgage the Attention; nay, when the Mind is em
ploy'd in the e abﬅract Confiderations, it muﬅ with all its
Force baniſh all corporeal Images which croud perpetually
upon it. Nor can this be perform'd without Pain, ſince the
Law of Nature has oblig'd the Mind to be in Pain, when
Force is offer'd to the Body.
7. Having laid down this, we muﬅ try whether or nowe
cannot encreaſe the Attention by the help of the Senſes and
Imaginative Faculty, even in Things that are merely incor
poreal. By what Art this may be done, we ſhall ſhew here
after 5 but above all Things we ſhou'd takeicare that the
InconVenience do not ariſe, which uſually follows the Com
motions
Logic ; or, the Art of Reaſoning. 24:
motions of the Mind by the Senſes, Imagination, or Paſ
ſions; that is, when the Mind is ſomething more vehc*
mently affected, it is turn'd in ſucha manner to the Object:
which affects it, that it takes notice of nothing elſe. Then
is this Motion ſo far from aſſiﬅing the Attention to Idea'
of incorporeal Things, that on the contrary it proves an
obﬅacle to it.
8. Hence this important Conſequence in our Enquiry af
ter Truth is drawn, that they, who would ſerioully apply
themſelves to the ſearch after Truth, ſhould avoid, as much
as they poſſibly can, all the more ﬅrong and vehement Sen
fitions; ſuch as great Noiſes, Light too ﬅrong and glaring,
Pain, Pleaſure, (9117. They ſhould likewiſe take care that:
their Imagination be not too vehemently mov'd by any Ob
ject, which ſhould infect it ſo far, as to make them think of
it whether they will or not 5 for by this means the Atten
tion will frequently be interrupted. Firﬅ, they ought not:
to be accuﬅom'd to the ﬅronger Emotions of the Paſſions;
for thoſe who experience frequently theſe Perturbations,
contract ſuch a Habit of Mind, that they can ſcarce think
of any thing elſe but the Objects of the Paſſions, or thoſe
things which have ſome Connection with them; but ſince,
for Reaſons which we ſhall not touch on here, no Man can
be entirely exempt from them, they muﬅ make it theirEn
deavours to ſeek ſome Affiﬅance from thoſe unavoidable
Evils to their Enquiries after Truth.
9. The Senſcs may be of ad vantage to the promoting the
Attention, if we make uſe of them as the Geametriciam do,
who expreſs inviſible Wantities by Lines, Numbers, and
Letters; for by this means the Mind more eaſily adheres to,
attends, and is fix'd to the Thing which it inquires after; for
while the Eyes are fix'd on the Figures, the Mind contem
plates the Thingwhoſe Signs they are. And this is done with
the more ſafety, becauſe there is no danger of confounding
the Figures with the Thing he ſeeks, there being no Relaq
tion between them, but what he makes. Thus the ſwiftneſfi
and duration of any Motion can be examin'd by the Deſerip
tion of certain Figures, which the Gtametrici'm can never
believe to be the Thing that is the Subject of his Enquiry.
10. By this means we may, without danger, make uſe of
our Senſes in Ratiocination. That is, that we may not be
oppreſs'd by the multitude of the Relations that are to be
conſider'd, they may be expreſs'd on Paper by certain
_Words. Beſides, we give BITE eaſy Attention to Propoſi
_ tions
242. Logic; or, the Art of Reaſoning.
tions already expreſs'd, and let down on Paper, than to their
Ideas. We can review more often, and with more eaſe our
Marks in long Arguments, when we have fix'd the Signs of
them on Paper, than when we have 'them only in our Minds.
r r. But theſe ought to be look'd on as Helps, which may
be made uſe of by youn Beginners, but ſhould not be of
fend to thoſe of riper nderﬅanding, leﬅ they ſhould ac
cuﬅom themſelves too much to them, ſo that it render
them incapable of underﬅanding any thing without the
Affiﬅance of ſome corporeal Image.
12.. The Faculty which brings the Images of corporeal
Things to the Mind, is moﬅ ﬅrictly united to the Senſits;
and therefore belongs to what is ſaid of the Senſes, and yet
affords a particular help to affiﬅing the Attmtim. For ex
ample, when we in ſilent Contemplation compare the Ideas
with the external and corporeal Objects, we may obſerve
the like in the Operations of the Eyes, as in the Actions of
the Mind. *
13. If we are to explain to others what we have f0und
out, they will give more, attention to a Compariſon, than
to a bare and naked Expofition of the Thing; they will
ſooner apprehend and underﬅand us, and remember it bet
ter. Hence aroſe the manner in the remoteﬅ Antiquities of
uſing Fables, which was long in vogue among the oriental
Nations.
r4. vBut here we muﬅ beware of the Error of the An
cients in this Particular, which _was, while they with too
much 'Zeal ſought the Attention of the Unskilful, they had
recourſe to ſo many Figures and Phraſes drawn from cor
poreal Things, that they offer'd to their Minds ſcarcc any
Thing but the Ideas of corporeal Beings: So that theTruth
being overwhelmfi with thoſe Figures, was perfectly hid,
and cannot, without the utmoﬅ difficulty, be freed from
them by the Learned themſelves.
. 1 ſ. We muﬅ, farther, be very cautious of avoiding an
Error too common to the Ancients and Moderns, who fan
cy'd the Compariſon, or ſome other Figure, which was only
to illuﬅrate the Things, was really an Argument to prove
them.
16. That the Paſſions often are Enemies to the Know
ledge of Truth, no body can doubt, and we have ſhown;
many have made a doubt, whether they are ever of any uſe
to it 5 yet fincc they are not evil in their own Nature, they
may, by good Management', be of great help to the encreaſing
the
LOglC ; or, the Art of Reaſoning. 24;
the Attention; nay, perhaps we may ſay, that this is never
extremely ſharp without ſome Paſſion. Thus we may make
a happy Uſe of the Deſire of Glory, if we keep it within its
due Moderation. When this Paſfion is alone, it is dange
rous, other' Paſſions are therefore to be excited in us, which
ſhould hinder us from ſuffering ourſelves to be borne down
by the Deſire of Glory: And this is the verydefire of know
ing the Truth, which is in the Minds of all Mankind ,- for
there is no Man that loves to be deceiv'd, nor any Man that
is pleas'd with Ignorance.
17. But we muﬅ, even here, take care that the defire of
finding out the Truth be not the only cauſe of our judg
ments,- for the Paſſions never give any Light to the judg
ment, but only excite our Enquiry after what is advanta
geous for us to know: But the judgment ought not to be
given as long as we can with-hold it, in things of which we
can have an evident Knowledge. -
ct-- Of 'be
' Capacity
- CHAP.III.
of the Mind, and the Means if
. enlarging it.
i. E call that Mind mþaeiom that has many Ideas be
fore it at once; and the more of thoſe it can
have a diﬅinct Perception of at once, the larger, or more
capacious is the Mind 3 and the fewer, the more narrow we
eﬅeem it. The Capacity therefore of the Mind is enlarg'd,
by contracting a Habit or Cuﬅom of conſidering many Ideas
at once, without Confufion. We mean not all together, and
at ame, that in one numerical individual Moment, and one
only Perception of the Mind, many things can be diﬅinctly
underﬅood, ſince 'tis certain that few Things can be di
ﬅinctly view'd together. But this Expreſſion is to be al
low'd the Latitude of meaning a very ſhort Time; and the
Reaſon we uſed the Term together, is, that there is no ex
ternal Menſurarion of Time, to divide the Rapidity of the
Mind's Motion from one Thought to another.
2. If any one ſhould demand, whether the Minds of all
Men were alike, except what difference is made by Educa
tion? we ſhould only anſwer, That we do not certainly
know, but that Experience gives us a certain Confirmation
of two Things.
Y 2 3. That
244 Logie; ar, the Art of Reaſoning.
3. That ſome have ſo unhappy a Genius, that it is with
difficulty they conceive the Connection of two Propoſi
tions, unleſs they fall on Subjects with which their Experience
has been converſant, but are perfectly blind in Contempla
tion, nor can in the leaﬅ diſcover any difference betwixt a
good and bad Ratiocination. Others again have a Mind
ſomething larger than this, and can by one View of the
Mind comprehend more than one Connection of Propoſi
tions 3 but if the Deduction of Conſequences be ſomething
longer than ordinary, they cannot extricate themſblves. But
then there are ſome happy Genius's which can with eaſe, if
not at one view, yet in a very little time, and few Thoughts,
comprehend a long Chain of Propoſitions. They are nei
ther ſatigu'd nor diﬅurb'd with that Number of Propofitions
which would abſolutely confound ſome others.
4.. It is apparent from Experience in the ſecond place,
that the Capacity of the Mind can be enlarg'd by a frequent
uſe of thinking' of many Things at once. 'Tis ſufficiently
known, that the young Leamers of Gumm-7, Arithmetic.
or Algebra, are at firﬅ diﬅurb*d with the number of Ideas to
be conſider'd together, nor can they, without a very ainful
Attention, underﬅand what they read, or are taug t, by
reaſon of the number of Ideas which are to be confidefd:
As for Example, Thoſe who at firﬅ endeavour to learn
the Rule of Di-ui ran, are confounded or puzzl'd by the mani
fold compariſon of the Diviſar and Di-uidmdz and they are
ſurpriz'd to conſider how the Maﬅer that teaches them ſhall
be able at one View,*or at leaﬅ with very few, to compre
hend the Connection of ſo many Pro fitions as are form'd in
a long Arithmetical Operation 5 yet t e ſame Students of this
Art, after they have apply'd themſelves to the Study of Ac
counts for ſome Months, comprehend many Operations with
eaſe in their Mind, when before they could not take one.
Whence 'tis evident, that the Capacity of the Mind will ad
mit of an Encreaſe.
If it ſhould farther be ask'd, whether the Capacity of all
Men could be improved by the ſame Method .> we may an
ſwer, That ExPerience has ſhown us, that all ſuch who can
that way improve their Minds, have by it enlarged their Ca
pacity; for there are ſome, who, from their firﬅ Application,
could never make any Progreſs in theſe Studies ,- but among
thoſe who are not wholly incapable of theſe Studies, ſome
make a ſwifter and greater Progreſs than others, even from
the beginning, whether this be the effect of the Nature of
the Mind or the Body. 6, To
Logic; or, the Art of Keaſonmg. 24;
6. To come to the point it err, whoever has a Deſire to
enlarge the Capacity of his Mind, muﬅ make it his endea*
vour to have his Attention at his Command, ſo as to apply
it when, and to what he pleaſes, which may be obtain'd
by the Means propos'd in the former Chapter. For he that
cannot be attentive to a. few, will much leſs be capable of
underﬅanding many together, and not be confounded by
the Multiplicity of the Objects. ,
7. But ſince the Capacity of the Mind, as we have ſeen,
is a Faculty within us by Nature, whatever we do to ac
quire it, as we have expreſs'd it, comes only to this, that
by frequent EXerciſi: we render its Uſe eaſy to us. We
muﬅ only examine on what Objects it is chiefly exercis'd.
8. Objects are of two kinds; one are Mathematical, the
other cannot be treated Mathematically. Whatever can be
examin'd in a Geometrical Method (which we ſhall deliver
when we ſhall treat of the Method of Compoſition) are Ma
thematical; and of this kind are all things of which we
can have a perfect Knowledge, that is, whatever belongs,
or relates to Moder.
9. All who have apply'd themſelves to the enlarging the
Capacity of the Mind, tell us, that it is acquir'd by the
Conſideration of theſe Things. And *tis certain, that in
Aritbmetit (to inﬅance one part of the Matbematicr for all)
the manifold Parts of the Object are ſo diﬅinctly noted, and
ſo clearly perceiv'd, that provided the Attention be apply'd,
there is no manner of danger of our being confounded. In
Computation or Accompts, there are, firﬅ, as manyObject:
as Unirsz next, certain Name: are impos'd (for Brevity's
ſake) on certain Collections of Um'N, without producing
any Confufion, how great ſoever the Collection of Units
may be', as one Hundred, a Thou/hard, an Hundred thazq'and,
a Million, &ce. Laﬅly, there are long Compariſons of
Numbers made in the groſs, without coming to any one
particular, or alone, but of many collectively together, and
at once. For whether we add or ſubﬅract, multiply or
divide, to which all Aritbmetic is reduc'd, many Numbers
are conſider'd at once, except only theNumber Two, which
conſiﬅs only of two Unitr; but in the Compntation of that,
vthere is not- any need of Art.
lo. In Computation therefore, we. exerciſe theFaculty of
diﬅinctly underﬅanding many Thingstogether, which we
call the Capacity off Genimg for we ſhou'd ﬅill remember,
_that this Capacity we ſpeak of, ought always to be join'd
* ' ' ' ' Y z _with
with this diﬅinct Perception, ſince a confus'd Underﬅand
ing of Things is of no Uſe to the finding out of Truth.
n. The C ſideration of Subﬅances cannot be Mathe
matically ' cuſs'd; and we ſhou'd in vain imagine, that in
theſe the Capacity of the Mind cou'd ever be acquir'd; for
ſince we have no clear Knowledge of particular Subﬅances.
much leſs can we know with Perſpicuity a Collection of
Subﬅances together 5 we can only conſider their Properties,
and the Relations that there is between them.
12.. Hence we may ather, that the Mind cannot be
render'd more capacious y _the Conſideration of Genu; and
SPecier of the old Philoſophers, who rang'd all Subﬅances
under thoſe Heads, becauſe it is an uncertain Diviſion of
unknown Objects. .
c H A P. IV.
' Of the Law: of the Method of Reſolution.
r. Efore we proceed to the Laws of the Method of
szalntion, we muﬅ recal to our Memory certain
Maxxms on which they are built. The firﬅ is what We
have more than once taken notice of, viz. That me muﬅ
conſider E-uideme in every Step or Degree of on' Progreffiom
in our Reaflming or Arguments, unleſs we wou'd run the
Riſque of falling into Error.
a. The next is the Conſequence of this, That we ought
to redſim on tho/i? Thing: only, of which we ha-ue clear and
perſpimom Idea: 5 or on ohﬅure things. only ſo far a: we know
them. Whence we may gather, that our Reaſoning ought
to be only converſant about the Properties and Modes of
Subﬅances and abﬅract ldeas, and not about the inmoﬅ Na
ture of Things extremely obſcure.
z. The third Maxim is, That me ought alway: to begin
from the ſimple and Mfl, and to dwell on them a while, before
we proceed to thing: compounded and more difficult :. For we
ought firﬅ to have a clear Perception of ſimple ldeas, elſe
-we can never have a ſufficient Knowledge of the Corn
pounded. {
4. Theſe general Maxims are the common Principles of
both the Method of Refilution and Compqfition. For in both
*Methods are equally requir'd Evidence in the Degrees or
Steps of Progreſſion, Choiceof the Subjectof our En uiries,
and the Knowledge of Things ſimple before thoſe t at are
corn
- 11 - v a'
Logic ; or, the Art of Reaſonmg. 247

compounded; as will appear from what follows. But now
we ſhall proceed to thoſe Laws which are peculiar to the
Method of Reſblutian. ſi _
. ſ. The -firﬅ_is, That we muﬅ clearly and perfectly under
ﬅand the State. of the flee/lion: propot'd. _ If we prgpoſe any
Thing as the Subject or our Enquiry, it is. nece ary to a
void rambling from the Point, that we haveadiﬅinct Know
ledge or Idea in our Mind of the Thing we examine. If
the Weﬅion be propos'd by others in certain Words, we
ought, before we proceed to the Solution, to have a di*
ﬅinct and clear Knowledge of the meaning of every Word,
in which it is expreſs'd. r . : . _ m
6. Having now a diﬅinct Knowledge of the Sulzject of
our Enquiry, and the Ideas which are contain'd pin the
Veﬅion being now to be compar'd, another Law is, That
with ſhme forte and effort of the Lfind, one or more middle
Idea: muﬅ he diſiowfd, whichſhou'd he like a common Mea
ﬅzre or Standartl, by whofla help the Relations between the
Ideas to he compar'd he found out.
'stak
7. But when the Queﬅions are difficult, and ﬅand in
need of a long diſcuffion, the third Law is, That me cut of
all, that ha: no neceſſary Relation to the Truth ſhught after,
from the Thing which is the Subject of our Conſideration.
8. When the Qieﬅion is reducid to its narrowd'c Bounds,
that is, when we diﬅinctly perceive the Matter in diſpute,
having rejected all that does not neceſſarily belong to it, the
fourth Law is, That the compounded flee/lion he divided
e'Jc-:_-I--'L
:
'a-
into Parts, and thoſe to heſeparately conſider'd in ſuch Order,
that me begin with thoſe which tortfﬅ of the more ſimple
Ideas, and never proceed to the more tom ounded, till 'me di
flinctlj know the mareſimple, and hy Reſiection have render'tſ
them eaſy to our Conſtderation.
9. When by Reflection we have obtain'dadiﬅinct Know
ledge of all the Parts of the Veﬅion, and manage it with
Eaſe in our Minds, thus the fifth Law is, That certain Sign:
of our Idea: comprehended in eﬅahliſh'd Figurer, or in the
I.
fewefl I-Vora's that can he, he imprinted in the Memory, or
mark'd on Paper, leﬅ the Mind have a more trouble ahout
them. This Law ought chiefiy to e obey'd when the
Qieﬅions are difficult, and conſiﬅ of many Heads, tho' it be
not unuſeful even in thoſe that are more eaſy. By the help
of this Law the Reaſoning is ſooner concluded, than if they
were conceiv'd in many Words and other Signs,- and we
thus likewifi; diſcover the Connefition of the &ass.
'a . *
... 10. en
248 Logic; or, the Art qf Reaſoning;
10. When thoſe Things which are neceſſary to the Olfa
ﬅion are clear to us, and marked with compendious Signs,
and diſ oſed in Order; then muﬅ the Idea: (by the ſixth
Law) e compared with each other, either Reflection alone,
or by expreſs PI/ordr. When more Things t an one arc to be
compared, the Memory and judgment receive great Affiﬅ
ance from Writing, which 'are eaſily otherwiſe confounded,
and we can make but an ill judgment of Things confuſed.
1 I. I-f after we have compared all the Ideas, whoſeSi ns
we have committed to Paper, we cannot yet find out w at
we ſeek, then the ſeventh- Law ſug eﬅs, That we cut of
all 'he Prapafitiom, which afler aful Examinatim 'me find
of no Uſe to the Solution of the Quﬅian 5 then me may again
proceed in the ſame Order' in the refl, which is delivered in
the-fix preceding Laws.
La. lfyafter we have repeated this Examination as often
as it is neceſſary, nothing of what we have marked ſeemsto
conduce to the Solution of the Weﬅions, we muﬅ confeſs,
that, as to us, it is not to be reſolv'd, ſince whatever we
'cou'd diſcover in its Parts, prove inſufficient to ſolve it. We
ought therefore to throw it entirely aſide, or conſult ſome
Perſon more knowing in the Subject, or better skill'd in
Enquiries. - -
13. Theſe are the Laws of the Method of Reſhlution, all
which are not to be obſerVed in all Queﬅionsz for one or
two of them are ſufficient for ſimple Weﬅions, or thoſe
which conſiﬅ of but few Propoſitions. But when they are
very much compounded and intricate, we muﬅ often come
to the laﬅ, and that to' be repeated more than once. But
this being a Matter of very great Importance, we ſhall diſ
courſe of them ſeparately in ſeveral CIMPNH.
CHAP. V.
Of the three Muximr on which all Method i;
' built.
s
r. ſ E ſhall ſay nothin more than We have already on
the firﬅ Maxim a out preſier'uing Evidence in every
Step or Degree of Knowledge; but we cou'd nor but take
notice of it in this place, both to make appear the Con
nection of thoſe that follow 'with it, and alſo becauſe it
cannot be too much inculcated to Men who have been uſed
to give their Aſſent to Things that are obﬅure.
L- The
Logic ; or, the Art of Reaſonmg. 249
a. The next, which is the Conſequence of the former, is,
That we ought not to reaſim on Thing: of which me have no clear
Idus, or of obſhnre Things, a: far a: the] are abſcure. We
muﬅ not take this Maxim in a Senſe that ſhould exclude
the Nature of all Things which are yet unknown to us From
our Enquiries; for this would be directly oppoſite to our
Defign, by which we aim to open a way to the Diſcovery
of Truths unknown to us.
3. But we are of Opinion, that a Philoſopher ought not
to reaſon on obſcure Things, in adouble Senſe: the firﬅ is,
That he ought not to chuſe ſuch Objects of his Contempla
tion, which it is plain cannot be diſcovered by evident De
monﬅrations. (i.) Thus, as ſeveral Geomem'u'am have de
monﬅrated, the ſqudring of the Circle, and the depicting 'be
Cube, cannot be found out. (2..) Thus we cannot diſcover
what is the inmoﬅ Nature of Things; all we can know of
that, is, that Experience has ſhown us, that there do co-_
exiﬅ in Subﬅances certain Properties: We ſhould therefore
reject the Enquiry into Subﬅantes, and only conſider their
Propcrties. (z.) If we cannot find out the inmoﬅ, or whole
Nature of any one created Subﬅance, much leſs muﬅ we
pretend to diſcover the Subﬅance of that, Sup'reme' Nature
which created all the reﬅ, We may gather,*as it were by
Experience, from thoſe Properties which we ﬅe intthrea
tures,
what hethat
hasthey
not;areyetinwe
the cannot
Creator,conceive
ſince nohow
bodyailſſthe
can give
real
Properties of all Creatures can co-exiﬅ in God.
4.. The other Senſe of this Maxim is, That no certain
Conſequence can be drawn from a Principle that is unknownv
or uncertain. Tho this bea Maxim allowed by all Philoſo
phers, both ancient and modern, yet have they all offended
againﬅ it, erſuading themſelves that they do know their
Principles to be clear and certain, which yet are often very
uncertain, and many times not known at all. Thus all that
we have any clear Perception of in out Minds, is the Pro
perty of Thinking; and therefore we cannot poſitively af
firm, that there is any other in it; nor on the other ſide,
can we deny that there is, becauſe there may be ſome, of
which we are ignorant.
5. But it is here neceſſary to take notice (leﬅ any one
ſhould wreﬅ what we mean by our Mind into another
Senſe) that what we ſay is not to be underﬅood as if we could
not deny Contradictions. For 'tis one thing to deny that
any Particular is not in a Subject beſides what wc ſee, and'=
ano
ago Logic; or, the Art of-Reaſoning.
another to deny that the lime thing can be, and not be," in
the (Lime Subject at the ſameTime, Thus we cannor affirm,
that there is nothing elſe in our Mind beſides the Faculty of
Thinkin , becauſe we diſcover nothing elſe in it; but We
may wit out danger of Error, deny that the Mind, Whilﬅ- it
is thinking, is deﬅitute of Thought, ſince we clearly perceive
that one of theſe two Propoſitions is neceſſarily falſe.
6. To obſerve the ſecond Caution which we have men"
tioned, we muﬅ neceſſarily examine with our utmoﬅ Dili
gence into the Principles laid down, before we proceed to
the ConﬅquenCes of them. We are taught by the third
Maxim, That me muﬅ hegin 'with the ſimple and caſ] Things,
and dwell on them ſinne time, hqfore me proceed to the term
pounded and difficult. Thus we learn Arithmetic, the Stu
dent m'uﬅ be.perfectly acquainted with, and fix in his Me
mory the firﬅ four Rules of Addition, Suhflraction, Multi=
plication and Dimſion, before he can to any purpoſe proceed
to'the Rule ofi Ihree, and the following Rules.
r C H A P. VI.
7 Of the firﬅ Rule (yf thngethodqf Reſolution)
t. ALL our judgments being only the Perceptions of
* Relations, in which Perceptions we acquieſce, it
is manifeﬅ, that when we enquire into any thing which is
unknown to us, 'we only ſeek after an unknown Relation.
When therefore we ſay in the firﬅ Rule, that we muﬅ per
fecty and clearly know the State of the flee/lion prepar'd; 'tis
the ſame thing as if we ſhould tell you, that you are to take
particular Care leﬅ you ſuppoſe that Relation the Object' of
your Enquiry, which does by no means come under our
Confideration; for unleſs the ſought Relation be marked
.With ſome certain Note, we ſhall neither know what we
ſeek, nor know it when found out.
2.. But _if ſuch a Relation be plainly and clearly known,
you may ſay, How can we then make any farther Enquiry
about it? But then ſay we, can there be any Deſireof know
ing any thing of which we have no manner of Knowledge?
None at all. That which is ſought, therefore, ought neceſ
'flarily to be diﬅinguiſhed from all things elſe, that we may
know it when we find it, and ſo-far know it, before we make
anK Enquiry about it; No Queﬅion can ever be ſolv'd,
_W Oſiz Terms are not in ſome meaſure known to us. Thus
for
Logic; or, the Art of Reaſoning. 25:
for Example, we enquire, When thoſe two Number: are, he
tween which there is ſuch 4 Relation, a: you take a Unit
from one, and add it to the other, they ſhall he equal; but on
the contrary, you add the Unit taken rom the other, to
thatfi-om which you ſuhtracted, the Num er ſhall he double
to the other! Tho' the Numbers between which there is
this Relation' be not known, yet are they ſo far known,
that that Relation ought to be between them, whence they
are acknowledged as ſoon as ever they are found out.
3. When a Weﬅion is conceived in Words, thoſe Words
ought to be diﬅinctly underﬅood 5 or the Ideas which are
fignify'd by every Word ought to be throughly known to
us. All Equivocation in the Terms muﬅ therefore be en
tirely removed, leﬅ, for one Queﬅion, as many ariſe as there
are different Senſhs of the Propoſition; nor can we appre
hend what Senſe he that propoﬅs it (if propoſed byanother)
gives his equivocal Propoſition.
4.. If we cannot underﬅand all the Senſes of the Words in
which aneﬅion is conceiv'd, we can never know whether
we have given it a Solution in the Senſe in which it was pro
poſed, which often happens in general Weﬅions, and the
occaſion of which isnot ſufficiently known; Thus we can
only gueſs at the Places in old Authors, which cannot be
ſolyed but by the Series of the Context.
5. When we have rendered the Terms in 'which any
Weﬅion is conceived as plain and clear to us as we can, we
muﬅ applky our Attention to the Confideration of the Con
ditions, i there be any in it. If we underﬅand not them,
the Aeﬅion remains obſizurez for they often ſhew us the
way to ſolve the Weﬅion. If there be none expreſſed or
underﬅood, then is the Aeﬅion general, in which we muﬅ
obſerve thoſe Things which we have already delivered on
that Head: But if the Conditions are not expreſſed, but un
derﬅood, tho' neceſſary, it can never be ſolved, if we have
not 'the Opportunity of asking the Propoſer of it what they
are. If the Conditions added to the Qxeﬅion be ſuperflu
_ous and of no uſe, they muﬅ be diﬅinguiſh'd from thoſe
which are neceſſary, for without this, we often run after
things of no moment, and leave thoſe which are of imporz
rance and neceſſary, without any Notice.
6. This Weﬅion may be propoſed-To find out two Num."
hen, on; ofwhich deſigned by the Letter A, ſhall he two Um'n
greater than another deſigned by the Letter B ,- jþ that taþihga
Unit from B, and adding it to A, A ſhall he doubled. The
. .1 Can;
252. Logic; or, the Art Qf Reaſonina.
Condition of theQxeﬅion is Conceived in theWordsſa that,
&c. thoſe therefore muﬅ have our Attention, becauſe with
out them the Aeﬅion is not underﬅood. For the Veﬅion
is nOt ſimply, how a Number may be found out greater by
two Units than another, but ſuch Numbers in which that
occurs which is in the Condition, which are 7 and ſ.
7. The neceſſary Condition would be omitted in this
Weﬅion, Whether a Man, by putting his Finger in his Ear,
could be rendered ſi: immoveable, as not ra be able to wall' till
his Finger he taken out ofhi: Ear! AO\ueﬅi0n propoſed in
theſe Words would be deny'd, becauſe the putting the
Finger in the Ear cannot tender any one immovcable. But
this difficulty is removed by adding, That the Manſhall he
ſi placed, that hiſ Arm ſhall embrace a ſhlid fixt Filler,
when he put: a Finger qf that Arm into his Ear.
8. Farther, ſometimes there are idle Conditions annex'd to
the Veſtion propoſed, which conduce nothing at all td the
Matter, as if we ſhould propoſe, To make a Man, anointed
with ſweetheOil,
flill, tho' andany
ſee not crown'd
thingwith
thata tun
Garland, not ableShctou'd
'no-ye him. to lie
an one ﬅop at, and conſider the meaning of this part,

w ich ſiys, anointed withſweet oil, and crown? with a Gar
land, he would ſpend his Pains to no purpoſe, ſince thoſe
Words have nothing to dowith the Matter: But this is done
by putting a Man into a Ship driven on by the Winds; or
if he fall from a Tower, or any other high place; for he
will of neceſſity be moved, tho' he foe not what it is that
gives that Motion, ſince he is driven on by a Matter that
does not fall under the Scnſe of Seeing.
9. Nor is this only to be regarded in ſuch Weﬅions as
are only feigned for the Exerciſe of the Mind, for the like
Caſes occur in Things drawn from the Critical Art, and
from Natural Fhiloſophy, and all other Parts of Learning. '
Thus if we examine, what any particular Word does ſignify
generally conſidered? The Anſwer, rho' true, is very rarely
of any conſequence to the Solution of the particular Aeﬅion
of, what that Word does ſignify inany one certain place.
If, therefore, any one deſires to know the latter, he ought
not to propoſe the Queﬅion in neral Terms, but to re
pea: the Place in which the Sen e of that Word, which is
ſought, occurs; for Words often vary their Senſe by their
Situation to another, which when they ﬅand alone, they
do not ſignify.
þ.
CHAP.
Logi-c 3 er, the Art qf Reaſonino. a 253ct
C H A P. VII.
The Explanation of 'be ſecond and third Rule: if
'be Mtbad qf Reſolution. '
*'. L L (Lueﬅions may be referred totwo Kinds, or Salts I
that is, Simple or Compounded. All that is nccclſi
firily' required to theSolution ot the firﬅ, is a diligent com
pariſon of the ldeas of which they are compoſed. Thus
when 'tis ſaid, that a Circle has this Proper-ty," that all the
Lines that are drawn from its Cenere to its Circumference,
are e ual: if any one doubt of the Matter of Fact, and
won] enquire into the Truth or Falſhood of that Maximi
he need only compare the Idea of a Circle, with the Idea of
this Property.
2.. But a Compounded O_ucﬅion cannot be ſolv'd without
comparing the ldeasof which 'tis compoſed, with ſome third
Idea, or many Ideas; for nd Man can find out the un
known Relations, which are the Subject of his Enquiry, by
an immediate (lompnriibn of the Ideas of the Qieition pro-ſi
poſitd. There is, therefore, a Neceſiity of findin out ſome
third Idea, or more, with which the Terms oft cQueﬅion
muﬅ be compared; but theſe Idens ought to be clear and
perſpicuous, at leaﬅ, as to their'Rclation by which they are'
compared with Others. And hence is'drawn the ſecond'
Rule of the Method of Rqſhlution.
3. Example: will make this Matter more plain. If this
O_ueﬅion was propoſed,v Whether a Thitfought to ſuffir Dear/2?
Since the Idea bf a Thiqf cannot be immediately compared
with the laﬅ Puniſhment, no Natural Connexio-n being be
tween thoſe two Ideas; ſo that the ldea of a Thief ſhould
neceſſarily excite the Idea of that capital Puniſhment: We
can't ſelve thar Queﬅion without the Intervention of ſome
third Idea, with which bath the others ſhould be compared;
and that is of Vindicati-ue Juﬅice, or the Knowledge of the
an. And when we have made this Compariſon, we ſhall
fixy, 'tis juﬅice, for the good of the Commonwealth, that
the Thick' be put to death, or undergo ſome milder Puniflc
ment.
4.. If again we vput the Queﬅion, Whether 'B o tem
beinggcjlt] if Thfft, ſhould He put to Death .P TZe 'izfmen
Qeﬅion is contained in this: ſ;-
___ we muﬅ firﬅenquire,
ſſ" whe
they
i
254 Logic 3 or, the Art ofReaſoningfl
ther an Thief deſerve Death, before we ſee whether ſuch
a Thie ſhould ſuffer in that,m:.nner, For unleſs the firﬅ
Weﬅion be ſolv'd, the latter never can. But having found,
by the Laws, that a Thief at Man's Eﬅate, by the Law, it
to be put to death, we 'muﬅ farther enquire, whether a
Thief of fifteen bevliable to the ſame Puniſhment. Here,
therefore, would be another Compariſim, not of the Boy
with thclPuniſhment, but of the Puniſhment that is-to be
inflicted, with juﬅice, or the Law.,- , . t,
. ſ. There may, in this very ſame Weﬅion, occur ſeveral
other Ideas, which muﬅ-be compared, becauſe the Bencfit
of the Commonwealthis not a ſimple Thing; but here', fori
the ſake of Inﬅruction, we makezthe Idea of juﬅice aſim
ple Idea, and of the higheﬅ Clearneſs and Perjþicuity. iWe
farther ſuppoſe, that there is no Enquiry into the Circum
ﬅances of the Fact, which yet moﬅ commonly come into
the Conſideration of the Thing. .
6. But if the Þeﬅion was, What Pmiſhmeut ſhould he in
flicted on Peter, w o, withevtthe Award of Law, had by fort'
taken away what he pretend: i: hisdue ,? Then, at firﬅ hearing
very many Things offer themſelves to our Conſideration.
(_'.) We muﬅ nicely examine, whether he were really the
Crediror or not, of him from whom he had taken this Thing;
in which Enquiry his Affirmation is to be compared with
the Bond, Writing, or other Inﬅruments, if there be any, or
with the Affidavit, or Oath, or Witneſiſes, Or. (z_.) Next,
we muﬅ examine, whether the sum he lent be as great as
he pretends, which is by comparing his Oathwith'the Words
of the Decds, or Inſlrument, or'of the Witneſſes, be. (3.) We
muﬅ enquire, whether he took it away, or not. - (4.) Whe
- ther by Force, where we muﬅ heat Witncſſes, whoſe Evi
dcncc muﬅ be compared with manifold Ideas to make out
the Truth. (;.) We muﬅexaminc, whether the Lawscon
demn all manner of Force on ſuch an Occaſion, where we
muﬅ compare the Fact with the Words of the LaWs. (6.) What
Puniſhment the Laws inflict on that Force, which we here
ſuppoſe to have been uſed, without the Intervention of the
Sentence of the judge. Before, therefore, we can ſolve this
Queﬅion, V/hat Paniſhment Peter muﬅ undergo? we muﬅ
many ways compare the middle Ideas with the Terms of
the Qgcﬅion,
7. But if in this Compariſoh we take in Ideas that are
not very clear, there is the greateﬅ-Danger imaginable of
Effort of if any oneflip in, an the following Prope
' '-'. ſitions
-__,_1
Logic; or, the Art of Reaſoning. as;

fitions are either falﬅ, or nothing to the purpoſe, and the
Conclnſion i'nuﬅ be abſolutely falſe.
8. The-third Rule is, To throw away every thing, fi-om the
Queﬅion to be conſider'd, 'which doth not neceſſarily belong to
the Truth that is ſhaght after. This Rule is of manifeﬅ Adr
vantage and Uſe; becauſe, whoever does not obſerve it, eia
ther wandcrs wideoſ the Matter, and finds not what he ſeeks,
or Forms his Judgment by foreign Ideas, and gives his Mind
a profitleſs Fatigue. Thus, in the former Queﬅion, if we
ſhould enquire, whether Peter where a Denizen or Foreigner,
or-what are the Laws of other Countries, on that Head, or
the like, 'tis plain, there could nothing be drawn thence to
the iblution ot the Weﬅion. -
9. We make uſe of this Caution in (Lueﬅions that are
conceived in many Words, either by the ignorance or De
ſign of him who propoſes them, to make them the more
intricate; or thoſe which-are taken outof any Writing, which
the Writer never deſigned to propoſe with Clearneſs and
Perſpicuity.
'C H A P. VIII.
'An Explanation ofthefbnrth,fifth,ſixth andſZ-wnh
' Rule: if the Method of Reſolution.
1. HEN we have taken away from the Weﬅion ro
poﬅd all that did not, or appear'd not nece arily
to belong to the Thing enquir'd after, if it yet remains com
pounded ſo ſar as to fall under two or more Heads, ſince
we cannot with Attention examine ſeveral Things at once)
by the fourth Rule we areobliged, (1.) To divide the fine/77'
on into it: ſeveral Heads. (2..) To examine thoſe Head: ſe a
mteby, inſach a manner, a: to begin with thoſe which conſiﬅ of
the more ſimple Ideas. (3.) And never to proceed to theſe Head:
which are more compounded, Will we have by oar Conjzderatz'on
made them more ſimple, perſpioaoar, and ea to on' ſel-ver.
a. The Neceffiry of this Rule is mani eﬅ in the ſolution
of compounded (Deﬅionsz for, firﬅ, if we confound their
ſeveral Heads, we can never have diﬅinct Ideas of them;
for Diﬅinction and Confuſion are inconſiﬅcnt. By that
means we can never compare the Ideas with each other, as
they on ht to be compared to find out the Truth ,- which iſ
we ſhou d otherwiſe hit on, it would be more the Effcct of
Chanee, than our Skill or Underﬅanding.
Zz 3.Wc
256 Logic; or, the-Art of Reaſoning.
3.. We ſomctiines give the ſame Judgment of ſweral Ideas;
tho', generally ſpeaking, the ſame ju gment will not agree
to ſeveral. But if we form a Judgment of various Things
mixr together, without conſidering each fingly, we give a
general judgment of different Things, which is ſeldom free
from Etror in ſome thing or other. We may diſcover that
an Author has neglected his Rules, when, upon a diligent
peruſal of his Works, we cannot (tho' the Argusneut he
writes on be not unknown to us) reduce what he ſays to
certain Heads: And this we may find in ſeveral' of the An
cient aa well as Modern Writers 5 who for that Reaſon are
not read without difficulty and pain.
4. The ſame lnconveniencies ariſe from the neglect of the
ſecond and third Cautions of this out fourth Rule. Having
ſaid ſomething of this in the fifth Chapter, we ſhall only add
here, that when we are grown familiar and achainted
with the more ſimple Principles of the Qgeﬅion propoſed,
ſo far as to have them diﬅinctl in our Minds, we never, in
the leaﬅ Conſequences draWn tom them, affirm any thing
contrary to them. On the contrary, when we take but a
tranſrent View of the more ſimple, and paſs on ſo ſwiftly to
the more compounded, we ſurely forget them, and the laſt
prove often contradictory to the firﬅ.
.The fifth, fithl, and ſeventh Rules ſeldom come into
Uſe in any Art but Algebm, Examples taken from whence
would ſoon and clearly declare their Uſe :, But they bein
too difficult ſtir thoſe who are unac' uainted with them, and
becauſe we are of Opinion that t e ſame Rules can bene
ficially bſic adapted to other Arts, we ſhall draw our Example:
elſewhere. .
' 6. when we go about the ſhlution of any propoſed Queﬅi
on, and to ſet down in Writing what ſeems to us may be
anſwered to it, it will be of the greateﬅ uſe imaginable to
write the Heads of the Queﬅion down in the feweﬅ Words
that may be, eſpecially if they arc many, leﬅ, while we con
ſider of one, the reﬅ, as it often happens by the multiplicity
of the Qicﬅions, flip our of our Mind. By this means even
a happy Memory, which with difficulty retains many Heads,
would find a great Aſſiﬅance; and the Mind unincumbercd
with other Things. with leſs Pain attends the Conſidera
tion of Particulars. 'Tis very ſeldom that all the Parts of a
compounded and difficult Weﬅion, which muﬅ be conſi
deted, offer themſelves to ether, and at once. Moﬅ com
Jnonly we muſt conſider orne time before we diſcover all,
and
Logic; or, the Art of Reaſomng. 257
and then if we Write not all that down whichwe have firﬅ
found out, while we ſeek others, that (lips out ofour Memo
ry. But becauſe it would be very troubleſome to write down
many things, therefore the various Relations which are to be
conſidered, may be expreſſed by ſome certain Words.
7. Hence ariſe two Advanta es which are not by any
means to be deſpiſhd. The ſir is, that before we write
down more fully what we have found out on any Weﬅion,
either by Conſideration, or that help'd by Reading, by this
Art we eaſily conceive the Order of the things to be writ
ten, and change it with equal Eaſe, if perchance we find an
thing amiſs in it: The other is, that both the Order and
Parts of our Treatiſe are ſo fixt in our Memory, by reading
over ſometimes what we have written, that when we come
afterwards to ſet down our whole Diſſertation, wedo not de
part from that Order, nor omit any thing which is worthy
of our Conſideration. Otherwiſe, by having too greataCon
fidence in our Memory, we ſit down to write with our Or
det and Heads of our Diſcourſe only in our Mind, many
things which occur to us while we are writing, like thoſe
which we have thought, inſcnſibly divert us from the right
Track which we deſigned to purſue, and make usomit what
we ſhou'd have diſcourſed of, and meddle with thofl: things
which have nothing to do in the Queﬅion before us.
8. When we have, according to the fifth Rule, expreſs'd
the Order we have conceIVed with certain Marks and Signs,
then, according to the ſixth Rule, we diligently conſider
every Propoſition that is to be examined. There are never
more than two Terms of one Propoſitiou to be compar'd, be
fore we find what Relation is, or is not, between them. This
thus found out, ſhould in few Words be written down, that
the MemOry be unburthened ofit, and that we may without any
Pains read over our Traces, and ſee what we have found out,
and what is the Connection of our Ar uments.
9. When we have written down al the Propoſitions that
were to be examined, and have not, however, found out
what we ſought; the ſeventh Rule ordains, that we with
greater Application peruſe what we have written, and cut
v off whatever we find of no Uſe to the ſolution of theQieﬅi
on; and commands us then to examine any thing that may
_ ſeem of Uſe, according to the former Method: For we
often, on the firﬅ View, imagine ſeveral Things to beplainly
neceſſary to the ſolution of the Queﬅion, eſpecially in theſe
which are intricatc, which afterwards we find on our Ex.
7- z perimcms,
258 Logrc; or, the Art of Reaſoning.
Periments, by an accurate comparing of the Ideas, to'be of
no manner oi' Uſe; and on the contrary, that ſome things,
which at firﬅ ſeem'd of no Importance to the Qieﬅion, an
a repeating the Examination, to be of that Uſe, as to open
the Way to our diſcovery of Truth. And this every one
will better know by Experience, than by any Examples
brought from others. '
10. Laﬅly, If on a frequent Repetition we can diſcover
no way of iblving the Queﬅion propoſed, we ought to daſh
it out with our Pens, as beyond-Mr Power. Or, if in our
Enquirics we have diſcover'd, that there are no I'deas in it
by which it can be ſolv'd, we ought to ſhe-w, that it is in
ſOiVabic in its Nature, that no body throw away their Time
any more about it.
rt. Perhaps ſome may object to this Method, that it is
difficult: But then they muﬅ reflect that there is no eaſier,
and that all theſe Rules are not made uie of in T'ruths more
eaſy to be diſcovered, but only in thoſe which are more dif
ficult and intricate. But it is much more difficult without
this Method to find out the Truth, and to know it when
diſcovered, than to uſe this Method, and gather the Cerz _
taintcty of our Diſcoveries.
c H A P. IX;
'1724- Rule: of the Method qf compoſition;
1, - E hope 'tis plain from the Compariſon we made
- between the Methods of Reſhlutitm and Campqfi
tion, in the firﬅ Chapter of this Part, what we mean by
Compgſz'tion. That is, that after we have found out the
Principles of any Truth, or whole Art or Diſcipline, we
muﬅ ſeek ſome Order, by which the Connection of its Parts
may be eaſily underﬅood, and the Thing it ſelf ſo prov'd,
'hat having granted the Beginning, you muﬅ of neCeflary
'conſequence grant alſb all that follows.
2. There has been no better Way found out than, that
the general Principles be firﬅ propoſed, and if Neceſſity re
quire, to be proved, _and that their Conſequences be ſo diſ
poſed, that thoſe which follow, fiem to fiow as much as poſ
ſrbly they can from thoſe which went before. Beſides the
gaining by this means the Order and Force of a Demonﬅra
tion, we avoid a great Inconvenience in teaching or convey
ing any Knowledge, which is the Neceffity ſi' of Repetition:
For
Logic; or, the Art of Reaſonmg. at;
Forif we ſhould begin from Particulars to come at laſt to
\the Generals, we muﬅ be forced to repeat what We know
'of its General, when we ſpeak of every Particular, becauſe
Without the Knowledge of the General, xou can never have
a certain Knowledge of the Particular.
3. But we muﬅ here put you in mind, that this Method
can only be preſerved in thoſe Things whoſe Principles we
perfectly know; as for Example, Geometr , which is wholl
employ'd in the Conſideration oſ abﬅra Moder, of which
our Mind
vquirvy hasSubflancet,
is into clear and asadequate Ideas;
in Natural but when
Philoſophy, wethe En
cannot
make uſe of the Method or Compqfltion, becauſe the Kinds
ofSubﬅanter are not known to us, no: can we find out their
inmoﬅ Eſſences. '
4. This Method of Gumm/[tion has beenby none ſo juﬅly and
accurately obſerv'd hitherto, as by the Mathematicimzs, whoſe
Principles are perfectly known; we can therefore draw its
Rules from none better, than from the T'eachers of Geamet'y.
5', Since they deſign'd to propoſe nothing that could be
contradicted, they thought they could obtain this chiefly h'y
three Ways. (r .) By offering nothing but what was couched
in Words or Terms perfectly underﬅood, and for this Rea
ſon they always careful! deſine the Words they make uſe
of; of which we have poken in the Second Part. (2.) By
building only an evident and clear Principles, ſo that they
could not be controverted by any one who underﬅood them.
They, therefore, firﬅ ofall propound their Maxims or Axiomsz
which they demand to be granted them, as being ſelf
* evident, and in need of no Ptooſ; (z.) By pro-ving deman
flrati'uel] all their Conſequences, and for this Reaſon they
only makeuſe of in their Arguments or Proofs of Definitionr,
Axiom: that have been granted, and Propoſitiom which they
have already proved. which are Principles to thofi: Things
that come laﬅ.
6. To theſe three Heads may. be referred- all. the Obſerva
tions of the Geometriciam, in the Demonﬅration of thoſe
Truths which they have diſcovered.
7. Theſe are the Laws or Rules of Deſinitions: (r .) Never
to uſe any Win] doubtful, or 'be leaﬅ obſture, without a De
finition. (2..) To 'me/ce uſ? of no. Word; butſucb a: are Aſ a
'ver known Sigmffiution, arfiuh a: have been already explained.
g. The Rule of their-M'nxims or Axioms, is, To allow nothing
flr a Maxim or Axiom, but what it moſt evident.
9.Theſi:
--* . p - m' i .'
260 Loglc; or, the Art ochaſonmg;
9. Theſi: are the Laws or Rules of their Demonﬅmtions?
(i.) To Have aZlPropoſz'tz'on: that have the leaﬅ Ohﬅnrig, and
to admit nothing to the Demonflratiam of them hat conﬅituted
Definition', granted Axiams, Propoſition: already pra-ved, or the
Canflraction of the Figure which i: under Conſideratian, when
aryſueh thing happen: to he done. ( 7..) Never to abuſe the Am
bigaity of a Word, 5] not affixing thoſe Definition: 5] which
they are explained. *
10. Theſe are Rules which the Geometrician: have thought
neceſſary to be obſerved, to give thoſe Truths which they de:
figncd to prove, the laﬅ and greateﬅ Evidence.
' C H A P. X.
'I'he' Explanation of the Rule: if Definition.
"1, E have already diſcourſed of the Definition of
Names, but it being a thing of no ſmall Conſe
quence, and without which the Geometrz'cal Method cannot
be underﬅood, we ſhall add ſome few things on the ſame
Subject, avoiding as much as poſſible a Repetition of what
we have ſaid.
a. The firﬅ Rule forbids us admitting any Whrd that is
the leaﬅ ohſmre without a Definition. , The Neceffity of this
Rule is built on this Foundation: I. That to pro-va an] thing
with Evidence, there it a neceffi't] that what weſhj he perfectl)1
underﬅood. For how can that Demonﬅration be evident,
which we do not ful-ly underﬅand? But there are a great
many Words which cannot be perfectly underﬅood, unlefi
they are defined, ſince the Uſe of the Tongue from whence
they are taken, has not fixt any certain and determinate Senſe
upon them, and ſo leaves them obſcures as wemay find in
fiudying the Art of Criticiſm. But when Words of this Na
ture are made uſe of in the' delivering, eſpecially the Princi
ples of Arts or Sciences, we underﬅand neither the Princi
ples themſelves, nor the Conſequencesþdrawn from them,
'nor the Order oi' the Argumentation, or the Connection of
the Propoſitions; whence it follows, that we cannoteer
tainly conclude, whether what is ſaid be true or falſe.
3. II. The Deſinitions of Words has this Effect on out
ſelves, that it makes us moreconﬅant and conſiﬅent with
our ſelves, by giving always the lime Senſe to the ſame Word.
For when we have not a diﬅinct Nation of that Signifioa
tion which we have at firﬅ given to a Word, we are apt,
by Inadvertenee, to recede front it, eſpecially in long Diſ
putes,
' ' -- ' -' '*"" 'I
Logic ; or, the Art ofReaſomng. 26:
"purest, and when the Diſcourſe is of things of differ-'ent
v Kinds; for on theſe Occaſions we our ſelves are not ſufficii
ently conſcious of what we mean, and of the Order of our
Argumentation, much leſs can another underﬅand us. But
i'f we deſme our 'Terms or Words, their Signiſication makes
a deeper Imgeſiim on our Minds, and by that we are the
more eaſily ought into the right Path, if in our Diſcourſe
we have by Accident ﬅray'd from it.
4.. The ſecond Rule of Definition: forbids a: to make uſe
of an] Word: in them, whoſesignifiratim is not diﬅinctl] known,
or already explained. The Reaſon of this is plain; for how
can that which is obſcure be explained by what is obſcure? '
z'. But to avoid too great a multiplicity of Deſinitions we
muﬅ never make uſe of obſcure Words but when we can
not find any others; elſe we ſhall be oblig'd to make Defig
nitions of Definitions. -' \ -
CHAP.
'An Explanation oft/ne XI. orAxiomſis.
Rule: of Maxims, ' '- O
r. Here are ſome Propoſitions of ſi) great Perſpicuity
and Evidence, and ſo univerſally known, that as ſoon
as we hear the Words that expreſs them, we perfectly know
and allow their Truth, as, That nothing cannot produce Some
thing. No Caaflz can give what it has not it ſelf. Theſe,
and others of the lame Nature, have no need oſ Demonﬅra
* Xſithey
tion, are.
becauſeAndno whatever
Demonſtration canthis
has not be Evidence,
more evident
is notthan
to
be admitted as a Maxim.
a. But we muﬅ be cautious of believing, that there are
_ none clear and evident, but thoſe which have never been
deny'd, becauſe there are ſeveral that have been of old deny'd.
by the violence oſ ſome of the ancient Sccts, eſpecially the
.Pjrrhoniam and Atademicr, which are now beyond- Con
Atrovei'ſy. For, ſhould the majority of Mankind conſpire to
deny that One is leſs than Two, no Man in his Senſes can
deny that Truth. -
_z. There are two Rules of Maxims or Axioms, which con
tain all that belongs to this Matter. The firﬅ is, Whenne'
are plainly and evidentbi ce that my Attrihate agree: with any
Subject, as weſee that o the Whole being bigger than it: Part,
ye have not need afany langConfideration of the Attribate and
Subject, for the Mind to diſcover that the Idea of the Attrihut'
ha: a Connech'on with the ldea aſ the Subject; we may well,
WHEN"- gi-ve the Name of a Maxim to ſuch a Propoſitim.
But'
26;" Logic ;' or, the Art of Reaſoning:
But this may be put into fewer Words. Whatever P'ap'ſi-_
lum expre e: the immediate clear Comparijim of two Hem',
without t e help of the third, i: un Axiom.
4. The other Rule, oppoſite to the former, is thus ex.
preſſed. When the hure Conſt'derution of the Idea: of the Suhjeil
and the Atm'hute are not ſufficient to diſcover the Agreement of
the Attrihute to the Subject, ſuch aProPQ/ition i: not to heal/mit-v
'ed a: an Axiom, but muﬅ bedemonflruted 5] the help of other
Ideu:.- In fewer Words, thus: Eve Propafition, the Proaf
quvhich require: ſhme third Idea, heﬅ e: the Attribute and the
Subject, i: not unAxiam. Or ſhorter yet: A Truth which doe:
notariſefram un immediate Compariſon gſtm Ideus, i: no Axiam.
, CHAP. XII. _
An Explanation iſ the Rule: of Demonﬅrariont
1. Here are two things requir'd in a right Demanflra
tion; firﬅ, 'that every Propoſrtion of which it conſiﬅs,
conſider'd ſeparately, be true ,- the ſecond, that the Conſe
uences drawn from other fore oing thin s, neceſſarily flow'
om them 5 or that all the Conſequenees e eontain'd in the
Antecedents, or Premiſis 5 both which will be certainly gain'd,
by following ﬅrictly the two Laws delit-cr'd in the gfh Chap.
a. All the Propofitions will be true, if none are admitted
except Definition: which can be call'd in queﬅion; or Max
ims or Axioms, which muﬅ always be evident,- or Propoſi
tions already demonﬅrated, which by Demonſlrution are freed
from all Doubts, or the Conﬅructiori of Figures, ii we make
uſe of any. be therefore we reduce the former Rule to Pra
ctice, all the Propoſitions ofwhich Wemake uſe, will be free
fi'om any manner of Doubt, ſince we can by that Rule make'
uſe of only thoſe things which we have reckoned up.
3. The Conſequences likewiſe will be truly drawn, if we
ſin not againﬅ theſecond Rule, which orders us to avoid an
manner of Ambiguity in our Words: For no Man in his
Wits can believe falſely, that any Pro ſition follows from a*
nother, or is contain'd in another, if Khave aperfect Know
ledge of both: Almoﬅ all the falſe Conſequences that are
made, depend on Words ill underﬅood z thoſe. that are not
ſo, are ſo evident and obvious; that no Man of a ſound
Head can Fall into them. p
4.. To avoid ſome Errors, we muﬅ remember, I. Not to
pro-ac uthing to he true, without giving the Reuſbn qfthut Truth.
II.Not to pro-ne that which doe: not needu Proaf. IIl.Nat to argue
from Impoffihiliy. IV.Not demanflrate by Reuſom too fur fercg.
c
_ _ I 2332')
þkiFOu'rthj Part of-Lo'eto.7

i' , ' Of the Socratie Method qf Diſpſſuzingl- -
i, luce 'tis eertnin, that the Aim oſ every honeﬅMau is to' ſin)
out the Truth, and to convey the Truth thus ſound out to
_others; and not to make a vain ſhow oſ his own, and expoſe
che flow/neſt oſ Apprehenſion eſ another: I' follows, that the Art
of S uabling, which has ſo long obtain'd in the School', and which
on] r. Luke condemns under the Name of Logt'c, and which has'
'or in in it but an emptv Oﬅentation ofWit, is abſolutely unworthy
of a an oſWiſdom. But ſince Truth cannot be diﬅinfily known
m- .prov'd Without Art, it is neceſſary, to do this rightly, that we
npply our ſelve' to the ſtudy oſ this Art. 'Tis often, likewiſe, ne
ccffny to ſilence the Saþhrflers, who boaﬅ their Knowledge of that,"
'ſ which they are really ignorant, to make uſe of a great deal of
Diligence, that by making them ſee their Ignorante, they may be
better inſorm'd.
2. Greece, which always was peﬅer'd with abundance oſ theſe
Sophiﬅs, was never more plagu'd with them than about the Time
of Socrates, when Philoſophy began to find a more than uſual Cul
givntion. This great Man, form'd by Nature For the confounding
the Pride of this ſort of Men, has flrewn us a Way, by which
'we may attain the ſame End againﬅ them in our Times, iſ they
happen to fall in our Way : And though this Way ought to have
been purſu'd by former Ages, et has it been entirely neglected;
perhaps becauſe this Pride of cerning to know more than we really
do, had got the Aſeendant of the Followcrs of Soap-ate; themſelves,
Which made them take to the ſubtile Arts oſ the Sopbills, and
jej'fl: the moﬅ admirable Method oſ a Man oſ that conſummace
Wiſdom.
3. But we deſign to revive with ſome ſhort Explanation this
Method, both in Conſideration of the Reaſon we have given, and
ali'o becauſe it is moﬅ agreeable to that Candour and Sinceriry
which every honeﬅ Man ought to pro oſe. 'Tis true, this Me
gþod requires a Genius, and Acuteneſs 0 lVit; but without theſe
Valiiies, the Mind cannot in any other Art be provided for ex
xempnre Diſputes.
. 4. The firﬅ Rule oſ this Method orders the Man who is to
make uſe of it, 'Ib conduct himſelf in ſuch a manner, as be de
fir'd to learn [drinking of' him Wilh whom b: argues. And indeed,
every one of us ought to have a Diſpofition to hear and 3110.; die
rut ,
264 Logxc; or, the Art of Reaſomng.
Truth, let it come from what Hand ſocvcr. Nor ought any Man'
'o think ſo well of himſelf, as to imagine he cannot be inſormcd by
nother, or ar leaﬅ be excited'ro think of a Thing of which per.
haps he thought not before. But beſide' that, every Man owe'
this Dury to himſelf, ſuch aDiſpofition of Mind, which appear' i'
the Countenance and Word', is moﬅ adapted to create in 'he Mind'
oſ thoſe who hear us, an Opinion oſ our Modcﬅy, which goe' a
great and ſure Wa to perſuade them.
' z-e Secondly, or: we proceed to any Objection, Iſ'e oughtn'f
'be Perſe' 'with whom we argue, make uſe of any ohſeute a' doubtfxi
Win-ds, to ask kin' to exflarn ubat be 'grant by the' : For it after
happens, 'bar Men have. uſcd themſelves to ſome Words which
they do not perſcflly underﬅand themſelves; and then they will,
By ſuch modeﬅ Qcflions, diſcover their I norance much better,
an by a dircfl Oppoſrtion, which often 'aiſfs 'he Paſſions. iſ the
Perſon happen to be a Man of Sincerity, and Lovcr of Truth,
he will own, that he did not ſufficiently underﬅand the Matter,
and then the Diſpureir at an end. But iſ 've meet with a pertin
jons and obﬅinate Puſon, who will ohtrude his Word: u n na
without defining them, we ought to proceed no farther in r e Diſ
ute, till he has made plain what it is he means. We ou ht 'a
xreſs him with little ueﬅions, not as the cffca oſ his want o Skill
'a Arguing, but our du neſs of Apprehenſion of what he underﬅand'
and delivers in his Speechr In the mean while, 're muﬅ not admit
any one thing that is obſcure, rho' it: flir up his Anger; which yet
may be done bya harry Addreſs, of telling him, that we are ready
to yield to ruth, but that we firﬅ ought to know it; ſince no
Lia-o in his Senſes can give his Alſent to a Propoſirion which he
does not underſtand. But iſ we can by no means prevail with him
'a ſpeak plainly, we muſt Puſ an end to the Diſyu'ez for 'hence 'ri'
evident that he knows not what he would he at. By this meam.
'hoſe that hear us o-ill'diſtovcr the Man's Vaniry who talk' oſ
things which he does not underﬅand, and many Times leaves a Sting
in the Mind oſ a Man mhczwiſe too perrinacious.
6. Thirdly, If we bring him at laﬅ to ſpeak plainly and clearly
what he means, fl'e mzdl' ask him Qrdiiom on the Partrculars of all
the fart: of the Dnflrine be advances, and their Canfzguencers not
n "Po-ving them, but Pr- 'fuller and more clear Injormatian of 'be
Matter; Je that be hou d apyenr the inﬅructor, and we the Leamers.
The Abſurdi of t e Doctrine will 'inn-ar from theſe Auﬅiuns, iſ
it labour wit any, much better than by an open Opponrion, yro
vided it be done with Dexterity, and the Vcﬅious Pretty numerous,
and he obliged ſeveral Times to repcat the ſame thing, leﬅ he
ſhould afterwards deny thar he had ſand ſo.- Here, that the Expla
nation may be the more ample, it would not be amiſs to make uſe
oſ Example: and Similitudes, and azh him, whether he means this,
or that i The make copious we arein this Particular, the more evident
will the Falfiry of the Opinibn appear.
7. The perſpieuous Expuſirion of any Doſhine, with its Conſe
gdocnees, if it be not true, ſhewe generally its Abſnidiry: But iſ
a ic be not ſufficient, then we muﬅ ask him," on what A' n'am o'
Irouſ' be build: bia Oginio'ri and wc Duct uſeth: (me &undufliz
rczar
Logic ; ar, the Art of Reaſomng. 36;
'regard oſ the
ſſhim with whomArguments as toas the
we diſpute, iſ other-Parts. We toarebetoinſorm'd
we were by him enquire of
of
41 Point of which we are ignorant; but we muﬅ not allow him th!
'leaﬅ Obſcurity. In ſhort, we muﬅ hear the whole Series eſ his
,.A.rgumentation in ſuch amanner, that there remain no Difficulty
either in underﬅanding his Doctrine, or the'Foundation on which it
'is built.
8. When we have done this with diligence, the Perſon who pro
ſes his Doctrine, muﬅ plainly ſee in Falſity, or on what Prooſs
't depends, 'If Paffion blind his Eyes, yet the Hearers wrll excuſe
any farther Diſpute with a Man who is angry, that we receive no:
ffiis Opinion tho' labouring with Abſurdity.
9. We 'ſhall give one Example of this Method on a Modern
Uontroirerſy, by which it will he better explained, betwixt a The
mtſia' and another, diſputing upon the Efficacy of the Divine Pro
widenu.
m. A. I 'wonder you are ſo ohflinate, a: to deny that God has an
Efficaciuus Operation in the Sin: of Men, 'which the Serzftures in many
places ſo openly andtplainly tejiiſy.
B. Ionl deny' that I underfiood how this is &one. Perhaps
my Dulne s makes that a Difficulty to me, which is obvious to
another. But I would willingly be inſorm'd by you, becauſeI can
neither believe, nor condemn what 'I do not underﬅand; what, there
fore, do you mean by an Eflicaciom Operation in the Sins of Men 2
do you mean that he makes them ſin .7
A. Far he itfra'n me, for ſo God would he the Author of Sin. 'I'z's Man
commit: Sin, not God.
Do you mean, that God make: Men to commit Sin, or forces
Men to commit Sin?
A. 1 would not have cap-eſt'd this in ſo rude a manner; but God,
in a dark and unknown manner, ſo permit: Sin, that it muﬅ neceſſarily
he committed.
.B. You us'd before the Word OPeration, now you uſe Permit ; pray
do they mean the ſame thing P '
A. Theſe Mrds do not ahſoluteſy mean the fame thing, but they mld?
be jain'd together, ji' that what God doesſhonld he called an efficacious
Permiffion; for God neither make: Sin, nor does hefimply Peru/'t it.
B. You, therefore, mean that God permits ſomething, and doe'
ſomething, ſo that Sin neceſſarily follows 3
A. That is what Irn-ran.
B. Perhaps then God does, in this, what he does who cutting down
the Dykes, lets the Waters in to overflow the Fieldi. For he doe'
ſomething in breaking the Dyke, and he permit; ſomething in ſuffer
ing the Sea to paſs through the Breach.
I. AIy Mind could not have been exyrcji'd by a more happy Simi
, ztn e,
B. But according to our common way of Speaking, we ſhould ſay,
that he who made a Breach in the Dyke, had let in the Waters;
nor would any one accuſe the Dyke or the Sea of any manner of
Fault; but you, ifI miﬅake you not, accuſe Man oſ the Fault, and
ſay Man, not God, committed the Sin. Wherefore, your Weeping;
Iwmiffion ſeems unintelligible to me. *
Aa an,
266 Logic 3 or, the Art ochaſoni-ng."
A. Do you nak,oi[erve,.thzt as to the Things themſelvgs, there is roof!
difference betweenthhiffi? For Men are endowed with Wdediandin and
V/ill, which the Dyke and the Sea have not 5 and far-that Reaflm, Lot is
a Crime in Man, which is notfo in the Sea and the Dyke.
B. But I ask of you, whether that which God does or permit',
zhas that Efficaty (For that Word you have likewiſe uſed) that Men
ean no more not ſin when that has ordered it, than the Sea not
overflow the Fields through the Breach which affordi a free Paffage 2
A. Tou have my Meaning.
B. According therefore to you, there is the ſame Relation in thze
Senſe between God and Sin, as there is between the Man who madea
Breach in the Dyke, and the Deﬅrufiion of the Fields.
A. There is, as to the Event, for both are equally neceſſary.
B. The Action therefore of both, according to the Cuﬅom of
Speech, may be expreſſed in the ſame manner :_ That is-- as
he who broke dowrt the Dyke is called the Cauſe of the Loſs of
zhe Fields, becauſe he did that which - neceſſarily produe'd that
_Loſs; ſo God is the Author of Sin, ſince he has put Man under a
nCCCffity of Sinuing- '
A. I told you before, that I will not make uſe of thoſe rude Ex
Preflom.
B. But either I do not underﬅand what yo'- ſay, or it comes
10 that Point; for v'e muﬅ not regard the empty. Sounds of
Words, which ſignify nothing, but mind the Ideas to which they
are annex'd. ' -
_A. thli- you'll Prefcrihe Rules to me aſ spelling, as if I did not
know how to hold a Dzſcourſe ?
gr. Iſ the Dialoguc once comes to this, there muﬅ bean end
of it; and hence it will appear, that he (deſigned by the Let.
ſer A) either knows not What he means, or elſe has a greater regard
zn Word: than Things- That O}\inion is look'd on as ſufficiently
confuted, which its Deſender is aſham'd to expreſs in clear and in
ulligible words. Having in the former Dialqgue Cufficiently ex
plai'n'd the firﬅ and ſecond Rule, to explain 'the third, we ſhall
[uppoſe the ſame Diſpute again.
k 17., A. Tonſufficiently underﬅand, that my Opinion is, that God has to
do with Evil 5 that he is not a 'member-e Spectator, but is ſo far an
Agent. that onþis acting Man commits Sin.
B. If God did nothing before the Sin, would not the Sin be
lcommitted? '
A. No, ſo' nothing'is done without the Eflicacy of the Divine Pro
vidence.
' B, What 7 do you believe that Man alone cannot violate
am? ' ,
That he an, Iffleny, 'when I deny that any thing can be done
_Jwithout 'the E cacy of the Divine Providence. '
_hF p.helGod, therefore,
s u>.mſſdo helps us__ to' 'do wickedly
well? , in the ſame manne', as
A. Iiiu miﬅake, for in Evil tue _mufl diflingmſh the Action, and the
Viciouſneſs of the Action. God helps as to the doing the Action, but
mit to the Vice But in good Actions he helps us lu- 'be Good that is
in' the Affiop. * _ B '
* . I
53
Logi'c; or, the Art of Re'aſom'ig. 26 7
B. I begI you, inform me, what you mean by the Words anActio-z,
lnd what y the Viciowfnrſr ofan Action?
A. I will make il plain to you by this Example : In the Hatred of
our Neighbour, there is the Action of the Hatred, which in it ſelf is in
different, and is only call'd bad, when directed to an unlz'wſul Object,
and good when to a lawful. Next, there is the Relation of that Action'
to the Object, which is Evil. God does not concur to this Relation, tho'
there is a neceſſity of his concurring to the Action, wirhoxt ivhich it
could not he done.
B- By what youhave ſaid, l ſuppoſe you mean, that God firﬅgenerates
in the Mind of Man, Hatred in genernl; which is in it ſelf nei
ther Good nor Evil: Then there cumes another Relation of the
Hatred to the Objcct, as in the Example to our Ncighbour. Do I
underﬅand you 2
A. Partly you do, h'rt not entirely z> for Ido not think there is any
ſugh Exilience as Haired in general, 'which ſhe/4" afterwards h defer-ex
mmed to a certain Objeflz th r is co-itrm'y to ExPen-ience.
B. Does God then create that very Hatred that is direfled againﬅ
our Neighbour 7
A. Moﬅ certainly the Ham-ed, but nal the Relation.
B, But does that Hatred exiﬅ without that Relation?
A. Not at all e for-the very moment that it is created in our .Mind5,
Hi: the Hatred of our Neighbour.
B. According, therefore, to you, God creates ſuch an Hatred which
eo-exiﬅs in ſuch a manner with a vicious Relation, that it cannot be
ſeparated or diﬅinguiſh'd ſrom-
A. He d'eefo; \' it' but'\ by Abﬅraction.
ſi
B. Ca'thfſs Horn-ed, tho: generated in the Mind of Mdn, be by
'he Man directed to a lawful Objefl, 's T'ice, for Example 3
A, It cannot ; for the Action of God being paﬅ, the certain Event
'nujl' neceſſarily follow.
B. I beſeech you, Sir, if a Man ſhould put a Burthen on another"
Shoulder, which he that bore it could not afterwards throw off, and
by that means he ſhould break his Ribs, would not he that put on
ſuch a Burthen be look'd on as the Breaker of his Ribs, if he had
known the Event of his Action?
A. Mq/l certainly.
B. Should a Man puſh another, walking by a River-'lide, into the
Wirer, 'who-ſhould there be drown'd, ſhould we not ſay' that' li'
who thruﬅ him in drown'd him 3
A. Certainly.
B. Yet there arc ſome Men who would ſay, that you are in an Er
ror in this particular; that the impofing, and the thrufling was pro
duced by both ,- but not the breaking the Ribs, and the drowning,
as God gcnerates the Hatred which is directed againﬅ our Neighbour
without that evil Relation.
A. 'Tis indeed may? evident, that the Men inflamed, were guilty >
of the Fracture and the Drowmſing 5 but the matter iſ otherwiſe with
God, who is. not obliged to give an account to poor miſerable Man
his Adminiflration.
B. But if he did, what you would wickedly perſuade us, either all
Sinncrs muﬅ be acquitted of any Crime, or God himſelf, who cum
pels the Sins, cogdcmn'd.
A a a. A. Don't
a
26 8 Logm 3 or, the Art of Reaſonmg.

A. Don't you know, that God's Ways are not I'll' Ways, not U"
Thought: ours? Shall the Pot comffiain, that it was not made in
ſuch and ſuch a manner 2
'3. Hence it is evident to all that heal it, that the Tbamifl (notcdn
by the Letter A) either knows not what he num, o: make: GpGL
'he Author ofSin.
-_T7o<EndofLO_GIQ
( 269 )
T H E
Uſeſul: COMPANION.
/ ' * - *\%ct*3*ffl*mmm_'_.n;h __ >_ ,
7, ' ſſ IN'o *.
. 1 - '\\n\\iſi;=l31\uuv"""
' \ſi ,\\ l\
. , \ ſi>>=-M 'Xs/T 5
94 <{9\ \ va __\1-1A rJ
,' ſ; / 04p ' \
/,\\\ .\. ' \\ Z\o --l'
. a.
. .l.
aI
' -' .,: \ _ I?
\\
s A G/
QV T \ \ '73
ſſ \
a GoiN. 'zz/
\ b z Do let. to, 51,
x. 25 aſhy-ax 'P' \
&Ne. PMAMLMP *
1 -/,. E:,',;F'74'('\_,
'U
'me£mflpxſun'ulſſſ"
A'
'4le
HIS Table is divided into Ten Cicmes 5' the outward-7

Circle; gþg _12. Signs, divided each into 30 Degrees,v
ix zll 3695 An z . Fine
270 The Uſefu] Campanian.
The Second Circle is divided into 365- Days and 6 Hours;
bein the Days of the Months throughout the Year.
T e Third is a Circle containing the Time of the Sun's
Riſmg and Setting, for every Day in the Year. '
In the Fourth are the Degrees of the Sun's Declination,
for every Degree of the Eeliptick. _
The Fifth has the fiX'd Feaﬅs and Terms.
The Sijtth, the Golden Number. -
The Seventh, the Dominical Letter.
The
The Eighth;
Ninth, thethe Day of theFeaﬅs;
moveable Month with
on which
the faﬅer,
Number falls.of ſi
Weeks, as they fall before or after Eafler.

The Tenth, the moveable Terms, with the. Time of the-'le
Beginning and Ending.._
The Uſe of it is thin.

O find the Day of the Month, you muﬅ obſerve th'at
againﬅ the firﬅ Day of _'fanumy ﬅands a Point, ano
ther againﬅ the Sth, alſo againﬅ the 1 ſth, the Lad, and the:
zoth, and ſo in every Month are four or five Points. Now,
if the Dominical Letter beA,. all the Days in the Year againſt
which thoſe Points ﬅand', are Sundayrzt iFB, Saturdays;
if C, Friday; if D, Thnrſdaysz if E, Wedneſda s; ii' F, T'aſ
dujs; iſ G, Monday/r. Iſ therefore you woul know On the
third V'edneſdfly in few-my, what Day of the Month it is,
(the Dominical Letter being A) you muﬅ count the firﬅ
Day of family, againﬅ which the Point ﬅands, Sunday;
the 8th, Sunday,- and the 1 ſth, Sunday; and theI-Vedneſda ſol
lowing, being the third Wedneſday, is the 18th Day; gilt if
the Dominical Letter had been E, then you muﬅ have be
gun _'fammry with Wedzzefilay, and 'then the third I-Vedngſda]
had been the 1 Fth Day, and ſo of the-reﬅ.
D know what Sign the Sun i: in.
Look out the Day of the Month, and againﬅ it, in the
Circle of Signs, ﬅands the Degree in which the Sun is on
that Day.
To know the Sma': Riſing and Setting;
Find the Day of the Month, and againﬅ it in the third
Circle, is the. Hour of the Sun's Rifing, and oppoſite to it
in the ſame Circle is his Setting. As, if you would know
'he Time of the Sun's Riſing on the Tenth of March, you.
will find againﬅ it in the third Circle 6, and oppoſite to it
in_the ſame Circle 6, ſo that on the roth of March the Sun
Riſes and Sets at 62 lzut againſt the _xoxh oi April chi:
'
.__ _ _ w
'The Uſeſut' Campanian. "afile,
will find 5', and oppoſite to it 75 ſo on the loth of April,
the Sun Riſes at 5, and Sets at 7. -
To [num 'be "Sand Deelinaeion.
'Againﬅ the Day of the Month, in the fourth Circle, ﬅand -
the Degree of the Sun's Declimtion, aaon the loth of
Much, ﬅands a Cy'pher, then being no De'clination; but on
the 1 t-th pf jane-ﬅands 23 Degrees North Declination, . andf'
a ainﬅ the llth of December ﬅands 2.; Degrees South De? (
c 'natiou.. _
Te find thefix'dxFeaﬅe am] IZ-rms.
In' every Month, from the Day on which a Feaﬅ- falls, a
ſmall Line is drawn to the fifth Circle; where you will find
the Name of- the Feaﬅ, as from the 2.;th of December, a Line"
is drawn to the fifth Circle, where you find Clari/me, ano
ther fromthe 26th, where you find Steplmz, a third from,
the z7rh, where you find ye n, (ly-e.
* To find the moveable Fe'aflr.
In the ſixth Circle find the - Golden Number for the
. Year; in, the ſeventh find. the Dominical Letter for the ſame:
Year, next following the Golden Number, and' under in.
the eighth Circle you have the Day on which Eaﬅer falls; -
as if the Golden Number be toz and the Dominical Letter
D, you find 16 in the ſiXth Circle, and D in the ſeventh
Circle next following 16, and under D in theveighth Circle
you find March the zzd, whichis the Day on which Eaﬅer
falls that Year.
The reﬅ of the moveable Feaſts depending on Eaﬅer, you
have in the 9th Circle their Names and Diﬅances from Eaﬅer
before and after ,- as Septuageſimaz nine Weeks before Eaﬅerz
Trinity Sunday, eight Weeks after Eaﬅer,' &e.
To find the Roman'Indiction.
To the Year 0f>our Lord add z, and divide' the Product
.by 15', the, Rcmainder isv the Indiction; counted vfrom 3er
temlze'r; .
To find. the' Damim'ml Letter.v
Add tothe Year its Fourth, and 4.; divide thoſe three
Numbers by 7, and ſubﬅract: what remains from 7, the Re
mainder is the Dominical Letter, counting A' 1, B 2., C 3, .
D4., Eſ, F6, G7.
To find the Cjele 'ſike Sun.
- Add to the Year of our Lord 9, (for our Saviour was
born when the Number was 9) which divided by 28, the
Aotient is theifNumber
the Rggggindex of of
the. Cyclc Revolutions
the Sun. of the
A Cyele, and
_ . ,- __ _ __ __ To
57; ' The Uſeful Campaniani'
> To ſiml t/n Golden Number;
To the Year of our Lord add r, (for ſo-mUch Was the
Prime when Chriﬅ was born) which divide by r 9, tthe.
mainder is the Golden Number.
' - Tafiud the Epact. -
Multipiy the Prime 'by l-I, and divide the Product by 36]
the Remainder is the Epact; or add: 11 to the Epact of
* this Year, ſo have you the Epact of the. next; or ſee the
Age of the Moon the 1 ith Kalends ovaPril, for that is the'
Number of the Epact. '
Tofind the New, Full, and Quartan of the Moon.
- Add to the Day of the Month, the Epact, and the Numl *
ber of Months from March, to the Month you are in, in
cluding both Months, the which take from 30, and the
Remainder is the Day of the Change, or new Moon. But
if the Sum of Addition exceed zo, ſubﬅract from 59, and
the Remainder is the Day of the Change; to which, if you
add l-j' Days, you have the ful] Moon; and by adding 7
Days and 9 Hours to the new or full Moon, you have the'
firﬅ or
ct ' laﬅ Tartars.
To find 'be Moon? Age at' any Time.
Add to theDay of the Month, the Epact, and-theNum
ber of Months-from Mart/7,- to the Month you are in, it)
cluding'both Months, ſo have you the Moon's Age. But ii
the ſaid three Numbers added together, exceed 30, you muﬅ
take away 30, as oft as you can, and the Remainder is the
Moon's Age 5' this is when'the Month hath 31 Days: But if
the Month hath but 30 Days, (or-leſs, as in February) you
muﬅ take away but 29, and the reﬅ is the Age of the Moon.
. Example.
I deſire to know the Age of the Moon, ' the firﬅ Day Of
January 1713.- Now, becauſe the Epact changeth not 'till
_the firﬅof March, I add the Epact of the Year before, which'
is 3, and the Day of the Month r, together, which make-'r
4. ,* then january being the 1 rth Month from March added
ther'eun'to,' makes 1 ſ, which-is the Age of the Moon, the
ſaid firﬅ Day of junumy' 1713. You thus knowing the
Moon's- Age in any- Month at Meaſure, and are deſirous to
know what Age ſhe will he the ſame Day of the Month the
next Year, 'tis but adding rſſr to her'preſent Age, and you
have your Deſire, and to that Age add l r, ſo have youher
._Age the ſecond Year enſuing, and ſo infinitelyz' remember
!ng torejeebzo, as glzqyg: gikewiſc; ii you add ry, astbc
'w ſi ſſ. ' ſ ſſſiſſ 7 01'
The Ufl-fuſ Campanian: 273
fo're Ir, you have the Moon's Age the laﬅ Year, remem-z
bering to caﬅ away zo.
To find the Moon's Sour/ving.
Multipiy her Age by 4, and that Product divide by ſ, the
ontient will be the Hours, and the Remainder of the Di-
viſion the Minutes that the Moon is South; to which add:
LHours, and you have the Time of high Water at London
idge any Day in the Year for ever.
A'Rule toknawthe Sun's Riſing and Setling.
The firﬅ of _'fimumythe Sun Riſes 4Minutes after 8, and"
Sets 4. Minutes before 4., which is 12. Hours; and ſo many
Minutes as the Sun Riſes after any Hour, ſovmany Minutes
it Sets before, to make juﬅ 12. Hours. If it Riſe: at 8, it sets
at 4.; if at 6, it Sets at 6; if at 7, it Sets at z'. In the midﬅ'
of May it Riſes at 4., and Sets at 8. It Riſes in the Eaﬅ, and.
it Sets in the W'efl, and at Noon, or 12. a Clock, it is full
Sauth. Set your Face to the North,- our Back wilibe South;
your Right-Hand Eaﬅ, and your Le t-Hand Weﬅ.
To find the Maan': Rzfing and Settz'ng at an] Time.
Before the Full, add the Quantity of her ſhining, to the'
Time of the Sun's Setting, ſo have you the Moon's Settingz
and for her Riſmg, add the (hid Wantity of her ſhining to'
the Sun-riſing, and You have the Moon's Riſing. But after
the Full, ſubﬅract the Length of her ſhining, from the Hour.
of the Sun-riſing or Setting. see the Table.
_s Age
.Seek the Moon's- Age-in the firſt or third TheMoon Increaſ. ſhe
Hours
Column, and. in the Middle, right againﬅ ſhe_ Decreaffig.
_ſhmes
her Age, you will find the Aantity of her
ſhining in Hours and Minutes ; if it is her
Increaſe, ſhe ſhines ſo many Hours and Mi i
nutes after Sun-flat; if her Decreaſe, ſhe ſhines
ſb' many Hours and Minutes before Sun.
riſing.
To know the Time ofiher Setting. add the
Hours and Minutes againﬅ her Age, to the
Hour of the Sun-ſetting, and that is the
Time of her Setting ; for her Rifing, add the
ſame to the Time ofthe Sun-riſin . Do thus
' all the Increaſe. After the Full, ubftract the
Hours and Minutes in the Table, from the
I-Irmr of the Sun's Riſing or Setting; and iſ
the Subﬅraction cannot be made, add 12., and
then ſubﬅract, and the Remainder ſhows' the
'Lime of the Moon's Riſing or Setting.,
'474. The Ufiful Campanian;
To know what'tisiz clock bjthe Moon's ſhining upon nSnn-Dialſi
See what the Shadow of the Moon, ſ-upon the Sun-Dial,
wants of 12., which take from tffi Time of her coming to
the South, the Remainder is the Hour of the Night, but if
the shadow he paﬅ rz, add thoſe Hours to the coming to'
'the South, and the Sum is the Hour of the Night.
-- To find the Length of the Day and Night.
Double the Hours and Minutes ot the Sun's Riſing, ſo
have you the Length of the Night: and doubling the Hours
ahd Minutes of his Setting, gives the Length of the Day.
(if Days, W'eekx, Months, and Tears.
The Day is either Natural or Artificial; the natural Day'
is the Space of 24. Hours, (including both the Dark and
Light Part) in which Time' the Sun is earry'd by the firﬅ
Mover, from the Eaﬅ into the Weﬅ, and. ſo round the World
into the Eaﬅ again. The artificial Day conſiﬅs of 12. Hours,
Lo. from the Sun's Riſmg to its setting, and the artificial
Night is from the Sun's Setting to its Rifing. The Day is ac
counted with us, for Payment of Money, between the
Sun's Riſing and Setting; but fer Indictments for Murder,
the Day is
likewiſe accountedDays.
are'Faﬅing from 'iMidnight
ſi - to Midnight
- s and ſo
The H'hrmrand Chaldemu begin their Day at Sun-riſing,

and end at his- next Riſing.
The few: and Imlidns, from Sun-fit to Sun-ſick. The
Ramam, at Midnight.
which Account TheEg
Aﬅronomerſis ptianr, from Noon to Noonz.
fo ow.
A Week conſiﬅs of 7 Mornings, or 7 Days, which the
Genriles call'd by the Names of the 7 Planets, (whom they
worſhipped as Gods) the Firﬅ the Day of the Sun, the Se
cond the Day of the Moon, &me. In a Week God made the
World, it. in ſix Days, and reﬅed the Seventh.
All civiliz'd Nations obſerve one Day in Seven, as a ﬅated.
Time of Worſhip; the Turk: andMnhamemm keep the ſixth
Day of the Week, or Friday; the Years, the Seventh, or
Saturday; the Chriﬅians,' the Firﬅ, or Snnda .
Of Months there are various Kinds ,* a Sogr Month is the
Space of 30 Days, in which Time the Sun runneth through
one Sign of the Zodiack.
A Lunar Month is. that Interval of Time which the
Moon ſpendeth in wander-ing from the Sun, in her oval
Clremt. through the 12. Si ns, until ſhereturn. to him again,
(being ſometimes nearer, ometimes farther from the Earth)
i-e. om the _firﬅ Day of he; Appearing next after her
ghangdi
q
The Uſeſul Campanian. 27£
Change, to the laﬅ Day- of 'her being Viſible, before her
next Change, which may be Greater or Leſſer, according
,.to her Motion.
. The uſual or common Months are thoſe ſet down in out
Almanacks, containing ſome zo, ſome 3.-l,.and1*'ehma'y but
28 Days, according to theſe Verſizs. . _.,
Thirty Day: hath Septembet, r . _ F
April, june, and Novembc'rz . __
_ February Twenty Eight alone, , _ _ _ - zx
All the reﬅ have Thirty One. , . -_
' But. when Leap-Tear comer'theTime;
Then Febrnary has Twenty Nine.
A YEAR isthfiffiace of Time that the Sun runs through sill;

the rzSigns. of _e Zodiack, containing 12. ſolar Month'sgf;
lzlunar Months, ye; Weeks, 3-65- Days, 6 Hours, and 6 Micflz
nutes; which ſix-Hours, in tour Years Time, being'added'
together, make
Day is added to one Day, which
Fehrſi'aaiy, makingwe callMonth,
that Lcap-Year;
ev'ery which
fourth
Year 29 Days, which at other Times is but 18.
To find the Leap-Year.
Divide the Year by 4, and if there be no Rcmainder, it
'i_s Leap-Yearz but it' there remains 1, 7., or 3, then one of
thoſe are the firﬅ, ſecond, or third, after Leap-Year
The remarkahIe Daye, fixed Feafle, and Terms.

r Jan. Circ.or New-Ye. Daylzq, Au. St.Bartholamew Apoﬅ.
6 jan. Epiph. or Twel. Day. ar Sep.St.Matthew Apoﬅle.
zj'Jan. Conv. of St. Paul. 29 Sep.St.Miehael Archangel.
zo jan. K. Ch. I. Mart. 1648. '8 Oct. St. Luke Evangeliﬅ.
2. Feb.Purif. Virg.Mar . 28 Oct.St. Simon and jade.
34. Fcb, St. Mat. (in Lp. e.15-. 1' N0.All Saints."
a z- Mar, An.V.M. or Lady-Day. 5- No. Powder Treaſbn.
a; Ap. St.Mar/e Evangeliﬅ. 30 No. St. Andrew Apoﬅle.
1 May St. Phil. and 74c.M. D. 2 1 Dec. St. Thomas Apoﬅle.
11 Jnne St. Barnah. Long. Day. Qj'DCC. Chriﬅ's Nat.or Chr, D.
24. june St._*}'0hnBap.Midſumer.526 Dec. St.Ste hen.
19 june St.Peter and Paul. 12.', Dcc. St._'fo n Evangeliﬅ. A
25 July Snj'ames Apoﬅle. . 28 D_ec. Innoeente.
, .',. .. a a. _ 13 Jan.
"52 76 'The -UſZ*fuZ Campanian.
I 3 Jan. St. Hilfl'y. lose
28 .E ualDa
ScFSthiffs and ſwgnfl.
0 Lan. Ni
'no jan. Oct.Hill. xﬅ Return.
43' jap. Hilla Term Begim. 29 Scp. Ld. Mayor of Lond.El.
'27 an.££4i .Hill.zd. Ret. 1. o Oct. In: Michnel. 1 ﬅ Ret.
- 3w eb.Crm Pur. zdRet. zz Oct.Mirhad.Ierm Begin.
9 Feb.Octab. Pur. 4.th Ret. ; zſoct. Criſpin. \
in Feb.Hillmy Term Ends. 27 Oct. Menſ. Micb. zd Ret.
14. Feb. Valentine. 19 Oct. Ld. Mayor of Land. ſw,
lo Ma. Equal Day and Night. 2. No. All Soulx.
17 Ma. St. Pmiclr. 3Nd. Crm. Anim. zd Ret.
zz Apr.St.Gcorge. 11 No. St.Martin
24. june Sheriffs of Loud. Ele. 12 No. Cms.Mar. 4th Ret;
15' July St. Switbin. ; '8 No. Oct. Mar. 5'th Return;
719 July Dog-Day: Begin. z,*N0. uin. Ma-r. 6th Ret.
1 Au. Lamman : 23 No. Mtclmel. Term Emh.
27 Au. Dog-Day: End. n Dec. shorteﬅ Day.
\2*Sep.Fire of London 1666. >
-Ic
A 'T A 3 L E of the Revolution of Ezzﬅer, ſhew?

ing, the Kings Reigns, the Prime, Epact,
Dominical-Letter, Eaﬅer-Day, the Terms,
- and moveable Feaﬅs and Faﬅs, for ever, by
._ Inſpection.
q
{_ '5 . a '.E. ' l d "1

T a oF-om f ctÞA - 'Year of on: -5 þct ;
_ Lfor R D. 3.. 5 K'ngs' *LORD. Ya g 'ZIK'DP'
'as I E >4 __ a" 2 >c
1066 est-Iliad Will. ' ' 1067 zS'Mar. WuL
1598
Primc 3. 'g ay
t. COn q' . _*S99
anc 4. Aſk.
May (A na _
Epafl: 3- Junc Epa&.*4. June

Dmn.Le.A. IJuly Dom.Le.G. July
EaflgrAJG. Aug. , Eaflcy-Apfl. Aug.
Eafler Ter. Sept- Ea.Te.bc_ . Sap.
ch_May 3. Oct 14 Ajms. en s 103. 14
ends 19.' Nov. x May zr. Nov z
Pin-Term Dcc - ſrinzleet-m _ De:
bchJJulyz.
. un 16. Jan.
FeL beg. un. 8.
ends 27. In.
Leb.
EINIS,
/
_ _ſ__r--d-_<-
YM-> _
a
ſ
xl
\ _
..___
no ___l__ .
'i'
I\
'1
J' 7'__* U
l.
'
'
I
. \
'
\
.'
'
'
/.
1
-r
s
t
.
o
.
r A
l .
. ,
p p
44
Pa. .
I l
.
,
r
'
.
\
' [I
, a
.
I a
a .
0 z
\
l
. .
a .
r -
a
- .
1 I
r
U
,\ u
'
- /
I
/
a
\ /
r
' -
. .
' o
I l
ye', l
.
o "into
I
I
l an' .
l \
i
*
' .. . I
c'L \
\ .\. I .
II -
x
. a 'U
\ H
\ '
\ .
\. - l
. \
a
\
ſ
\ I . .
_ a

A Grammar of The English Tongue (5th Ed.), 1728 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

A Grammar of The English Tongue (5th Ed.), 1728 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

This is a reproduction of a library book that was digitized

by Google as part of an ongoing effort to preserve the

T on G 01: has done that Juﬅice to our Language, which, till

Iﬂmc Bic/eezﬅaﬂ; cenſer.

GROUNDS and REASONS

of a'n ENGLISH EDUCATION.

For the U s E of the

The' FIFTH EDI T 10N,'Corrected.

:;-::l.1 [The Authors.

" HE vPteblibatlon and Succeﬁ of the Firﬅ Edition o thi:

In Latin Pluczl MQB inns Mr'AndSlt- the 38317-2'- _ - ſ

Ufffl 'his NPbletDcfign me: 'Efidtrfliskk

Toet-Lau'eat- to Her Majeﬅy. ' l a' . a

m .:L£ :.>".' enſign-V' ..i.-. '3. (no -l

To free Our injurfd Fair i'ﬁfþnglſiScrvile A m,) "A,

O wondrous Bleſſing! yet on Terms ſo cheap,

Shall private Zeal beﬅow ſuch Coſi: and Toil

ZUFU TT? TT "_

[6] It is of Uſe to obſerve,that the Tongue, the Palate z Which yet

Whem-ver ſilent (e) is in the eloﬁ.

gz The Engliſh Grammar, with Notes,

I, O, and U, et th' End of ſlbrd: require,

(e)by little andlittle vaniſh'd ſo ſill',

[11] Oftlae Vawel (l).

[12] Of the Voice] (O).

Examples. When double (U ends a Word, as Toll,PoIl, Roll,

[13] Of the Vowel (U).

Greater. Middle. Leſs.

H A T we call Double Vomelx, is, when the Sound of two

Of the Double 'Vowel (au) or (aw).

Of the proper Double Vowel (ou) or (ow).

" (Ou) the Beginning, and the Middle ter/ter,

T without adding ſome ſingle or double Vowel before or

ſcure Sound of a Vowe attending their Pronunciation, which is

Before (a), (o), (u), (l), and (r) z us creep,

criſj, jealoujz Leproſy, Palſj, Panﬄ, a Flower, Pleuriſjv, qu,

Moﬅ Words ending in the Sound of arce, erce, orce, urce,

(H), tho' deny'd a Letter heretoﬁzre,

(K) bZ'ore (i), (e) when hard, is ſeen 3

(C) 'varies with the Vowel ſtill its Sound,

(C) chan es its Sound according to the Vowel it precedes,

[zs'] The Uſ) Conſonant we proaching the Letter(f);_yet (f)

[z If the Breath directed ebro' If theBreath reaehes not theLipr,

Mute --.__>£. a' l r

Aswe have ſaid ſomethingofthe with them (with a Note of Produ

He, Engliſh Grammar, with Notes. 5!

A Syllablc'r a 'and per ed Sand.

[il The Word SYLLABLE is ir a literal or Articulate 'Bicepſ an

Br. Bruce Gr. Grave

a. men _* Sw. Sweer '

U In ﬂwrt, all.this Rules: izquþrizezl inthjis; that a' Male and a

H'be Engliſh Grammar; with Notes. 57

tirian, Grecian, Lagz'cian,f Magician, &c. from Aritbmm'c,

- The End of the Seaand (Pa/'L -

\'- 4 q SJN TAQÞU c Till-os',

_ 'He Four Pith: ofspeech.

[2] A ME S expreſs the Thing: themſhl-uu, that is-cvery

He Engliſh Grammar, witb Notes. 65

As we have ſome Words, which have no Sin lar Number',

This is ſpokeas to their Forms in our Langu e; for in

Three kind: of (Lialities there are, we know,

ction. T'e Adjective declare: an that that Diﬀerent i: no' ſuﬃcient

As ualities from Names, 'me/he, do ﬂow,